[featured_image]
Download
Download is available until [expire_date]
  • Version 3.20
  • Download 6442
  • Tamanho do Arquivo 485.36 MB
  • File Count 1
  • Data de Criação 24 de setembro de 2020
  • Ultima Atualização 24 de setembro de 2020

XP-Builder 3.20

LS ELECTRIC strives to maximize your profits in gratitude for choosing us as your partner. XP-Builder 3.20 XGT Panel Human Machine Interface Reviesion History i Revision History Version Date Major Change Revised Page V 1.30 ‘13.11 1st edition - V 1.33 ‘15.08 Revised to version 1.33 Full revision V 2.00 ‘15.12 Revised to version 2.00 Full revision V 2.01 ‘17.01 Revised to version 2.01 Full revision Add IPC Series Full revision 2.2.2.6 Resize font when it use Text Table if the width of rectangle is greater than the text width P2-17 2.2.2.9 Don’t show communication error after it is closed P2-22 2.2.2.12 wXP Settings P2-28 2.2.3.2 Check ‘Include Upload Project file’ on Project Download as Default P2-31 2.3.10 Renaming a Tag to add as a New Tag P2-80 V2.11 ’18.08 Window 10 home edition not supported Add iXP2 Series Add HDMI expanded Settings Add Resize font in case object region is larger than the text length while Text Table or Device Address Show is used Add Device type in Global Script Settings Add Screen change gesture option Add HDMI Screen Settings Add HDMI screen insert method Add HDMI Initial Screen Setting Method Add Don’t allow change this screen by gesture Add Registering Figures/Objects Add Formatting Text in an Object/Objects Add Finding and Replacing All Fonts Add Execute Project at Local wXP Revision History ii Add Error Messages (2030 ~ 2037) Add _T500MS on/off system tag Add _Alarm_Norecovery_Device_Num, _Alarm_Norconfirm_Device_Num Add Extended File Recipe Add Char. Spacing, Line Spacing Add Setting Device Size per Col. At Logging viewer Add Fit to the max header length at Logging viewer Add Gesture&Multi-Touch Add Caution V2.20 ’19.04 Add iXP2H-07XXD Add details on the iXP2 HDMI Extension features Add password mode locked on screen feature when switching screen Add global external switcn feature Add description for the iXP2H-07XXD H/W KEY Add find/replace all fonts feature Add find/replace all strings feature Add details of how to used find/replace string from text table feature Add description for extended file recipe 1. File No./Name device 2. Block count device 3. Add data format setting description Word Lamp 1. Increased word lamp conditional statements up to 64 2. Add copy&paste feature 3. Add only caption continuous copy feature 4. Add copy only property feature Special Switch 1. Add multimedia special switch 2. Explorer and Editor: File Explorer – Add Write selected file name in to the device, Copy to specified path feature 3. Explorer and Editor: Add extended file Recipe explorer details. P1-16, P2-3 P2-14 P2-17 P2-28 P2-94 P141 P142 P145 P4-58 P4-58 P4-58 P4-162 P4-162 P4-166 P4-166 Reviesion History iii 4. Add password mode locked on screen. 5. Add multimedia on operation device 6. Add note for multimedia. Word Message 1. Add message number and text table number features. Realtime Scatter Graph 1. Add line type File Explorer 1. Add initial path 2. Add extended file recipe features. Add multimedia object Add explorer gesture feature Add screen change gesture option. V3.00 ’19.10 1. XP series not supported in V3.00 because of discontinued 2. Add font size unit feature 3. Add features about XP-Runtime 4. Add USB barcode feature 5. Add discontinued project conversion feature 6. Add keyboard input tags 7. Add create logging no. directory feature 8. Add delimiter feature 9. Add description on screen change switch 10. Add notes about appendix 5. 11. Add include path description 12. Add description of close window 13. Add scale type of device and constant 14. Add description on input max value 15. Add features of change status color 16. Add NC program monitor feature 17. Add Object Display Rule before Communication Connection P1-12 P2-22 P2-28 P2-34 P2-188 P4-8 P4-24 P4-56 P4-197 P4-218 P4-225 P4-264, 4-294 P4-304 P4-403 App-40 App-70 V3.10 ’20.03 1. Image Update, words and misspeling correction 2. 2.2.2.9 Add Smooth edges of font feature 3. 2.2.2.10 Modified USB Barcode reader 4. 2.3.5.1 Improved obecject select feature 5. 2.6.6.7 Modified Viewing cross reference feature Revision History iv 6. 4.1.1 Add HS0503.1 VNC Server Control Tag 7. 4.1.2 Increased number of text table items 8. 4.1 Modified Common Data switch object display 9. 4.3.8.2 Add improvement of Pie graph feature 10. 4.3.22 Add FTP Client feature V3.10 ’20.05 Revision due to the change of company name V3.20 ’20.08 2.3.5.4 Multicopy: Add caption copy feature 4.1.3 Logging: Add CSV+PDF feature 4.3.4 Numeric/Text Display: Modified numeric display scaling feature Appendix 3: Add Autoscan feature V3.20, August, 2020 Table of Contents v Revision History .......................................................................................i 1. About XP-Builder...............................................................................1 1.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 1 1.2 Installing and Updating.................................................................................. 3 1.3 Interface and Features.................................................................................... 5 Customizing Toolbars........................................................................................... 9 Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts ..................................................................11 Customizing Menu Options.............................................................................12 Customizing Pane Positions.............................................................................12 Customizing Other Options.............................................................................13 2. Project Development.........................................................................1 2.1 Creating a project ........................................................................................... 1 2.2 Configuring Project Properties ..................................................................... 7 Changing Basic Project Properties ................................................................10 Changing XGT Panel Settings..........................................................................11 Changing Screen Settings ................................................................................14 Changing Security Settings..............................................................................17 Changing Key Window Settings.....................................................................18 Changing Languages..........................................................................................20 Changing Storage Settings ..............................................................................24 Changing Global Script Settings ....................................................................26 Changing Auxiliary Settings.............................................................................27 Changing Extended Device Settings ..........................................................31 Changing Operation Log Settings ..............................................................35 wXP Settings........................................................................................................39 Changing default editing options .................................................................40 Changing default project options..................................................................41 2.3 Developing an Interface............................................................................... 43 Opening or Closing a Screen...........................................................................45 Setting a Screen as the Start Screen.............................................................45 Renaming a Screen..............................................................................................46 Table of Contents vi Changing Screen Properties ............................................................................48 Drawing Figures....................................................................................................51 Inserting Images from the Graphic Library................................................55 Drawing Objects...................................................................................................56 Inserting Objects from the Object Library .................................................58 Selecting Objects .................................................................................................60 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects ..............................................................62 Locking and Unlocking Objects......................................................................63 Copying Multiple Objects.................................................................................65 Arranging Objects................................................................................................68 Rotating Objects...................................................................................................69 Resizing or Relocating Objects .......................................................................71 Setting Viewing Options ...................................................................................75 Registering Figures/Objects.............................................................................81 Draw from Figure to Object...........................................................................82 Deleting an Object/Objects...........................................................................83 Undoing and Redoing a Change.................................................................84 Object & Text Format.......................................................................................84 Import Screen Dialog Box.................................................................................91 2.4 Managing Libraries ..................................................................................... 102 Creating a User Graphic Library .................................................................. 104 Exporting a User Graphic Library................................................................ 107 Importing a User Graphic Library............................................................... 108 Editing a User Graphic Library ..................................................................... 110 Applying Options to the Images................................................................. 112 Creating a User Object Library..................................................................... 118 Exporting a User Object Library.................................................................. 120 Importing a User Object Library ................................................................. 122 Editing a User Object Library ....................................................................... 124 2.5 Connecting Controllers .............................................................................. 126 Using RS232C..................................................................................................... 128 Using RS485/RS422 ......................................................................................... 130 2.6 Simulating & Debugging ........................................................................... 132 Table of Contents vii Monitoring Devices.......................................................................................... 135 Changing Device Values................................................................................. 136 Finding and Replacing Devices on the Active Screen......................... 142 Finding and Replacing All Devices ............................................................. 143 Finding and Replacing All Fonts.................................................................. 145 Finding & Replacing All Strings................................................................... 146 Finding and Replacing Devices, Fonts, and Tags from a List............ 148 Viewing Cross-References ............................................................................. 153 Viewing Cross-References ............................................................................. 153 2.7 Running XP-Simulators with other PLC Simulators................................ 154 2.8 Managing a Project..................................................................................... 170 Using a Serial (RS-232C) Connection........................................................ 176 Using an Ethernet Connection..................................................................... 177 Using a USB Connection (XP models)....................................................... 179 Using a USB Connection (iXP/eXP/iXP2 models).................................. 181 2.9 Configuring Advanced Communication Settings.................................... 194 Token Hold .......................................................................................................... 199 N:1 System Devices .......................................................................................... 200 3. Error Messages ...................................................................................1 3.1 Resolving Error Codes Found in the Results Pane....................................... 1 3.2 Resolving Error Messages in Pop-up Windows ......................................... 10 4. Reference ............................................................................................1 4.1 Common Data ................................................................................................. 1 Table of Contents viii Basic Recipes..........................................................................................................33 File Recipes.............................................................................................................43 Extended File Recipe...........................................................................................53 4.2 Scripts............................................................................................................. 92 Understanding Script Commands .................................................................94 Understanding Device Address Expressions........................................... 117 Understanding Constants and Data Types.............................................. 118 Understanding Temporary Variables in a Script.................................... 121 Viewing the Script Cross Reference ........................................................... 123 Inserting Scripts................................................................................................. 125 Using the Script Tool box............................................................................... 126 Specifying Local Scripts.................................................................................. 127 Specifying Display Change Scripts............................................................. 129 Specifying Scheduler Scripts ........................................................................ 130 Creating Object Scripts................................................................................... 132 Editing Scripts .................................................................................................... 133 Understanding Script Error Handling........................................................ 135 Understanding the Script Watchdog Function...................................... 135 Understanding System Functions............................................................... 136 Understanding Print Functions.................................................................... 137 Understanding Screen Change Functions ............................................... 137 Understanding Script Functions.................................................................. 138 Understanding String Functions ................................................................. 139 Understanding Device Functions................................................................ 141 Understanding Communication Functions ............................................. 143 Understanding Memory Functions ............................................................ 145 Understanding Data Conversion Functions............................................ 148 Understanding Other Functions ............................................................... 150 4.3 Objects.......................................................................................................... 152 Bit Lamp................................................................................................................ 154 Word Lamp.......................................................................................................... 161 N-State Lamp ..................................................................................................... 170 Bit Switch.............................................................................................................. 178 Word Switch........................................................................................................ 187 Table of Contents ix Change Screen Switch..................................................................................... 198 Special Switch..................................................................................................... 207 Multi Switch ........................................................................................................ 237 Bit Message......................................................................................................... 246 Word Message................................................................................................... 251 Numeric Input.................................................................................................... 262 Numeric Display ................................................................................................ 282 Text Input............................................................................................................. 293 Text Display ......................................................................................................... 302 Bit Window.......................................................................................................... 308 Word Window.................................................................................................... 311 Bit Part................................................................................................................... 319 Word Part............................................................................................................. 323 Bar Graph............................................................................................................. 333 Pie Graph.............................................................................................................. 339 Meter Graph........................................................................................................ 346 Closed Graph...................................................................................................... 351 Trend Graph ........................................................................................................ 357 Logging Trend Graph ...................................................................................... 367 Scatter Graph – Logging Scatter................................................................. 380 Scatter Graph - Realtime Scatter................................................................. 388 4.4 Viewing or Changing XGT Panel Information ......................................... 460 4.5 Using the HTML Device Copier ................................................................. 463 4.6 Using the CSV Converter............................................................................ 465 4.7 Managing External Storage Sources for Backup..................................... 466 Table of Contents x File Path for Logging Backup ....................................................................... 467 Path for Recipe Backup................................................................................... 468 Path for Screen Backup................................................................................... 468 Path for Memo Backup................................................................................... 469 When there is Insufficient Memory or Exceeds the Limit.................. 471 5. Other features ....................................................................................1 5.1 Gestures & Multi-Touch ................................................................................. 1 Appendix..................................................................................................1 1 Program Monitor............................................................................................... 1 1.1.1 PLCs that Support Monitoring ............................................................................. 1 1.1.2 Properties by HMI devices..................................................................................... 3 1.1.3 The Program Monitor Window............................................................................ 4 1.2.1 Monitoring Programs from the XGT Panel Menu ......................................... 6 1.2.2 Monitoring Programs with a Special Switch Object..................................... 7 1.2.3 Selecting Programs to Monitor............................................................................ 7 1.2.4 Managing Programs................................................................................................. 9 1.2.5 Viewing the Monitoring Data.............................................................................10 1.2.6 Changing the Display Format.............................................................................11 1.2.7 Changing the Current Device Value.................................................................12 1.3.1 Managing Devices...................................................................................................15 1.4.1 Searching for Devices ............................................................................................19 1.4.2 Searching for Labels...............................................................................................26 1.4.3 Searching for Sub-routines..................................................................................27 1.4.4 Searching for Steps.................................................................................................28 1.4.5 Searching with Touch.............................................................................................30 1.4.6 Searching for Labels with Touch........................................................................30 1.4.7 Searching for Sub-routines with Touch...........................................................33 1.4.8 Searching for Devices with Touch .....................................................................35 Table of Contents xi 2 NC Program Monitor....................................................................................... 41 2.3.1 NC monitoring program description...............................................................44 2.3.2 User Device Setting ................................................................................................45 2.3.3 NC file Management..............................................................................................45 2.3.4 Import NC file...........................................................................................................47 2.3.5 Change View Mode................................................................................................48 2.4.1 Preparation ................................................................................................................49 2.4.2 Overview.....................................................................................................................51 3 Autoscan ........................................................................................................... 53 3.1.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................53 3.1.2 Add special switch to operate Autoscan program .....................................54 3.3.1 Autoscan program menu .....................................................................................57 3.3.2 IP setting and monitoring period setting.......................................................58 3.3.3 Save network status................................................................................................60 3.3.4 Slave Diagnostic.......................................................................................................60 3.3.5 Goto Local..................................................................................................................61 3.3.6 Compare .....................................................................................................................61 3.3.7 Cable Distance..........................................................................................................62 3.3.8 Monitoring.................................................................................................................62 3.3.9 Remote module status information diagnostic ...........................................63 4 XP-VSP............................................................................................................... 70 4.1.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................70 4.1.2 Supported PLC Drivers ..........................................................................................72 4.2.1 Installing XP-VSP .....................................................................................................73 4.2.2 Updating XP-VSP.....................................................................................................74 4.4.1 Registering Virtual Com Port..............................................................................76 4.4.2 Connecting PLC and Ladder Program via Virtual Com Port ...................79 4.4.3 Unregistering Virtual Com Port .........................................................................81 5 wXP.................................................................................................................... 83 5.1.1 Requirements............................................................................................................83 5.2.1 Project..........................................................................................................................84 5.2.2 Screen..........................................................................................................................85 Table of Contents xii 5.2.3 Offline Setting...........................................................................................................85 5.2.4 Help..............................................................................................................................87 6 Object Display Rule before Communication Connection............................ 89 7 Glossary............................................................................................................. 90 8 List of Acronyms............................................................................................... 93 9 Caution .............................................................................................................. 95 1. About XP-Builder 1-1 1. About XP-Builder XP-Builder is software that allows you to create and manage projects for machine control devices. You can use XP-Builder to create projects for the XGT Panel. XP-Builder includes multiple features that allow you to design and edit projects conveniently, such as:  Customizable toolbars and hotkeys  Customizable tool, project, and editing panes  Functions to import and export common data  Tabs for viewing multiple screens easily  Previews of project screens  Customizable image and object libraries  Scripts and advanced functions, such as alarms, logs, schedules, and recipes  Support for multiple languages 1.1 Overview This section describes the basic concept of using XP-Builder to create interfaces for machine control devices and the types of hardware that XP-Builder supports. XP-Builder Concept XP-Builder is the starting point for creating human-machine interfaces (HMIs) for industrial applications. With XP-Builder, you can design user-friendly interfaces for XGT Panels that allow end users to control machine functions through configurable controllers, such as programmable logic controllers (PLCs), inverters, or servos. With the XGT Panel, you can monitor information from each controller via a graphical user interface (GUI). In addition, simple control is possible with switch and writing objects. The XGT Panel supports additional programmable functions, such as scripts, loggings, recipes, and alarms, which allow you to fully customize the control environment. As illustrated by the graphic that follows, the interface running on an XGT Panel provides input controls on the screen in the form of GUI objects that are linked to controller routines, such as a ladder program, or other parameters. The controller parameters dictate the operation of connected machinery and may also provide feedback to the XGT Panel. 1. About XP-Builder 1-2 Supported Hardware Types XP-Builder supports XP, iXP, eXP and IPC series XGT Panels and a wide range of controllers. Projects can only be transferred from XP-Builder to XGT Panel. To view specifications for XGT Panels, in XP-Builder, click [PROJECT] ► [New Project], and then select a series and model number from the drop-down lists. Note • Available memory for XP series XGT Panels is 10 MB for TTA and BTA models, with the exception of the XP90 model (20 MB), and 4 MB for TTE and BTE models. • 64 MB memory is available for eXP XGT Panels, and 128 MB for iXP/IPC series XGT Panels. • XP Series is not supported on XP-Builder V3.00. If you want to use XP series, please use previous version of XP-Builder V3.00 1. About XP-Builder 1-3 1.2 Installing and Updating This section explains how to install and update the XP-Builder software, as well as the operating system software for an XGT Panel. Installing XP-Builder You may install XP-Builder on a PC that meets the following minimum system requirements:  Processor: Pentium 4 or higher  Memory: 512MB or more free memory  COM Ports: RS-232C serial port, Ethernet port, or USB port  Hard Disk: 1GB capacity or higher  Monitor: Minimum resolution of 1024x768  OS: Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,Windows 8, or Windows 10  Peripherals: Mouse and keyboard To install XP-Builder in Windows XP: 1 Run the XP-Builder setup file. You can download the file from the LS ELECTRIC website (https://www.lselectric.co.kr/support/download-center). 2 Select an installation language (Chinese [Simplified], English, or Korean). 3 Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation. To install XP-Builder in Windows Vista: 1 Log in to your computer with an administrator account. 2 On your computer, click [Start] ► [Control Panel] ► [User Accounts and Family Safety]. 3 Click [User Accounts] ► [Turn User Account Control on or off], and uncheck the checkbox next to Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer. 4 Run the XP-Builder setup file. You can download the file from the LS ELECTRIC website (https://www.lselectric.co.kr/support/download-center). 5 Select an installation language (Chinese [Simplified], English, or Korean). 6 Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation. 1. About XP-Builder 1-4 To install XP-Builder in Windows 7 or Windows 8: 1 Log in to your computer with an administrator account. 2 On your computer, click [Start] ► [Control Panel] ► [User Accounts and Family Safety]. 3 Click [User Accounts] ► [Change User Account Control Settings], and drag the slider to Never notify. 4 Run the XP-Builder setup file. You can download the file from the LS ELECTRIC website (https://www.lselectric.co.kr/support/download-center). 5 Select an installation language (Chinese [Simplified], English, or Korean). 6 Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation. To install XP-Builder in Windows 10: (Home Edition not supported.) 1 Log in to your computer with an administrator account. 2 On your computer, click [Start] ► [All apps] ► [Windows system] ► [Control Panel] ► [User Accounts and Family Safety]. 3 Click [User Accounts] ► [Change User Account Control Settings], and drag the slider to Never notify. 4 Run the XP-Builder setup file. You can download the file from the LS ELECTRIC website (https://www.lselectric.co.kr/support/download-center). 5 Select an installation language (Chinese [Simplified], English, or Korean). 6 Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation. Updating XP-Builder To check the version of your XP-Builder software, click [HELP] ► [About XP-Builder]. To update XPBuilder, refer to the LS ELECTRIC website (https://www.lselectric.co.kr/support/download-center). Note You can update an XGT Panel automatically in XP-Builder version 1.30 or higher. If you use a version lower than 1.24, you must update the XGT Panel manually. 1. About XP-Builder 1-5 1.3 Interface and Features XP-Builder offers a wide range of customizable options that allow you to efficiently create and manage projects. This section describes the XP-Builder interface and explains how to customize it to suit your needs. The XP-Builder Interface The XP-Builder interface is similar to that of many Windows-based programs. You can customize the interface by selecting various toolbar and window options, as described in <1.3.2 Controls and Options>. Main Interface: Interface Description Toolbars Use tools or menus to perform tasks and specify options. Project/ Screen pane The Project pane shows the elements contained in the project in a cascading tree, or shows the screens by screen type in a cascading tree. The Screen pane shows all the screens used included in the current project. You can add or edit each component from these panes. 1. About XP-Builder 1-6 Interface Description You can open, reposition, or dock other windows, such as the Graphic Library,Object Library, Device Map, Script Toolbox, and Data Viewer windows.You can also select Data Viewer, Graphic library, and Object library from theVIEW menu to open them in the pane.Editing area The center of the window, where you can add and manipulate objects, figures,and images to create an interface.Toolbox Use the Toolbox to create, view and modify a project. Project Viewer and ScreenViewer are displayed by default when you first run the software.• By default, figures and objects are displayed in the pane as small images. Toview figures or objects in a tree type list, select [TOOLBOX] ► [Tree TypeToolBox] or select in the ToolBox pane.• By default, figures and objects are set to Single Insert Mode, which allowsyou to insert one figure or object at a time. To insert figures or objectscontinuously, select [TOOLBOX] ► [Continuous Insert Mode] or select inthe ToolBox pane.Output and resultstabsThese tabs allow you to view interface messages, error messages, and searchresults.Status bar The status bar displays additional project-related information.DescriptionA System messageB Panel typeC Controller typeD Cursor positionE Object position (top left)F Object size: Width/heightG Caps lock/number lock/scroll lock status1. About XP-Builder1-7NoteScreens in XP-Builder ProjectsScreens contain objects and figures that XP-Builder provides. There are three different types of screensavailable:• Base screens allow users to edit the objects and figures. Base screens have fixed screen sizes andcolor specifications based on the panel types.Panel type XGT Panel model names Screen size and color spec.XP XP30-BTA 320 X 240 px, 8 Grayscale colorsXP30-TTA 320 X 240 px, 65536 colorsXP30-BTE 320 X 240 px, 8 Grayscale colorsXP30-TTE 320 X 240 px, 256 colorsXP40-TTE 800 X 480 px, 65536 colorsXP40-TTA 800 X 480 px, 65536 colorsXP50-TTE 640 X 480 px, 256 colorsXP50-TTA 640 X 480 px, 65536 colorsXP70-TTA 640 X 480 px, 65536 colorsXP80-TTA 800 X 600 px, 65536 colorsXP90-TTA 1024 X 768 px, 65536 colorsiXP iXP50-TTA 800 X 600 px, 16.7M colorsiXP70-TTA 800 X 600 px, 16.7M colorsiXP80-TTA 800 X 600 px, 16.7M colorsiXP90-TTA 1024 X 768 px, 16.7M colorsiXP2iXP2-0800 800 X 600 px, 16.7M colorsiXP2-1000 1024 X 768 px, 16.7M colorsiXP2-1200 1024 X 768 px, 16.7M colorsiXP2-1500 1024 X 768 px, 16.7M colorsiXP2H-0702D 1024 X 600 px, 16.7M colorsiXP2H-0704D 1024 X 600 px, 16.7M colorseXP eXP20-TTA 480 X 272 px, 16.7M colorseXP30-TTA 680 X 480 px, 65536 colorseXP30-TTE 680 X 480 px, 65536 colors1. About XP-Builder1-8eXP40-TTA 800 X 480 px, 16.7M colorseXP40-TTE 800 X 480 px, 16.7M colorseXP60-TTA 800 X 480 px, 65536 colorsIPC(wXP) AT/PC User-designated attribute(Width/Height: 200–3840)16.7M colors• Window screens are used for displaying Window screens over a Base screen.• Part screens are used as parts for Bit or Word Part objects.1. About XP-Builder1-9Controls and OptionsCustomize toolbars, keyboard shortcuts, menus, and other options in the XP-Builder interface.Customizing ToolbarsIn the XP-Builder interface, you can create custom toolbars, add or remove icons on toolbars, and selectwhich toolbars to show.To create a toolbar:1 Click [TOOL] ► [Customization] ► [Toolbars].2 Click [New].1. About XP-Builder1-103 Enter a name for the toolbar and click [OK]. The new toolbar will be added to the list of availabletoolbars on the left of the Customize window. You can drag icons from the toolbars at the top of theXP-Builder window to the new toolbar.To add or remove icons on toolbars:1 Click [TOOL] ► [Customization] ► [Commands].2 Click a tool category on the left, and then drag and drop a command onto an existing toolbar. Or, toremove an icon, drag it from a toolbar to the Customize window.1. About XP-Builder1-11To select which toolbars to show:1 Click [TOOL] ► [Customization] ► [Toolbars].2 Check the checkboxes to the left of the toolbars to select which to show (checked) and which to hide(unchecked).Customizing Keyboard ShortcutsTo customize keyboard shortcuts (hotkeys):1 Click [TOOL] ► [Customization] ► [Keyboard].2 Click a tool category from the drop-down list, and then click a command.3 Click the Press New Shortcut field and then press a key combination on the keyboard. If you press acombination that is already in use, the action that is assigned to the shortcut will appear below thisfield.1. About XP-Builder1-124 Click [Assign].5 To remove a shortcut, select one from the Current field and then click [Remove].6 When you are finished customizing keyboard shortcuts, click [Close].Customizing Menu OptionsIn the Customize window, you can select which Application Frame windows and Context menus to show.To customize menu options, click [TOOL] ► [Customization] ► [Menu], and then select the desiredoptions from the drop-down menus.Customizing Pane PositionsTo view or hide panes, click [VIEW], and then click the name of a pane. You can drag and drop panes innew positions within the XP-Builder window. To change the properties of a pane, right-click the pane andclick an option. You can set panes to dock or float, and set whether or not the pane will hideautomatically.To dock the pane, move the pane to the desired location indicator. A shadow will appear to provide apreview of the docking location.To set a pane to float, on the pane, click ► [Floating]. To hide a pane, on the pane, click .1. About XP-Builder1-13Customizing Other OptionsIn the Customize window, you can customize additional options, such as whether or not to show tooltipsand show shortcuts with tips. To customize these options, click [TOOL] ► [Customization] ► [Options],and then check the checkboxes next to the desired options.2. Project Development2-12. Project DevelopmentXP-Builder allows you to develop complex but simple-to-use interfaces for controlling machines. You canadd figures, objects, and graphics to represent functions, or use scripts to define processes. XP-Builderalso allows you to simulate projects and debug them before transferring them to an XGT Panel.2.1 Creating a projectLearn how to start or open a project.Starting a New ProjectTo create a new project:1 When you launch XP-Builder, the Select Project window appears. Click [Create Project] to create aproject. To open a saved file, select [Open Project]. To enable the Select Project window to appear every time you launch XP-Builder, check thecheckbox next to Show this Dialog at Startup. You can also create a file by selecting [PROJECT] ► [New Project].Note• XP-Builder supports multiple instances of the software running simultaneously. Users canrun more than one XP-builder window on a PC to edit projects more efficiently.• If you try to save a read-only project file, XP-builder displays the error message below.• If you try to open a project file that is already open in another editor, XP-builder displaysthe error message below.2. Project Development2-22 Set the panel series, model name, the controller manufacturer, and the controller model (Product).3 If necessary, click [Communication Settings] and specify connection properties. For more detailsabout connection properties, refer to <2.5 Connecting Controllers>.4 Click [Finish] or [OK].Note• XGT Panel series panels come in various models featuring different screen resolutions, displaycolors, and other hardware configurations.[XP Series]Model Type ScreenResolutionColors External Storage device EthernetXP30-TTA 320 X 240 65,536 1 X 1 X CF, 2 X USB OXP30-BTE 320 X 240 8 1 X USB XXP30-BTA 320 X 240 8 1 X CF, 2 X USB OXP30-TTE 320 X 240 256 1 X USB XXP40-TTA 800 X 600 65,536 1 X USB O2. Project Development2-3XP40-TTE 800 X 600 256 1 X USB XXP50-TTA 640 X 480 65,536 1 X CF, 2 X USB OXP50-TTE 640 X 480 256 1 X USB XXP70-TTA 640 X 480 65,536 1 X CF, 2 X USB OXP80-TTA 800 X 600 65,536 1 X CF, 2 X USB OXP90-TTA 1024 X 768 65,536 1 X CF, 2 X USB O[iXP Series]Model Type ScreenResolutionColors External Storage device EthernetiXP50-TTA 800 X 600 65,536 3 X USB, 1 X SD card slot OiXP70-TTA 800 X 600 65,536 3 X USB, 1 X SD card slot OiXP80-TTA 800 X 600 65,536 3 X USB, 1 X SD card slot OiXP90-TTA 1024 X 768 65,536 3 X USB, 1 X SD card slot O[iXP2 SeriesModel Type ScreenResolutionColors External Storage device EthernetiXP2-0800 800 X 600 16.7M 3 X USB, 1 X SD OiXP2-1000 1024 X 768 16.7M 3 X USB, 1 X SD OiXP2-1200 1024 X 768 16.7M 3 X USB, 1 X SD OiXP2-1500 1024 X 768 16.7M 3 X USB, 1 X SD OiXP2H-0702D 1024 X 600 16.7M 1 X USB, 1 X SD OiXP2H-0704D 1024 X 600 16.7M 1 X USB, 1 X SD O[eXP Series]Model Type ScreenResolutionColors External Storage device EtherneteXP20-TTA 480 X 272 16.7M 1 X USB OeXP30-TTA 680 X 480 65,536 1 X USB OeXP30-TTE 680 X480 65,536 1 X USB XeXP40-TTA 800 X 480 16.7M 1 X USB O2. Project Development2-4eXP40-TTE 800 X 480 16.7M 1 X USB XeXP60-TTA 800 X 480 65,536 1 X USB O[IPC Series]Model Type ScreenResolutionColors External Storage device EthernetPC/AT Customizable 16.7M Varies by PC O• IPC can set any value in resolution.For example, 800x600, 1024x760, and so one.You can set the resolution from 200x200 to 3840x3840.• XP-Builder allows model type changes to other panel models with the same or higher colorspecifications. However, XP-Builder does not allow project conversion from color to monochromeXGT Panels, or vice versa.• BTE and TTE type models support only BMP, GIF, JPG, and WMF image file formats. Run a data checkto ensure that only the supported image types are used in a project.• You can view a summary of XGT Panel specifications when you create a project by selecting the XGTPanel series and model.• If the computer or panel you are working with does not have the desired font installed, text 2. Project Development2-5information, such as captions for objects or figures may not be displayed properly. To solve thisproblem, install or export fonts as needed: click [TOOL] ► [Install Font] or [Export Font], specify a filelocation, and click [OK].• Project files in XP-Builder are saved with the extension “.xpd.” You can only import these types ofproject files to XP-Builder.• The file extension for the user object library is “.xpo.”• The file extension for the user graphic library is “.xpg.”• The extensions for exported files (backup files) are shown in the following table:Item File ExtensionText table, Recipe, and Tag *.CSVHistory alarm *.HALFlow alarm *.FALLogging *.LOGSchedule *.SCHScript *.SPT2. Project Development2-6Saving a ProjectTo save a project:1 Click [PROJECT] ► [Save Project]. You can also select the save project icon from the toolbar. To save the file with another name, select [PROJECT] ► [Save As Project]2 Select a destination for the saved file, enter a file name, and then click [Save].3 To close the project, click [PROJECT] ► [Close Project].Note• When you save a project, two other files are created:- Backup file: The extensions for the backup files are “.bak” and “.bak1–bak9.”- OSTS file: The extension for the OSTS file is “.OSTS.” This file includes information about yourproject workspace, such as the current screen, docked windows, and toolbar information.• When your project contains unsaved changes, the Project pane shows an asterisk (*) next to theproject name.2. Project Development2-72.2 Configuring Project PropertiesSet the properties or parameters of the project file. Specify properties for connecting with XGT Panels,screen settings, security levels, languages, and more.Protecting the Project with a PasswordYou can prevent others from opening a project by setting a password.To set a password:1 Click [PROJECT] ► [Project Password].2 Enter a password and re-enter it to confirm.3 Click [Apply].Note• XP-Builder supports only Latin characters in passwords. Passwords are case sensitive and can be upto 12 characters long.• Be careful not to forget the password. If you forget the password, you cannot open the project file.2. Project Development2-8To change a password:1 Click [PROJECT] ► [Project Password].2 Enter the current password in the Old Password field.3 Enter a new password in the New Password field and re-enter it to confirm.4 Click [Apply].To delete a password:1 Click [PROJECT] ► [Project Password].2 Enter the current password in the Old Password field.3 Click [Delete].2. Project Development2-9Viewing and Editing PropertiesXP-Builder allows you to view and edit general properties of projects. To view or edit project properties,click [COMMON] ► [Project Property Setting]. From the Project Property window, you can view or editthe following properties:Tab DescriptionProject Summary Basic information of the project file, such as the project name andauthorXGT Panel Settings XGT Panel information and communication methodsScreen Settings Screen change optionsSecurity Settings Permissions for connected XGT PanelsKey Window Settings Settings for key windowsLanguage Options for editing language and runtime languageStorage Settings Destination and backup locations of project components and XGTPanel dataGlobal Script Settings Options to apply to global scriptsAuxiliary Settings Options for printing, capturing screens, displaying flow alarms,sending email alerts, displaying system alarms, and displayingcommunication errorsExtended Device Settings Settings for printers and barcode readersOperation Log Settings for saving logs of user operationswXP Settings Settings for the IPC series panels.2. Project Development2-10Changing Basic Project PropertiesThe Project Summary tab in the Project Property window contains basic information, such as the projectname, file path, author, creation date, modification date, last download date, version, and projectdescription. To change basic project properties, edit the information in the appropriate field and click[OK].Item DescriptionProject Name The project name does not have to match the file name. The file name you specifywill appear at the top of the project or screen tree in the Project/Screen pane.File Path The location of the project file (this cannot be edited)Author The creator of the fileDescription A description of the projectCreated The date the file was first created (this cannot be edited)Modified The date the file was last modified (this cannot be edited)Downloaded The date the project was last downloaded to an XGT Panel (this cannot be edited)Version The version of the XP-Builder software (you can change this information to create aunique identifier for customized properties)2. Project Development2-11Changing XGT Panel SettingsEdit the XGT Panel and model type. You can also set the connection method settings for connecting tocontrollers. The options vary by the connection method. To change XGT Panel settings, edit theinformation in the appropriate field and click [OK]:XGT Panel Settings DescriptionSeries Select an XGT Panel type. The initial information is the same as youselected when you created the project.Refer to the hardware manual for detailed specifications.Model Select a model number based on the XGT Panel type you selected.24 BIT Color Mode This mode is supported only by the iXP series. Select this option touse 24-bit color instead of the default setting (65,536 colors). The useof 24-bit mode improves the appearance of images on the screen,but may result in slower screen refresh speeds.Portrait Mode(Available in iXP Series andeXP20, iXP2 Series Panelsonly)Select this option to use the XGT Panel in portrait. If you have alreadycreated the XGT Panel in landscape and select the Portrait mode, thefigures and objects may be resized or positioned outside of thescreen. The user downloads the project to the HMI and when it isdifferent between current state and before state (Landscape mode/portrait mode), your device will reboot. The setting is appliedimmediately. Refer to the hardware manual for installationprecautions.RS-232C 5V Power Supply This mode is supported only by the iXP series. Select this option touse the RS232C connection (5 V, 250 mA) as the power supply.Add Controller & You can connect controllers with multiple protocols, including 2. Project Development2-12XGT Panel Settings DescriptionDelete Controller RS232C, RS422/485, or Ethernet.• Click [Add Controller] to insert a new controller tab. Theconnection number for the new controller will automatically beone higher than the previous controller’s connection number. XPseries panels support up to four connection numbers (0-3) and theeXP/iXP/iXP2/IPC series support up to 16 connection numbers,depending on the connection protocol you use. For moreinformation, refer to <2.9.1 Using 1:N Communication withMultiple Protocols>• Click a controller tab and then click [Delete Controller] to delete it.This option is active only after you have added at least onecontroller.• Connection numbers are automatically renumbered when acontroller is deleted. For example, if you have three controllers(numbered 0-2) and you delete controller 1, the last controller willbe renumbered from 2 to 1 automatically.• The IPC series does not support serial controllers or serial drivers.Controller Settings Set the controller manufacturer and controller type (Product).Refer to Manual Click to open the reference manual for the selected controller.Protocol Set the connection method between the XGT Panel and the controller.Ensure that the setting matches the actual connection between theXGT Panel and the controller.Serial Port This option can be selected for serial communication connections.Port selection is not required if the model has only one available port.If there are multiple ports, check the port name on the XGT Panelport and set the port number.Detail Settings Click to set detailed connection parameters. If a controller is selected,the default properties will be set automatically. The options availablevary by the connection type.Timeout Set a network timeout.Wait to Send Set the length of time to wait for network communication betweenthe XGT Panel and the controller.Retry Count Set the number of times to retry when communication fails betweenthe XGT Panel and the controller.Use PLC Simulator Set whether or not to use the simulator. To run the simulator, click[TOOL] ► [Simulation]. For more information, refer to <2.6.1Simulating an Interface>. 2. Project Development2-13XGT Panel Settings DescriptionProgram Monitor Set whether or not to view controller data with the Program Monitor.This feature is supported by all XGK series PLCs and some XGB seriesPLCs only. For more information about using the Program Monitor,refer to the section of the Appendix.This feature is not supported by the IPC series.Note• You can change the XGT Panel type to another type which supports the mode selected in the XGTProperty.• When changing the XGT Panel type, the height and width of objects on the screen may varydepending on the screen size. Objects with fixed sizes and fonts are not affected by changes of thepanel type.• If you transfer projects composed in 65535 colors to XGT panels that support only 256 colors, thecolor of objects and figures may slightly vary. Color palettes are automatically adjusted and theobjects and figures are displayed using the nearest colors to the original.• Projects developed for color XGT Panels cannot be used in monochrome XGT Panels, and vice versa.2. Project Development2-14Changing Screen SettingsYou can specify the startup screen that appears when an XGT Panel is turned on and the conditions forchanging the screens. To change screen settings, edit the information in the appropriate field and click[OK]:Screen Settings DescriptionInitial Screen Number Set the number of the screen that appears when the XGT Panel isturned on.If no screen is specified, an error will occur. To specify the startscreen, click [Browse] ► select a screen, and then click ► [OK].Change Screen by Device Set whether or not to switch base screens based on the devicevalue.Change to Screen Number Set the device to switch to a specified screen. When the devicevalue changes, the screen specified by the device value will beactivated (unsigned, 16-bit).Current Screen Number Set a number for the current base screen.Global Window 1 NumberGlobal Window 2 NumberSpecify one or two windows that will be activated “globally”(across the entire interface) based on the device value. Windowsspecified here are called based on the specified device values andhave no priority over each other.2. Project Development2-15Screen Settings DescriptionHDMI Setting When connecting the HMI with HDMI on multiple monitors, HDMIscreens can be monitored with Cloning and Expanding throughthe HMI.When accessing Cloning and Expanding on HMI devices, pleaserefer to Manual 5.1.4 Environment SettingsClone When in Clone mode, the HMI screen can be monitored via HDMIscreen.Extension When in Expand mode, connect display via HMI and HDMI toshow HDMI screens setup by XP-Builder.You can set up to 1- 4 HDMI monitors depending on the model.For more information about forming HDMI screens, refer to <2.3Developing an Interface>.Expanded Properties: Initial HDMI screenSelect a starting HDMI screen number to monitor.Numbers between 1 through 65534 can be selected.Expanded Properties: Change to screen nmberDesignate a screen transition device for HDMI screen monitoring.Expanded Properties: Current screen numberDesignate the screen device to monitor with HDMI screenmonitoring.Expanded Properties: Screen ResolutionChoose screen resolution for HDMI screens.HDMI Screen Output Use If [HDMI Screen Output Use] is disabled, connected HDMI cableswill not display screens.This will be enabled by default.Monitor Resolution You can select a resolution for HMI connected display monitors.This can only be selected by devices that support this feature.Note• HDMI Screen settings can only be selected by devices that support HDMI feature .2. Project Development2-16• In portrait mode, it is impossible to set the mode to HDMI extension.• If the project is changed from Extended mode to Clone mode or the HDMI function is notsupported, the HDMI screen will be deleted, so must be taken caution• When changing the resolution, care must be taken as it affects the resolution of existing HDMIscreens.2. Project Development2-17Changing Security SettingsYou can change security settings for a connected XGT Panel to regulate access for different types ofusers. XGT Panels support ten security levels (0 or not set: no access restriction, 9: highest security level).In the Security Settings, it can be set to unset or level 1~9. In the object, you can set the security levelto restrict access to individual objects. Higher-level security can unsecure lower-level security. Lowerlevel security cannot unsecure higher-level security.Security Settings DescriptionPassword Mode Set to protect a panel with a password. Enter the passwords in the Passwordfield for the corresponding security level.Password DeviceModeSet to use a word device to control access to the XGT Panel. Authentication isinitiated by user input, but the data contained in the first six word devicesspecifies the password.User ID Mode Set a user ID and a password to access the panel. The user ID character stringcan have a maximum of 16 characters. Only alphanumeric and specialcharacters can be used for the password or user ID. A password must beentered after the user ID is entered.[User ID Mode Input Sequence](1) Select [User ID mode].(2) Input the ID in the [User ID] column.(3) Select a level between 1 and 9.(4) Input the password.Security Level Set passwords for security levels as desired. Level 0 allows access for all users,so it is not possible to specify a password (only levels 1-9 are configurable).After entering a password for a certain security level, you automatically gain 2. Project Development2-18Security Settings Descriptionaccess to all the objects with lower security levels.Password Set a password. XP-Builder supports only Latin characters in passwords.Passwords are case sensitive and can be up to 12 characters long.Password Device Set a word device to control access to the XGT Panel. Enter a device addressor click the field, and then click the keypad icon on the right side of the fieldto specify a device address.Password InputInterval(min)• Set the length of time to grant access after entering the password. Thepermission will expire based on your setting and will require the passwordto be re-entered. The default unit is minutes and you can set an intervalfrom 0 to 30 minutes.• If you set the interval to “0,” a password must be entered for everyoperation where a security level is applied.• Use shorter intervals for highly sensitive operations.Password modelocked on screenWhen the item is checked, the password mode is locked regardless of thesecurity level retention time even when the screen is changed, Therefore,you must disable the security by entering the password in the protectedobject to disable security for use. For more information, refer to the securitymode locking function of the special switch.NoteYou can apply security settings to the following objects: bit switch, word switch, change screen switch,special switch, multi switch, numeric input, and text input.Changing Key Window SettingsYou can set the key window number for input devices. The key window set here is applied as the defaultfor all key windows. To change key window settings, click the arrow buttons ( or ) to select a newwindow number, or click [Browse] and then click a key window type.2. Project Development2-192. Project Development2-20Changing LanguagesThe following language types are used in a project to display different information.Language types DescriptionEditing language Editing language is the language that users can configure and use to createmultilingual text tables. You can choose different fonts to add entries indifferent languages. The fonts for editing languages are included in theproject, but are not transmitted to the XGT panel.Runtime language Runtime language is the language that is downloaded to the XGT panel. Theruntime language fonts are transmitted to the XGT panel as TTF (true-typefont) files. In the Project Property settings, you can select up to 12 differentruntime languages.From the Language tab, you can edit both editing and runtime language settings. To change languagesettings, edit the information in the appropriate field and click [OK]:Language Settings DescriptionEditing Language • Set the languages used in XP-builder.• Languages shown in text tables are set here.Add New Click to add additional display languages to the interface. Select alanguage from the list and then click [OK] to add it to the EditingLanguage List.2. Project Development2-21Language Settings DescriptionDelete Select a language, and then click to remove it.Editing Languages Settings Change the default font for each editing language.Runtime Language List View and specify runtime languages to use with the project. You canmodify the font list by adding fonts from a list of editing fonts ordeleting them.Multilingual Font• Set a font to transfer with the project file. This function is useful whenthe XGT Panel does not support Asian characters, such as in the caseof XP series panels that run the Windows CE operating system.• If you select this option, the entire font will be transferred to the panel.Ensure that the size of the font file does not exceed the availablememory of the XGT panel model.• Multilingual fonts are also used for table headers in text input, textdisplay and logging backup CSV files. Refer to <4.3.4.4 TextDisplay>.Language Change byDeviceSet the runtime language to change for specific devices. The XGT Panelreads the value from the device and displays the interface in the 2. Project Development2-22Language Settings Descriptionlanguage you specify in the Runtime Language List.Device Select a word device (language change device).Default Runtime Language Set the runtime language that will be used by default on the XGT Panel.XGT Panel The language for the XGT Panel menu screen is selected. The defaultlanguage is English.In the IPC series, the menu screen language depends on the setup filelanguages.Resize Font The length of an object’s character string, calculated from the characterstring table, will vary based on the language. If the length of thecharacter string is larger than the width of the object, the font size of thecharacter string is automatically reduced when displayed. The minimumfont size is 9.Resize font in case objectregion is larger than thetext length while Text Tableor Device Address Show isusedThis feature applies to objects that use text tables, or to the deviceaddresses of text display objects. When the language is changed, if thelength of the character string is larger than the width of the object, thefont size of the text or address is automatically reduced when it isdisplayed.(The minimum font size is 9.)Internal Device Skip onDevice Address showThis function excludes internal devices when displaying device addressesin an object. If this option is checked, the address is not displayed in thetext indicator in which [Bit Device Address] or [Word Device Address] isset. Refer to <4.3.4.4 Text Display> for detailed information.Font Size Unit In general, when displaying the font size, it can be displayed in pixelunits and point units. Set the font size unit to be displayed.In the case of MS S/W (MS Word, MS Excel, etc.), the font size isdisplayed in point unit. In case of XP-Builder, the unit is displayed in pixelas default.Even with the same font size, the font size displayed may vary dependingon the display units.2. Project Development2-23Language Settings DescriptionFor example, the same [Sample] letter as shown in the table below is16px for pixel units, but 12pt for point units.Note• The font used in a text table is set by the default settings of the editing language. Text may not bedisplayed properly if the text of a text table cannot be represented by the default font.• If you set the language to change by device, you must designate a language for the device or nothingwill be shown in the XGT Panel. Refer to <2.2.2.6 Changing Languages> for detailed information.2. Project Development2-24Changing Storage SettingsSet the storage locations for image and font files, as well as the locations for backing up logging datarecipes and screen captures from an XGT Panel.Storage Settings DescriptionImage Files XGT Panel has a fixed amount of memory for saving project files. If you wantto download XGT Panel data that exceeds the size of the allocated memory,you can save files on removable media. Use the entire path to specify thestorage file path on the XGT Panel.In the IPC series, only a flash memory drive or hard disk drive can be usedfor storing the data.Upload Project FileSound FilesRecipe DataSpecify locations where files will be stored.In the IPC series, only a flash memory drive or hard disk drive can be usedfor storing the data.Alarm DataLogging DataRecipe DataCapture ImageMemo FileOperation LogSpecify an external location where the data will be saved.Delete Old File If Disk isFullSelect this option to overwrite existing data if the disk is full. The oldest datawill be deleted.Create Directory Backup data such as alarm, logging, and recipe are backed up with a uniquefolder name. If you uncheck “Create Directory”, you can back up files to theroot of the backup directory without creating a unique folder. 2. Project Development2-25Storage Settings DescriptionNote that only one of the backup items such as alarm, logging, or recipe canbe unchecked “Create Directory”.Note• XGT Panels support three types of removable storage devices: USB devices, CF cards, and SD cards(Only supported in the iXP/IPC series).• X30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, XP40-TTA, XP50-TTE, iXP, iXP2 and eXP models do not support CFcards.2. Project Development2-26Changing Global Script SettingsGlobal script conditions are monitored through an XGT Panel and executed if the conditions are met. Upto eight global scripts can be created. If two or more conditions are met simultaneously, scripts areexecuted based on the priority that you specify.Global Script Settings DescriptionName Set a script name.Device Set a bit device that meets the conditions required to execute thescript.Type Choose a trigger type for executing the script (Rising edge or FallingEdge).Second Only available when scripts are repeated regularly, and will set theinterval to seconds.Insert, Delete, Modify Click to insert, delete, or modify global scripts.UpDownSpecify the execution priority for when two or more conditions are metsimultaneously.2. Project Development2-27Changing Auxiliary SettingsYou can set the screen capture action and properties of the system alarm display.Auxiliary Settings DescriptionScreen Capture Set the action that occurs when the screen is captured on the XGTPanel. You can save the image in a file or print it.The IPC series does not support screenshot printing.Script Watchdog Time Set the Watchdog time for a script. A script will end if it is not runwithin the maximum time set.Flow Alarm Display Mode • Set to display the alarm message for the states of the flow alarm.• When a flow alarm occurs and is then reset while the alarm messageis displayed, you can specify one of two actions to occur:- Redraw at occurrence: The alarm message is replacedautomatically with a new message.- After current display list: The alarm message remains on thescreen and new alarms or cleared alarms will be shown bysubsequent messages.E-mail Property Set whether or not to use email alerts.Server Settings Set email settings. For more information, refer to the note below.System Alarm Window Set whether or not to display system alarm messages.Communication ErrorDisplaySet whether or not to display communication error messages on top ofother screens. If the buzzer activation option is checked, the buzzer isactivated when an error pop-up message is displayed. To stop orresume the buzzer’s sound, check or uncheck Buzzer On at the right 2. Project Development2-28Auxiliary Settings Descriptionside of the communication error window.The IPC series does not support buzzer sounds.Don’t show communicationerror after it is closedSelect this option to stop viewing error messages after you close thefirst communication error notification.Screen change gestureoption(Available from version 2.11)Choose a screen transition gesture between screen number transitionand the Next/Return screen transition.- Change by screen number• The screen will move based on the screen number.• When going to the next screen on the last screen, it will move you to the first numbered screen.• When going to the previous screen on the first screen, it will move you to the last numbered screen.- Change by screen change order (Similar to web browser)• Screens will be shifted based on their screen history. (Similar to the undo/redo mechanic of web browsers.)▶For example, if you perform the return gesture on screen 20 afteraccessing screens 1, 10, and 20, you will return to screen 10.Prioritize the operation ofXP-RuntimePrecedence of drawing priority: When displaying the objectimmediately after screen changing in XGT Panel, the object is displayedbased on the previously communicated value even if communication isnot completed. In this case, the value displayed on the object may bedifferent from the actual controller value until communication 1 scan iscomplete.Switch Action Setting on XPRuntimeSynchronous mode:• The method of synchronize external input processing andcommunication operation in the conventional way.• If the communication operation is performed by external input, other 2. Project Development2-29Auxiliary Settings Descriptionexternal input processing is impossible before the communicationoperation is completed.Asynchronous mode:• The method of handling communication operation and externalinput processing separately.• If the communication operation is performed by external input, otherexternal input operation is possible before the communicationoperation is completed.• In asynchronous mode, there is no guarantee of multi switchoperation order.• Applies only to bit switches, word switches, and multi switches.Smooth edges of font(Except eXP Series)Change the text-shaped options displayed on the XGT Panel.• Anti-aliasing: Text is displayed smoothly.• ClearType: The text shape is clearly displayed.Note• Click [Server Settings] ► [E-mail] to configure the email settings.Function DescriptionFrom Set the sender. You can specify only one sender.To Set the recipient. Use a semicolon (;) to divide the email addresses betweenmultiple recipients.CC Set the secondary recipient(s). Use a semicolon (;) to divide the emailaddresses between multiple recipients.BCC Set the hidden secondary recipient(s). The addresses in this field will not be 2. Project Development2-30shown on the email content. Use a semicolon (;) to divide the emailaddresses between multiple recipients.Subject Enter the subject of an email. You can enter up to 128 Latin characters.• Click [Server Settings] ► [Mail Server] to configure the email server.Function DescriptionIP Address or SMTP ServerNameEnter the IP address or SMTP server name.SMTP Server Port Enter the port number of the SMTP server. If you use ananonymous SMTP account service in the intranet, the portnumber is 25.Use SSL/TLS Encode data when transferring it to the mail server.Validate Server Certificate View the certificate of the mail server.My SMTP Server RequiresAuthenticationUnless you use an anonymous SMTP mail service in theintranet, you need authentication for the user information.User Name Set the name for authentication.Password Set the password for authentication.- To configure the Mail Server Settings using an Anonymous SMTP, the mail server must be on thesame intranet as the XGT Panel.- The email is encoded in Unicode. Set the port number to 25 in this case (25 is the default portnumber for Anonymous SMTP service).- To use the mail server URL instead of an IP address in the Mail Server Settings, you must set theDNS server IP in the XGT Panel Start menu. 2. Project Development2-31Changing Extended Device SettingsYou can connect a barcode reader to an XGT Panel’s RS-232C port (COM2) and use printer functions.From the Project Property window, you can view or edit the following properties of a barcode reader thatis connected to an XGT Panel:Item DescriptionBarcode Settings Set to connect barcode reader to XGT Panel.Connection Property Set to use the barcode through the RS-232C / USB protocol.tail Settings Set detail connection options:• Bytes to read: Set the amount of data to read from a barcode. If youset the number of bytes, the XGT Panel reads only the specifiednumber of bytes. If you do not specify this setting, the XGT Panelreads the entire barcode.• Save data in: Set a location for saving barcode data. Data is savedfrom the specified device continuously.• Data storage: Enter the first device to receive data from the barcode.• Read complete device: Assign a bit device to set when all data hasbeen read.• Set the RS-232C communication parameter, such as the baud rate,data bits, and flow control.• COM port: Set the communication port. This setting is supported bythe IPC series only.NoteThe baud rate must match the setting in the XGT Panel. 2. Project Development2-32Item DescriptionTo change the baud rate on the XGT Panel, tap and holdthe screen to access the menu. Then, tap [Setting] ► [PCConn Setting].Note• For USB barcode, don’t need to set connection optionsdepending on the usage environment. (See how to usethe USB barcode reader at the bottom)• For USB barcode, input value of USB is saved in [DataStorage] only when the connection option is set andthe HS501.2 device is ON.• After the waiting time for the barcode input, the inputis saved after initializing the [Data Storage] value.Use Printer Set to use the printer option.The IPC series does not support printing.Vendor Select a vendor for the printer type.Port Select the printer port.Direction Set the directions.Color Set the color type.High Quality Print Set the properties for printing quality.External Object Setting It can be set only in handy model (e.g. iXP2H).This is the setting for the globally operable HW key for the handy.For information on setting the Handy HW key that can operate on thelocal screen within on screen, refer to <2.3.11 Setting HW Key forHandy on screen>.When you press the button, the following dialog box appear. You can setexternal lamp or external multiple switch.For details, refer to the corresponding object or HW manual.2. Project Development2-33Item DescriptionTo connect a barcode reader:1 Select [COMMON] ► [Project Property Setting] ► [Extended Device Settings].2 Check the checkbox next to Barcode settings.3 Click [Detail Settings] and specify the following settings:To connect a USB barcode reader:4 Select [COMMON] ► [Project Property Setting] ► [Extended Device Settings].5 Check the checkbox next to Barcode settings and select USB.6 Click [Detail Settings] and specify the following settings: 2. Project Development2-34The method of USB barcode reader:1 In case of the text input or numeric input is in the input state as in the above screen (1)2. Project Development2-35 Even without [Detail Settings] setting, the information of the entered barcode is saved in thedevice of the corresponding input device. If [Detail Settings] is set and the internal device HS0501.2 is ON, it is simultaneously saved to thedevice set in [Data Storage].2 In case of the text input or numeric input is not in the input state as in the above screen (2) In this case, set as USB after checking [Barcode Settings] on [Project Property] – [Extended DeviceSettings] Set [Data Storage] in the [Detail Settings] In case of the internal device HS0501.2 is ON: The entered barcode value is saved in [DataStorage]. For example, in the above screen, press the switch of HS0501.2 to turn it On, and thenenter the input barcode value. In case of the internal device HS0501.2 is OFF: Input is not possible. To receive input data whilemaintaining the OFF state, make an input state as (1) and scan it.3 Utilization of waiting time for barcode input Input within the barcode waiting time (unit ms) is continuously stored in [Data Storage]. Since [Barcode input initialize time] is 1000ms on the above screen, all inputs within 1000msinterval are entered in [Data Storage]. If barcodes are scanned continuously within 1000ms, they are recognized as one barcode and allare saved. If the interval between consecutive scans is 1000ms or more, it is entered afterinitializing the [Data Storage]. The time can be adjusted with the internal device (HS0507) in addition to [Detail Settings].Changing Operation Log SettingsYou can use the Operation Log function to record the operations on the XGT panel. This function enablesyou to check which operation was performed, and when or where it was performed. With this function,you can analyze the causes of errors or other problems from the recorded log.2. Project Development2-36Item DescriptionOperation Log Enable Set whether or not to use the Operation Log function.Operation Log Condition Set when to record logs.• Continuous: Logs are recorded continuously.• On Bit 'ON': Logs are recorded when a bit device is set to ON.Status Device Set a word device to control log recording.NVRAM DEL Device Set a device to delete the operation log area of the NVRAM.Operation On NVRAM Full Set the action that occurs when the NVRAM is full.• Stop: Logs will not be recorded if the NVRAM is full.• Use Ring Buffer: If the NVRAM is full, the oldest record will bedeleted and logs will be recorded accordingly.User String Device Set a word device to control user strings. A maximum of 16 bytes canbe recorded.Operation Log List Select which operations will be recorded.Backup Device Set a device to store the operation log.Automatic Backup onNVRAM FullSet whether or not to execute backup automatically when the NVRAMis full.Backup File Name Device Set a device to store the names of backup files. A maximum of 8 bytescan be stored.2. Project Development2-37Item DescriptionAppend Backup Content atSame FileSet whether or not to append another backup set to the existingbackup file. If this option is checked, the previous contents of thebackup file remain intact, and the new backup will be written after theend of the last backup. A maximum of 1024 backup records can bestored in a single file. If this option is not checked, the new backup willbe saved as a new file.Backup File (CSV) Encoding Set whether or not to encode a backup file (CSV or Encrypted CSV file).Date/Time Set the date or time format to use for a backup file.Note• The Operation Log function is available on iXP/iXP2/IPC series panels only. (XP is onlyavailable in V2.20)• The following diagram briefly explains how an operation log is recorded.• Describes the value information for the state device.2. Project Development2-3816bit Lower Byte Off(0) On(1)Bit 0 End of Progress ProceedingBit 1 Backup device is inserted backup device is not insertedBit 2 Log SRAM area write failed Log SRAM area write successfulBit 3 There is free space in the logSRAM area.The log SRAM area is fullBit 4 Clear log SRAM area Completion of clear of log SRAMareaBit 5 Failed to write log backup Log backup successfulBit 6 There is free space in thewrite log area.The log write area is full.Bit 7 Clear a log backup Log Backup Delete Complete• Maximum per device. Maximum number ofbackupsXP General 490iXP/iXP2/IPC 9832. Project Development2-39wXP SettingsSet the wXP drive path for the CF/USB/SD memory you selected in the storage settings. This feature issupported by the IPC series only.Item DescriptionBackup Path Setting: CFCardSet the wXP hard disk drive path to store backup files when you haveselected ‘CF Card’ as the storage device.Backup Path Setting: USBStorageSet the wXP hard disk drive path to store backup files when you haveselected ‘USB Storage’ as the storage device.Backup Path Setting: SDCardSet the wXP hard disk drive path to store backup files when you haveselected ‘SD Card’ as the storage device.2. Project Development2-40Editing default settingsYou can edit default settings in XP-Builder.Changing default editing optionsChange the editing options. Click [TOOL] ► [Option] ► [Edit Option].Item DescriptionObject ID/AddressText ColorSet the default color for device and object IDs. The setting is appliedimmediately.Background Alpha BlendUseSet a semi-transparent background for device or object IDs. The settingis applied immediately.Object ID/Address Font Size Set the default font size for device and object IDs. The setting is appliedimmediately.Default Text Color ofFigure/ObjectSet the default font color for character strings in figures or objects. Thesetting is applied when you create new figures or objects.Default Line Color ofFigure/ObjectSet the default line color for character strings in figures or objects. Thesetting is applied when you create new figures or objects.Use Background Color fromNew ScreenSet a background color to use for new screens. The setting is appliedwhen you create a new screen.Default BG Color from NewScreenSelect the default background color. The setting is applied when youcreate a new screen.Screen Limit Check onObject/Figure’s EditingPrevents figures and objects from extending beyond the boundaries ofthe editing area. The setting is applied immediately.Page Margin X Set the screen’s margin line on the X axis by pixel.2. Project Development2-41Item DescriptionPage Margin Y Set the screen’s margin line on the Y axis by pixel.Move/Resize Pixel(X) Set the pixel size for moving or resizing an object using the arrow keyson the X axis.Move/Resize Pixel(Y) Set the pixel size for moving or resizing an object using the arrow keyson the Y axis.Changing default project optionsTo edit project management properties, click [TOOL] ► [Option] ► [Project].Item DescriptionShow File Dialog atStart UpSet whether or not to show the Select Project screen when you launch XPBuilder.Recent Files Set the maximum number of recent files to show.Auto Save Set whether or not to save project files automatically.Interval Set how often XP-Builder will automatically save project files. The default unit isminutes.2. Project Development2-42Item DescriptionShow PropertyDialog on NewFigure/ObjectSet to show the properties window when you create a new figure or object.Show Warning OnData Check or ScriptCheckSet whether or not to show a warning message and list of errors in thefollowing instances. If you do not use this option, only the warning messagewill appear.• When you run a data check ([TOOL] ► [Data Check]).• When you download a project file to an XGT Panel.• When you run a script check ([TOOL] ► [Script Check]).Create .bakWhenever SavingProject FileThis option determines if an existing project will be saved as a “.bak“ file when aproject file is created. If this option is checked, the content of an existingproject file is saved as a BAK file before a new project file is saved. Changes tothe project’s data are saved in an XPD file. If the option is unchecked, the BAKfile is not created, and the project is saved only as an XPD file.Max Backup File No. You can set XP-Builder to create up to ten backup files. The extensions for thebackup files are “.bak” and “.bak1–bak9.” Click [TOOL] ► [Option], [Project] toadjust the number of backup files.Check ‘IncludeUpload Project file’on ProjectDownload asDefaultCheck to select the “Check ‘Include Upload Project file’ on Project Download asDefault” feature. This option is selected by default. When this option is selected,the ‘Include Upload Project File’ option is applied by default. Uncheck thisoption to manually decide whether to include the upload project each time youdownload a project.2. Project Development2-432.3 Developing an InterfaceYou can use different types of screens when creating a project, and draw or insert figures, objects, andgraphs on screens. The following table describes available screen types.Type DescriptionBase Screen • The main area for drawing and editing a project.• The screen size varies by XGT panel model.Window Screen • Windows that overlap or pop-up on the Base screen.• A project can support up to 65,534 screens, but screens 65,531-65,534 arereserved for system key information.• You can insert figures and objects, and up to eight window objects (16 windowobjects for the iXP/iXP2/IPC series).• To view the bit device status (on or off), click [VIEW] ► [Show/hide ObjectOn/Off].• To view the word device status for the screen number assigned to theconditional statement, change the value of the word status combo box on thetoolbar.• A shift key does not appear on Window screens by default. To activate theshift key, click anywhere on the Window screen.• Refer to <4.3.5 Window Objects> for detailed information.Key Window • Key windows are pre-defined Window screens that allow you to insert fourtypes of keypads: decimal, ASCII, hexadecimal, and float.• To use a user-defined keypad, use the Special Switch Function or import oneof the provided object libraries, and then insert it into the screen.• To change the key window settings, click [COMMON] ► [Project PropertySetting] ► [Key Window Settings].Part Screen • You can use a Part screen to control how figures (such as lines, circles, andimages) behave on a Base screen.• Drag and drop the Part screen from the Screen pane to the editing area tocopy all objects from the Part screen into the Base screen.• The Part screen is used as a part of the part object, the bit part, and the wordpart.• You can create up to 65,534 Part screens.• You cannot register an object to a Part screen.• Refer to <4.3.6 Part Objects> for detailed information.HDMI Screen • You can only create HDMI screen on models that support HDMI• You can create an HDMI screen by switching from [Project property] ▶[Screen Settings] ▶ [HDMI Screen Setting].2. Project Development2-44Type Description• You can create up to 1 to 65534 screens per HDMI connection.• You can set initial screen and screen resolution in [Project Property] ▶[ScreenSettings] ▶ [HDMI Screen Settings]Global window settings allow you to define up to two windows that can be activated across the entireinterface, based on device values. To set the addresses for the global windows, click [COMMON] ►[Project Property Setting] ► [Screen Settings].NoteA project can support a total of 65,534 Base, Part, or Window screens. However, Windowscreens 65,531-65,534 are reserved for decimal, HEX, ASCII, and real keypads,respectively. You can adjust the size of a Base screen, but not the sizes of other screens.Adding ScreensYou can insert three types of screens from the Screen pane. You can also drag and drop a Base, Window,or Part screen onto a Base screen. When you insert a Base or Window screen, the screen itself will beinserted. When you insert a Part screen, the objects on the Part screen will be copied to the Base screen.The following table describes how to add screens: 2. Project Development2-45Type DescriptionBase Screen Right-click [Base Screen] and click [Insert].Window Screen Right-click [Window Screen] and click [Insert].Part Screen Right-click [Part Screen] and click [Insert].HDMI Screen Right-click [HDMI Screen] and click [Insert]Double-click [Insert HDMI Screen].Configuring ScreensXP-Builder allows you to customize screen properties, such as which screen appears when the interface isstarted from the XGT panel.Opening or Closing a ScreenTo open a screen, double-click the screen name in the Screen pane. To close a screen, right-click thescreen name and click [Close].To view thumbnails of all the project screens, click [VIEW] ► [Screen Thumbnails].Setting a Screen as the Start ScreenThe start screen is the screen that appears when the interface is run on the XGT Panel. The start screenmust be a Base screen, and it will appear in boldface in the Screen pane.2. Project Development2-46To set the start screen:1 In the Screen pane, right-click one of the Base screens.2 Click [As Startup Screen].Renaming a Screen1 In the Screen pane, right-click a screen.2 Click [Rename].2. Project Development2-473 Enter a new name and press the Enter key.Note• Screen names are composed of numbers, spaces, and text characters. You must separate the screennumber and name with a space or the screen name will not be recognized (for example, if youenter “1Base screen,” the name will not be recognized).• Keypad windows have fixed numbers: DEC (65531), HEX (65532), ASCII (65533), and FLOAT (65534).• On the screen pane, you can select multiple screens and change the screen property options at thesame time. Click the screens while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple screens, andthen right-click over the selected screen to open the context menu and select [Property].2. Project Development2-48Changing Screen Properties1 Right-click anywhere on a Base screen.2 Click [Screen Property].3 Set the following properties: 2. Project Development2-49Category DescriptionGeneral • Set basic information, such as type, number, name, or screen size. Ifyou specify window titles from a text table, the text will be applied,but additional font properties will not. The window titles will appearin a fixed format: white, 15-point font.• To change properties for multiple screens at the same time, hold theCtrl key and click the screen names. Then, right-click any of theselected screen names and click [Property]. The values you specifywill be applied to all the selected screens at the same time.Background • Set the background pattern, color, or image. To select a backgroundimage from your computer, check the checkbox next to Use BGImage, click [Library], and then locate the image file. For moreinformation, refer to <2.4.1 Manaing Graphic Libraries>.• You can set a background to include a color and image, but the colorsetting takes priority over the image setting.• Supported background image formats include BMP, JPG, GIF, TGA,PNG, TIF, WMF, ICO, and PCX. The BTE and TTE models support onlyBMP, GIF, JPG, and WMF formats.Local ScriptSetting• Set scripts to execute when the Base screen appears or switches. Thescript is executed according to the selected condition when thescreen changes.• Scripts must be created before they can be applied to screens. Formore information about scripts, refer to<4.2 Scripts>.• To apply a script, select a script name and execution condition, andthen click [Insert].• You can specify an execution condition for a script (Consecutive,Periodic, On Bit Rising, On Bit Falling, or On Bit Changed) or specify adevice to control the execution of the script.Etc. • Check the checkbox next to Run Script at Open Screen or Run Scriptat Close Screen, and select a script for each case.• Check the checkbox next to Show Flow Alarm to set whether or notto show flow alarms at the bottom of the XGT Panel screen.NoteAlthough an execution condition is fulfilled while processing a script, there might be a slightdelay because the conditions are rechecked after the script is completed.4 When you are finished configuring properties, click [OK] to save your changes.2. Project Development2-50Editing ScreensYou can edit the screens with standard functions, such as cut, copy, and paste. To edit windows:1 In the Screen pane, right-click a screen name.2 Click an option, such as [Copy], [Paste], [Cut], or [Delete].3 Click [OK] (if necessary).NoteWhen you paste a screen into the project, you can set the number of the screen.2. Project Development2-51Inserting Figures or ObjectsYou can add figures, objects, or text to screens. You can also set properties, such as width, height, color,or pattern, and insert images from the graphic library.Drawing FiguresYou can draw figures, such as lines, circles, and rectangles.To draw a figure:1 In the Toolbox pane, click [Figure].2 Click a figure type.3 Click the editing area and specify options for the figure.Type DescriptionLineMultiline• To draw multiple lines, click multiple points and then double-click toinsert the figure.• To delete part of a multiline, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking apoint.Click Click Double-clickClick Click2. Project Development2-52Type Description• To draw a line, drag the line on the editing area. If you want to draw astraight line, press and hold the Shift key while dragging.CirclePieChordEllipseRectangleRoundRect• To draw a perfect circle or square, press and hold the Shift key whiledragging.• To draw a figure from the center point, click the figure, and then click[EDIT] ► [First Point As Center] on the toolbar.NoteWhen you enable the First Point As Center option, it is applied toall the screens in the same project.• When drawing circles, pies, or chords, draw a circle first, then click thecircle to mark the start and end points.• Draw the circle again until you complete the circle, pie, or chord. • To draw an ellipse, rectangle, or rounded rectangle, click and draw thefigure.Polygon • To draw a polygon, click multiple points and then double-click to insertthe figure.2. Project Development2-53Type Description• To delete part of the multiline, press and hold the Ctrl key while clickinga point.Image • To import images from the System Graphic Library or User GraphicLibrary, refer to <2.4.1 Manaing Graphic Libraries>.• To change an image, double-click it.Scale • You can select the location and direction (horizontal or vertical) of scales.• Set the scale properties, including the number of tick marks, tick size,and tick intervals.• Set the appearance of the scale with the color options.• You can create a table with the scale.Text • Draw a text box on the screen, and then enter text in the text input box.• To insert text from a text table, check the check box next to From TextTable, and then click [Text Table].4 When you are finished specifying figure properties, click [OK].Double-clickClickClick ClickClickClickClick2. Project Development2-54Note• The default size of figures varies by figure type.• You can apply 28 types of textures to figures, except for line, multiline, image, scale and text figures.• Monochrome XGT panels do not support texture for the objects or figures.• The textures displayed by an XGT panel may differ slightly from their appearance in XP Builder.2. Project Development2-55Inserting Images from the Graphic LibraryYou can insert images from the Graphic Library. For more information about the Graphic Library, refer to<2.4.1 Manaing Graphic Libraries>.To insert images from the Graphic Library:1 Click [VIEW] ► [Graphic Library].2 In the Graphic Library pane, click the System or User tab, and then click an object category from thedrop-down list.3 In the Graphic Library pane, drag and drop an image onto the editing area.2. Project Development2-56Drawing ObjectsYou can draw objects, such as switches, windows, parts, and graphs. These objects are the mostimportant components for operating a control system based on device values or condition. For moreinformation about objects, refer to <2.4.2 Managing Object Libraries>.To draw an object:1 In the Toolbox pane, click [Object].2 Click an object type.3 Click or drag in the editing area and specify options for the figure:Type Drawing OptionsBit/Word SwitchChange Screen SwitchSpecial SwitchMulti SwitchBit/Word LampN-State LampClockBit MessageWord MessageNumeric DisplayNumeric InputText DisplayText InputAnimationDraw the object in the editing area or click the editingarea to insert the object in its default size.2. Project Development2-57Type Drawing OptionsBit WindowWord Window• To draw the object, click a point in the editing area.• The sizes of these objects are fixed.Bit PartWord Part• Choose a movement type, such as [Fixed], [XY], [Line],or [Route].• Draw a line or route method, similar to a line ormultiline figure respectively.• The sizes of these objects are fixed, but the line androute types are customizable.Bar GraphPie GraphMeter GraphTrend GraphLogging Trend GraphScatter GraphDraw the object in the editing area or click the editingarea to insert the object in its default size.Closed Graph • Choose a graph type: Ellipse or Polygon.• Draw the closed graph, based on the ellipse orpolygon-type you selected. When drawing apolygon-type closed graph, click multiple points todraw the polygon then double-click the drawing tocomplete it.History Alarm ViewerDatalistLogging ViewerAlarm NavigatorMemoPadExplorerDatalist EditorFile Recipe EditorPDF ViewerVNC Viewer• Draw the object in the editing area or click the editingarea to insert the object in its default size.• The size of the Logging Viewer or Datalist is fixed.4 When you are finished editing properties, click [OK]. To change the properties of an object, doubleclick it.2. Project Development2-58Note• The following table describes limits when creating objects.Type LimitHistory Alarm Viewer 1: You can insert only one object per screen.Logging ViewerAlarm NavigatorBit Window 8 (16 for iXP series): There is no limit foroverlapping windows. Word WindowMemoPad 1: You can insert only one object per screen.Recipe Navigator • 1 for basic recipe• 1 for file recipe• You can choose the recipe type in theproperties window.• If you exceed the limit, an error will occurwhen transferring the project to a panel.Datalist Editor 1: You can insert only one object per screen.File Recipe EditorFigure and other objects Unlimited• An object cannot be created when:- It is inserted in a Part screen- A Window object is inserted into a Window screen- One of the following objects is already on the screen:Alarm Viewer, Logging Viewer, Alarm Navigator, Logging Trend Graph, Datalist Editor, File RecipeEditor, MemoPad, PDF Viewer, VNC Viewer objectInserting Objects from the Object LibraryYou can insert figures or objects from the Object Library. For more information about libraries, refer to<2.4 Managing Libraries>.To insert images from the Graphic Library:1 Click [VIEW] ► [Object Library].2. Project Development2-592 In the Object Library pane, click a desired tab, and then click an object category.3 In the Object List, drag and drop an object into the editing area.4 Double-click the object and change the properties if necessary.5 When you are finished changing properties, click [OK].2. Project Development2-60Editing ObjectsLearn how to edit objects that you have inserted into a project.Selecting ObjectsYou can move, resize, copy, paste, or delete objects, or adjust the object properties after makingselections. XP-Builder provides several options to help users select the on-screen components moreefficiently.Basic Selections You can select an object on the screen by clicking on it. To select multiple objects, drag the pointer over the objects on the screen, or press and hold the Ctrlor Shift key while clicking the objects.- If you drag the pointer to the right and downwards, only the objects which are completely coveredby the rectangle will be selected.- If you drag the pointer to the left and upwards, the objects in the rectangle and other objectspartially covered by the rectangle are selected together. To select all of the objects on a screen at once, click [EDIT] ► [Select All], or press “Ctrl+A.”2. Project Development2-61NoteInside a selection, you can decide the primary object by clicking one of theselected objects while pressing the Ctrl key.When you arrange a selection of multiple objects, the objects are aligned basedon the position of the primary object in the selection.Selecting Overlapping ObjectsTo select one of the overlapping objects, right-click the front object while pressing the Ctrl key. Thencontinue right-clicking while pressing control to cycle through the selection of objects individually fromfront to back.Note• When you cycle through the selection of overlapping objects in a group, the cycle takes place onlywithin the boundary of the group.• To select an object that is hidden behind another object or to select an overlapping area betweenmultiple objects, press the Alt key while you drag the pointer to make a selection.• When you select an object that is overlapped by another object, the selection is maintained whenyou click on the overlapped area.2. Project Development2-62Canceling a SelectionTo cancel a selection, click an empty area on the screen, or press and hold the Alt or Shift key whileclicking anywhere on the screen.Grouping and Ungrouping ObjectsYou can edit multiple objects more easily by grouping them first.To group objects:1 Select multiple objects.2 Right-click the selection and click [Group].To ungroup objects:1 Select a group.2 Right-click the selection and click [Ungroup].2. Project Development2-63Note• To select an object inside a group, click the object for 0.5 seconds. A selection ismade when you release the mouse button.• After selecting an object in a group, you can click and select other objects inthe same group.Locking and Unlocking ObjectsYou can lock or unlock objects to enable or disable the selection.To lock objects:1 Select the objects to lock.2 Right-click the selection and select 'Select Lock' from the menu.2. Project Development2-64To unlock objects:1 Right-click the locked object(s).2 Select 'Release Select Lock' from the menu.Note To disable selection lock for all objects and figures on the screen, on the mainmenu, click [EDIT] ► [Release Selection Lock of All Objects and Figures onScreen.2. Project Development2-65 You can enable or disable the selection lock from the Data Viewer by clickingthe lock icon on the right side of the object information. You can lock or unlock a group but not the individual objects inside a group.Ungroup the objects to lock or unlock the individual objects in a group.Copying Multiple ObjectsYou can use the Multicopy function to insert multiple objects with the same properties.1 Select multiple objects.NoteYou can copy and paste different objects at the same time.2 Click [EDIT] ► [Multi Copy].3 Specify the following properties as desired: 2. Project Development2-66Type DescriptionCopy No. Set how many objects to paste by specifying the number of rows andcolumns of the new objects. The number of rows and columns cannotexceed the maximum number displayed on the screen. Also, this settingcannot be applied if “Screen Limit Check on Object/Figure’s Editing” ischecked under [TOOL] ► [Option] ► [Edit Option].Space Set the vertical and horizontal space between each object.Copy Direction Set the pasting direction of new objects.Caption Copy - Do Not Copy: The object is copied, but only the address is copied, andthe text string is not used.- Copy: The address of the object increases as much as the [Offset]value, and the text string is copied ad it is witout increasing.- Multi Copy: Text is also copied with increment values. For example, itworks as follows.• If the currently selected object’s text string is a direct text.Creates and copies a text string that has increased as much as[Offset] in the entered text string.(Ex. If the string is “Bit 1” and [Offset] is 1, the string is createdand copied in order of “Bit 2” and then “Bit 3”.)• If the text string of currently selected object is a text table: Theselected text table: The selected text number is coped byincreasing [Offset].(Ex. After selecting the string number 1, if [Offset] is 1, thenumber is copied by incrementing each of 2, 3, 4…)2. Project Development2-67Type DescriptionComment Copy Set to copy the description of an object.Offset Set an offset to specify the new device addresses automatically.Apply All Set to apply the offset number to every object.Address Incrementone by oneApply a different offset to each device. If you want to paste objects withdifferent addresses, set the offset number manually.4 Click [OK].Note• If the number of input columns or rows exceeds the maximum number, the objects cannot becopied.• You cannot copy tags with the Multicopy function.2. Project Development2-68Arranging ObjectsYou can arrange objects or change the drawing order in the editing area. The last object created is shownat the top level. When you arrange a selection of multiple objects, the objects are aligned based on theposition of the primary object in the selection.To arrange objects:1 Select multiple objects on the screen.2 Right-click the selection.3 Click [Align] and select an alignment option.Note• You cannot align the individual objects in a group. Right-click the grouped objects and click[Ungroup] before aligning the objects on the screen.• You can also move all of the objects to the center of the editing area. Select the objects to move,and then click [EDIT] ► [Center in Page] ► [Horizontal] or [Vertical].2. Project Development2-69To change the drawing order:1 Right-click an object.2 Click [Order] and select an order option. The object order is changed.Rotating ObjectsYou can rotate or flip objects in a desired direction.To rotate objects:1 Right-click an object.2. Project Development2-702 Click [Rotate or Flip] and select a rotation or flip option. The object is rotated or flipped.Object types Availability for Rotation and FlippingSwitches (5 types) Supports rotation and flipping. Captions cannot be flipped.Lamps (3 types) Images and captions can be rotated. Captions cannot be flipped.Clock Images and the time display can be rotated. The time display cannotbe flipped.Message objects(2 types)Background images and messages can be rotated. Messages cannot beflipped.Text and numericobjectsBackground images and numeric characters can be rotated. Numericcharacters cannot be flipped.Part and windowobjectsSupports neither rotation nor flipping.Animation objects Supports neither rotation nor flipping.Graph objects(9types)Background images can be rotated, but the direction of the graph doesnot support rotation or flipping.2. Project Development2-71Object types Availability for Rotation and FlippingHistory alarmviewer, data list,alarm navigator,memo pad, filerecipe editor, datalist editor, PDFviewer, VNCviewerSupports neither rotation nor flipping.Note• The XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE models do not support font rotation.Resizing or Relocating ObjectsYou can resize or relocate objects.To resize or move objects:1 Right-click an object.2 Click [Position/Scale Change].2. Project Development2-723 Set values for a new location or size. You can move an object to a precise position or specify its size.Note• To move an object by one pixel, select an object, and then press the desiredarrow keys.• To resize an object by single pixel increments/decrements, press the desiredarrow keys while pressing the Shift key.• You can configure a preset value (number of pixels) for moving and resizingobject. Go to [TOOL] ► [Option] ► [Edit Option], adjust Move/ResizePixel(X) and Move/Resize Pixel(Y)] values, and then:- To move an object by the preset number of pixels, press the desired arrowkeys while pressing the Ctrl key.- To resize an object by the preset number of pixels, press the desired arrowkeys while pressing the Ctrl and Shift keys.• To resize an object while maintaining a fixed center point, hold the Ctrl keywhile resizing an object.• To resize an object while maintaining the same ratio, hold the Shift key whileresizing an object.• Certain objects, such as Logging Viewer, Datalist, and Window/Part objects donot support resizing. They are provided by the system in fixed sizes.4 Click [OK].2. Project Development2-73To resize multiple objects:1 Select the objects to resize.2 Click [EDIT] ► [Make Same Size] ► [Width], [Height], or [Both]. The objects are all resized in the same way.2. Project Development2-74To space objects evenly:1 Select multiple objects.2 Click [Edit] ► [Space Evenly] ► [Across] or [Down]. The objects are all spaced evenly.2. Project Development2-75Setting Viewing OptionsYou can set viewing options as described in the following table:Type DescriptionThumbnail • You can show all screens in a project on a single screen. Double-click ascreen to select it.• Click [VIEW] ► [Screen Thumbnails].Pan Window • You can view the current screen in a birds-eye view and scroll through thescreens.• Click [VIEW] ► [Pan Window].Zooming • You can zoom in or out on the current screen.• Click the magnifier icon on the toolbar. You can also enter a magnificationpercentage in the toolbar or select one of the presets (50%-400%) in thedropdown list.2. Project Development2-76Type DescriptionProperty Viewer • You can view and edit information about windows, figures, or objects on thecurrent screen without opening a dialog box.• Click [VIEW] ► [Property Viewer], then select an object or screen.You can also set options for the editing area, as described in the following table:Type DescriptionRuler • To show or hide the ruler, click [VIEW] ► [Ruler].• Scales are displayed in pixels.Grid Setting • You can move and arrange objects conveniently with the grids in the editingarea.2. Project Development2-77Type Description• To show or hide gridlines, click [VIEW] ► [Grid].• You can set the color, width, and height of the dots on the grid. To changethe settings, click [VIEW] ► [Grid Setting].• You can also change settings to display the dots over or below the objectsfrom the Grid Setting.• To allow an object to snap to the nearest intersection of lines in the gridwhile moving or resizing it, click [EDIT] ► [Snap to grid].• To disable or enable the Snap to grid function during moving or resizing anobject, press the Alt key while moving or resizing an object.Margin Line • The margin line is the boundary of the editing area.• To show or hide the lines, click [VIEW] ► [Margin Line].• To set the margin sizes, click [TOOL] ► [Option], and then select EditOption.2. Project Development2-78Type DescriptionHelp Line • The help line is used as a reference when you draw or arrange objects on thescreen.• To show or hide the help lines, click [VIEW] ► [Help Line].• To draw help lines, move the pointer to the border of the screen frame, andthen drag the line to the editing area.• To lock or unlock the help lines, right-click the line and then click [Help Line]► [Lock Help Line].• To delete a help line, right-click the line and then select [Help Line] ►[Delete Help Line].• To allow an object to be attached to the help lines while moving or resizingit, click [EDIT] ► [Glue to Help Line]. 2. Project Development2-79Type DescriptionGuide line • When you move an object on the screen, the guidelines are displayed toprovide additional guidance about the object’s position in relation to theobject’s previous position or the position of other objects on the screen. Theguidelines are displayed when the moving object and an existing object arealigned in the center, edge, intersection, etc.• To show or hide the guidelines, click [VIEW] ► [Guide Line].Show/Hide ObjectID• Every object has an ID which makes the object unique.• To show or hide an object’s ID, click [VIEW] ► [Show/hide Object ID].• You can determine the type of object by its object ID. For example, an ID thatbegins with “SD” refers to a Word Switch.Show/Hide ObjectAddress• To show or hide an object’s address, click [VIEW] ► [Show/hide ObjectAddress]. If multiple addresses exist, they will be displayed together.Show/Hide ObjectStatus• To show or hide an object’s status, click [VIEW] ► [Show/hide ObjectOn/Off].2. Project Development2-80Type Description• An object with a bit or word address can appear differently depending on itsOn/Off state or the preset condition. You can preview the states beforetransferring the data to an XGT Panel. Data Viewer • The Data Viewer shows object type, ID, and location information, along withselection lock status. You can copy, cut, and paste items in the Data Viewerwindow, or enable or disable selection lock by clicking the lock icon on theright side of the object information.• To open the Data Viewer, click [VIEW] ► [Data Viewer].• Grouped objects are shown as a “Group,” and their sizes are shown as themaximum boundaries.• A dropdown filter is provided at the bottom of the Data Viewer pane to allowyou to view objects by type (all, figure, or object).2. Project Development2-81Registering Figures/ObjectsThis function saves Figure and Object settings that are used often to enable users to recreate them easily.1 Open a Figure or Object.2 Change the Figure or Object based on the user settings.3 Register as a new Figure/Object.The newly made bit switch will have the same properties as the registered bit switch.2. Project Development2-82Draw from Figure to ObjectThis function uses the drawing sequence of “Draw from Figure to Object” to make figures consistent withthe drawing sequence of the XGT panel. This enables the device and editor screens to be displayed in thesame way.1 Register the object on the screen.2 Register the figure at the top of the object.3 Click [VIEW] – [Draw from Figure to Object].4 Confirm that the figure is placed below the object as shown in the following screenshot.2. Project Development2-83Note• The Draw from Shape (Figure) to Object function enables the same drawing sequence to be usedon the HMI device. It allows users to preview how the object will be displayed on the HMI device.• When the Draw from Figure to Object function is used, the Selection and the SendForward/Backward functions do not operate properly. This occurs because the order of creationand the order of display do match. To select a figure that is in the background when using thisfunction, right-click it while pressing the Ctrl key.Deleting an Object/ObjectsTo delete an object or multiple objects, click an object, or drag the pointer over multiple objects to makea selection, and then press the Delete key on the keyboard.You can also right-click the selection, and then click [Delete].2. Project Development2-84Undoing and Redoing a ChangeTo undo the changes, click [EDIT] ► [Undo] and select the last change made, or press CTRL+ Z.The most recent change is canceled.To redo the changes, click [EDIT] ► [Redo] and select the last change that has been undone, or pressCTRL+ Y.Object & Text FormatYou can change the text properties of an object or several objects in a batch.The following text formats can be changed:Note• In the case of 5 switches and Bit lamps, both text properties corresponding to On / Off are applied.• For Word lamps / N-State lamps, all text properties corresponding to the number of registeredstatus / condition statements apply.• For Clock / History Alarm Viewer / Datalist / Logging Viewer / Datalist Editor / File Recipe Editor, itapplies to the properties of the text item. However, since the object does not have [VerticalAlignment], its properties are not applied.• The text properties set in [Conditional Statement] are not applied. It is applied to text formatting,and conditional property is not applied. For example, Numeric Display / Numeric Input only appliesto the property for the text item.• For Bit Message / Word Messages, only the size and alignment are applied. However, if [ Changeproperty selected in text table] is set, the item set in the toolbar is applied.2. Project Development2-85Creating Screen Tap GroupsYou can split the editing area horizontally or vertically to create new tab groups. It helps you efficientlyedit complicated projects composed of many screens. Group and arrange the tabs and switch betweenthe screens that belong to the same group.On a project with multiple screens, right-click one of the tabs and select [New Horizontal Tab group] or[New Vertical Tab group], and then add more tabs if necessary.Group and arrange the tabs and switch between the screens that belong to the same group.Note• The screen tab group feature allows you to drag and drop objects. You can duplicate an object bydragging it from a screen in one tab group window and dropping it on a screen in another.• On the newly opened windows, drag and drop the tabs into different groups, or right-click the tabsand select desired options to edit or arrange the screen for each group.2. Project Development2-86Exporting and Importing FontsWhen editing a project on a PC after receiving it from the XGT panel, the characters may not bedisplayed properly if the font used in the project is not installed on the PC. In this case, you can exportthe font from the project and import (install) it to the PC to solve the problem.To export a font and install it on a PC:1 Click [TOOL] ► [Export Font].2 Choose the path and folder to save the font file, and then click [OK].3 Click [TOOL] ► [Install Font].4 Select the folder where the font file is saved, and then click [OK].2. Project Development2-87Exporting and Importing ScreensThe screen exporting and importing functions are used to save the current screen and the text tables,user images as well as tag elements that are related to the screen as a file or to retrieve it from anotherXP-Builder project on another PC.The screen export procedure is as follows.1 Select the screen(s) to export from the screen tree and click the right mouse button. Then, select[Export] from the menu.2 In the dialog box, select the folder to save the file in. Then, enter the file name and click [Save]. When the screen is exported, the following elements are also exported.Item DescriptionScreen Data All objects and figures used on the screenText Tables Text tables used by the objects on the screenTags Tags used by the objects on the screenUser Images User images used by the objects and figures on the screenNoteThe file extension for screen export files is “.xscr.”2. Project Development2-88To import a screen:1 Right-click the screen you want to import from the screen tree and select [Import] from the menu.2 Click the file selection button at the top of the [Import] screen to select the file to import (as shownin the screenshot below).3 The list of screens in the file to be imported is displayed in the preview window at the left side of thewindow.4 Select a screen to add from the list on the left side of the window and click [Add].5 The added screen is displayed in the grid on the right side of the window as shown in the screenshotbelow.2. Project Development2-896 Change the value of the screen number, the name, the tag, and the text table as required.7 Click [OK] and then confirm that the selected screen and related text tables and tags are successfullyadded to the project.2. Project Development2-90Note• The pop-up message shown below is displayed when the same file number exists on the screen or iftwo or more screens have the same screen numbers in the grid.• Drag (AutoFill) the reference row from the grid to copy the screen data. The screen numberincreases by 1 if it is dragged down and decreases by 1 if it is dragged up based on the value of thereference row.2. Project Development2-91Import Screen Dialog BoxThis section contains more information about the screen import dialog box.Type DescriptionSelect File Select a file to import (.xscr).Preview Screen Display the screen list of the selected file.Add Select a screen to add to the project and click "Add" to add the screen data tothe grid on the right side of the window.List Mode Displays screen data as text if list mode is checked.Screen Number Displays the screen number of a screen added using the [Add] button. Thescreen can be edited and a number from 1 to 65534 can be entered.Screen Name Displays the screen name of a screen added using the [Add] button. Thescreen name can be edited.Screen Type Displays the screen type of a screen added using the [Add] button. The screentype cannot be edited.Screen Switch Offset Change the screen number of the screen change switch when a screen isadded to the project. A number from 0-65,534 can be added to the originalscreen number. The screen switch offset value can be edited.OK Add a screen to the grid in the project by clicking [OK].Cancel Cancel any changes to the project by clicking [Cancel].2. Project Development2-92Screen Import Option Dialog Box:Type DescriptionTag NameDuplicatedThis option is used when an existing tag in the project has the same name as anew tag to be added to the screen. There are two options available, [Overwrite]and [Skip]. The default is [Overwrite].ImageCategory/NameDuplicatedThis option is used when an image category or image name is duplicated in theproject. There are two options available: [Overwrite] or [Skip]. The defaultoption is [Overwrite].Text Table NameDuplicatedThis option is used when a duplicate text table name and number matches atable in the project. There are two options available: [Overwrite] or [Skip]. Thedefault option is [Overwrite].It is added when items used in keyword editing and character strings arechanged.Object/Figure onDifferent ScreenResolutionThis option is used to determine if the objects and figures on the screen will bescaled to fit the current project. Alternatively, they will retain their currentformat to ensure the resolution of the screen to be added is different from theresolution of the project. There are two options available, [Scale] and [Skip]. Thedefault is [Scale].Import Default Path Click to select the default location of imported files.2. Project Development2-93Replace Tag/Text Table Dialog Box:Type DescriptionTag • This function replaces a part of a tag name with a new character string whena screen is imported. The following example shows a tag change. Thereplacement character string is enclosed between “#” and “#”. The objectsthat use the tag are registered on the screen to be exported.[Setting Export Projects]• If “Basic” is entered as the replacement character string, the tag names will bechanged as shown below. It shows that “#LOC#” is replaced by “Basic”. If thesame group name and number exist on the screen, a new tag is created andadded.[Import Results]Text Table • This function replaces a part of the character strings in the text table with anew character string when a screen is imported. The following example shows 2. Project Development2-94Type Descriptionthe process of changing a text table. The replacement character string isenclosed between “#”and “#”.The objects using the text table are registeredon the screen to be exported.[Setting Export Projects]• If “01” is entered as the replacement character string, the tag names will bechanged as shown below. It shows that “#NO#” is replaced with “01”. If thesame text table name and number exists, a new text table item is created andadded.[Import Results]Printing a ProjectYou can save detailed project information in an MS Excel file format for documentation and reviewing.To save the project information in an MS Excel file:1 Click [PROJECT] ► [Project Print].2. Project Development2-952 In the Content tab, select the items to include.NoteIn the Selected Print Items pane, you can rearrange the order of each selected item.3 In the Header/Footer tab, specify options for a header or footer, and then click [OK]. 2. Project Development2-96 An MS Excel file including the selected project data opens on the computer screen automatically.2. Project Development2-97Renaming a Tag to add as a New TagYou can rename a tag that is already on the screen and add it as a new tag.To rename a tag and add it as a new tag:1 Place an object, register a tag with a name (‘TagOld’), and assign it to a device in the object.2 Click [TOOL] ▶ [Replace Tag Name and Register as a New Tag].3 In the pop-up window, enter the tag name to search and a new name to replace it.2. Project Development2-98Note• By default, the newly registered tag is added to the same tag group as the one the originaltag belongs to. You can select a different tag group, or create a new tag group and select it.• By default, the tag replacement range is set as the entire project. You can click “Replace At”to specify the range.• The new tag name must be in a valid format. The following message will be displayed if thetag name is missing, if the first character is a number, or if the tag name contains controlcharacters or device addresses.• If the tag name already exists, the following message will be displayed. You can click [Yes] toreplace the existing tag, or [No] to cancel. Note that the tag will not be replaced even if youclick [Yes] if the device types are different for the new and existing tags.4 Click [Yes]. The new tag name (‘TagNew’) is listed in the properties window, and the object’s tag namehas been changed to ‘TagNew.’2. Project Development2-99Setting HW Key for Handy on ScreenThe handy model HMI (example: iXP2H) provides an object for connecting to the operation of anexternal mounted button or lamp and an external object setting window docked on the screen. Thefollowing describes how to set up an external object that works only on the screen. Refer to <2.2.2.10Changing Extended Device Settings> in the project properties for setting the globally operatingexternal object.Setting an external object to work on the screen:1 [Base Screen] ▶ Double-click [Insert Base Screen]If the external object docking window appears on the right side of the screen, click on the title andthe following setting window appears.Then click the Auto hide button to hide the setting window on the right of the screen..2 Double-click the circular button on the docking window to add an external object.You can only add external multiple switches within the screen, but you can also add external lamps inthe global window. For detailed object attributes and settings, refer to the corresponding objectdescription.2. Project Development2-1003 After adding an object to the Data Viewer window it is shown as follows:4 Select the object to delete from the external object setting window and click Delete button to deletethe object.The object can be deleted from the Data Viewer window can be deleted using the same method.2. Project Development2-1015 In the External Object Settings window, select the object to change and then click or double-clickChange.If the object's attribute box appears, change the properties and click OK.You can change the properties in the Data Viewer window in the same way as before.Note• The real object that is edited is not shown on the actual screen so there may be some discrepancyin the changes.The following operations cannot be edited:.Move / resize / drag / drop, change position and size, copy / cut / paste to same size / screencentering / spacing equally2. Project Development2-1022.4 Managing LibrariesManaging Graphic LibrariesLearn how to manage image libraries. Both the system and user image libraries can be managed, butonly the user image library can be edited.Type DescriptionSystem Graphic Library About 8,000 images in 40 categories are included in the SystemGraphic Library. This library cannot be edited.You can select raster (256-color) or vector (65,535-color) images,depending on the color capabilities of the XGT Panels you are using.The following table describes characteristics of raster and vectorimages.Type DescriptionRaster Displayed in pixels as a bitmap image.Distorts when you zoom in or out.If used as a background image in an object, thepattern and color cannot be changed.Vector Expressed by connected lines.Not distorted when you zoom in or out.Not recommended to use a vector image as abackground image of an object. Excessive use ofvector images slows down the panel operationspeed.User Graphic Library You can register, modify or delete images. The images are saved in thecurrent project and not in the XP-Builder program. You can import aUser Graphic Library from another project or export it from the currentproject to use in other projects.2. Project Development2-103To open the Graphic Library pane, click [VIEW] ► [Graphic Library]. The Graphic Library pane will appear,as shown in the following image:In the Graphic Library pane, you can drag and drop an image into the editing area.Note• A tooltip (max 320 x 320 px.) is displayed to show the enlarged image, along with its full name, filesize, and image size, when you move the mouse pointer over the images in the library.• Dropdown filters are provided at the top of the Graphic Library pane to allow you to easily find thespecific images that you are looking for. You can set the image category and sub-category, imagecolor, image type (vector or raster), colors (All, 256, 65536), and on/off status of the image forviewing.2. Project Development2-104• You can also zoom in or out of images by selecting one of the magnification presets in thedropdown list.• Vector images maintain their shape even if you change their size. Raster images may be distorted ifyou enlarge or reduce their size.• When you drag an image to the editing area, it is created in its default size. The default sizes ofimages are variable.Creating a User Graphic LibraryYou can create your own user image library.To create a library:1 In the Graphic Library pane, click the User tab.2. Project Development2-1052 Enter the name of the library and click . A new image category will be created.3 Right-click an empty area in the Graphic Library pane, and then select [Insert Image].4 Select the image files in the browsing window, and then click [Open]. Images have been added to the new graphic library.2. Project Development2-106Note You can also drag the image from the browsing window and drop it to the User Graphic Librarypane. To delete an image, right-click an image and then click [Delete Image].Note• The WMF format is used only in XP-Builder. You can draw figures in XP-Builder and directly add it toa user graphic library in WMF image format. WMF images are not distorted when you resize them.To add WMF (vector) figures to a library:1. In the editing area, right-click a figure to save it.2. Click [Insert the selected shapes to active graphic library]. The image is added to the library in WMF format.• Figures filled with patterns #3-41 and figures with textures cannot be inserted to a user graphiclibrary in WMF format.• You cannot save WMF images as image files.2. Project Development2-107Exporting a User Graphic LibraryYou can share libraries between projects.To export your user object library after creating it:1 In the Graphic Library pane, click the User tab.2 Select a library to export from the drop-down list and click or right-click an empty area in theGraphic Library pane and click [Export].3 Enter a name for the file and set the file destination.4 Click [Save].Note• The exported library is saved as an .xpg file.• If there are no images in the library, you cannot export the graphic library.2. Project Development2-108Importing a User Graphic LibraryYou can either import a library into the project as a new library or you can import images into an existinguser graphic library.To import a new library:1 In the Graphic Library pane, click the User tab.2 Click .3 Select an .xpg file and click [Open]. You can also select multiple files to add. The new library will be added to the Graphic Library List.2. Project Development2-109To import images into an existing user library:1 In the Graphic Library pane, click a user graphic library name.2 In the Graphic Library pane, right-click an empty area, and then click [Insert Image].3 Select image files and click [Open]. The selected images will be added to your user library.NoteIf an image file with the same name exists in the graphic library, a pop-up window is displayed to askyou for a new file name. Enter a new name and click [OK] to proceed.2. Project Development2-110Editing a User Graphic LibraryTo change the name of a library:1 Select a library from the drop-down list.2. Project Development2-1112 Enter a new name, and then click to save it. Graphic library “Library_001” has changed to “Library_001A.”Note• User graphic libraries are sorted in ascending order by name.• The name of a system graphic library cannot be changed.• Supported image types include BMP, JPEG, GIF, WMF, TGA, PNG, TIF, ICO, and PCX.• Users can create a maximum of 2047 categories, from category number 2049 to 4095.An error message is displayed if you try to create categories exceeding the limit.• Each category can have 500 images. An error message is displayed if you try to addmore images to a category exceeding the limit.2. Project Development2-112To delete a library:1 In the Graphic Library pane, click the User tab.2 Select a library from the drop-down list and click .Applying Options to the ImagesSeveral options are available when editing, such as setting the transparency value of images and savingthem in WMF format so that they maintain resolution when enlarged.To apply changes to an image, right-click it and select from the following options.Functions DescriptionAs BackgroundImageSet the image as the background image of the current screen.2. Project Development2-113Functions DescriptionTo set an image as a background:1. Select a category from the Graphic Library.2. Right-click an image and click [As Background Image].For more information about specifying background images, refer to<2.3.2.4 Changing Screen Properties>.To remove a background image:1. Right-click the image that is currently set as the background image.2. Click [Screen Property] ► [Background].3. Clear the checkbox next to Use BG Image, and then click [OK].Delete Deletes an image from the graphic library.Rename Changes an image name.2. Project Development2-114Functions DescriptionReplace Image Replaces an existing image with a new image file selected by the user.Save as File Exports an image to save it as a file.ApplyTransparentColorApplies a transparent color to the image (see the following procedure).To set the transparency of the image and apply it to XP-Builder:1. Open an image in Paint and set the RGB color properties of the part of theimage to 255, 0, 255, to make it transparent.2. Register the image in the Graphic library.3. Right-click the image and click [Apply Transparent Color].4. Apply the image to the editing area to view the transparency settings.2. Project Development2-115Functions DescriptionSelectTransparentColorSet the transparency value of an existing color in the image (see the followingprocedure).To set the transparency of an existing image:1. Right-click an image and click [Select Transparent Color].2. Select the part of the image that you want to make transparent, and then click[OK]. Then, the RGB value for the transparent color will be changed.Dither Image to Change the color value of the image to 256 colors to reduce the size of the file.2. Project Development2-116Functions Description256 ColorsTo dither the image to 256 colors:1. Add the image to the User graphic library.2. Right-click an image and click [Dither Image to 256 Colors].3. Click [OK].NoteOnce an image is dithered, its color value cannot be restored.Note• The default transparent color is RGB (255, 0, 255).• Setting a transparent color is not a default option.• You can select multiple images and apply transparency to them simultaneously if the imageproperties are the same. If the image formats are different or if one of the images has atransparency already applied, the function will not work.• You can use the dithering function only in projects for color mode panels. After TGA and JPG filesare dithered, they are saved as BMP files.• The image dithering function substitutes colors to the 256 color palette to reduce the image sizeand number of colors.2. Project Development2-117Managing Object LibrariesLearn how to manage object libraries. Both the system and user object libraries can be managed, butonly user object libraries can be edited. For more information about inserting or editing objects, refer to<2.3.4.4 Inserting Objects from the Object Library> and <2.3.5 Editing Objects>.Type DescriptionSystem Object Library Includes seven categories: Alarm and Logging, Keypad, Lamp,Pushdown_Switch, Rotary_Switch, Slide_Switch, Toggle_Switch. The systemobjects cannot be edited.User Object Library You can register, modify or delete objects. The objects are saved in thecurrent project and not in the XP-Builder program. You can import a userobject library from another project or export it from the current project touse in other projects.To open the Object Library pane, click [VIEW] ► [Object Library]. The Object Library pane will appear, asshown in the following image:Note• A dropdown filter is provided at the top of the Object Library pane to allow you to find specificobjects you are looking for. Select an object category to view.• You can also zoom in or out of object images by selecting one of the magnification presets from2. Project Development2-118the dropdown list.• A tooltip is displayed to show the object information and the object is magnified for a detailed viewwhen you move the mouse cursor over images in the library.• After inserting an object on the screen, you can double-click it, select it, and press the ENTER key, orright-click it and select [Object Property] to modify the object properties.• When you drag an object to the editing area, the object is created at the default size. The defaultsizes of objects vary.Creating a User Object LibraryTo create a user library:1 In the Object Library pane, click the User tab.2 Enter a category name and click . A new object category will be created.2. Project Development2-1193 Drag objects from the editing area to the Object Library pane. You can select multiple objects/figuresand register them as one object.4 Right-click the newly added object and select [Rename] to change the name of the object.2. Project Development2-120NoteTo delete objects, right-click an object and then click [Delete]. To delete all objects, right-click anempty area in the Object Library pane, and then click [Delete All Objects].Exporting a User Object LibraryTo export the user object library after creating it:1 In the Object Library pane, click the User tab.2. Project Development2-1212 Select a library to export from the drop-down list and click .3 Enter a name for the file and set the file destination.4 Click [Save].Note• The exported library is saved as an .xpo file.• You can also export the current category (library) by right-clicking an empty area in the ObjectLibrary pane, and then clicking [Export].2. Project Development2-122Importing a User Object LibraryYou can either import a library into a project as a new library or you can import objects into an existinguser object library.To import a new library:1 In the Object Library pane, click the User tab.2 Click .3 Select an .xpo file and click [Open]. You can also select multiple files to add.2. Project Development2-123 The new library will be added to the Object Library List.To import objects into an existing library:1 In the Object Library pane, click a user object library name.2 In the Object Library pane, right-click an empty area, and then click [Import].3 Select an .xpo file and click [Open]. The objects in the library file you selected will be added to theexisting library.Note• Users can create a maximum of 57,343 categories, from category number 8,193 to 65,535. An errormessage is displayed if you try to create categories exceeding the limit.• Each category can have 500 images. An error message is displayed if you try to add more images to 2. Project Development2-124a category exceeding the limit.• User object libraries and the objects in the library are sorted by names in ascending order when youadd or rename a library.Editing a User Object LibraryTo change the name of the library:1 Select a library from the drop-down list.2 Enter a new name, and then click to save it. Object library “object08195” has changed to “Library_002.”To delete a library:1 In the Object Library pane, click the User tab.2. Project Development2-1252 Select a library from the drop-down list and click .2. Project Development2-1262.5 Connecting ControllersConfigure the communication settings for the XGT Panel and controller. To connect an XGT Panel to thecontroller, use an Ethernet connection and the serial port. In the serial ports, there are three connectionmethods: RS232C, RS485, and RS422. This section describes how to set the communication method. Formore details about XGT Panel settings, refer to <2.2.2.2 Changing XGT Panel Settings>.Connecting via an Ethernet CableConnect the XGT Panel to the controller with an Ethernet cable.To set the configure Ethernet options:1 Click [COMMON] ► [Project Property Setting] ► [XGT Panel Settings].2 Select the XGT Panel series and model name.3 Set the controller manufacturer and the controller model (Product). Select a product with “Ethernet”at the end of the controller name.2. Project Development2-1274 Set the protocol to Ethernet.5 Select Detail Settings, configure the IP settings, and click [OK].6 Set the additional connection properties in the Connection Property section and click [OK].2. Project Development2-128Connecting via a Serial PortConnect the XGT Panel to the controller via a serial port. You can select RS232C, RS485, or RS422.Using RS232C1 Click [COMMON] ► [Project Property Setting] ► [XGT Panel Settings].2 Select the XGT Panel series and model name.3 Set the controller manufacturer and the controller model (Product). Select a product with “LINK” atthe end of the controller name.4 Set the protocol to RS232C and select a serial port.2. Project Development2-1295 Select Detail Settings, configure the properties, and click [OK].Note• The baud rate must match the setting in the XGT Panel. To change the baud rate on theXGT Panel, tap and hold the screen to access the menu. Then, tap [PLC Information],select a driver from the Driver list, tap [Settings], and set the baud rate.• Station stands for the station ID of the PLC. HMI station number is used only in N:1communication settings.6 Set the additional connection properties and click [OK].2. Project Development2-130Using RS485/RS4221 Click [COMMON] ► [Project Property Setting] ► [XGT Panel Settings].2 Select the XGT Panel series and model name.3 Set the controller manufacturer and the controller model (Product). Select a product with “LINK” atthe end of the controller name.4 Set the protocol to RS485 or RS422 and select a serial port.5 Select Detail Settings, configure the properties, and click [OK].2. Project Development2-131Note• The baud rate must match the setting in the XGT Panel. To change the baud rate on theXGT Panel, tap and hold the screen to access the menu. Then, tap [PLC Information],select a driver from the Driver list, tap [Settings], and set the baud rate.• Station stands for the station ID of the PLC. HMI station number is used only in N:1communication settings.6 Set the additional connection properties and click [OK].2. Project Development2-1322.6 Simulating & DebuggingAfter developing an interface, it is a good idea to test it before putting it to use. XP-Builder offersmultiple ways to check the integrity of your data, including an interface simulator, data check and devicemap functions, and a script cross-reference that can help you debug your program.Simulating an InterfaceThe simulator provided in XP-Builder allows you to verify the functionality and appearance of yourinterface before you transfer it to an XGT Panel. By testing your project, you can correct errors and verifysystem operations and responses in advance.To run the simulator:1 Click [Tool] ► [Simulation].Note• Except for the menu and title, the simulation window will use the same resolution aswhen it is exported to an XGT Panel.• Only one simulator can be run at a time. If you are running the simulator, you cannotexecute another one.• The size of simulator window may vary according to the set XGT Panel size.• Click and move the Simulation window borders to control screen size. Note that thedisplay resolution remains the same and may make margins.2. Project Development2-133• The OPC UA Client and OMRON NX/NJ Ethernet/IP do not support simulators.2 Verify operations by clicking or selecting objects and activating functions in the interface. As shownin the following example, you can virtually input the value and review the operation via thesimulation. The simulator interface includes the following functions:Function DescriptionFile Exit Ends the simulation and closes thewindow.Tool Virtual Device Start Monitors and controls a device forsimulation. For more information, refer 2. Project Development2-134Function Descriptionto <2.6.2 Inputting Simulated Data>.Screen Capture Captures an image of the currentscreen.Help XP simulator Information (A) Displays the current versioninformation.2. Project Development2-135Inputting Simulated DataLearn how to create the simulated data and change the values to check the process.Monitoring DevicesUse the simulator to generate sample data that you can use to monitor devices.1 Click [Tool] ► [Simulation].2 In the simulator, click [Tool] ► [Virtual Device Start]. Device lists with simulated data will appear.2. Project Development2-136Data Type Descriptiona Sets the type of screen and number of screens that you want tomonitor. All base screens with objects and window screens can beselected from the combo box, but you cannot monitor commondata devices. The simulator changes the display based on thenumber of screens you select.User Device List Sets the device value manually to simulate the project.Common Device List Displays a list of common data, such as History Alarms, Recipes,and Flow Alarms.Screen Device List Displays a list of all the edited objects in the base screen.Object Description Displays the object name of the device.Device Size Displays the size of the device: Bit, 16-bit (word), or 32-bit (doubleword).Device Addr. Displays the address of the device.Device Value Displays the value of the current device.Type of ConnectedPLCDisplays the controller type.Changing Device ValuesSet device information and change values in the User Device List. You can set bit devices to On or Offand manually enter device values for word devices. Values are applied to the simulator as soon as youchange them.2. Project Development2-137NoteTo use the XG5000 with the simulator, click the checkbox next to Use XG5000 simulator in the XGTPanel Settings.2. Project Development2-138Running a Data CheckThe data check allows you to locate and correct data errors before transferring a project to an XGT Panel.You can verify deleted image numbers, tags, display numbers, existing addresses, and errors unique toobjects or common items. For more information about the messages that are displayed during a datacheck, refer to <3. Error Messages>.To run a data check, click [Tool] ► [Data Check]. Error numbers and their descriptions will appear in theoutput window.NoteIf you close all the project screens and double-click on an item in the output window, you can activatescreens or objects that correspond to error messages, so that you can modify them. Refer to <3.1Resolving Error Codes Found in the Results Pane> for detailed information.2. Project Development2-139Viewing the Device MapThe Device Map allows you to view the locations, addresses, or tag names of devices in the project.To view the device map:1 Click [View] ► [Device Map].2 Click the drop-down list to select a device type (Bit or Word).2. Project Development2-1403 Enter a device address or click the keypad icon to the right of the device input area to specify adevice address.4 Item Descriptiona. Device Type Inputs a device type to search for (Bit or Word).b. Device Address Input a device address to search for and then press the Enterkey.c. Device Map Displays the device addresses in use.d. Device Reference Displays the currently selected device and its position in thedevice map.e. Address or Tag Tabs Displays information by address or by tag.f. Tag List Displays the tags registered to each device.2. Project Development2-141Evaluating Project Size (Memory Usage)When the current project data is transferred to an XGT Panel, the files are saved and transferred as .hmifiles. The size of an HMI file must not exceed the memory limit of the XGT Panel, so it is important toknow the size of the HMI files and components of the current project.To evaluate the project size:1 Create a project, as described in <2. Project Development>.2 Select [Tool] ► [Memory Statistics]. The memory size of each element is shown, including screensand common data.Note• The memory size of the screen element includes the sizes of figure and objects and does notinclude the sizes of images and fonts used on the screen. Image and font sizes show their sizes forthe entire project. If an image is used more than once in a project, the information of a single imageis transferred to the XGT Panel.• If the memory required for images, projects, sounds, or recipe data is quite large, you can set thestorage location for those files to an external drive that is connected to the XGT Panel.• Additional information includes the information of various drivers such as the communication drivermodule.2. Project Development2-142Finding and Replacing DevicesThis function allows you to locate the addresses of objects used in a project and, if necessary, relocatethem to a new address.Finding and Replacing Devices on the Active ScreenTo find and replace devices on the active screen:1 Click [Tool] ► [Find in Active Screen]. The object’s address is shown in the Find Device window.2 Click [Find Next] to find another object with the same address.3 To change the address of a device, click [Replace]. The Replace Device window will appear.4 Enter a new address in the Replace With field or click the keypad to the right of the field to specify adevice address.5 After entering the new device address, click [Close].Note• You can also click [Tool] ► [Replace in Active Screen] to directly access the Replace Device window.• By default, the Find function locates either device addresses or tags, based on the type of 2. Project Development2-143information that you specify. To search for device addresses and tags, check the check box next toFind All Addresses/Tags.• To locate a range of addresses, set the range in the Range Search field. By default, the range is “1,”which returns a single device address. You can also replace addresses automatically in a range froma specified starting point, for as many devices as you specify in the Range Search.Finding and Replacing All DevicesTo find all devices used in objects of a particular type at once:1 Click an object to select it, and then click [Tool] ► [Find/Replace All] ► [Device].The current object’sdevice address is shown in the Find All window.2 Click device types and enter the device address to find in the Find What field. By default, the searchrange is the entire project.2. Project Development2-144 Click [Find All]. The output window shows the results of the search. You can double-click a columnto view details about the object.To replace all objects in a range of addresses at once:1 Click an object to select it, and then click [Tool] ► [Find/Replace All]► [Device]. The current object’sdevice address is shown in the Find All window.2 Click [Replace].3 Enter the original device address in the Find what field and the new address in the Replace withfield.4 Click [Replace All].5 Click [Yes] to confirm the address replacement. The output window shows the number of thereplaced addresses.NoteTo replace addresses in a specified range, change the Device Count setting. Addresses will bereplaced for the number of devices you specify. For example, if the original device address is P0 andthe Device Count is 7, then 7 devices, including P0, are replaced.2. Project Development2-145Finding and Replacing All FontsTo find all fonts used in the project at once:1 Click an object to select it, and then click [Tool] ► [Find/Replace All] ► [Font]. The Find/Replace Fontwindow opens.2 In the Find field, choose a font from the dropdown menu. The entire project is selected by default.3 Select [Find All] to display the search results in the output window. Double-click the object to checkto see the object.2. Project Development2-146To replace all fonts in a range of addresses at once:1 Click an object to select it, and then click [Tool] ► [Find/Replace All] ► [Font]. The Find/Replace Fontwindow opens.2 Choose the fonts from the dropdown menu for the Find and Replace with fields.3 Click [Replace All].4 Click [Yes] to confirm the address replacement. The output window shows the number of thereplaced addresses.Finding & Replacing All Strings.Find strings:1 From the menu, select [Tools] ► [Find / Replace All] ► [Strings].2. Project Development2-1472 Select the string you want to find. If no objects are selected by default, they are found in the entireproject. By default, it looks for the string that contains the string you are looking for, not includingcomments.3 Select [Find All] to display the search results in the output window. Double-click the object to checkto see the object.Replace All:1 From the menu, select [Tools] ► [Find / Replace All] ► [Strings]. Enter the string to be replaced withthe string to be found in the activated tool box.2 Select [Replace All], all then select [Yes] in the message below to execute the replacement.2. Project Development2-1483 Select The number of changed strings is displayed in the output window.Finding and Replacing Devices, Fonts, and Tags from a ListTo find and replace devices used in specific items in a project:1 Click [Tool] ► [Find/Replace an item] ► [Device].2 In the left pane, select the specific items in the project to search.3 Find the devices in Before Dev. column, and click the value in After Dev. column.4 Enter new value, or open a keypad by clicking and input a value.2. Project Development2-1495 Repeat steps 3 and 4, and then click Convert when done.NoteCheck the Selected Object option to find device address from the objects you selected on the screen.If the selected object exists on the screen, "Selected object" is automatically checked in the searcharea.If you check "From Text table" in Find/Replace String, you can search or replace in string unit. If youcheck the "Block by block" check box, you can change it by the page of the Text table page (block). Forexample, it is possible to change the elements of a project using"Text table_01" as shown below, keeping the number in block with "Text table_02".2. Project Development2-150To find and replace fonts used in specific items in a project:1 Click [Tool] ► [Find/Replace an item] ► [Font].2 In the left pane, select the specific items in a project to search.3 Find the font in Before Dev. column, and click the After Dev. column.2. Project Development2-1514 Select a new font from the dropdown list.5 Repeat steps 3 and 4, and then click Convert when done.To find and replace devices using a specific tag:1 Click [Tool] ► [Find/Replace an item] ► [Tag address].2 In the left pane, select the specific items in a project to search.3 Select/Enter the “After Device.”4 Enter a device address, or assign an address using the keypad to the right.2. Project Development2-1525 Click [OK] after entering the device address.Note• You can view and select individual objects that do not use tags. Unlike the “finding and replacing adevice” feature (Click [Tool] ► [Find/Replace an item] ► [Device]) which replaces all the specific deviceaddress in the project at once, the “finding and replacing a device using a specific tag” feature allowsfor selective replacement .• By dragging downward on the “After Device” column, you can fill the table with ascending devicenumbers (from the first device address, each number becomes greater by 1). By dragging upward onthe “After Device” row, you can fill the table with descending device numbers (from the last deviceaddress, each number becomes smaller by 1).• You can click “Tag name”, “Before Device,” or “After Device” items on the title bar, to sort the table byascending or descending order.• You can double-click on the right edge of the title line items to adjust the cell size to fit the longeststring in the row.• You can click on the edge of a cell and drag to manually adjust the width and height of the cell.2. Project Development2-153Viewing Cross-ReferencesYou can view cross references to see device, tag, or script information for the entire project at once. Toview device, tag, or script cross-references, click [Tool] ► [Cross Reference], and then select [Device],[Font], or [Script]. Device addresses, tag names, positions, object type, and descriptions are shown in theOutput pane. You can double-click an entry in the cross reference to view device or script details.Viewing Cross-ReferencesBy using Cross Reference in Active screen, you can check the entire information of devices, tags, scripts,etc. used on the screen at once. To use on-screen cross-references, select [Tools] ► [Cross Reference inActive screen] from the toolbar menu, and then select [Device], [Font], or [Script]. The device address, tagname, location, object type, and description are displayed in the output window. Double-clicking on aspecific row activates the object with that address in the screen.Switching Project ScreensTo switch project screens conveniently, you can use the Next/Previous function. This allows you to scrollthrough screens in order. To switch project screens, click [Tool] ► [Previous Screen/Next Screen]. You canalso click the Next or Previous icons on the toolbar.2. Project Development2-1542.7 Running XP-Simulators with other PLC SimulatorsBefore downloading a file edited using XP-Builder for XGT Panel, it can be simulated on a PC. The ladderprogram from another PLC simulator can be used to prepare device values for the XP-Simulator. In otherwords, the ladder program edited by another PLC program can be run in XP-Simulator to link the PLCsimulator values and XP-Builder simulator values. This feature is supported on AB, Siemens, LS ELECTRIC,and Mitsubishi PLC simulators only.XG5000 Simulator and XP SimulatorBefore checking the XG5000 simulator, confirm that a supported version of software is used. Theprogram may terminate abnormally if the specified version is not used.1 Run the XG5000 software and edit the ladder diagram.2 Run the XG5000 simulator.3 Edit the data to run in XGT Panel using the XP-Builder editor.4 In XP Builder, check the check box next to [Use PLC Simulator] in [Common] ► [Project PropertySetting] ► [XGT Panel Setting].2. Project Development2-1555 Run the simulator in XP-Builder.6 Operate or change the device values either in XG5000 or XP-Builder simulator and monitor theoperation.Note• XP-Builder does not support multiple instances of the simulator. Only one simulator can be run at atime.• Run the XG5000 simulator first, and then run the XP-Builder simulator.• During simulation, the PLC type setting affects the operation.2. Project Development2-156S7-PLCSIM Simulator and XP-SimulatorBefore checking the S7-PLCSIM simulator, confirm that a supported version of the software is used. Theprogram may terminate abnormally if the specified version is not used.1 Run [S7-PLCSIM]2 Edit data to run in XGT Panel using the XP-Builder editor.3 In XP Builder, select [Use PLC Simulator] in [Common] ► [Project Property Setting] ► [XGT PanelSetting].4 If a device value is changed in S7-PLCSIM, the changed value is saved and displayed on the XPSimulator.Note• S7-PLCSIM Version 5.4 or later• PLC Driver Device Addresses Supported by S7-PLCSIM.- Data Block Devices- Flag Devices, Internal Memory- Output Devices (QI, QW, etc.)- Input Devices (I, IW, etc.)• PLC Driver inaccessible Device Addresses Supported by S7-PLCSIM.- Timer Device (TW, etc.)- Counter Device (CW, etc.)• If an input device is used in an object as a read device, the object will not be displayedcorrectly. Also, writing a value to a read device may result in abnormal operation.- A bit switch object uses an input device. Reversal of the device value cannot be appliedwith a bit switch, because the device value cannot be read.- For On/Off operation at a bit switch, only the selected bit works while other bits arereset.• The PPI MD device is a 32-bit device. It can be interfaced with the PLC simulator in 32bits. It is recommended to use the 32-bit version.• The DB block can be normally interfaced to the XP-Simulator after it is set in SIMATICManager, downloaded to the PLC simulator, and then can be run properly in the PLCsimulator. It will not work properly if it is not downloaded to the simulator even if it isadded in SIMATIC Manager.- Input the name and type in SIMATIC Manager as shown in the screenshot below.2. Project Development2-157- Download the added DB to the simulator.2. Project Development2-158RSLogix Emulator and XP-SimulatorBefore checking the RSLogix emulator, confirm that the program used is the RSLinx Classic version andthat it supports the OPC server function. The program may terminate abnormally if the specified versionis not used. The settings are described in the following procedure.Configuring RS Logix5000:1 Create the project.2 Set the slot number to be used by the emulator.2. Project Development2-1593 Select [New Module], as shown in the following screenshot, to set the I/O Configuration.4 Set the Assembly Instance for the New Module to “2,” “1”, and “16.”2. Project Development2-160Configuring RS Emulator:1 Right-click on the slot (“slot 1” in the example above) identified if the emulator was created in RSLogix.2 Select the slot’s Module Type as “Emulate5000 Controller” as shown in the figure below. Then, checkthe slot number.3 For other parameters, use the default values provided by the Tools.4 Create the I/O Configuration slot in the same way. Right-click on the second slot in the list to create aslot. Then, specify the Module Type as 1789-SIM 32 Point Input/output Simulator.5 The following details are displayed when the emulator settings are completed.2. Project Development2-161Configuring RSLink:1 Select [RSLinx Classic Gateway] ► [Communications] ► [Configure Drivers].2 Select Virtual Backplane from the dropdown list.3 Select [RSLinx Classic Gateway] ► [DDE/OPC] ► [Topic Configuration]. The name of the projectcreated in RS Logix 5000 is displayed in a list to the right of the window. Select the project andspecify the topic in the left pane. Click [Apply] and then click [Done].2. Project Development2-162Running RS Emulator:1 After the previous procedure is finished, run the emulator in RSLogix500. Select [RSLogix5000] ►[Communication] ► [Who Active] to run it.2 Select the emulator in the Who Active window, as shown in the screenshot below, and click[Download].3 Execute Run Mode when these steps have been completed.2. Project Development2-1634 Register the tag in [RSLogix5000] ► [Logic] ► [Monitor Tags].5 Edit the data to run in XGT Panel with the XP-Builder editor.6 Select [Use PLC simulator] in [Common] ► [Project Property Setting] ► [XGT panel Setting] on theXP-Builder.7 When the XP-Simulator runs, the list of projects created by RSLogix5000 is displayed as shown in thescreenshot below. Select the project for the topic that was set in the procedure above.2. Project Development2-1648 If the variables for PIC_101_SPProg are changed in RSLogix5000, as shown in the screenshot below,the target device value will be displayed in XP-Simulator.NoteAll three tools must be set for the simulation in the data interface for the RSLogix emulator.• RSLogix Emulate 5000 Classic Monitor 21.00.00 version or later.• RSLinx Classic GateWay 3.51.00 or later (OEM and Single Node versions are not supported).• Studio 5000 Logix Designer 21.00 version or later.2. Project Development2-165The GX Simulator and XP-SimulatorBefore running the GX Developer or GX Works2 simulator, check the following items. The program mayterminate abnormally if the specified version is not used. GX Simulator Version 7.30 or later GX Works 1.5 or later MX Component Version 3.08 or laterThe procedure to configure a data interface for simulation between the GX Simulator and the XPSimulator is detailed below.1 Set the COM connection target to GX Simulator in [MX Component]–[Communication Setup Utility].2. Project Development2-166To connect with simulator running on GX Works2, you need to connect to GX Simulator2.Item DescriptionPC side I/F Sets the COM Server target. Specify the GX Simulator as the target forthe simulator.CPU Sets the CPU type for the simulator. The target CPU type for the ladderprogram edited in the GX Simulator is generally specified. Only thememory domain for a specified CPU type can be simulated. Forexample, if Q06H is specified in the Q02H CPU type or the GXComponent Wizard, the GX Simulator can monitor only memorycorresponding to the Q06H CPU.2. Project Development2-1672 After the Communication Setup is completed in MX Component, create a ladder program using GXDeveloper.3 After the ladder program is created, select [Tools] ► [Start ladder logic test] in GX Developer to runthe simulator.4 Edit the data to input into XGT Panel with the XP-Builder editor.5 In XP-Builder, check the [Use PLC simulator] checkbox in [Common] ► [Project Property Setting].6 Run XP-Builder simulator. The CPU that is connected must be set when the GX Simulator and the XPSimulator are connected. Set the CPU type that is same as GX Simulator’s ladder program in thecheckbox, as shown in the screenshot below.2. Project Development2-1687 Set or modify the device value in XP-Simulator or GX Simulator. If the X0 device value is set to 0x21 in GX Simulator, the same value will be displayed in the XPSimulator.Note• Supported PLC Drivers1. SIEMENS Simulator Interfaces - Siemens: SIMATIC S7 300/400 Ethernet - Siemens: SIMATIC S7 3964(R)/RK512 - Siemens: SIMATIC S7 MPI - Siemens: SIMATIC S7 PPI2. Rockwell Simulator Interfaces2. Project Development2-169 - Rockwell: EtherNet/IP ControlLogix/CompactLogix Series Native3. Mitsubishi Simulator Interfaces - MITSUBISHI: MELSEC-A(LINK) - MITSUBISHI: MELSEC-FX(CPU) - MITSUBISHI: MELSEC-FX(ETHERNET) - MITSUBISHI: MELSEC-FX(LINK) - MITSUBISHI: MELSEC-Q(CPU) - MITSUBISHI: MELSEC-QnA, Q(ETHERNET) - MITSUBISHI: MELSEC-QnU CPU(ETHERNET) - MITSUBISHI: MELSEC-QnA, Q(LINK)• XP-Simulator must be run only after another PLC simulator is run. 2. Project Development2-1702.8 Managing a ProjectLearn about project management functions, including transferring data to XGT Panels or removablememory devices, and receiving projects from HMI.Transferring to an XGT PanelThe GUI you design in XP-Builder must be transferred to an XGT Panel. You can transfer the interface byusing one of two methods: full transfer or modification transfer. By default, XP-Builder determineswhether or not a previous version of the project exists on the XGT Panel and then transfers either theentire project or only modified parts of the project accordingly. However, you can force XP-Builder totransfer the full project, if desired.Before transferring a project, you must select a connection method, as described in the followingsections. There are three connection methods available: RS232C, USB, and Ethernet. The connectionmethods available will vary based on the XGT Panel model you are using.To transfer a project:1 Click [Communication] ► [Send] or select the download icon ( ) from the toolbar.2. Project Development2-1712 Set the following options, as necessary.Function DescriptionDownload to XGT Panel Select this option to transfer a project to an XGTPanel. This is the default option. Click [Settings] tochange the communication settings.Download Project AllForcedlyBy default, XP-Builder determines if a previousversion of the project exists on the panel anddetermines whether or not to transfer the full projector only to update data. However, you can select thisoption to force XP-Builder to transfer the entireproject.Save to RemovableDeviceSelect this option to transfer a project to aremovable memory device that is connected to yourcomputer. For more details, refer to <2.8.2Transferring to a removable Device>.This feature is not supported by the IPC series.File Location Displays the file path for a file that is saved in anexternal storage device. A folder type and acompressed file type can be selected. If the foldertype is selected, multiple files to be downloaded tothe input folder are generated. If a compressed filetype is selected, multiple files are compressed andstored in a file that has a file name you specified. Forfile management purposes, the compressed file typeis more convenient but it may take longer to 2. Project Development2-172Function Descriptioncompress the files. For example, files to bedownloaded in the folder are saved to the G:XP_ProjectAAA folder. If a compressed file is used,files to be downloaded are saved as AAA.xpd file inthe G: XP_Project folder.Update XP-RuntimeForcedlyBy default, XP-Builder determines whether or not theruntime files need to be updated on the XGT Panel.However, you can select this option to force XPBuilder to update the runtime files on the panel.This feature is not supported by the IPC series. Forthe IPC series, you must run a setup file manually toupdate XP-Runtime.Delete All MonitoringDataSelect this option to delete alarms, logging, recipedata, and operation logs stored in the NVRAM of theXGT Panel.Include Upload ProjectFileSelect this option to transfer a compressed projectfile to the XGT Panel in addition to the normalproject files. This option is recommended when youdo not have a project file on your computer andwant to transfer it from the XGP Panel onto yourcomputer. You can use a removable storage device todownload a compressed project file.Download Click to transfer the data to the XGT Panel.3 If necessary, click [Settings] to view or change the connection settings.Function DescriptionConnect Type Set the connection type between your computer andthe XGT Panel.Details You can specify the detailed connection settings forEthernet, RS-232C, and USB connections.For the RS-232 connection, set the serial port andbaud rate.2. Project Development2-173Function DescriptionFor an Ethernet connection, set the IP address, portnumber, and network adapter.• In Windows XP, a virtual IP address is automaticallycreated for an Ethernet connection.• In Windows 7 or Windows 8, you must set the IPaddress manually for an Ethernet connection.For a USB connection, set the XGT Panel type.2. Project Development2-174Function DescriptionScan XGT Panel Click to scan for XGT Panels connected via Ethernet.4 Verify that your computer and the XGT Panel are both properly connected via your chosenconnection method, and then click [Download]Note• Viewing Available Memory before Sending a ProjectView the available memory before sending the project file to ensure the file can be transferredsuccessfully. You can compare Flash and USB/CF/SD memory capacities to the size of the project 2. Project Development2-175file before transferring it, as shown below.Memory type Case DescriptionFlash memory Downloading thewhole projectCompare the project file size to the totalmemory available, because the memory willbe erased prior to downloading the project.Downloading therevised parts onlyCompare the project file size to the availablememory.USB/CF/SDmemoryCompare the project file size to the available memory of an externaldevice.• Downloading the Entire ProjectYou can download the entire project only when the entire memory on the external device is largerthan or same as the size of the project file.• Downloading Only the Revised Parts of a Project• You can download a revised part of a project only when the size of the available memory on theexternal device is larger or same as the size of the project file.- If you attempt to transfer a project file when there is insufficient memory, the following pop-upwindow will appear. It shows the total memory capacity and the size of the project file.- If the available memory is insufficient to download only the revised part, download the entireproject.Note• To set the password, in XP-Builder, click [Communication] ► [XGT Panel Information] ► [Password].When you set the password for the first time, enter the new password again to confirm it. Yourpassword can contain up to 10 characters in length.2. Project Development2-176• XP-Builder transfers only the updated portion of a project, except in the following cases:- You are transferring the project to the panel for the first time.- You have changed the project properties, which can affect data throughout the entire project.- The project ID has been deleted on the panel due to a communication error. Therefore, theproject IDs cannot be compared between your computer and the panel.• If the transfer is unsuccessful, it may be due to different runtime versions between XP-Builder andthe XGT Panel. If the runtime version of the XP-Builder is later than that of the panel, update theruntime file on the panel to match XP-Builder and try the transfer again.Using a Serial (RS-232C) ConnectionA serial connection provides a 1:1 communication method between the control device and a computer. A6-pin cable is required to make a serial connection, but this cable is not provided with the XGT Panel.To use a serial connection:1 Connect the serial cable to the TOOL port on the XGT Panel and RS-232C port on a computer.2 On the XGT Panel, close any open programs.3 Tap and hold the screen to open the menu.4 Tap [Settings] ► [PC Conn Setting].5 In RS232 Baud Rate, select a baud rate.NoteOnly XP series panels support connections via RS232 ports. iXP/iXP2/IPC series panels do notsupport it.6 In XP-Builder, select [Communication] ► [Send] ► [Settings] ► [RS232C].2. Project Development2-1777 Select the same baud rate that you set on the XGT Panel. If the transfer rates do not match, thetransfer will fail.8 Select the serial port connected to the XGT Panel. The COM port number must be the same as theone used by your computer for the RS-232C connection. To set the COM port number on yourcomputer, open the Control Panel, locate the Device Manager, and modify the Ports’ (COM&LPT)settings.Using an Ethernet ConnectionAn Ethernet connection is typically much faster than a serial connection; so using an Ethernet connectionis highly recommended.To use an Ethernet connection:1 Connect a computer and an XGT Panel to a network via Ethernet cables. You can also use a crosscable connection if a network is unavailable. The IP addresses of the XGT Panel and the connectedcomputer must be in the same Subnet mask.2 On the XGT Panel, close any open programs.2. Project Development2-1783 Tap and hold the screen to open the menu.4 Tap [Settings]► [Ethernet Setting].5 Set the Ethernet IP, Gateway, and Subnet mask.6 Tap [Go to Main Menu].7 In XP-Builder, click [Communication] ► [Send] ► [Settings] ► [Ethernet].8 Set the IP address and port number to match the ones that are set in the panel.Note• You can use the automatic search function in XP-Builder (Scan XGT Panel) to locate and connectXGT Panels on a network. The feature uses the UDP protocol to retrieve information about the XGTPanel and returns it via broadcast messages to a default address (255.255.255.255). This search isperformed only on the local network. If a gateway exists between the search computer and the XGTPanel, the message may be blocked.• By default, the last address used will remain in the settings until you replace it manually or update itby performing a scan for connected XGT Panels.• If you are transferring information to multiple XGT Panels, the data will be transferred in order by IPaddress. When you view IP addresses as shown in the following example, they appear in ascendingorder.• The XGT series uses port 2143, and the IPC series uses port 2144. When downloading a project, portsetting is not required because the port number is automatically selected based on the selectedpanel specifications.2. Project Development2-179Using a USB Connection (XP models)To use a USB connection, you must use an XPO-USBC cable, manufactured by LS ELECTRIC. The USBcable is not provided with the XGT Panel, so you must purchase one separately. A USB connectionprovides 1:1 communication between a computer and a panel.Note• The procedures described in this section apply only to XP series panels. Refer to <2.8.1.4 Using aUSB Connection (iXP/eXP/iXP2 models)> for information on USB connections with iXP/eXP seriespanels.• The USB connection is supported by XGT Panel operating software versions 1.24 and higher.To use a USB connection:1 Run XP-Builder, and then create and save the project to be transmitted.2 Connect PC and XGT Panel by ethernet or serial.3 Click [Communication]-[XGT Panel Information], then go to the setting tab and click Install/UpdateXGT Panel USB driver to download USB driver to XGT Panel.4 Connect the USB cable (XPO-USBC) to each port on the PC and XGT Panel. When USB cable isconnected to the XGT Panel, the USB icon is displayed at the bottom-left corner.2. Project Development2-1805 Click [COMMUNICATION] ► [Send] to open the Download screen.6 Click [Settings] to open the Communication Settings screen.7 Select the [USB] icon from the [Connection Type] selection list. Select XP Series as the type in theDetails.Note• Once you initially download the XGT Panel USB driver installation/update, you can download viaUSB without installing a separate USB driver2. Project Development2-181Using a USB Connection (iXP/eXP/iXP2 models)The mini-USB cable that supports USB 2.0 communication is available for iXP and eXP Series. The cableconfiguration procedure is detailed below.1 Run XP-Builder when the cables are properly connected and the XGT Panel settings are complete.2 Create and save the project to be transmitted.3 Click [COMMUNICATION] ► [Send] to open the Download screen.4 Click [Settings] to open the Communication Settings screen.5 Select the [USB] icon from the [Connect Type] selection list. Select iXP/iXP2/eXP Series as the typein the Details.Note1) The OTG cable connected to the XGT Panel must be USB 2.0 or higher2) When installing XP-Builder, rNDIS driver is installed automatically, so there is no needto re-install the driver unless it was deleted intentionally.3) Take the actions below if the following message appears.2. Project Development2-182A. Make sure that the cable between PC and HMI is connected properly.B. If there is no communication even after connection is established, unplug the USB cable andrepeat 1 or 2 times.C. If you cannot communicate even after trying the solutions, press the [PC USB, Driver Reinstallation] button in [Communication] - [Transfer Settings]. Then install the RNDIS Driver and unplug the USB cable 1 or 2 times until the [Remote NDIS based Device] in [Device Manager] – [Network Adapter] is displayed properly.2. Project Development2-183D. If the driver does not load properly after installation, remove the USB cable fromthe PC and HMI, reboot the PC, and reconnect the USB cable to see if the driverloads as above.4) Take the actions below if the following message appears.The rNDIS driver is normally loaded, or the rNDIS network adapter's IP setting isin progress or it is not set up properly.A. Wait for 1 ~ 2 minutes and try connecting again.B. If the message appears even when connecting after standby, manually set the IPaddress to 184.114.58.254 in [Control Panel] - [Network and Internet] - [NetworkConnection] and retry communication.Transferring to a Removable DeviceFor convenience, you can transfer the project to a removable drive and then connect the drive to an XGTPanel to update it.To transfer the project to a removable drive:1 Click [Communication] ► [Send] or select the download icon ( ) from the toolbar.2. Project Development2-1842 Check the checkbox next to Save as file and select the location of the removable device. By default,the project will be saved in the Drive nameXP_ProjectFolder name folder, unless you specify adifferent folder name. To download the project file, you must create a folder inside the XP_Projectfolder. The folder will be created automatically.3 Click [Download].NoteEnsure that your removable drive has sufficient space to store your selected project files. If the drivehas insufficient space available, an error message will appear that describes the available memory andthe total memory required to transfer the project files.2. Project Development2-185Starting a Project File from a Local wXPSetup, Send, and a Start XP-Builder compatible version of wXP and send wXP projects written by XPBuilder.Start project in local wXP1 Click [Communication] ► [Send] or select the download icon ( ) from the toolbar.2 Select [Execute Project at Local wXP]3 Click [Download].The project and wXP will start automatically.2. Project Development2-1864 If the option ( ) is selected, it will go into monitoring mode.NoteYou can only start wXP projects on local wXP. The wXP must be a compatible version with the XP-Builderor it must be updated.2. Project Development2-187Receiving a Project File from an XGT PanelYou can transfer project file from an XGT Panel to your computer.To receive a project file:1 In XP-Builder, click [Communication] ► [Receive] or select the upload icon ( ) from the toolbar.2 If necessary, click [Settings] to change the communication settings.3 Click [Browse] to select a destination folder for the project file. If you do not set the destination, youcannot receive the project file from an XGT Panel.2. Project Development2-1884 Select Project file to transfer the entire project. Select Backup data to specify which types of data totransfer.5 Click [Upload].NoteYou cannot receive images unless you have selected the Include Upload Project File option whentransferring the project to the XGT Panel.2. Project Development2-189Backing up Project DataYou can back up project data from a removable storage drive in an XGT Panel to your computer,including logging and alarm data, recipes, screen captures, operation logs, and memos.To back up project data:1 In XP-Builder, click [Communication] ► [Receive] or select the upload icon ( ) from the toolbar.2 Click [Backup data].3 Click [Browse] to select a destination folder for the project data.2. Project Development2-1904 Select Backup data. You can click the checkboxes in the list to specify which types of data to transfer.5 Click [Upload].6 If a communication password is set, enter the password for the XGT Panel and click [OK]. In XPBuilder, the transfer progress will be shown in the output window.2. Project Development2-191NoteLogging, alarm, operation log and recipe data are stored in CSV format. Memos and screen capturesare saved in BMP format.2. Project Development2-192Discontinued Project ConversionAs XP series is discontinued, XP-Builder (V3.00 or later) will no longer be able to edit, save and downloadthe model. Therefore, supporting to provide the ability to change the discontinued model to anothermodel.Convert project:1 Open XP project.2 Click [OK] on the message below.If you click [Cancel], project will be closed.3 Select other series model instead of XP series model on [Project Property] – [ XGT Panel Settings]after click [OK]If you click [Cancel], project will be closed.2. Project Development2-1934 Click [Save Project] or [Save As Project] to save the project.NoteWhen uploading XP project, model conversion is done as above.2. Project Development2-1942.9 Configuring Advanced Communication SettingsXP-Builder supports several communication types to allow for flexible controller and panel configurations.This section describes the communication types available.Multiple controllers can be monitored from a single XGT Panel. The XP series panels support up to 4connection numbers (0-3) and the iXP/IPC series panels support up to 16 connection numbers (0-15) fordifferent types of controllers, when connected to multiple protocols (RS232C, RS422/485, and Ethernet).Using 1: N Communication with Multiple ProtocolsWhen setting up 1: N communication with multiple protocols, you can connect various types ofcontrollers via the different protocols. The RS485/RS422 supports multi-drop connection, which allowsyou to connect one XGT Panel to multiple controllers. The Ethernet connection also allows connection ofmultiple controllers.You can connect up to 4 different controllers for XP/eXP series panels or up to 16 different controllers foreXP/iXP/IPC/iXP2 series panels. A multi-channel setup of 1: N communication is illustrated by thefollowing image (XP Series).Note• When you connect controllers via RS232C only, you can connect only one controller from eachseries.• When you connect controllers via Ethernet only, you can connect 4 XP series controllers, 4 eXPcontrollers, and 16 eXP/iXP/IPC/iXP2 series controllers.2. Project Development2-195To use 1: N communication:1 In XP-Builder, click [Common] ► [Project Property Setting] ►[XGT Panel Settings] ►[Add Controller].2 Select the PLC and manufacturer from the drop-down list. If necessary, click [Detail Settings] andchange the properties.NoteTo delete a controller, select it from the list and click [Delete Controller].Using 1: N Communication with RS485/RS422When setting up 1: N communication with RS485, you can connect a large number of controllers, as longas they are all the same type and manufacturer of controller. With a RS485 connection, you can also setstation numbers for devices in the advanced communication settings, so that the same device can bereferenced by multiple controllers with unique station IDs. A multi-drop setup of 1: N communicationwith RS485 is illustrated by the following image.2. Project Development2-196To use 1: N communication:1 In XP-Builder, click [Common] ► [Project Property Setting] ►[XGT Panel Settings].2 In the connection properties, select RS485.3 In the object settings, click to set the properties.4 Check the box next to Custom setting.5 Set the station number.2. Project Development2-197Using N: 1 CommunicationThis is a useful way to make several XGT Panels to communicate with one PLC. N: 1 communication isavailable only with the RS-485 communication protocol and uses a token ring bus to regulatecommunication. Only one XGT Panel can hold the token at a time and the token is passed after a definedholding time. The XGT Panel that you set to station “0” is the starting point for communication. After thetoken is released, it is delivered to station “1” and so on.To use N: 1 communication, set the communication parameters:1 In XP-Builder, click [Common] ► [Project Property Setting] ► [XGT Panel Settings].2 In the Connection Property area, set [Protocol] to RS485.3 Click [N: 1 Settings].4 Click the checkbox next to Use N: 1 Communication and input the following parameters: 2. Project Development2-198N: 1 Settings DescriptionUse N: 1CommunicationSelect whether or not to use N: 1 communication.N: 1 Station Number Select a station number (0-15) for the HMI. The first station mustbe set to “0.” Station numbers must be continuous, orcommunication will fail. Duplicated station numbers are notallowed.Number of XGT Panel Select the total number of XGT panels you are using (up to 16).Max. Token HoldingTimeSelect the maximum time that each panel can hold the token (upto 60 seconds). The token is automatically released when themaximum time is reached.Note• The total number of XGT Panels you specify must match the total number of stationsexactly.• The N: 1 Settings option appears when you select a controller that supports N: 1communication.• The more XGT panels you connect, the slower the communication speed will be.• All XGT Panels participating in N: 1 communication should have the same controllersettings and parameter settings (except for station numbers).• When using N: 1 communication, the Program Monitor function is not supported andthe controller monitor protocol cannot be used, which results in decreasedcommunication speed.• N: 1 communication does not function in the simulator.The following drivers support N: 1 communication.Manufacturer DriverLS LS: XGK(LINK)LS: XGI/XGR/XEC(LINK)LS: XGB(LINK)LS: GM(LINK)LS: MASTER-K(80, 120, 200, 300, 1000)S(LINK)2. Project Development2-199Manufacturer DriverLS: Inverter (LSBus)LS: Inverter (MODBUS)LS: XEC (LINK)LS: XGB (LINK)-VCB Trip ControlLS Mecapion LS Mecapion: VS/VP Servo DriveMitsubishi ElectricCorporationMITSUBISHI: MELSEC-A(LINK)MITSUBISHI: MELSEC-QnA, Q(LINK)MITSUBISHI: MELSEC-FX(LINK)Token HoldThe N:1 communication provides slower communication speed than the 1:1 connection. To enhance thecommunication speed on a temporary basis, you can set an XGT Panel to hold the token for a specifiedtime before it passes the token to the next XGT panel.To set the Token Hold function:1 Create a projects for N:1 communication.2 Configure the communication setting for N:1 connection.3 Add a switch on a base screen.4 Assign the “_N1_Token_Hold” tag to the switch’s device.2. Project Development2-2005 Download the project to an XGT Panel. You can press the switch to perform a token hold and enhance the connection speed.Note• You can enable the token hold using a script.• Token Hold takes effect after the XGT Panel obtains the token.• Token Hold can be used on a temporary basis only.N:1 System DevicesThe following table lists system devices for use with N:1 communication.Tag Name Device Type Description_N1_Token HS0070.0 BIT When a token is held by XGT Panels, thissystem device is either On or OFF. Read-onlydevice._N1_Token_Hold HS0501.0 BIT N:1 Token Hold is available. Read/Writedevice._N1_Token_Station HS0071 WORD N:1 station ID of an XGT Panel holding atoken. Read-only._N1_Token_Count HS0072 WORD The number of times an N:1 token is held.Read-only._N1_Station HS0073 WORD The N:1 station ID of an XGT Panel.View Communication ManualDescribes how to view the communication manual. There are three ways to view the communicationmanual as shown below.Method 1: View communication manual in HELP1 In XP-Builder, click [HELP] ► [PLC/Controller Manual] ► [Communication Driver].2. Project Development2-201Method 2: View communication manual in Project Property1 In XP-Builder, click [Common] ► [Project Property Setting] ► [XGT Panel Setting].2 Click [Refer to Manual]Method 3: View communication manual in1 Open the device dialog being edited.2 Click “?”, and then click anywhere within the device dialog box. Alternatively, you can view thecommunication manual by pressing the keyboard “F1” key. 3. Error Messages3-13. Error MessagesIn XP-Builder, you may be notified of an error via a code in the Results pane or a message in a pop-upwindow. In these cases, locate the error in the corresponding sections that follow and take theappropriate steps to resolve the error.3.1 Resolving Error Codes Found in the Results PaneThe following table lists error codes that appear in the Results pane. The errors and suggestions forresolving them are listed in order by code number.Code Error Message How to Resolve the Error1000 There is no background image. The image set for the background does not exist.Choose another image for the background.1001 There is (are) shape(s) that is outof the screen area.Check the project in XP-Builder and make sure thatall the shapes and objects are placed within the basescreen.1002 The “XX” screen No. “XX” isincorrect. Screen No. should bebelow 65535.The screen number exceeded the limit. Specify ascreen number smaller than “65535.”1003 Invalid script “XX” is selected. The selected script does not exist. Replace the scriptwith another one or create and register a new script.1004 It is impossible to place morethan “XX” popup window objectonto the screen.More than 8 window objects have been registered.Delete window objects until 8 or fewer remain.1005 The size of the window exceedsmaximum one of the HMI screen.A window cannot be larger than the dimensionssupported by the XGT Panel type specified. Set thewindow size to fit within the maximum dimensionsallowed by the XGT Panel type.2000 The image information isincorrect.(ex. 1. The image is not selected.2. The image format is not valid.)The specified image has been deleted or the fileextension is incorrect. Select another image or selectan image type that is supported.2001 “XX” is incorrect. The specified display does not exist. Change thedisplay type and number of the object.2002 The address is incorrect. The device type is incorrect or the device addresshas not been set. Set or change the device address.2004 A deleted or incorrect text table is The specified text table does not exist. Specify 3. Error Messages3-2Code Error Message How to Resolve the Errorused. another text table.2005 The script “XX” that is not set isselected.The specified script does not exist. Specify anotherscript.2007 The selected font “XX” cannotrepresent all of headers set “XX”.The font you selected cannot be found or does notsupport the double-byte characters you used in theheading. You must reinstall the font, select a fontthat supports the characters in the heading, orchange the heading.2008 There is an object or figure that isout of the screen area.The object is outside the boundaries of the window.Relocate the object or adjust the size until it fitswithin the window boundaries.2009 The selected font “XX” is notinstalled in the system.The font you selected cannot be found. You mustreinstall the font.2011 The selected image is of the typethat is not supported.The specified image type is not supported. Deletethe image or select an image type that is supported.2012 In the selected “XX”, the monitoraddress exists. Unexpected resultsmay occur.The variable type is incorrect in the script. Changethe variable to a temporary variable to display aresult without writing it in the standard device.2013 The selected history alarm to printdoes not exist.The history alarm list in a special switch or multiswitch has been deleted. Specify another historyalarm list.2014 The maximum device address isexceeded (“XX” rows, “XX”columns)The number of rows and lines you set exceed themaximum device range. Set the number of rows andlines to fall within the maximum device range.2015 [“XX”] device is read-only. You have set a read-only device where a write deviceis required. Specify a write device for the object.2016 There is no lamp case. Defaultcase will be showed.The specified condition for a word lamp does notexist. Add a condition for the word lamp.2017 The keypad position is out ofscreen.The key window location is outside the dimensionsof the window boundaries. Change the windowlocation to fit within the window boundaries.2018 The Selected Logging Group ID :[“XX”] does not existThe specified logging group does not exist. Registerthe logging group in the logging properties.2019 Object that has same cursorgroup ID and input order exists.Arrange its order.Two objects have the same automatic cursor andinput order numbers. Change the automatic cursorand input order to unique numbers or remove the 3. Error Messages3-3Code Error Message How to Resolve the Errorobject with the redundant setting.2021 The number of connected plctype is invalidThe specified controller does not support programmonitoring. Change the function of the specialswitch or specify a controller that supports programmonitoring.2022 The ladder monitoring option isnot set. Please check laddermonitoring option in [Common]-[Project Property Setting]-[XGTPanel Settings]The program monitor function has not been set forthe object. Change the function of the special switchor activate program monitoring in the devicesettings.2024 There is no (trend) item. At least,one (trend) item must be added.Trend item has not been added. Add trend item(s)2025 There is an object or figure that isout of the screen area.An object or image location is outside thedimensions of the window boundaries. Change theobject or image location to fit within the windowboundaries.2026 The range of Group Num. is from1 to 253.The specified number is beyond the allowable rangefor a group number. Specify a number from 1 to 253.2027 The device address must beInternal device address.Only an internal device type can be specified for thisfunction. Change the device type to an internaldevice.2028 The font of code page is not valid.Please check the [common]-[Project Property Setting]-[Language]-[multilingual font].No font is specified for the selected language.Specify a font in the language settings.2029 The program path, parameter orfile path is not valid.The path and filename are incorrect for an externalprogram. Enter the correct path and filename.2030 The selected object or feature itnot supported in the currentmodel.This error occurs when an unsupported feature isselected in a project (e.g., when a PDF viewer objectis used in an XP series panel). The followingcommand will be cleared or deleted:The following option is not supported on the XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, or the XP50-TTE. Rotate Object text Numeric input and Switch operation log Text display bit/word address3. Error Messages3-4Code Error Message How to Resolve the Error Lamp and switch text blink If the N-state lamp object exceeds 6. (Only whenchanged by bit.) VNC/ PDF viewer and associated special switch File browser and associated special switches Set parameters for an external program startswitch. View character string function in view historyalarm. If the N-state lamp object exceeds 6. (Only whenchanged by bit.) Select [Setting device size per Col.], [Setting ofcell size] in View Logging Show lamp and switch trigger Bookmark Logging Trend Graph Word switch increase/decrease repeat. Set text intervals and line spacing for Figuresand Word Form Character/spacing cannot be set when thelength of the character string is set forswitches/lamps.2031 The following external storagedevices are not supported:This error occurs when an SD card is assigned as theexternal storage in an unsupported device, such asan XP series panel. The XP series is set on the SDstorage device or the storage device is notsupported. Change the external storage path toclear the error.2032 The number of characters allowedis 1–4. (16 bits: 1–2, 32bits: 1–4)This error occurs in a logging viewer object when thenumber of ASCII characters exceeds the allowedrange. Change the number of ASCII characters tostay within the allowed range.2034 Exceeded the maximum numberof characters. ([0–255])This error occurs in switch and lamp objects whenthe caption length exceeds 255 characters. Resizethe caption length.2036 Available in multilingual mode -Initializes keypad settings.To use the Korean keypad for a text input object, setthe language to Korea in the properties window3. Error Messages3-5Code Error Message How to Resolve the ErrorCheck the settings at [Language]-[Multilingual font], and [Keypad].([Language]-[Multilingual font]-[Korean]).2037 The language setting is invalid. This error occurs in [special switch] and [multi switch]objects, if a language used in the language changefeature is deleted. Check [Language]-[Runtimelanguage list] in the project properties, or changethe language settings.3000 The initial screen setting “XX” isincorrect.The specified start screen does not exist. Specify anexisting screen or create a new screen to use as thestart screen.3002 The key window [“XX”] is incorrect. The specified key window does not exist. Specify anexisting window or create a new window to use asthe key window.3003 The default screen-convertingdevice is incorrect.The window change device has not been specified.Specify the device in the project properties window.3004 The Global window 1-convertingdevice is incorrect.The window change device has not been specified.Specify the device in the project properties window.3005 The Global window 2-convertingdevice is incorrect.The window change device has not been specified.Specify the device in the project properties window.4000 The trigger device of the logging“XX” is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the logging properties.4001 The sampling device of thelogging “XX” is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the logging properties.4002 The progress device of the logging“XX” is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the logging properties.4003 The cancel device of the logging“XX” is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the logging properties.4004 The file full device of the logging“XX” is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the logging properties.4005 The data clear device of thelogging “XX” is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the logging properties.4006 The backup trigger device of thelogging “XX” is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the logging properties.4007 The backup complete device ofthe logging “XX” is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the logging properties.3. Error Messages3-6Code Error Message How to Resolve the Error4008 The logging area setting isincorrect.The logging storage area has not been specified.Specify the storage area in the logging areasettings.4009 The maximum logging size isexceeded.(“XX” bytes).The sum of the specified storage areas exceeds themaximum logging area size. Adjust the storageareas to fit within the maximum size.4010 The logging area is not set. The logging storage area has not been specified.Specify the storage area in the logging areasettings.4014 The backup path of the logging isnot selected.The logging backup path has not been specified.Specify the backup path in the logging properties.4015 The setting of the loggingsampling device is incorrect. Themaximum device size that is ableto be set by the number of thesampling devices is exceeded.The maximum number of devices to log has beenexceeded. Reduce the number of device to log untilit is within the maximum.4016 The control device of the logging“XX” has a duplicated setting. Theduplication of a control device isnot permitted.Two logging control devices have the same number.Change one of the devices to a unique number.5000 The setting of the occurred alarmcount device is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the alarm properties.5001 The setting of the monitoringdevice is incorrect or not appliedto all registered alarms.All required devices have not been specified or adevice address is incorrect. Specify a device or verifyspecified devices in the flow alarm settings.5002 The monitoring device isduplicated.Two flow alarm devices have the same number.Change one of the devices to a unique number.5003 [Flow alarm “XX”] The messagesetting is incorrect.No alarm message has been selected. Select analarm message.7000 The setting of the not restoredalarm count device is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the history alarm properties.7001 The setting of the alarm data cleardevice is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the history alarm properties.7002 The setting of the alarm printtrigger device is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the history alarm properties.7003 The setting of the alarm print end The device has not been specified. Specify the 3. Error Messages3-7Code Error Message How to Resolve the Errordevice is incorrect. device in the history alarm properties.7004 The setting of the history alarmdata obtaining-period is incorrect.The specified history alarm acquisition cyclecontains an error. Verify the cycle in the historyalarm properties.7005 There is no content of the string ofthe alarm group “XX”.The alarm group display text has not been selected.Select display text in the group properties window.7006 The string table setting of thealarm list “XX” is incorrect.No text has been selected in the alarm list. Select atext table or create and specify a new text table forthe alarm list.7007 The monitoring device setting ofthe alarm list “XX” is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the alarm list settings.7008 The range setting of the alarm list“XX” is incorrect.The specified conditional expression in the alarmlist contains an error. Verify the expression in thealarm list settings.7009 The detail window number settingof the alarm list “XX” is incorrect.The detailed display setting in the alarm listcontains an error. Verify the setting in the alarm listsettings.7010 The message setting of the alarmlist “XX” is incorrect.No alarm message has been set. Select a text stringfrom a text table in the alarm list to use as the alarmmessage.7011 The alarm lists “XX” and “XX” areset to watch the same device.Two history alarms are set to monitor the samedevice. Specify a unique device for one of thealarms or delete one of the alarms.7012 All the sampling devices of thealarm list “XX” should be set.Some devices in the alarm list have not beenspecified. Specify all devices in the alarm list.7013 The monitoring device of thealarm list “XX” is duplicated.Two history alarms are set to monitor the samedevice. Specify a unique device for one of thealarms or delete one of the alarms.7014 The word condition informationsetting of the monitoring device ofthe alarm list “XX” is incorrect.The specified conditional expression in the alarmlist contains an error. Verify the expression in thealarm list settings.8000 The setting of the write triggerdevice is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the recipe properties window.8001 The setting of the read triggerdevice is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the recipe properties window.3. Error Messages3-8Code Error Message How to Resolve the Error8002 The backup device setting isincorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the recipe properties window.8003 The setting of the recipe numberdevice is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the recipe properties window.8004 The setting of the recipe blocknumber device is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the recipe properties window.8005 The setting of the recipe datatransfer complete device isincorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the recipe properties window.8006 The setting of the recipe datatransfer error device is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the recipe properties window.8007 The setting of the recipe samplingdevice is incorrect.The device has not been specified. Specify thedevice in the recipe properties window.8008 The maximum recipe setting size(“XX” KB) is exceeded.The sum of the specified recipes exceeds themaximum memory size. Adjust the number of datablocks within the recipes to fit within the maximumsize.8009 The backup path of the recipe isnot selected.Set the recipe backup path in the recipe propertieswindow.8010 The setting of the recipe samplingdevice is incorrect. Check whetherthe maximum device setting size isexceeded by the number of therecipe devices.The device has not been specified or the number ofdevices exceeds the maximum allowed. Verify thespecified devices in the recipe entry window.9000 The download data size (“XX”bytes) exceeds the maximum size(“XX” bytes).The total size of the selected data exceeds themaximum memory available for download to theXGT Panel. Unselect items to reduce the total datasize and try again.9001 The font used in the project (“XX”)is not installed in the system.Change to a font installed in thesystem. Otherwise, strings maynot appear.The specified font is not installed on the system.Install the font on the system or specify anotherfont in the project properties.11000 Cannot find the font file [“XX”]. The specified font cannot be found or is notinstalled on the system. Try restarting XP-Builder. Ifthe problem reoccurs, install the font on the systemor specify another font in the project properties. 3. Error Messages3-9Code Error Message How to Resolve the Error11001 There is a character that cannot beprinted with the font [“XX”]. Checkwhether a character that is of theincompatible font is used.The selected font cannot display the specialcharacters you are using. You must select anotherfont that is capable of displaying the specialcharacters.13001 There is no script selected asoperation.The specified script does not exist. Specify anotherscript or create a new script.15000 Backup file conversion: Cannotopen backup file.The file may be in use. Ensure that the file is closedand try again.15001 Backup file conversion: Cannotcreate output file.The file may be in use. Ensure that the file is closedand try again.15002 Backup file conversion: Cannotaccess backup file.The file may be in use. Ensure that the file is closedand try again.15003 Backup file conversion: Cannotread backup file.The file may be in use. Ensure that the file is closedand try again.15004 Backup file conversion: Cannotwrite to backup file.The file may be in use. Ensure that the file is closedand try again.16001 The write-prohibited device isused as a write device, in thescript.You have set a read-only device where a writedevice is required. Specify a write device for thescript.16002 The read-prohibited device is usedas a read device, in the script.You have set an input device where a read device isrequired. Specify a read device for the script.3. Error Messages3-103.2 Resolving Error Messages in Pop-up WindowsThe following table shows how to resolve error messages that appear in pop-up windows within the XPBuilder interface. These error messages have no error codes. They are listed in the following tablealphabetically.Error Message How to Resolve the Error“XX” cannot be specified as aninterval. The scale interval isbetween 0 and 10.Set the scale interval for the graph between 0 and 10.“XX” cannot be specified as thenumber of scale. The scale numberis between 0 and 255.Set the number of scales in the graph object between 0 and 255.“XX” is not a 16 BCD data type.Enter a value between 0~9999.If the size and form of the device is 16 bit BCD, you must set theconditional range between 0 and 9,999.“XX” is not a 16 bit signed datatype. Enter a value between -32768~32767.If the device size and type is signed 16 bit, you must set theconditional range between 32,768 and 32,767.“XX” is not a 16 bit unsigned datatype. Enter a value between0~65535.If the device size and type is unsigned 16 bit, you must set theconditional range between 0 and 65,535.“XX” is not a 32 bit BCD data type.Enter a value between0~99999999.If the device size and type is 32 bit BCD, you must set theconditional range between 0 and 99,999,999.“XX” is not a 32 bit signed datatype. Enter a value between -2147483648 and 2147483647.If the device size and type is signed 32 bit, you must set theconditional range between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.A mobile GIF cannot be used as animage of an object/figure.Select another image type.A temporary directory is a place tostore a temporary XGT file, so youcannot save or open a file here.You cannot save or open files in the temporary directory. Specifyanother file location.Caption “XX” cannot be alldisplayed with the currently setfont “YY.” Choose the font meetingthe entered contents.This error occurs when the selected font cannot display thedouble-byte characters used in the caption. Change the font ortranslate the caption into a language that is supported by theselected font.Changed into an indirect method.All the expressions of the builtconditional sentences are deleted.This message appears when the method of selecting themessage or display for the word message, word component, orword window has been changed from [Status] to [Condition].3. Error Messages3-11Error Message How to Resolve the ErrorCommunication connection hasbeen failed.There is no connection to the XGT Panel. Check the connectionto the XGT Panel and the communication settings.Connection passwords aredifferent.The password you entered is incorrect. Re-enter the connectionpassword for the XGT Panel.Disconnected. Try again afterconnection.This error occurs when the XGT Panel is disconnected. Check theconnection between your computer and the XGT Panel andensure that the communication settings are correct.Edit device is Read-Only. Usewritable device.Device input fails when the object does not support writing.Some objects support both reading and writing, but otherdevices, such as lamps, are read-only devices. To support deviceinput, you must use a writable device, such as a switch, numberinput, or character input object. For more information aboutobject types, refer to <4.3 Objects>.File transformation error This error occurs when the file to be transferred cannot be read,due to an error in the file. Download the project to the XGTPanel again. Refer to <2.8.1 Transferring to an XGT Panel>.Graphic library load has beenfailed.The image library is corrupt or damaged. You must create a newimage library.More than 10M cannot bedownloaded.The XGT panel that is currently connected has only 10 MB ofavailable memory. You cannot transfer a file larger than 10 MB.No reply within the set period ordisconnectedThis error may occur during data transfer. Check the connectionbetween your computer and the XGT Panel and the power cablefor the XGT Panel.Object library load has been failed. The object library is corrupt or damaged. You must create a newobject library.Password setting has been failed. The new password cannot be set. Check the connection to theXGT Panel and the communication settings.Problem with data This error occurs when incorrect data is included in the transfer.Try the transfer again.Save the project file. Enter a file name and save the project file.Save the project first. This error occurs when you attempt to transfer a project withoutsaving it first. Save the project and try again.Shift to the XGT Panel programupdate mode.This error occurs when you attempt to update the XGT Panelwhile the panel is in the normal operating mode, instead of theupdate mode. On the XGT Panel, touch and hold the screen toaccess the XGT Panel menu, and then select the update mode.3. Error Messages3-12Error Message How to Resolve the ErrorThe “XX” set lines exceed themaximum display range.The number of lines set in the object exceeds the horizontaldimensions of the screen.The “XX” set rows exceed themaximum display range.The number of rows set in the object exceeds the verticaldimensions of the screen. Set the number of rows below themaximum.The backup data you want todownload is not in XGT Panel.This error occurs when there is no backup data in the XGT Panel.The backup path has beenincorrectly designated.The download path for the font or image file is incorrect. Ensurethat a USB drive is connected or a CF card is installed in the XGTPanel and then modify the download path in the projectproperties information.The color is a user library largerthan the number of colors that anXGT model can have now.The XGT Panel that is currently connected does not supportcolor. You must change the project settings to black and whiteor connect to an XGT Panel that supports color.The compressed project file youwant to download is not in the XGTPanel.This error occurs when a compressed project file does not existon the XGT Panel. To include the compressed project file whentransferring a project to an XGT Panel, refer to <2.8.1Transferring to an XGT Panel>.The executable file in the deviceand the executable file to send arenot the same.The executable file has been modified. Transfer the entire projectto the XGT Panel.The file already exists. Would youoverwrite?A file with the same name exists in the directory you specified.Click [Yes] to select another destination for the file or [Cancel] todiscontinue saving the file.The file cannot be read. Checkwhether another program is beingused.The download file is locked. This may occur if the project file isbeing accessed by another connected computer. If that is case,ensure that the project is not open by more than one computerand try again.The file is not writable. Check thedisk memory.This error occurs when there is insufficient memory in the XGTPanel to store the file. Check the memory in the XGT Panel andmake additional memory available, if necessary.The maximum value must be largerthan the minimum value.Set the maximum value to be larger than the minimum value.The number of characters that canbe displayed should be an evennumber.Set the number of characters in the character indicator andcharacter input/output units to an even number.The number of the X axis displays The range of acceptable display numbers has been exceeded. 3. Error Messages3-13Error Message How to Resolve the Errorthat can be selected is between 3and 120. Check and enter again.Set the number of X axis displays in the trend graph [Display]between 3 and 120.The password is incorrect. Enter the correct password.The previous project information isnot available.An earlier version of the project does not exist on the XGT Panel.Transfer the entire project to the XGT Panel. Refer to <2.8.1Transferring to an XGT Panel>.The print template file does notexist.The excel template for printing does not exist. You must create anew template.The project header information iswrong.The project header information is corrupt or incorrect.The project ID is not correct. The project IDs in XP-Builder and the XGT Panel are different.Transfer the entire project to the XGT Panel. Refer to <2.8.1Transferring to an XGT Panel>.The selectable display numbers arefrom 1 to 4095. Check the numberand enter again.The range of acceptable display numbers has been exceeded.Specify a display number between 1 and 4,095.The simulator cannot be executed. The simulator file does not exist. You must create a newsimulator file.The total number of figures shouldbe larger than the number offigures below the decimal point.Set the total number of figures larger than the number of figuresbelow the decimal point.The upload file is the same as theopened project file and cannot besaved. Do you want to specifyanother directory?You cannot overwrite the project file, because it is open. Click[Yes] to select another destination for the file or [Cancel] todiscontinue saving the file. To overwrite the project file, ensurethe original file is closed and then try again.The XGT Panel model does notmatch the model set in the editor.This error occurs when you attempt to transfer a project to anXGT Panel model that is not the same as you have set in theproject properties. Change the XGT Panel model n the projectproperties or transfer the project to the same type of panel youhave specified in the project properties. Refer to <2.2.2 Viewingand Editing Properties>.There is no executable file in thedevice. Send the entire XGT filefirst.The executable file has been modified or is incomplete. Transferthe entire project to the XGT Panel.This is not a 32 bit unsigned datatype. Enter a value between0~4294967295.If the device size and type is 32 bit decimal, you must set theconditional range between 0 and 4,294,967,295.3. Error Messages3-14Error Message How to Resolve the ErrorThis project has an error. Check thetool-data.Recheck your data and correct any errors before transferring theproject.[Working]/[Engine connectionstatus is in early stage]. Try again.The XGT Panel is in the operational mode, instead of the updatemode. Tap and hold the XGT Panel screen to open the menu.Then, tap [Update HMI Engine] and select the engine downloadmode.Wrong display number. A display with the same number exists or the range ofacceptable display numbers has been exceeded. Change thedisplay number.XGT INI file open error The initialization file for transferring the XGT Panel engine ismissing or in use. Ensure that the initialization file is not in useand try transferring the project again.XGT model types are not the same. Change the XGT Panel model in the project properties ortransfer the project to a different XGT Panel.XGT Panel is not ready to receive. XGT Panel is carrying out another operation. Wait a moment andtry again.You can select only mobile GIFimages.Select a mobile GIF image.4. Reference4-14. Reference4.1 Common DataCommon data properties apply to the entire project. The following table describes common data typesand their limitations.Type Description LimitTag Allows convenient management ofdevices when you register deviceaddresses and enter tags forcommonly-used functions.10,000 per tagText Table Stores commonly used text. You caninvoke text from the text table withvarious objects.255 tables10,001 entries per text tableLogging Records and saves monitored data ina file.32 logsBit: 64, Word: 100Recipe Sets write or read values based on theconditions specified.10,000 device recipes255 basic recipes/65,535 recipe data5,000 file recipe conditionsFlow Alarm Streams text across the bottom of theXGT Panel screen when a certaincondition is met.10,000 devicesHistory Alarm Saves the device value when a certaincondition is met. You can also use thisfunction with the special switchobject.10,000• up to 8 groups at the root• each group supports 4structure levels (depth 4)• up to 8 child per groupScheduler Executes operations at specifiedtimes.32Script Controls objects and functions withprogram commands.N/ASound Emits sounds from the XGT Panel. 5124. Reference4-2TagsYou can use tags to perform various functions. Tags can be used anywhere a device address can beentered and, when you change the value of a tag, the change will be applied to all devices with the sametag.In the device field, you can enter a tag manually or click the keypad to the right of the field to specify thetag. When you enter a tag name manually, enter “=” as the first character. The checkmark icon willchange to a “T” to indicate a tag.To create a tag:1 In the Project pane, double-click [Tag]. This will open a Tag tab in the editing area.2 In the Tag Group tree, click the Default tag group (System tags cannot be edited).3 In the tag list, set the tag name, device type, address, and a description for the tag.Type DescriptionNumbers A name cannot begin with a number (e.g., “3ABCD”).Special Character The following special characters are allowed in the tag names:“_(underscore)”, “%”, “$”, “#”, ”@”, “&”, “*”.Blank Character Blank characters before or after the name are not regarded as apart of the tag name.Device Name A device address expression cannot be used as a name (e.g.,“D0012,” or “%MW123”).Hexadecimal Number A hexadecimal number (ex. H234) cannot be used as a name.Note• Tag names must be unique. The below table describes rules for tag names.• All tags are registered on a single table. The changes made to the table affect all theobjects where the tag is used.• Consecutive copying is not performed when you specify a device address with a tag.• You can double-click the title column in the table to sort the list in ascending ordescending order.4. Reference4-3Two types of tags are available: system tags and user-defined tags. The following table describes thesystem tags available in XP-Builder.Name Type Device Description_NVRAM_Low_Battery BIT HS0950.0 The voltage of the XGT Panel battery islow._NVRAM_Invalid_Data BIT HS0950.1 The XGT Panel’s SRAM memory isdamaged._No_Logging_Backup_StorageBIT HS0951.0 External memory for logging backup isnot available._No_Recipe_Backup_StorageBIT HS0951.1 External memory for recipe backup is notavailable._No_Screen_Backup_StorageBIT HS0951.2 External memory for saving the project isnot available._No_Printer BIT HS0951.4 No printer is connected._USB_Over_Current_WarningBIT HS0950.8 An overcurrent from the connected USBdrive was detected._No_Alarm_Backup_StorageBIT HS0951.3 External memory for alarm backup is notavailable._ON BIT HS0000.0 Always contains the value On._OFF BIT HS0000.1 Always contains the value Off._T200MS BIT HS0000.6 Alternates between On and Off every 200milliseconds._T1S BIT HS0000.7 Alternates between On and Off everysecond._T2S BIT HS0000.8 Alternates between On and Off every 2seconds._T5S BIT HS0000.9 Alternates between On and Off every 5seconds._T10S BIT HS0000.A Alternates between On and Off every 10seconds._T30S BIT HS0000.B Alternates between On and Off every 30seconds._T60S BIT HS0000.C Alternates between On and Off every 60seconds.4. Reference4-4Name Type Device Description_OSVER_MAJ WORD HS0001 Display the OS version info (Major) of theXGT Panel._OSVER_MIN WORD HS0002 Display the OS version info (Minor) of theXGT Panel._YEAR WORD HS0004 Time info [Year] for the XGT Panel._MON WORD HS0005 Time info [Month] for the XGT Panel._DAY WORD HS0006 Time info [Day] for the XGT Panel._HOUR WORD HS0007 Time info [Hour] for the XGT Panel._MIN WORD HS0008 Time info [Minute] for the XGT Panel._SEC WORD HS0009 Time info [Second] for the XGT Panel._BASESCREEN_NO WORD HS0010 Display the number of the current Basescreen._GLOBALWNG1_NO WORD HS0011 Display the number of the #1 globalwindow._GLOBALWNG2_NO WORD HS0012 Display the number of the #2 globalwindow._SECURITY_NO WORD HS0013 Display a defined security level._ZERO WORD HS0014 Always contain the value of zero._C500MS WORD HS0015 Increase value by 1 every 500milliseconds._C1S WORD HS0016 Increase value by 1 every second._C2S WORD HS0017 Increase value by 1 every 2 seconds._C5S WORD HS0018 Increase value by 1 every 5 seconds._C10S WORD HS0019 Increase value by 1 every 10 seconds._Change_to_Screen WORD HS0500 The device to change the Base screen(operates in window change mode)._DAY_OF_WEEK WORD HS0003 Time info [Day of week] for the XGT Panel(Sun=0 to Sat=6)._T50MS BIT HS0000.4 Alternates between On and Off every 50milliseconds._T100MS BIT HS0000.5 Alternates between On and Off every 100milliseconds.4. Reference4-5Name Type Device Description_T500MS BIT HS0000.F Alternates between On and Off every 500milliseconds._No_Memo_Backup_StorageBIT HS0951.5 No external backup memory available._XPLinkParam_Load_ErrorBIT HS0100.2 Failed to process the parameter uploadedfrom XP-Manager._XP_VNC_Sever_ON BIT HS0100.1 XP-VNC server is running._Web_Sever_ON BIT HS0100.2 Web server is running._Size_All_Flash_Low WORD HS0027 The total flash memory capacity (loworder, double word)._Size_All_Flash_High WORD HS0029 The total flash memory capacity (highorder, double word)._Size_Available_Flash_LowWORD HS0031 The available flash memory capacity (loworder, double word)._Size_Available_Flash_HighWORD HS0033 The available flash memory capacity(high-order, double word)._Size_All_USB_Low WORD HS0035 The total USB memory capacity (loworder, double word)._Size_All_USB_High WORD HS0037 The total USB memory capacity (highorder, double word)._Size_Available_USB_LowWORD HS0039 The available capacity of USB storage(Low-order, double word)._Size_Available_USB_HighWORD HS0041 The available capacity of USB memory(High-order, double word)._Size_All_CF_Low WORD HS0043 The total CF card memory capacity (loworder, double word)._Size_All_CF_High WORD HS0045 The total CF card memory capacity (highorder, double word)._Size_Available_CF_Low WORD HS0047 The available CF card memory capacity(low-order, double word)._Size_Available_CF_HighWORD HS0049 The available CF card memory capacity(high-order, double word)._USB_Attatched BIT HS0051.0 Display whether or not the USB storagedevice is connected.4. Reference4-6Name Type Device Description_CF_Attatched BIT HS0051.1 Display whether or not the CF card isconnected._N1_Token BIT HS0070.0 Connected with a token during N: 1communication._N1_Token_Hold BIT HS0501.0 Set the panel to hold the token for aspecified time._N1_Token_Station WORD HS0071 Display the station number of the nodeholding the token during N: 1communication._IDLE_TIME_COUNTER WORD HS0502 Increase the count every second that youdo not touch the panel or use the mousepointer._XP_VNC_INTERLOCK BIT HS0503.0 When turned on, a user connected viaXP-VNC cannot make inputs with amouse or keyboard._N1_Token_Count WORD HS0072 Display the acquired number of the tokenduring N: 1 communication._N1_Station WORD HS0073 Display the station number of the XGTPanel during N: 1 communication._1_ON BIT HS0000.D Set to turn on the first time devices arescanned. The tag is skipped onsubsequent scans. You can use this tag toinitialize a program._Enable_XP_Remote BIT HS0504.0 Display whether or not the device can beoperated with XP-Remote._Has_Ctrl_Right BIT HS0075.0 Display whether or not the XGT Panel hasthe right to operate. If XP-Remote has theright, it turns off._XP_Remote_Count WORD HS0076 Display the number of XP-Remoteinstances that are connected to an XGTPanel._Ctrl_Right_XP_Remote_ID WORD HS0077 Display the ID of an XP-Remote instancethat has the right to operate._Ctrl_Right_XP_Remote_IP WORD HS0078 Display the IP address of an XP-Remoteinstance that has the right to operate (32-bit).4. Reference4-7Name Type Device Description_RS232C_Over_Current_WarningBIT HS0950.9 Overcurrent detected in an XGT Panelfrom a PLC connected via RS-232C (onlyfor the iXP series)._VM_Mod_Over_Current_WarningBIT HS0950.A Overcurrent detected in an XGT Panelfrom a PLC connected via the VM module(only for the iXP series)._EXT_Mod_Over_Current_WarningBIT HS0950.B Overcurrent detected in an XGT Panelfrom a PLC connected via the expandedmode (only for the iXP series)._No_Sound_File_StorageBIT HS0951.8 No external memory for saving the soundfile is available._SD_Attatched BIT HS0051.2 Display whether or not the SD card isconnected._Size_All_SD_Low WORD HS0058 The total SD card memory capacity (loworder, double word)._Size_All_SD_High WORD HS0060 The total SD card memory capacity (highorder, double word)._Size_Available_SD_Low WORD HS0062 The available SD card memory capacity(low-order, double word)._Size_Available_SD_HighWORD HS0064 The available SD card memory capacity(high-order, double word)._Alarm_Norecovery_Device_NumWORD HS0093 Device shows number of unrecoveredalarms._Alarm_Norconfirm_Device_NumWORD HS0084 Device shows number of unconfirmedalarms._BARCODE_SAVEIN_KEYCODEBIT HS0501.2 Save keyboard input to barcode device_BARCODE_INITIAL_TIME WORD HS0507 Wait timeout for storing keyboardinput data._XP_VNC_Server_Control BIT HS0503.1 VNC Server Control4. Reference4-8To set a tag as a device address:1 Double-click on an object to open the properties window.2 In the device field, enter a tag manually or click the keypad to the right of the field to specify the tag.When you enter a tag name manually, enter “=” as the first character. The checkmark icon will changeto a “T” to indicate a tag.3 Check the checkbox next to Tag.4 Select a tag group and a tag. You can view the available tag list.4. Reference4-95 Click [OK]. The tag icon will appear in the device field.Note• When you enter a new tag name or “=new tag,” you can register a new tag.• Changing the tag type (bit or word) can cause errors.To delete a tag:1 Select tags in the tag table.2 Press the Delete key on the keyboard.However, if the tag is used in the project, the following message is displayed and it is not deleted. Inthis case, you must use Find / Change to find the object or element being used in the system todelete the tag or delete after changing the tag.With XG5000 software, you can export all the tags used in a project, and then import them into XPBuilder.To import a file of tags from the XG5000:1 Right-click a tag group.2 Click [Import XG5000 Variable].3 Click and open a file containing tag data (*.csv).4. Reference4-104 Click [Open]. This will create a new tag group (“NewPLC”).Note• Follow the instructions to export tag data to a CSV file.1. Run an XG5000 program of version 3.0 or higher.2. Click [Project] ▶ [Save as Variables/Comment].3. Select the variables and click [OK].4. Reference4-11• If the PLC type is different when you import the data, an error will occur.4. Reference4-12Text TablesText tables allow you to store and manage text for reuse, translation, and simplified management. Theadvantage of using text tables is that you can register text strings and then use them throughout theproject. For example, you can fetch text from a text table to use as an object caption and format the color,size, and other font properties. You can also create multilingual interfaces by adding language columnsto the text table and registering translations for the text strings.The following are examples of text table applications for bit and word messages based on the deviceconditions.4. Reference4-13To create a text table:1 In the Project pane, right-click [Text Table].2 Click [Insert].3 Enter text and set properties, such as font color and typeface.Note• Window title: When a string for a window title is taken from a text table, text propertiesof the text string in the table, such as font size, colors, and other text styles (italic,underlined, bold, etc.), are ignored. The selected string is displayed in the title section ofthe window in white 15 px characters.• Sorting the text table: You can double-click the title column in the table (except for thecolor column) to sort the list in ascending or descending order. When you enter text in a text table, the text appears in the language currently set in the projectproperties.To specify languages in a text table:1 In the Project pane, double-click a text table to open it.2 Right-click anywhere in the text table and click [Property].4. Reference4-143 Click languages from the language list and then click [OK]. Columns for alternate text will be addedfor as many languages as you select in the language list.4 Enter the translation of the string in the appropriate field.4. Reference4-15 It will be available for display in objects when the user selects the alternative language from thedrop-down list on the XP-Builder toolbar. To add additional languages to the list of supportedlanguages, refer to <2.2.2.6 Changing Languages>.NoteTo support multiple languages, the operating system you are using must support the language as well.To apply text from a text table:1 Create an object that supports the use of text tables (see the table that follows).2 Click [Text] in the object property window or click [Header] for a History Alarm Viewer object. Toapply the text table to a Flow Alarm or History Alarm, select one of the text tables from the TextTable Name field in the Flow Alarm editing area or the Text Table field in the History Alarm editingarea.3 Select a text table:Type DescriptionBit Message Click [On] or [Off] ▶ [Text Table].4. Reference4-16Type DescriptionWord Message Select the message on Basic tab.[Message Device]: Selecting message number on the text table todisplay.- Indirect: Displays message of the number corresponding to thedevice value on the text table.- Case: Displays message that meets the conditions set in the Text tab.- Fixed: Displays the message on the text table selected.- Device: Select the text table corresponding to the device value.Bit SwitchWord SwitchChange ScreenSwitchSpecial SwitchMulti SwitchBit LampWord LampN-State LampCheck the checkbox next to Use Caption, check the checkbox next toFrom Text Table, and then click [Text Table].History AlarmViewerClick [From Text Table in Header Edit] and double-click the Title area.4 Select a text string (if necessary).4. Reference4-17NoteYou can set the text to appear differently based on the value of the device.You can automatically add object captions to a text table.To create a text table of captions:1 Create objects with text captions on the editing area.2 Click [Tool] ▶ [Register Object Caption to Text Table Automatically].3 Enter a name for the text table, select an editing language, and click [OK]. The text table will appear inthe Project pane. You can double-click the name of the text table in the Project pane to ensure that the captionshave been listed on the text table.Note• Up to 10,001 strings can be registered to the text table. To add more than 10,001 entries, you mustcreate a new text table.• A total of 255 string pages can be created in the Text table, and IDs and names can be changeddirectly on the tree. The ID is from 1 to 65534 (1 to 255 for economic type).4. Reference4-18• If the following message appears when you delete the text table page from the tree or change theID, it means that the table is being used in the project. In this case, you need to first find out theelements used for deletion by Find/Replace All, or change them to a text table with a different ID.4. Reference4-19LoggingYou can use up to 32 logs to record and save device values to a file when specified conditions are met.Logging can be used to trace device trends. You can view the logs in the Logging Viewer or LoggingTrend Graph object. Refer to <4.3.11 Logging Viewer Object> for detailed information.Type DescriptionPeriodical Logging(Time)Logging starts on a specified schedule and is repeated periodically, asspecified in the scheduler. The log can repeat up to 100 times. When therepetition timer reaches the specified limit, the device values are saved inthe file.The example below shows three logging data in 10-minute intervals.Periodical Logging (BitDevice)When the logging device turns on, logging begins.You can set the logging intervals and repetition numbers.Conditional Logging (BitDevice)Logging begins when the logging device is changed, or when it is turnedon or off. Logging does not repeat, unless the device is changed, or it isturned on or off again.4. Reference4-20To create a log:1 In the Project pane, double-click [Logging]. This will open a Logging tab in the editing area.2 Double-click anywhere in a field to specify the following settings. Logging Device:Function DescriptionNo. The number of the log.Target Device Specify the device to read. Enter the device address manually orclick the keypad to the right of the field to specify a device.Device Count Specify the number of devices to read consecutively from thestart device- In case of target device is Bit: maximum of 64 bits- In case of target device is word: maximum 100 words.Description Enter a description for the logging process.4. Reference4-21 Logging Condition:Function DescriptionPeriod Specify a period for logging: every hour, every day, everyweek, every month, or once. Use the dropdown menu to set aspecific operating interval. For example, if you select “Everyhour”, you can set the specific minute when the logging willoccur. If you do not specify the minute, the logging will occurevery hour, on the hour.Device (BIT) Specify a bit device and condition to trigger periodic logging(rising edge or falling edge).Repeat By Set the number of repetitions for the logging operation (max.255 times). The starting point for repeating the loggingoperation is when the device condition is met.Repeat Period Set the file recording cycle, if logging conditions are met.Device(BIT) fromConditional LoggingSpecify a bit device and condition to trigger conditionallogging (rising edge, falling edge, or on change).Logging Progress Specify the device that will display the logging process. Thebit device stays turned on until the cycle is completed.Stop Logging Specify a device to stop logging. Logging stops when thespecified devices turns on. Once logging stops, it does notcontinue on the next cycle or repetition. The stop loggingdevice operates on the rising edge.4. Reference4-22Function DescriptionLogging Area Full Specify a device to activate when the storage area (NVRAM)for logging data is full.Clear Logging Area Specify a device to clear the storage area for logging data.When the device turns on, data in the specified area isdeleted.Logging Area ClearCompleteSpecify a device to activate when data in the storage area forlogging data is deleted.Note• If you set the periodic logging setting to Period, you can set the logging to repeatup to 255 times. Logging starts at the time you set and repeats as many times asspecified at the designated period.• If you set the periodic logging setting to Device (Bit Device), logging starts when thebit device is turned on or off and repeats as many times as specified at thedesignated period.Repetition cycleLoggingExamples of periodic conditional operationSetting: Repeat 4 timesLogging starttimer ONRepetitiontimer ONLoggingprogressLogging start timer ON4. Reference4-23 Backup Area/Buffer Manage/Backup CSV Format:Function DescriptionStorage forBackup DataSet a storage area for logging backup data.Refer to <4.7.1.1 File Path for Logging Backup> for detailedinformation about storing backup files.Use Ring Buffer Set this option to overwrite logging data when the storage area isfull. Otherwise logs cannot be saved even if the condition is met.Overwriting occurs from the oldest file.4. Reference4-24Function DescriptionThis option cannot be used in conjunction with the Auto backupif area full option.Do Not Clear LogArea at BackupSet to retain logging data when data is backed up to the areaspecified in the project properties. When logging data is backedup, the data in the internal memory is deleted. However, somespecific objects, such as the logging trend object, need to retaindata even though it is backed up. At this time, set this option toretain the data. If you set this option, the logging area setting ischanged to Use Ring Buffer automatically.Auto Backup ifArea FullSet to back up logging data automatically when the storage areafor logging data is full. This option cannot be used in conjunctionwith the Use ring buffer option. When the storage for loggingdata is full, it is backed up to the specified location. After backup,the data is deleted, and then the new data is saved from the firstspace......Logging data nLogging data 5Logging data 4Logging data 3Logging data 2Logging data 1Storage location isshifted and thelogging data isrecorded from thefirst space.4. Reference4-25Function DescriptionBackup Device Specify a device to trigger the backing up of logging data.Send E-mail afterBackup DoneSet to send an email when logging data is backed up.Complete Device Specify a device to activate when logging data is backed up.Setting CSV FileFormatClick to specify the layout of backup data in a CSV file. Refer to the section that follows for detailedinformation.File Type Select a backup file type (CSV, Encrypted CSV, CSV+PDF).A CSV file can be opened using applications such as Memo Padand MS Excel. An encrypted CSV file (with the file extension CSVE)can be converted to a CSV file using the CSV Converter ([Tool]-[CSV file converter]). Refer to <4.6 Using the CSV Converter> formore details.File Name Device Specify a device to contain the file name of backup data.From the specified device, four consecutive word devices are usedas the file name. If the device fails to read the data or the namestring does not exist in the data, the backup file is saved as“noname.CSV.”BYTE Swap of FileNameSet to run a byte swap for the string value when using the filename device.File Name Length Set the length (in bytes) of the file name.Append Data toCSV FileSet to add new backup data to the end of the previous CSV file.By default, the logs that are backed up as the appendix to a CSV 4. Reference4-26Function Descriptionfile are stored without creating the date folder. You can select the‘File Generation as Date/Time Folder structure’ option to createnew folders by dates and store the backup files in the folders.Creating folder structures by dates is explained in <4.7 ManagingExternal Storage Sources for Backup>.Number ofBackup Data inCSV FileSet the number of logs to save in a CSV file (maximum of 65,000).Create LoggingNo. DirectoryWhen logging, number directory is created and backed up below.If this feature is disabled (unchecked), backup file is createdwithout creating number directory. However, only one of severalloggings can be disabled (unchecked) “Create Logging No.Directory.” CSV + PDF File BackUp (Version 3.20 or later applied):* PDF file backup is only available on the iXP, iXP2, wXP models.Function Description4. Reference4-27Function DescriptionFile Type Select a backup file type (CSV, Encrypted CSV, CSV+PDF).A CSV file can be opened using applications such asMemo Pad and MS Excel. An encrypted CSV file (with thefile extension CSVE) can be converted to a CSV file usingthe CSV Converter ([Tool]-[CSV file converter]). Refer to<4.6 Using the CSV Converter> for more details.Backup Device If the file type set as “CSV + PDF”,• CSV file: The data saved in the logging datastorage area (NVRAM) is saved to the designatedstorage.• PDF file: adds the contents of the CSV file to thetemplate file (.xls format) entered by the user andbacks it up as a pdf file. The PDF file name andpath are the same as the CSV file and theextension is PDF.If the “Auto Backup if area full” option is set, CSV filebackup is performed when the storage space is used upand PDF files are also backed up.Complete Device Turns on when both CSV file and PDF backup to thedesignated storage are successful.Setting CSV File Format Click to specify the layout of backup data in a CSV file.Refer to the section thatfollows for detailed information.File Name Device Specify a device to contain the file name of backup data.From the specified device, four consecutive word devicesare used as the file name. If the device fails to read thedata or the name string does not exist in the data, thebackup file is saved as “noname.CSV.”File Name Length Set the length (in bytes) of the file name.Byte Swap of File Name Set to run a byte swap for the string value when using thefile name device.PDF Report – Device inProgress of BackupDisplays the backup status of PDF files. If the PDF file isbeing backed up, the device turns “ON” and when it iscompleted, it turns “OFF”. Unlike CSV backup, PDF filebackup cannot be backed up to multiple files at the sametime, and the next PDF backup is performed only when theprevious PDF backup is completed. Therefore, when a PDFfile backup is requested, if the device is “ON” duringbackup, the PDF backup function is not performed.4. Reference4-28Function DescriptionPDF Report – TemplateFileThis is a form file to output the contents backed up in theCSV file. The template file format only supports .xls (97-2003 excel) format. The user can output the data to beprinted as a PDF file by entering reserved words in thetemplate file.- List of available reserved wordsReserved Word Input Value Requiredor Not#FILEDATE Date of the PDF file wascreatedX#NUMBER Total number of times logginghas occurred (Num. of logvalue in CSV file)X#DATE Time when logging wasperformed (Value of Data linein CSV file)X#STATUS Whether logging is successful(Status line value is CSV file)X#DATA0, DATA1,…Logging Data (Ex. #DATA0 =<logging value of index 0)O- Import (…): Import the template file on the project using[Import]. If the set template file is re-edited or changed, itis applied to the project until [Import] is performed again.The last application date and time of the template file aredisplayed on the screen when [Import] is performed.- Export: User can [Export] the template file set/saved inthe project to the path that user wants to save.PDF Report - Font Set the font used for PDF backup. Only 1 font can be setregardless of the number of CSV + PDF file backups.Depending on the font, Korean, English, or multilingualsupport is different. If the font you set does not supportthe language in the template file, the characters may bebroken or not visible.Delete old file if disk isfullThe oldest CSV and PDF files will be deleted if the option“Delete old file if disk is full” is set in the logging data area.PDF Backup Model PDF file backup is only available on the iXP, iXP2, wXPmodels.4. Reference4-29Note• Template file- Reserved words (#NUMBER, #DATE, #STATUS, #DATA0, #DATA…, etc.) foroutputting CSV file data in the template file must all be entered on the same line.- Only the first sheet of the template file can be converted to PDF• PDF size and data output size.- The converted PDF size is A4 size, and the orientation is based on the orientationof the template file (.xls) file (can be modified in print settings).- The maximum number of columns that can be printed is 255. If the lineexceeds the A4 size, it continues to the next page.- The text, image size, etc. in the cells displayed in the PDF are determined inproportion to the fixed size (A4 standard).• Font- Some Korean fonts are not compatible with the PDF conversion, so Koreancharacters may not be output properly. In this case, use a compatible font as shownbelow.- Korean compatible fonts: Gulim, Batang, Dodum, Malgun Gothic, Gungseo• PDF conversion items- Some character formats (text color, fill color, etc.) are supported, and characterstyles such as Bold and Italic are not supported.- Support for merged cells.- Image files (bmp, png, gif, jpg format) are supported.- Data such as functions, charts, graphs, etc. other than text and images are notconverted to PDF. Logging Common Property:The total size of all logging areas cannot exceed the size of each type of logging area.4. Reference4-30Function Descriptiona. Logging Area Set the size of the data saving area for each log.The logging area can be calculated by the number, size,and frequency of devices.b. Logging Area Size Calculate the size of the area required to save loggingdata:• Bit: [(Repeat count + 1) * 24].The storage size that occurs at one time is fixed to24bytes. Bit is unconditional(DWORD64), regardless of thedevice count.• Word: [(Repeat count + 1) * (Device count *2 + 16)].In case of word, one header of 16bytes is recorded beforelogging.• Double word: [[(Repeat count + 1) * (Device count *4 +16)].NoteThe maximum size of a logging area varies by the panel type:• iXP/IPC/iXP2 Series: 510 KB• XP Series TTA model: 256 KB• XP Series BTE/TTE models and eXP Series: 64 KBa b4. Reference4-31To set an external location for backing up log data:1 Click [Common] ▶ [Project Property Setting] ▶ [Storage Settings].2 Set the backup storage location in Logging data.To specify the format for backup data:1 In the Project pane, double-click [Logging].2 Double-click a log entry to open the Logging window.3 Click [Backup Area/Buffer Manage/Backup CSV Format].4 Set the location for backup data in the Storage for backup data field.5 Click [Setting CSV file format].6 Specify the following options:DataInformation4. Reference4-32Function DescriptionFrom Text Table Set to import header information from a text table.Header Specify a header for the backup file. If you select the From TextTable option, click [Header] to locate the table.Data Format Set the format for displaying the time and date.Digits Set how many digits are used for data.Decimal Digits Set how many decimal digits are used for data.Zero Fill If you have selected right justification, select this option toinsert zeros (0) before the number.Apply all the Logging Click to change the backup format for all log data.Close Save your changes and close the dialog boxData Information The number of data columns shown varies based on the numberof logging devices specified.Store as a Single String The logged data is not interpreted as numbers but as characterstrings when they are saved as a file.Language Select the language to use for the saved logging data. If thelogged data is saved as character strings during a backup oflogging data, the data is interpreted as Unicode values andsaved as character strings. Character strings are saved on adevice in multibyte format and a conversion table (also referredto as a code page) is needed to convert the multibyte format toUnicode format.One language in [Project Property setting]–[Language]–[Multilingual font] can be selected at a time. Therefore, if aKorean font is specified in [Project Property setting]–[Language]–[Multilingual font], Korean must be selected as thelanguage for logging backup before Korean language loggingdata can be displayed during logging backup.Refer to <2.2.2.6 Changing Languages> for more information.4. Reference4-33RecipesYou can use recipes to save and reuse process data. You can write or read data to a large number ofconsecutive devices with recipes. You must set both read and write devices to execute recipes.Two types of recipes are available: basic and file recipes.Type DescriptionBasic Export data to non-volatile internal memory in an XGT Panel or to external memory devices.If the power supply to the XGT Panel is interrupted, the most recent data is saved on theNVRAM. The saved data is used for reading or writing operation when monitoring resumes.File The data is stored in a CSV file. You can store the file on an external device, such as a USBdrive or CF card, to run it on an HMI.The name of the file recipe is written as shown below:• /Storage Card_root/XP_Recipe/XPR00000.CSV• /USB Storage_root/XP_Recipe/XPR00000.CSVRefer to <4.7.1.2 Path for Recipe Backup> for detailed information about storing thebackup files.When you open the CSV file, you can view the data as shown below:Basic RecipesThe following examples explain the read and write operation using basic recipes.Read device operationWhen the read device is in a rising or falling edge, data is read from the specified starting device addressfor as many devices as have been specified.4. Reference4-344. Reference4-35Write device operationWhen the write device is in a rising or falling edge, data is written from the specified starting deviceaddress to as many devices as have been specified.4. Reference4-364. Reference4-37To create a basic recipe:1 In the Project pane, right-click [Basic Recipe].2 Click [Insert].3 Set the following properties:Option DescriptionName The name of the recipe. You can register up to 255 recipes (1 to255). If you want to change the name, right-click the recipe name inthe Project pane and click [Rename].Device Set the device address to transfer the recipe data.Data type View the data type of the device. When you enter the value in thedata block, the data type is changed according to the data type.Description Enter a description for the recipe.No. of Device Set the number of devices. Recipe data will be transferredconsecutively from as many devices as you specify.Block count Set the number of data blocks. The maximum number of availableblocks is 255 (0–254).a. Device View the device list. Recipes use consecutive data sets, so youcannot set each device address.b. Data The block number is assigned starting from 0 and you cannotchange it. If you reduce the block number, the data set with biggestblock number is deleted first.NoteThe writing and reading functions cannot be executed simultaneously. When two devicesmeet the same condition simultaneously, writing will be performed first.a b4. Reference4-38Updating and Maintaining Default Recipe DataRecipe data files are stored in the XGT Panel’s non-volatile memory or on an external storage device. Themost recently saved data is retained even when the power is turned off. When the power is turned onagain and device monitoring begins, the last stored data is used for subsequent read and writeoperations.If the recipe data is set to be saved on an external storage device and not in SRAM, the recipe data isrecorded in a file format on the storage device when monitoring begins. The file content is updatedwhen the recipe data read operation is performed. Changes are retained as long as the file remains onthe storage device, and the file is generated again when it is deleted or another storage unit is mounted.In this situation, the previously updated data is not retained and is reset to the recipe data that is initiallyset in XP-Builder.The recipe data is not deleted when there is a partial download or when the download is only of thechanges in the project. However, the stored recipe data is deleted in all downloads if the [Delete allmonitoring data] option is selected.Backup and Restoration of Default Recipe DataThe default recipe data can be backed up in the CSV file format. One backup file is generated for eachrecipe. To restore default recipe data to a selected file, select a backup file from the File Explorer objectand click the [Restoration of Basic Recipe Backup] special switch.Refer to <4.7.1.2 Path for Recipe Backup> for detailed information about storing recipe backup files.The process of restoring the default recipe data may fail in the following situations. For informationabout data transmission errors, go to [Error Device]. The recipe file selected from File Explorer is the backup file generated by another project. The recipe setting changed after the selected backup file in File Explorer was created. A user modified the recipe backup file or the file is corrupted due to a storage device error.4. Reference4-39To set Basic recipe properties:1 In the Project pane, double-click [Recipe Property]. This will open a Recipe Property tab in the editingarea.4. Reference4-402 Set the following properties: Option DescriptionTrigger Device toWriteSet to specify a device for writing data. Set the condition totrigger the action (rising edge or falling edge). Enter thedevice address manually or click the keypad to the right ofthe device field.Trigger Device toReadSet to specify a device for reading data. Set the condition totrigger the action (rising edge or falling edge). Enter thedevice address manually or click the keypad to the right ofthe device field.Recipe Type Device Specify the device that will control the recipe type. If thelowest bit of the device is 0, a basic recipe will be executed. Ifthe lowest bit of the device is 1, a file recipe will be executed.Enter the device address manually or click the keypad to theright of the device field.Read/Write CompleteDeviceSpecify a bit device to turn on when data transfer iscompleted. Enter the device address manually or click thekeypad to the right of the device field.Basic recipe Storage Set a storage location for data from a basic recipe (Flash, CFCard, USB, or SD card).You can also configure storage options in Storage Settings inthe Project Property window.Error Device Specify a bit device to turn on when a problem occurs withthe data transfer. Enter the device address manually or clickthe keypad to the right of the device field.4. Reference4-41Option DescriptionError No. Device Specify a device to return a pre-defined error number if aproblem occurs with the data transfer. The error numbersinclude:No. Description1 There is missing data.2 The data does not match the current transmissioncondition.3 The data count exceeds the count specified by thetransmission condition.4The decimal point position used in the dataexceeds the decimal point position specified by thetransmission condition.5 The data value exceeds the maximum value of theformat specified by the transmission condition.6 The data value is less than the minimum value ofthe format specified by the transmission condition.11 The recipe number of the default recipe was notread.12 There is no recipe that corresponds to the currentlyspecified number.13 The block number of the default recipe was notread.14 There is no recipe block corresponding to thecurrently specified number.15 The transmission condition number of the filerecipe was not read.16 There is no file recipe transmission condition thatcorresponds to the currently specified number.17 The file number of the file recipe was not read.18 There is no recipe file that corresponds to thecurrently specified number.19 The data in the file recipe is not valid.20The total data count in the file recipe is less thanthe data count specified by the transmissioncondition.21 The file recipe data was not recorded.22 The specified default recipe backup file is thebackup file created by another project.23 The content of the specified default recipe backupfile is not valid.4. Reference4-42Option Description24 The recipe number of the specified default recipebackup file is not valid.25 The block size of the specified default recipebackup file is not valid.26 The block status of the specified default recipebackup file is not normal.27 The content of the specified default recipe backupfile in the data area was not written.28 The memory for the readable content of thespecified default recipe was not allocated. Option DescriptionRecipe No. Device Specify a device with a block number that will execute therecipe when the condition is met. The recipe is executed byreading the word value (unsigned 16-bit) from the device.Enter the device address manually or click the keypad to theright of the device field.Block No. Device Specify a word device that the data will be transferred towhen the condition is met. The recipe is executed by readingthe word value (unsigned 16-bit) from the device. This optioncan be used only with basic recipes. Enter the device addressmanually or click the keypad to the right of the device field.Backup Trigger Device Specify a device to back up the recipe data saved in aremovable memory device, such as a USB drive or CF card.Set a condition for backing up the data (rising edge or fallingedge).Backup CompleteDeviceSpecify a bit device to turn on when the backup is complete.4. Reference4-43Option DescriptionBackup Data Storage The backup location of the default recipe data is specified.The backup files are located in the same place as the recipedata backup files that are in [Storage Settings] in the ProjectProperty window.Refer to <4.7.1.2 Path for Recipe Backup> for detailedinformation about storing backup files.Basic Recipe Storage The location to save the default recipe is specified. If SRAMmemory is selected, data is saved in the XGT Panel. If otheroptions are selected, data is saved to a relevant externalstorage device.File Recipe NO. Device Set a word device for the file recipe number.File NO. Device Set a word device for the data file number.File recipe Storage Set a storage location for data from a file recipe (CF card, USBdevice, or SD card).File RecipesFile recipe conditions and data is edited separately. A file recipe is operated when the recipe commonsetting for [Recipe Type Device] is 1.The following examples explain the read and write operation using file recipes. 4. Reference4-44Read device operationThe file recipe reading operation begins when the [Read begin] device has a recipe common setting ofOn. The sequence for reading the file recipe is described as follows: read and write actions cannot beexecuted at the same time. The read action is executed first when two devices satisfy the same timeconditions.If the [Write begin] device is set to “On” while the [Recipe type] device value is 1, the [File recipe number]device value is 2, and the [File number] device is 3, the following is selected.4. Reference4-45Eight devices are read from HW200, and the unsigned decimal data is saved in the XPR00003.CSV file.Refer to <4.7.1.2 Path for Recipe Backup> for detailed information about storing the recipe backupfiles.Write device operationWriting data for a file recipe starts when the [Write begin] device in a recipe common setting is set to“On” (rising edge) or “Off” (falling edge). The data writing sequence is shown in the below flow chart.4. Reference4-46If the [Write begin] device is set to “On” while the [Recipe type device] value is 1, the [File recipe number]device value is 2, and the [File number] device is 3, the following is selected.4. Reference4-47The data stored in the XPR00003.CSV file is saved in 8 devices from HW200.To set file recipe properties:1 In the Project pane, double-click [Recipe Property]. This will open a Recipe Property tab in the editingarea.2 Set the following properties: 4. Reference4-48 Option DescriptionTrigger Device toWriteSet to specify a device for writing data. Set the condition totrigger the action (rising edge or falling edge). Enter thedevice address manually or click the keypad to the right ofthe device field.Trigger Device toReadSet to specify a device for reading data. Set the condition totrigger the action (rising edge or falling edge). Enter thedevice address manually or click the keypad to the right ofthe device field.Recipe Type Device Specify the device that will control the recipe type. If thelowest bit of the device is 0, a basic recipe will be executed. Ifthe lowest bit of the device is 1, a file recipe will be executed.Enter the device address manually or click the keypad to theright of the device field.Read/Write CompleteDeviceSpecify a bit device to turn on when data transfer iscompleted. Enter the device address manually or click thekeypad to the right of the device field.Basic recipe Storage Set a storage location for data from a basic recipe (Flash, CFCard, USB, or SD card).You can also set storage options in Storage Settings in theProject Property window.Error Device Specify a bit device to turn on when a problem occurs withthe data transfer. Enter the device address manually or clickthe keypad to the right of the device field.4. Reference4-49Option DescriptionError No. Device Specify a device to return a pre-defined error number if aproblem occurs with the data transfer. The error numbers arelisted below.No. Description1 There is missing data.2 The data does not match the currenttransmission condition.3 The data count exceeds the count specified bythe transmission condition.4The decimal point position used in the dataexceeds the decimal point position specified bythe transmission condition.5The data value exceeds the maximum value ofthe format specified by the transmissioncondition.6The data value is less than the minimum value ofthe format specified by the transmissioncondition.11 The recipe number of the default recipe was notread.12 There is no recipe that corresponds to thecurrently specified number.13 The block number of the default recipe was notread.14 There is no recipe block that corresponds to thecurrently specified number.15 The transmission condition number of the filerecipe was not read.16There is no file recipe transmission conditionthat corresponds to the currently specifiednumber.17 The file number of the file recipe was not read.18 There is no file recipe file that corresponds tothe currently specified number.19 The data in the file recipe is not valid.20The total data count in the file recipe is less thanthe data count specified by the transmissioncondition.21 The file recipe data was not recorded.22 The specified default recipe backup file is thebackup file created by another project.4. Reference4-50Option Description23 The content of the specified default recipebackup file is not valid.24 The recipe number of the specified defaultrecipe backup file is not valid.25 The block size of the specified default recipebackup file is not valid.26 The block status of the specified default recipebackup file is not normal.27 The content of the specified default recipebackup file in the data area was not written.28 The memory for the readable content of thespecified default recipe was not allocated. Option DescriptionFile Recipe NO. Device Set a word device for the file recipe number.File NO. Device Set a word device for the data file number.File recipe Storage Set a storage location for data from a file recipe (CF card, USBdevice, or SD card).To view the File Recipe Condition screen:In the Project pane, double-click [Recipe] ▶ [File recipe] ▶ [File Recipe Condition].4. Reference4-51Option DescriptionRecipe No. Enter the file recipe number. The number cannot be duplicated.Device Enter the device that will receive the recipe data. Read and write actions areperformed by reading the data received in this device and writing it to afile. Enter a word device.Device Count Set the number of contiguous devices from the corresponding device thatwill be read or written.Device Size Select 16 bits or 32 bits.Data Format Specify a format for device value-character sting conversion.During a read operation using a file recipe, the device value in thecontroller is converted to a character string for reading, and the characterstring is reverted to the device value when it is written.Digit Count Specify the number of places for a value.The device value in the file recipe data is converted to a character string forreading, and the character string is reverted to a writing value. The part of anumber exceeding the specified places will be displayed as asterisks ('*').Decimal Place Enter the decimal place for the data to be displayed at.Zero Fill Blank digits are filled with a 0 based on the data type.Name Enter the name.Comment Enter the descriptionNote• The valid file recipe number range is 0 – 5,000.• The valid device count range is 1 – 10,000.• The valid number count range is 1 - 64.• The valid decimal place range is 0 - 63.• The decimal place setting cannot be larger than the number count.4. Reference4-52To view the File Recipe Data screen:In the Project pane, double-click [Recipe] ▶ [File Recipe] ▶ [File Recipe Condition].Option DescriptionFile No. Enter the file data number.Data Count Enter the number of data to be stored in the file.Name Enter the name of the recipe file. The file name is displayed in versions priorto 1.30.Add “Name” Field to FileName on ExportSelect this option to include the Name field when exporting the recipe.Comment Enter the description.File Name File searches automatically use the default file name format: "XPR + filenumber.csv”. This file name is used when exporting the file.Data The data in the file selected from [File list] is displayed.Data in this file can be edited. However, ensure that the data meets theconditions (such as data type) that are set for the read/write operation ofthe recipe when you edit the data. A recipe error will occur if the conditionis not met.Export Files All file recipe data is saved using CSV file format. Select an external storagedrive, such as a USB drive. If an "XP_Recipe" folder does not exist on thestorage drive, it is automatically created on the selected device and the CSVfile is saved in the folder.Import Files This function retrieves a selected CSV file and loads the values in the filedata. Duplicated items are overwritten.Note• The valid file number range is 1–65,535.• The valid data count range is 1–10,000.• A CSV file can be imported only if its name format is the same as the file name format.4. Reference4-53Extended File RecipeExtended File Recipe conditions and data are edited separately. XP-Builder does not support the edit data functionand should be stored in the CSV format. Refer to [Creating an Extended File Recipe Data File] for detailedinformation. A file recipe is operated when the recipe common setting for [Recipe type device] is 2. The followingexamples explain the read and write operation using Extended File Recipes.Read Device OperationWhen [Trigger device to read] device is On, Extended File Recipes will be activated. The sequence for reading the filerecipe is described as follows: Read and Write actions cannot be executed at the same time. The read action isexecuted first when two devices satisfy the same time conditions.If the [Trigger device to read] device is set to “On” while the [Recipe type device] device value is 2, [Extended FileRecipe - Condition No. device] device value is 2, [Extended File Recipe – File No. device] device value is 3, and[Extended File Recipe – Block No. device] device value is 4, the following is selected.4. Reference4-54Set the Condition number 2 data format as the following: Set 14 bytes of unsigned decimal/float/text data as thefollowing.Set CSV data file as the following: Refer to [Creating an Extended File Recipe Data File] for detailed information.Extended File Recipes will be saved on XP_RecipeExt, files will be namedXPREX001.csv, XPREX002.csv ~ XPREX999.csv. In this example, the XPREX003.csv file value is updated as the Filenumber device value is 3.The title line should always be a header. Data will start from the second column, meaning the first column will beblock number 0, the second column will be block number 1, and the third column will be block number 2. Thus, inthe following picture, column 6 will be counted as block 4 and updated.4. Reference4-55If the XPREX003.csv file does not exist, an empty column will fill blocks 0 to 3 and data will show on block 4.Refer to <4.7.1.2 Path for Recipe Backup>for detailed information about storing the recipe backup files.Write device operationWriting data for an Extended File Recipe starts when the [Trigger device to write] device in a recipe common settingis set to “On” (rising edge) or “Off” (falling edge). The data writing sequence is shown in the flow chart below.4. Reference4-56If the [Trigger device to write] device is set to “On” while the [Recipe type device] device value is 2, [Extended FileRecipe – Condition No. Device] device value is 2, [Extended File Recipe - File No. device] device value is 3, [ExtendedFile Recipe - Block No. device] device value is 4, the following is selected.4. Reference4-57Set Condition number 2 data format as the following. Set 14 bytes of unsigned decimal/float/text data as thefollowing.Set CSV data file as the following. Refer to [Extended File Recipe data format setting] for detailed information.Extended File Recipes will be saved on XP_RecipeExt, files will be name XPREX001.csv,XPREX002.csv ~ XPREX999.csv. In this example, the XPREX003.csv file value is updated as the File number devicevalue is 3.Title line should always be a header. Data will start from the second column, meaning the first column will be blocknumber 0, the second column will be block number 1, and the third column will be block number 2. Column 6 willbe counted as Block 4, and rewritten as binary data to the PLC device.If the XPREX003.csv file does not exist, the Write action will fail.4. Reference4-58Refer to <4.7.1.2 Path for Recipe Backup>for detailed information about storing the recipe backup files.To set Extended File Recipe properties:1 In the Project pane, double-click [Recipe Property]. This will open a [Recipe Property] tab in theediting area.2 Set the following properties: Refer to File Recipes for more information on . Thefollowing refers to Extended File Recipes.Option DescriptionCondition No. device Set a word device for the Extended File Recipe conditionnumber.4. Reference4-59File No./name deviceSet a word device to save the extended file recipe number.By default, it is used as a file number device, but if you check"Use as a file name device," it is recognized as a name deviceand you can specify a recipe file by saving the file nameaccording to the specified byte.Block No. deviceSet a word device for the extended file recipe block number.When the block number device is used, the recipe can be reador written by the number of blocks stored in the block numberdevice from the block number stored in the device. By default,the block number device is not used much. This means that asingle block designated by the block number device is read orwritten.Extended File RecipeStorageSet a storage location for data from an Extended File Recipe.(CF card, USB memory, SD card)To view the Extended File Recipe condition screen:In the Project pane, double-click [Recipe] ▶ [Extended File Recipe] ▶ [Condition No. Device].Option DescriptionCondition No. Enter Extended File Recipe number. The valid range is1 - 100.DeviceSelect the file recipe condition device. The Read/Write Devicewrites data into a file or a condition device. Enter WordDevice.Data Format Setting Select the device data format manually.Name Enter file name.Comment Enter a description for the device.4. Reference4-60The following refers to Setup box after clicking the [Data Format Setting] button.Option DescriptionNO.The checkbox in the number indicates the skip column.This means that if you do not check the box, the data in thatcolumn is skipped and read or written. By default, the data in allcolumns is read or written.Data size Choose from 16-bit or 32-bit.Display formatSpecify a format for device value-character string conversion. Setthe data type and choose between Unsigned Decimals/SignedDecimals/Octal/Hexadecimal/Binary/Float/Text.DigitsSet how many digits to display. If the number of digits is lessthan the capacity of the device, empty spaces are filled withplaceholders (“*”).Decimal digits Set how many places to put it to the right of the decimal point.Zero fill If you have selected right justification, select this option to insertzeros (0) before the number.String length(Bytes) Can only be written in bytes in text format. Can enter from 1-255.Delimiter Can specify the character that separates the data. Can choosefrom , ; :.4. Reference4-61Note• The valid Extended File Recipe number range is 1-100.• Maximum device data cannot exceed 2048 bytes when setting data format.• The valid number count range is 1 - 64.• The valid decimal place range is 0 - 63.• The decimal place setting cannot be larger than the number count.Extended File Recipe data file Edit:CSV files are normal text files with texts divided with commas. So it can be written with text input such asNotepad or Notepad++, and also on Microsoft Excel. When saving content be sure to select [Save AsProject…].Extension files will be accordingly named as XPREX000.csv. The 000 will correspond to numbers from001-999, with 999 being the maximum. File should be saved to the XP_RecipeExtThe following is an example for Extended File Recipe setup.4. Reference4-62If the Extended File Recipe is setup, the Extended File Recipe data file (CSV file) can be input as such. Ifcolumn spaces are left empty errors may occur.If output data is decimal/hexadecimal/float or a number and the column is empty,(Undefined) error will occur.When you Input Extended File Recipe data, please follow instructions. Note• A maximum of 255 data can be setup and input.• A maximum of 999 data can be input into a single file.• The maximum file size is 1MB.• The maximum number of characters is 100.• Block data cannot exceed 10240 characters.• When editing with Microsoft Excel, if there are too many digits they will automatically convert to afloating point format, into a significand, and a base. In this case, set to change output data to wordform.4. Reference4-63An error may occur if CSV file data does not match XP-Builder setup, does not fit aforementioned [Note]format, or other device setup formats. In this case, error code [Error Device] will appear.ErrorNumberSummary Remarks1 NULL Data If the output data is a number anddata file column is empty.2 Inappropriate Data The data cannot be switched to achosen output data format. Forexample, 12F is conversed intoUnsigned decimals.3 Digit exceeded. When there is 6 digits while maximumdigits are set to 5.4 The maximum number of decimals isexceeded.The figure below the decimal pointshould be 3, but is not.5 Exceeded The Maximum Value. When you input a value that exceedsthe output data format.6 Under The Minimum Value. When you input a value that is smallerthan the minimum output data format.29 The Extended File Recipe block numberexceeded the limit.The number of block data set exceedsthe horizontal dimensions and cannotexceed 1000.30 The maximum number of Extended FileRecipe data is exceeded.If block data is set to horizontal, themaximum number is 255.31 The maximum number of Extended FileRecipe Block Character Stringsexceeded.The maximum number of block datacharacter is 10*1024 characters.32 The maximum number of Extended FileRecipe Value Character StringThe value character cannot exceed 100characters.33 The maximum number of Extended FileRecipe file limit Exceeded.The maximum recipe data file size is1MB.34 Extended File Recipe not found. When the input recipe, the recipe datafile, the directory, or the storage deviceis not found.35 Extended File Recipe File accessdenied.If the Recipe Data file exists but isinaccessible due to the system.4. Reference4-64ErrorNumberSummary Remarks36 The Extended File Recipe cannot beformed.When View or Input Recipe failed tomake a Recipe Data file.37 The Extended File Recipe cannot besaved to the storage device.If Extended File Recipe starts and takesover recipe files, it is occupied untilmonitoring is finished. Click RemoveSafety Switch to release the heldstorage device. If the Recipe Data filefails to occupy the storage device, itwill fail to load.38 Failed to read Extended File Recipe'Recipe Number.'Failed to read Extended File Recipecondition number, file number devicevalue.39 Wrong Extended File Recipe 'RecipeNumber.’If successful in reading the ExtendedFile Recipe condition number and thefile number device value, but the file orsetup format does not exist.40 Failed to read Extended File Recipe'Block Number.'If failed to read the Extended FileRecipe block number device value.41 Wrong Extended File Recipe 'BlockNumber'When writing Extended File Recipes,succeeded in reading block numberdevice, but block does not exist.42 Insufficient buffer during SerializingExtended File Recipe.Insufficient internal buffer for theExtended File Recipe feature.43 Extended File Recipe Data NumberIncorrect.When viewing the Extended FileRecipe, the written recipe data file doesnot match the original data.44 Extended File Recipe Entity Numbercannot be read.When reading, the writing ExtendedFile Recipe and the Block number ofthe Recipe data block number stringcannot be read.45 The Input Extended File Recipefunction does not fit the buffer size.When writing Extended File Recipes,Buffer does not fit Recipe data filecharacter string binary conversion.46 The recipe data file was not recorded. Recipe data file value does not matchXP-Builder User defined output format.4. Reference4-65ErrorNumberSummary Remarks47 No data in Extended File Recipe file. Extended File Recipe Entity Numbercannot be read.4. Reference4-66Flow AlarmsYou can use flow alarms to display text at the bottom of the screen in the XGT Panel when the specifiedcondition is met, as shown in the following figure:[Example: Flow alarm based on multiple bit device conditions]Flow alarm4. Reference4-67To create a flow alarm:1 In the Project pane, double-click [Flow Alarm].2 Specify the following properties.Option DescriptionDevice Count Set the number of alarm devices to monitor.Alarm Device Set a range (continuous) or a single device to monitor.No. of Alarm Occurred Set a word device to save the number of alarms. It shows thetotal number of alarms that have occurred.Background color Set the background color for the flow alarm areaMessage Position Set the position of the flow alarm message (Below screen,Center screen, Above screen, or Set Y Position).When using the ‘Set Y Position’ option, the top-left pixel of thescreen is ‘0’ on the Y axis.Display Mode Set the display option for flow alarm changes.• Redraw at occurrence: The alarm message is replacedautomatically with a new message.• After current display list: The alarm message remains on thescreen and New or Reset alarms will be shown in subsequentmessages.Flow Speed Set the renewal frequency of the flow alarm (2–1000 ms). The 4. Reference4-68Option Descriptionlower the number, the faster the renewal frequency.Move pixel Set the value for scrolling the flow alarm message (1–50 px). Thelarger the number, the faster the message scrolls.Font size Set the font size for the flow alarm message.Message Space Set the space between messages.Device Specify the device to monitor. Only bit devices can be monitoredby the flow alarm.Data type Set the data type for the flow alarm device. If set to read-only,only the current bit device can be registered as the alarm device.Bit Condition Set the condition for turning the alarm on or off.Text Table Name Specify a text table where the flow alarm message is stored.Text Index Specify a text string number in the text table to use for the flowalarm message.Preview A preview of the flow alarm message is shown.Note• By default, flow alarms appear on every screen when the XGT Panel is operating.• Up to 10,000 flow alarms can be added.• The specified bit device is monitored continuously by the flow alarm. When the bit deviceis “ON”, the alarm occurs and when the bit device is “OFF”, the alarm is cleared.• If more than two flow alarms occur simultaneously, the message at the bottom of thescreen shows the messages in sequence.• A flow alarm message displays text in the language specified in the project settings. Themessage can be shown in different languages if strings in other languages exist in thetext table.• You can set each screen not to execute a specified alarm.• The ‘Message Space’ option sets the number of space characters between messages. The 4. Reference4-69size of a space character may vary depending on the selected font and font size.To set to hide flow alarms from a specific screen on the XGT Panel:1 Right-click anywhere on the screen.2 Click [Screen Property].3 Click the Etc. tab and uncheck the check box next to Show Flow Alarm.Flow alarm messages can be set in a text table and are referred from the Flow Alarm settings screen.Properties such as color or italic font can be set in a text table. A flow alarm message displays on thepanel screen with the properties that are set in a text table and with a size that is set in the Flow Alarmsettings screen. When you set the background color, the flow alarm area is filled with the backgroundcolor.Below is an example where the device, Flow alarm #1 (%MX1000, is ON and an alarm has occurred.You can see that the flow alarm message is displayed with light green italic characters according to thesettings in a text table.4. Reference4-704. Reference4-71History AlarmsYou can use history alarms to monitor or review data for the state of a device. You can view and managehistory alarms with the History Alarm Viewer or Alarm Navigator objects. The History Alarm Viewer objectdisplays a list of the alarms that have occurred and allows you to manage it. With the Alarm Navigator,you can view a list of alarms that have occurred. If there are too many alarms to view, you can filter thelist by alarm group.History alarms are organized in alarm lists and groups. When an alarm is triggered or cleared, the time,device address, and alarm details are saved to non-volatile memory.If you select the second level Alarm group 2 on the Alarm Viewer, the alarms that have occurred in Alarmlist 1 will be displayed. If you select Alarm group 1, the alarms that have occurred in Alarm list 1 andAlarm list 2 will be displayed.4. Reference4-72Note• Up to 8 alarm groups can be created in the root structure.• Each group in the root structure may have up to 8 alarm groups/lists.• The maximum depth level allowed for any alarm group is 4.To set general properties for history alarms:1 In the Project pane, double-click [History Alarm]. This will open the History Alarm Property tab in theediting area.4. Reference4-732 Specify the following properties.Option DescriptionBackup Storage Path Set a location for the history alarm backup.Refer to <4.7.1 Managing the File Path for BackupFiles> for more information about storing backup files.Clear Alarm AreaDeviceSpecify a device to initialize the history alarm area in theNVRAM.Clear Alarm AreaComplete DeviceSpecify a device to activate after initializing the historyalarm area in the NVRAM is complete.No. of Alarms Occurred Specify a device to save the number of alarms that haveoccurred.Alarm Memory FullDeviceThe device is set to ON when there is insufficientmemory in the history alarm domain.Non-recoverable alarmdevice after poweringonDesignate the device to show the unrecovered of thealarms that occurred after power on.Alarm backup Click the checkbox to configure the BackupStart/Complete devices.Backup Start Device Specify a device to begin backup of alarm data. Backupwill only be performed if the backup location in theproject properties is set to a USB device or CF card.Backup CompleteDeviceSpecify a device to activate when alarm data backup iscomplete.4. Reference4-74Option DescriptionFile type Select the type of backup file (CSV or CSVE).A CSV file can be opened using applications such asMemo Pad and MS Excel.An encrypted CSV file (with the file extension CSVE) canbe converted to a CSV file Using the CSV Converter([Tool] ▶ [CSV file converter]). Refer to <4.6 Using theCSV Converter> for more details.File Name Device The name of the backup file can be changed. Thecharacter string of the device is used as the file name.BYTE Swap of FileNameWhen a file is saved, the bytes are swapped. Forexample, if the value stored in the device is“H12345678”, the swapped bytes will be “H21436587”.File Name Length Specifies the number of character strings in the filename.Send E-mail AfterBackup CompleteSet to send an email when backup of alarm data iscomplete. To use this function, you must specify backupstart and backup complete devices. An email addressspecified in [Project Properties] ▶[Others] ▶ [Email].Clear Restored AlarmAfter Backup CompleteSet to allow cleared alarms to be removed from theNVRAM after a backup is completed.Automatic Backupwhen Memory FullIf there is not enough memory capacity in the alarmarea, the alarms are automatically backed up.Append/Modify Datato Backup CSV FileThe alarm back up is added to the most recently savedCSV file.Alarm Entry Count ofCSV FileThe maximum number of alarms in the backup file isspecified.Always Backup even ifthere were NO AlarmLogThe alarm backup file is created even when there is noalarm history.Do Not BackupRemoved AlarmDeleted alarms in the history alarm are not included inthe alarm backup.Alarm Print Set to print history alarm data.Print Start Device Specify a device to start printing history alarm data.4. Reference4-75Option DescriptionPrint Complete Device Specify a device to activate when printing history alarmdata is complete.Top, Bottom, Left, andRight marginsSpecify margins for printing history alarm data.Acquisition Time Table Set intervals for collecting history alarm data.NoteAbout the Acquisition Rate Table:• Set up to 10 different sampling time for collecting history alarm data.• The sampling time can be set between 1–10 seconds with a minimum unit scale of 0.1seconds.• In the alarm list, you can select the sampling times you set here, to allow for flexibleacquisition cycles for different types of devices.• An XGT Panel inspects the alarm list and acquisition cycles together. Therefore, a largenumber of acquisition cycles in a project can slow performance.To define the range for an alarm expression, specify the following settings.4. Reference4-76Symbol Function Descriptiona Style Select a form for the expression. Examples for each style are asfollows:• A B (2 Terms): 0 < 0• A B C (3 Terms, And): 0 ≤ Device Value < 100• A B C (3 Terms, Or): 10 > Device ValueOR Device Value > 100b PreviewConditionalSentenceDisplays a preview of the conditional expression.c ConditionalExpression EditingitemSelect the operand you want to modify and set the operator.d Constant Set the operand type at a fixed value.e $V (StandardDevice)Use the current alarm monitoring device as an operand in theexpression. Displayed as $V in the preview.f $ (Other Device) Specify another device value as an operand in the expression.NoteIf a word device is set as the alarm monitoring device, an alarm condition is required. The alarmcondition is a single conditional expression consisting of two or three terms, linked by and orconditions.Conditional expressions must meet the following requirements:• Each term should be separated by a blank space.• The standard device address is expressed by “$V.” If “$V” is entered, it is automatically recognized asthe standard device when the project is transferred to an XGT Panel. The current alarm monitoringdevice must be included at least once in the expression.• Each conditional expression must include at least one direct variable (device variable).• The available operators are: < ,> , <= , >= , =, and !=4. Reference4-77To add an alarm group:1 In the Project pane, right-click [History Alarm].2 Click [Insert]. An Alarm Group tab will appear in the editing area.3 Specify the following properties for the alarm group:Option DescriptionGroup Name The name of the alarm group.Group ID The ID number of the alarm group.Display Name Select either From Text Table to fetch a group name from a text table,or Manually Input to provide a group name manually. If you fetch aname from a text table, set the No. (String number) value to identify thecorrect string in the table. The group name will appear in the Previewfield. Click the checkbox next to Synchronize manually input name…to update the alarm group name in the Project pane.4. Reference4-78To create a history alarm:1 In the Project pane, right-click a history alarm group.2 Click [Insert]. An Alarm List tab will appear in the editing area.3 Set the following properties for the alarm list:Option DescriptionName The name of the alarm list.Data Type Set the device type (bit or word).No. of alarm Set the number of alarms (maximum 10,000).Text Table Select a text table to fetch text from.Sampling Time Set how often to check for alarm conditions (1–10 seconds). Thedropdown list provides time values as configured in the AcquisitionRate Table.Backup Alarm Log By default, history alarm data is cleared if you check Delete all 4. Reference4-79Option Descriptionmonitoring data when you partially download a project, or when youdownload an entire project.To save history alarm data in the SRAM, set the Backup alarm logfunction. The Backup alarm log function saves the alarm data as a CSVfile when the alarm backup device is turned on.If a power interruption to the panel occurs, you cannot trace the alarmvia the History Alarm Viewer when the power is resumed although ithas not been cleared, and it is listed in the CSV file as “Untraceable.”Show CurrentSelected AlarmSpecify a device to display the most recent alarm. You can enter thedevice address manually or click the keypad icon to the right of thedevice field.Send E-mail Set to enable an email notification for the history alarm(Occur/Restore/Both) or to disable it (No). For more details about emailsettings, refer to <2.2.2.9 Changing Auxiliary Setting>.The Following is the email for alarm occurrence/restoration notification.* History alarm Information[Device Alias] ...[Alarm group name] ...[Alarm message] ...[Alarm State] Occurred[Time] ----/--/-- --/--/--4. Reference4-80Option DescriptionAn email notification for alarm is backed up is as follows.Assign AlarmDeviceSet the method for specifying alarm devices.Text Table Index Set the method for specifying strings in text tables.Show DetailedWindowSet the method for specifying windows and whether or not to showdetailed information.Use Alarm CountDeviceSet whether or not to use a device to save alarm count data and themethod for specifying devices.Count of ReferenceDeviceSet the number of the reference device (0-10).Parameter This option specifies whether a parameter will be used. If it is checked,the parameter can be edited in the alarm list. The stored parameters aresent to an external program if the external program is run by a specialswitch for the external program. Refer to <4.3.2.4 Special Switch> formore information.After selecting Parameter, you can set the following options.• Save at: It specifies the device to store the input parameters when ahistory alarm record is selected in the view history alarm object.• Type: Set the parameter type (file name, text, or number) and thedevice to store the parameter data. If File name is selected, you canalso set the external storage where the file is located.• File Name Position: Set the user input parameter to be stored as afile on a USB drive, CF or SD cards (availability may vary dependingon the XGT Panel model).• Text: Set the user input parameter in the history alarm list to bestored in a text format.• Number: The user input parameters in the history alarm list areconverted into a number based on the user’s selected number type.Then, it is stored in the storage device. The number type can beselected among unsigned 16 bits, signed 16 bits, unsigned 32 bits, orsigned 32 bits.* Alarm data has saved as CSV.[Device alias] .....[File Path] .....4. Reference4-81Option DescriptionDevice Enter alarm device addresses.Alarm Condition Set the alarm condition. For bit devices, the condition is either on or off.For word devices, the condition is an expression.Window No. The number of the detailed window is displayed if you selected Viewdetail window option.Text Index Specify the index of a string from a text table.Alarm CountDeviceThe alarm count device is displayed if you selected the Use alarmcount device option.Reference Device Set the number of reference devices and define them.Preview The selected text string for the alarm, if applicable.When a monitoring device detects that the alarm condition is met (on or off states for bit devices,specific expression for word devices), a history alarm occurs, and the time and content of the alarm isdisplayed in a history alarm viewer object. When a monitoring device detects that the alarm condition iscleared, the time of alarm clearance will be displayed in a history alarm viewer object.4. Reference4-82History alarms are saved in the order of occurrence. If the same alarm occurs more than once, it will besaved several times in the alarm count device.Because the acquisition time for each history alarm and the number of registered devices do not match,the time of alarm occurrence may differ.4. Reference4-83The History Alarm Viewer object displays a list of the alarms that have occurred. If many alarms occurredand you want to refer to only a certain group, you can use the alarm Navigator object to view only thedesired alarm group.You can add a window to view the detailed information of an alarm. 4. Reference4-84To add a window:1 From the alarm list, click the check box next to Show detail window.2 Enter a window number for each alarm.3 In the Project pane, edit the detailed window.4 Create a special switch for the alarm list edit window, and select Go to History Alarm Viewer Detailin the Special Switch Function settings.4. Reference4-855 Select an alarm from the alarm viewer object, and click the special switch to open the detailedinformation window.NoteAlarm messages for history alarms are referred from text tables. Text properties, such as font color,that are set in a text table will also be applied.You can print the list of history alarms using a special switch after connecting a USB printer to the device.Refer to <4.3.2.4 Special Switch> for more information.4. Reference4-86SchedulesYou can use schedules to specify actions in advance. Available functions for schedules include Bit On, BitOff, Word value setting, script execution, and more. You can create up to 32 schedules and eachschedule can specify up to 8 actions.The following example explains how scheduling works:[The Bit On function switches on the device based on a schedule][The Bit Off function switches off the device on the schedule]4. Reference4-87[The WORD Set function writes a value on the word device at the scheduled time.][The Script function executes a designated script at the scheduled time.]4. Reference4-88To create a schedule:1 Click an object in the editing area.2 In the Project pane, double-click [Scheduler]. This will open the Scheduler tab in the editing area.3 Double-click anywhere in the Scheduler tab to open the Property window.4 Specify the following properties:Type DescriptionType Set the operation interval (Every minute/hour/day/week/month/year, orOnce).DetailConditionSet the detailed operation time, based on the operation interval (seconds,minutes, hours, date, week of the day, etc.).Description Enter a description for the schedule.Function Click a function and then click [>>] to add the function to the schedule.Click a function and then click [<<] to remove a function from the schedule.You can specify up to 8 functions in a schedule.4. Reference4-89Type Description• Device: Set the bit or word (16-bit or 32-bit) device to enter a valuewhen the function starts.• Data type: Set the data type to enter to the device.• Value: Set the value to enter in the device.Up/Down Click [Up] or [Down] to arrange the operation sequence by prioritizingfunctions.4. Reference4-90SoundsYou can specify a maximum of 512 WAV or MP3 files to play when conditions are met for the XGT Panelsother than the iXP/IPC series models. To hear sounds, you must connect a speaker to the sound outputport.Below is an example of how a sound is used.To create a sound:1 In the Project pane, double-click [Sound]. This will open a Sound tab in the editing area.2 Specify the following conditions:Function DescriptionDestination Storage Select a storage location for the sound file. You can also set thelocation at the Project Property window.Data Type Enter the data type (e.g., 16-bit signed).Device Enter the device that will activate the sound file.4. Reference4-91Function DescriptionCondition Enter a condition for running the sound file. Choose ON/OFFfor bit devices and enter a condition formula for other types ofdevices.File No. Enter the file number of the sound file.Play Select a play mode for the sound file./ Play or stop the sound file.Size Display the size of the sound file (KB/MB).Sound File You can select the sound file to play from the browsing window.The file path and file name are displayed after you haveselected the file.Note• MP3 files may not play if the sound codec is not supported by your PC. Install the propercodecs to play sound files.• MP3 files must have the following characteristics: MPEG 1, Layer III, Sample rate: 32-48KHz, Bit rate: 32-320 kbps.• WAV files must have the following characteristics: Raw PCM Audio, 8/16 bit,signed/unsigned, Stereo/Mono.• Sound files cannot exceed 10 MB.4. Reference4-924.2 ScriptsInstead of creating individual objects and assigning operations to them, you can program globaloperations using scripts in the XP-Builder interface.About ScriptsScripts perform specified actions based on inputs from a user or from the system. You can control thesystem entirely with figures and objects in the XP-Builder interface, but using scripts allows you toorganize the project more conveniently and effectively. Script characteristics include: Easy system management Control of screens with clearly defined functions and complex mathematical operations Simplified programming (based on a limited form of the C language) Simplified editing, provided by a general program editor Debugging in the program editor for verifying grammatical errors in scripts Utilizes user-defined protocol drivers to transfer data to and from a controllerScripts are executed as shown in the following table.Script Type Execution MethodGlobal When the conditions are met, the script controls or manages the entire projectand its components.Display Change When the current screen is closed and before a new screen is opened.4. Reference4-93Script Type Execution MethodWhen the current screen is closedBefore a new screen is openedScript isexecuted.Local Settings • When the script conditions set in the current screen are met.• Set the scripts only for the screen.Scheduler Operation at the specified timeObjects Based on the action defined for the object only in the current screen.4. Reference4-94Understanding Script CommandsLearn how to write commands with scripts. The following table describes the control statements andoperators available for programming scripts:Command Expression Description• Control Statementsif if (Condition){ Statement;}else{ Statement;}This command performs the statement if true (a valueother than 0) as a result of judgment of the conditionand shifts to the location next to the statement if false.[Example]for for(Expression; Condition;Expression){ Statement;}This command repeats the statement if true (a valueother than 0) as a result of judgment of the conditionand shifts to the location next to the statement if false.[Example]while while(Condition){ Statement;}This command repeats the statement if true (a valueother than 0) as a result of judgment of the conditionand shifts to the location next to the statement if false.[Example]do while do{ Statement;} while(Condition);This command shifts to the Do location and performsthe statement if true (a value other than 0) as a resultof judgment of the condition and shifts to anotherlocation if false.[Example]4. Reference4-95Command Expression Descriptionreturn return; Ends the script.[Example]break break; • The break statement within the loop gets out of theloop wrapping the break.• If the break statement is within the nested loop, itonly affects the loop which is furthest inward in theprogram.[Example]continue continue; • Skips the remaining part within the loop and shiftsto the next loop execution.• The continue statement is within the nested loop, itonly affects the internal loop structure containing it.[Example]4. Reference4-96Command Expression Description• Logical Operators&& && Provides 1 if both and are trueand 0 otherwise.[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable|| || Provides 1 if both and are falseand 0 otherwise.[Example]Named variableDirect variable4. Reference4-97Command Expression DescriptionTemporary variable! ! Provides 1 if is 0 and otherwise 0.[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable4. Reference4-98Command Expression Description• Relational Operators< < Provides 1 if is smaller than andotherwise 0.[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable<= <= Provides 1 if is smaller than or equal to and otherwise 0.[Example]Named variable4. Reference4-99Command Expression DescriptionDirect variableTemporary variable> > Provides 1 if is larger than andotherwise 0.[Example]Named variableDirect variable4. Reference4-100Command Expression DescriptionTemporary variable>= >= Provides 1 if is larger than or equal to and otherwise 0.[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable4. Reference4-101Command Expression Description!= != Provides 1 if is not equal to andotherwise 0.[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable== == Provides 1 if is equal to andotherwise 0.[Example]Named variable4. Reference4-102Command Expression DescriptionDirect variableTemporary variable• Mathematical Operators+ + Adds to .[Example]Named variableDirect variable4. Reference4-103Command Expression DescriptionTemporary variable- - Subtracts from .[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable* * Multiplies by .[Example]Named variable4. Reference4-104Command Expression DescriptionDirect variableTemporary variable/ / Divides by .[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable% % Divides by and takes the residual.[Example]Named variable4. Reference4-105Command Expression DescriptionDirect variableTemporary variable• Bit Operators& & Performs the bit operation (AND) of and.[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable4. Reference4-106Command Expression Description| | Performs the bit operation (OR) of or .[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable~ ~ Reverses the value.[Example]Named variable4. Reference4-107Command Expression DescriptionDirect variableTemporary variable^ ^ Performs the bit operation (EOR) of or .[Example]Named variableDirect variable4. Reference4-108Command Expression DescriptionTemporary variable<< << Shifts to the left by the value of .[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable>> >> Shifts to the right by the value of .[Example]4. Reference4-109Command Expression DescriptionNamed variableDirect variableTemporary variable• Assignment Operators= = Assigns the value of to .[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable4. Reference4-110Command Expression Description+= += Adds to and assigns the value of theresult of the operation to .[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable-= -= Subtracts from and assigns the valueof the result of the operation to .[Example]Named variable4. Reference4-111Command Expression DescriptionDirect variableTemporary variable*= *= Multiplies by and assigns the value ofthe result of the operation to .[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable4. Reference4-112Command Expression Description/= /= Divides by and assigns the value ofthe result of the operation to .[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable%= %= Divides by and takes the residue andthen assigns the value of the result of the operation to.[Example]Named variable4. Reference4-113Command Expression DescriptionDirect variableTemporary variable|= |= Performs the bit operation (AND) of to and assigns the value of the result of theoperation to .[Example]Named variableDirect variable&= &= Performs the bit operation (OR) of to and assigns the value of the result of the operation to.[Example]Direct variable4. Reference4-114Command Expression Description^= ^= Performs the bit operation (EOR) of to and assigns the value of the result of theoperation to .[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable<<= <<= Shifts to the left by and assigns thevalue of the result of the operation to .[Example]Named variable4. Reference4-115Command Expression DescriptionDirect variableTemporary variable>>= >>= Shifts to the right by and assigns thevalue of the result of the operation to .[Example]Named variableDirect variableTemporary variable4. Reference4-116Command Expression Description• Increment/Decrement Operators++ ++;++;Increases by 1.[Example]-- --;--;Decreases by 1.[Example]4. Reference4-117Understanding Device Address ExpressionsTo express a device address in a script, use this format: @[Device type: Connection number: Stationaddress: Tag name or Device address], with the data inside the brackets describing the physical addressof the device in the PLC. Examples of device address formats are shown in the table below:Note• In the sample expressions that follow, “1” refers to the direct device address, which varies by PLCtype. For more information, refer to <4.2.1.3 Understanding Constants and Data Types>.• Connection numbers range from 0 to 3.Device Device Address Format Device Address ExamplesBit (Device type=X) @[X: Address]@[X: Conn#: Address]@[X: Stn#: Address]@[X: Conn#: Stn#: Address]@[X: %MX1]@[X: 0: %MX1]@[X: #1: %MX1]@[X: 0: #1: %MX1]Short (Device type=S) @[S: Address]@[S: Conn#: Address]@[S: Stn#: Address]@[S: Conn#: Stn#: Address]@[S: %MW000]@[S: 0: %MW000]@[S: #1: %MW000]@[S: 2: #1: %MW000]Integer (Device type=L) @[L: Address]@[L: Conn#: Address]@[L: Stn#: Address]@[L: Conn#: Stn#: Address]@[L: %MW000]@[L: 0: %MW000]@[L: #1: %MW000]@[L: 2: #1: %MW000]Unsigned Short (Devicetype=W)@[W: Address]@[W: Conn#: Address]@[W: Stn#: Address]@[W: Conn#: Stn#: Address]@[W: %MW000]@[W: 0: %MW000]@[W: #1: %MW000]@[W: 2: #1: %MW000]Unsigned Integer (Devicetype=D)@[D: Address]@[D: Conn#: Address]@[D: Stn#: Address]@[D: Conn#: Stn#: Address]@[D: %MW000]@[D: 0: %MW000]@[D: #1: %MW000]@[D: 2: #1: %MW000]Float (Device type=F) @[F: Address]@[F: Conn#: Address]@[F: Stn#: Address]@[F: Conn#: Stn#: Address]@[F: %MW000]@[F: 0: %MW000]@[F: #1: %MW000]@[F: 2: #1: %MW000]4. Reference4-118Understanding Constants and Data TypesScripts employ a systematic expression of data. The table below describes the constants used by scriptsin XP-Builder.Constant ExamplesDecimal Numbers 124, -34, 0, 2334454Real Numbers 0.123, 10.45E12, 0.0Hexadecimal Numbers 0x45FA, 0xfffBinary Numbers true, falseCharacters “a”, “1”, “0”, “%”Strings “123abc”Script functions can express and return various data types. The table below describes the data types usedby scripts in XP-Builder.Type Description Data range ExampleBoolean(1 bit)• Expresses either “true or false”• The abbreviation “bool” comesfirst, followed by the variablename.• Initializes as “true” or “false”0 to 1 bool bState = true;Character(8 bit)• Expresses a character• To initialize a variable, place“=” after the variable nameand specify a value.-127 to 127 char cValue =-10 ;Short(16 bit)• This data type uses lessmemory than an integer.• To initialize a variable, place“=” after the variable nameand specify a value.-32768 to 32767 short nValue = -10 ;4. Reference4-119Type Description Data range ExampleInteger(32 bit)• A signed integer can be apositive number, a negativenumber, or 0.• To declare multiple variables,place “int” first, followed bythe variables separated bycommas.• To initialize a variable, place“=” after the variable nameand specify a value.-2147483648 to2147483647Int nValue = -100 ;UnsignedShort(16 bit)To initialize a variable, place “=”after the variable name andspecify a value.0 to 65535 unsigned shortnValue = 10 ;UnsignedInteger(32 bit)• This data type is used for apositive number including 0.• To initialize a variable, place“=” after the variable nameand specify a value.0 to 4294967295 unsigned int nValue =100 ;4. Reference4-120Type Description Data range ExampleFloat(32 bit)To initialize a variable, place “=”after the variable name andspecify a value.1.175494351 E – 38to3.402823466 E + 38float fValue = 10.01 ;NoteA bit is the basic unit of computer memory. It is represented as either a 0 or 1. The two values can alsobe interpreted as activation states (On/Off).You can declare an array variable the same way as other variables. When initializing variables after anarray declaration, the variables should be placed in brace brackets. You can also place a string inquotation marks for the character type. If you do not initialize an array variable, the variable may have avalue other than 0. It is advised to initialize an array variable before use.The table below shows examples of the data types used by scripts in XP-Builder.Type Example Initialization ExamplesBoolean bool bState[3]; bool bState[3] = {true, false, true}bool bState[3] = {1, 0, 1};Short short nValue[3]; short nValue[3] = {1, 2, 3};Character char cValue[3]; char cValue[3] = {‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’}; orchar cValue[5] = “1234”Integer int nValue[4]; int nValue[4] = {-100, -200, 100, 200};UnsignedShortunsigned shortnValue[3];unsigned short nValue[3] = {0, 100, 200};UnsignedIntegerunsigned int nValue[5]; unsigned int nValue[5] = {10, 11, 12, 13, 15};4. Reference4-121Type Example Initialization ExamplesFloat float fValue[2]; float fValue[2] = {10.0, 20.0}; orfloat fValue[2] = {1.175494351e-38 , -1.175494351e-38};Note• If you initialize a larger number than the number of the declared array, an error will occur:int nValue[3] = {1, 2, 3, 4};• If you initialize a smaller number than the number of the declared array, some variables will not beinitialized:In case of bool bValue[2] = {true}; , bValue[0] is true but bValue[1] may be either true or false.• When you initialize an array variable of the character type with quotation marks, you can initializeone smaller number than the number of the declared array. That is because a string variable shouldhave a null value at the end to be used for a string:char cValue[5] = “1234”;• When you initialize an array variable of the character type with quotation marks, you can initialize itwith Latin characters, numbers, or special characters. You cannot use Korean characters or otherlanguages.Understanding Temporary Variables in a ScriptStandard variables are used as temporary variables. Temporary variables may be defined and used forscript operation in objects.While an operation with a direct (physical) address is reflected and written to the PLC’s memory as soonas the operation is run, changes made to the temporary variables are written to the PLC’s memory onlyafter the script is completely run.Only objects with the Input function can write temporary variable values to a direct address (PLCmemory).In the example below, a switch object is assigned with the direct address “%mw10”, and the followingscripts are run when the switch is pressed. The current value saved at “%mw10” is 100. Script with the direct address “%mw10”:------------------------------------------------------ Script runsIf (@[w:%mw10] == 100){@[w:%mw10]= 20; /* true*/}Else{@[w:%mw10]= 40; }@[w:%mw10] = @[w:%mw10]+1; /*%mw10 = 21 */------------------------------------------------------ Script endsResulting %mw10 value = 214. Reference4-122 Script with the direct address “%mw10” and a temporary variable $S:------------------------------------------------------ Script runs/* $S is initialized to 100 */If ($S == 100){@[w:%mw10]= 20; /* true*/}Else{@[w:%mw10]= 40;}$S = $S+1; /* $S = 101, @[w:%mw10] = 20 *//* $S value will be written to @[w:%mw10] when the script ends*/------------------------------------------------------ Script endsResulting “%mw10” value = 101Each data type has a corresponding temporary variable type. The table below shows the standardvariable types available.Variable Type Example Value RangeBoolean $X 0 to 1Short $S -32768 to 32767Integer $L -2147483648 to 2147483647Unsigned Short $W 0 to 655354. Reference4-123Variable Type Example Value RangeUnsigned Integer $D 0 to 4294967295Float $F -1.175494351e-38,to3.402823466e+38Viewing the Script Cross ReferenceThe Script Cross Reference function displays object or common properties used for scripts in the outputscreen. When a project is executed in the XGT Panel, unexpected script errors may occur. This functionallows you to detect script errors without checking individual items that are affected by global or localscripts.To view the script cross reference, click [Tool] ▶ [Cross Reference], and then select [Script].Script names, positions, object types (if they are used), and explanations are displayed in the output pane.4. Reference4-124Note• If you double-click a result in the cross reference, the affected object or screen will open in theediting area.• If you want to find script information that is applied to objects in the Base screen, click [Tool] ▶[Find All Script].4. Reference4-125Creating ScriptsLearn how to create scripts. You can create scripts from the Project pane, and add functions and variablesin the Script Tool box. To apply global settings to scripts, refer to <2.2.2.8 Changing Global ScriptSettings >.Inserting ScriptsTo insert a script from the Project pane:1 In the Project pane, double-click [Insert script].A Script tab will open in the editing area.2 Create your script in the editing area. Right-click the Script tab and then click [Close] to return tonormal screen editing.4. Reference4-126Using the Script Tool boxThe Script Tool box allows you to create and manage scripts easily. You can select functions andcommands from lists instead of entering them manually.To register the scripts using the Function List:1 Insert a script, as described in <4.2.2.1 Inserting Scripts >.2 Click [View] ▶ [Script Toolbox].3 Click [Function List] to select from lists of pre-defined functions, such as device, screen, andcommunication operations. Select an operation, set the properties, and then click [Insert], or doubleclick the operation to insert it into the script.4 Check that the selected operation is inserted in the script editing area.You can enter or edit values for the operation directly from the editing area.4. Reference4-1275 In the Script Tool box, click [Control Word] to select from lists of commands, device settings, andoperators. Double-click an item to insert it into the script.6 Check that the selected control word is inserted in the script editing area, and add operands or therest of the control words as necessary.Specifying Local ScriptsLocal scripts run operations on the relevant screen the condition is met. It can only be configured forBase screens.To configure a local script:1 Create a script, as described in <4.2.2.1 Inserting Scripts>.2 Double-click a screen from the Project pane.3 In the editing area, right-click and then click [Screen Property].4. Reference4-1284 Click [Local Script Setting].5 Select a script and execution condition from the drop-down lists. If you choose an executioncondition other than Consecutive or Periodic, specify the device condition address.6 Click [Insert] and, if necessary, click [Up] or [Down] to prioritize the script.7 Click [OK].4. Reference4-129Specifying Display Change ScriptsDisplay scripts are executed when the screen is changed. It can only be configured for Base screens.To configure a display change script:1 Create a script, as described in <4.2.2.1 Inserting Scripts>.2 Double-click a screen from the Project pane.3 In the editing area, right-click and then click [Screen Property].4 Click [Etc.].5 If desired, check the checkbox next to Run Script at Open Screen or Run Script at Close Screen,and then select a script to execute, based on the screen status.4. Reference4-1306 Click [OK].Specifying Scheduler ScriptsTo specify scripts that run on specified schedules:1 Create a script, as described in <4.2.2.1 Inserting Scripts>.2 In the Project pane, double-click [Scheduler].3 In the editing area, double-click a cell in the Scheduler tab.4 In the Property window, specify the schedule type, detail condition, and description as desired.4. Reference4-1315 In the Function Settings, click [Script] ▶ [>>].6 Select a script from the drop-down list and click [OK].7 If necessary, click [Up] or [Down] to prioritize the script.8 Close the Property window or specify additional scheduler scripts, as desired. Your changes are savedautomatically.4. Reference4-132Creating Object Scripts1 Create a script, as described in sections 4.2.2.1 and 4.2.2.2 .2 Create an object. For more information about creating objects, refer to <2.3.4 Inserting Figures orObjects>. After creating an object, the Properties window will appear for the object.3 Click [Operation] in the Properties window.4 Check the checkbox next to Use Script.5 Select a script.6 Click [OK].Note• Scripts can only be configured for certain types of objects. The [Use Script] option is not available ifthe object does not support use of scripts.• If you delete a script that is applied to objects in your project, an error will occur during the datacheck.4. Reference4-133Editing ScriptsTo find part of a script:1 With the Script tab open in the editing area, click [Tool] ▶ [Find in Active Screen].2 Specify the data to find in the pop-up window.3 Specify matching and direction options, as desired.4 Click [Find Next] to find the next instance of the data.To replace part of a script:1 With the Script tab open in the editing area, click [Tool] ▶ [Replace in Active Screen].2 Specify the data to find in the pop-up window.3 Specify matching options, as desired.4 Click [Replace] to replace data instances one at a time or you can click [Replace All] to replace all datainstances that match your search at once.To move to a specific line in the script:1 With the script tab open, right-click on the script editing area.2 Click [Goto].4. Reference4-1343 Enter a line number and click [Goto].NoteYou can add single-line or multi-line comments to your scripts. To add a single-line comment, entertwo backslashes (//) in front of the comment. To add a multi-line comment, enter backslashes andasterisks (/* */) at the start and end of the comment, as shown in the below example.// This is a single line comment./* This is line 1 of a multi-line comment.This is line 2 of a multi-line comment.This is line 3 of a multi-line comment. */4. Reference4-135Understanding Script Error HandlingIf an error occurs during a script execution, statements after the error are skipped without processing.Then, the processing is resumed after an ERROR control statement is encountered, as shown in thescreenshot below.Statements within the ERROR control statement are executed only when an error occurs during the scriptexecution.Script errors and descriptions are displayed in the Output tab at the bottom of the XP-Builder screen.Understanding the Script Watchdog FunctionThe Watchdog function exists to avoid infinite loops or prevent scripts that are too long from hanging upprocesses. When a script exceeds the default time allotted (5 seconds), the Watchdog function isactivated automatically and forces the script to end.You can adjust the script watchdog time in the Project Property settings window.Script execution takes longer than any other action, so use conditional statements with care. Pay specialattention to statements for which the run time is hard to predict, such as for, while, and do-whilestatements.ExecutedExecutedDivided by 0 ERRORNot executedScript execution resumes here.Executed4. Reference4-136Using Scripts to Control XGT Panel FunctionsSeveral scripts are available for controlling XGT panel functions, including system, print, and devicefunctions.Understanding System FunctionsThe table below describes script properties of the system functions.Function Description ParametersHMIExit The XGT Panel closes themonitor and moves to themenu screen.Example: HMIExit();NoneInitHistoricalAlarm Initializes the alarm area ofthe NVRAM. Existing alarmswill be deleted.Example:InitHistoricalAlarm();NoneInitLogging Initializes the logging area ofthe NVRAM. Logged contentwill be deleted. If one of thehistory alarm numbers isinvalid, this function will notwork.Example: InitLogging(1);Return value NoneParameter 1intn LogNum: thelogging numberto be initializedSetTime Changes the XGT Panel’sclock.Example:SetTime(@[W: %MW1000],@[W: %MW1001],@[W: : %MW1002],@[W: %MW1003],@[W: %MW1004],@[W: %MW1005]);SetTime(2013, 1, 30, 8, 10, 0);Return value NoneParameter 1 intn Year: YearParameter 2 intn Month:Month (1-12)Parameter 3 intn Day: Day (0-31)Parameter 4 IntnTime: Hour(0-23)Parameter 5 intn Min: Minute(0-59)Parameter 6 IntnSec: Second(0-59)ResetUSB Resets the power to the USBports on the XGT Panels. Thisfunction is not supported byNone4. Reference4-137Function Description Parametersthe IPC series.Example:if(@[X: HX00000] == true)ResetUSB ( );Understanding Print FunctionsThe table below describes script properties of the print functions.Function Description ParametersPrintAlarm Prints the alarm list. Thisfunction is not supported bythe IPC series.Example:if(@[X: %MX0] == true){PrintAlarm();}NonePrintScreen Prints the current screen of theXGT Panel. Set the print optionin the Auxiliary Settings tab ofthe project properties.The IPC series only supportsprinting to a file.Example:if(@[X: %MX1] == true){PrintScreen();}NoneUnderstanding Screen Change FunctionsFunction Description ParametersChangeBaseScreen Changes the current screen to the screennumber specified by the device. If thescreen number is not assigned in theIntn Base Screen Number:Input the screen number tochange. You can input a real 4. Reference4-138Function Description ParametersProject pane, the screen will not bechanged.Example: if(@[W: %MW000] >= 0)ChangeBaseScreen(10); elseChangeBaseScreen(@[W: %MW10]);//Constant is 10. Device is %MW10.number or designate a worddevice to provide the value.Understanding Script FunctionsThe table below describes properties of the script function.Function Description ParametersGetLastError Return errors that occur during scriptexecution.Example:intn um =0, a = 10, b = 0;int error;num = a/b;ERROR:{ error = GetLastError();}See the following table.The GetLastError function returns the values listed in the table below.Value Description0: Steady State Set a steady state.1: Shut down The program was shut down normally.2: Memory error A stack address value was not properly read or written.3: Direct Variable Memory error A direct variable address was not properly read or written.4: Temporary Variable MemoryerrorA temporary variable address was not properly read or written.5: Internal Function Processing An internal function defined in XP-Builder did not performcorrectly.6: Data error A variable data value is invalid (used for debugging).4. Reference4-139Value Description7: Invalid Data A data value is invalid when writing variables (used for debugging).8: Divide by 0 Error Illegal operation: division by zero.9: Opcode Error Invalid opcode10: Arrangement SubscriptExcessAn arrangement subscript exceeds the maximum size.11: Range Excess Not used.12: Function Error Not used.13: Semi Error Not used.14: Watchdog Time Error The watchdog time has been exceeded.15: Duplication FunctionNumber Error(10)More than 10 scripts called.16: Dead lock State Not used.17: Memory Error An attempt was made to reference something outside of the globalvariable area (g_DataBuffer).18: Memory Error The pointer’s memory exceeds the range of the assigned variable.19: Memory Error The pointer’s class is incorrect (available only for global variables orstack variables).20: Memory Error The wrong type was entered (when a value other than the declaredvariable type was entered).Understanding String FunctionsThe following table describes properties of the string functions.Function Description ParametersStrcat Adds a source string behind atarget string. When the targetstring plus the source string isbigger than the character type’svariable, the string is not added(false is returned).Example:char szSrc[10] = “12345”,szDst[10] = “abcd”;Strcat(&szDst, &szSrc);Return valuebool: Whether ornot the string isadded.Parameter 1char* pszDst: Thetarget string (theaddress of thecharacter type’svariable).Parameter 2 char* pszSrc: The 4. Reference4-140Function Description Parameters//The value of szDst is“abcd12345”.source string (theaddress of thecharacter type’svariable).Strcmp Compares two texts and, if theyare the same, returns 0.Example:char szStr1[10] = “12345”;char szStr2[10] = “12345”;intn Result;nResult = Strcmp(&szStr1,&szStr2);//The value of nResult is 0.Return valueint: Return theresult of thecomparison:• Negative:pszString1 <pszString2• 0: Same string• Positive:pszString1 >pszString2Parameter 1char* pszDst: Thetarget string (theaddress of thecharacter type’svariable).Parameter 2char* pszSrc: Thesource string (theaddress of thecharacter type’svariable).Strcpy Copies a string from the sourcestring to the target string. If thelength of the source string islonger than the character type’svariable, it cannot be copied(false is returned).Example:char szSrc[10] = “12345”,szDst[10];Strcpy(&szDst, &szSrc);Return valuebool: Whether ornot the string iscopied.Parameter 1char* pszDst: Thetarget string (theaddress of thecharacter type’svariable).Parameter 2char* pszSrc: Thesource string (theaddress of thecharacter type’svariable).4. Reference4-141Function Description ParametersStrlen Lengthens the string.Example:char buf[10] = “12345”;intn Len;nLen = Strlen(&buf);//The value of nLen is 5.Return value int: The length ofstringParameter 1char* pszString:The address ofthe charactertype’s variable.Understanding Device FunctionsThe table below describes properties of the device functions.Function Description ParametersCopyData Reads data from the sourcedevice and inputs it into adestination device.Example:CopyData(@[W: %MW000],@[W: %MW100], 10);Return value NoneParameter 1DEVICE src: Thesource device tocopy fromParameter 2DEVICE dst: ThedestinationdeviceParameter 3intn Count: Thenumber ofdevicesCopyDataEx Reads data from the sourcedevice up to the source offset andinputs it into the destinationdevice up to the destinationoffset.Example:int index;if(@[X: %IX0.0.0] == true){ index = 0;}else{ index = 100;}CopyData(@[W: %MW000], 0,@[W: %MW100], index, 10);/*Return valueBOOL: If thedevice address isexceeded, FALSEwill be returned.Parameter 1DEVICE src: Thesource device tocopy fromParameter 2intn SrcOffset:Offset of thesource deviceParameter 3DEVICE dst: ThedestinationdeviceParameter 4intn DstOffset:Offset of thedestinationdevice4. Reference4-142Function Description ParametersIf statement is true, offsets 10word values, from %MW000to %MW100. If statement is false,offsets 10 word valuesfrom %MW000 to %MW200.*/Parameter 5intn CopyCount:The number ofdevicesSetData Input values to a device.Example:intn Loop;for(nLoop = 0; nLoop<10;nLoop++)SetData(@[W: %MW100], nLoop,0);//Set “0” in devicesfrom %MW100 to %MW109.Return valueBOOL: If thedevice address isexceeded, FALSEwill be returned.Parameter 1 DEVICE src: Thesource deviceParameter 2intn SrcOffset:Offset of thesource deviceParameter 3 intn Value: ValueGetData Retrieves and adds values from adevice.Example:intn Loop, nValue; for(nLoop =0; nLoop<10; nLoop++){GetData(@[W: %MW100], nLoop,&nValue);nValue += nValue;}//Retrieve and add valuesfrom %MW100 to %MW109.Return valueBOOL: If thedevice address isexceeded, FALSEwill be returned.Parameter 1 DEVICE src: Thesource deviceParameter 2intn SrcOffset:Offset of thesource deviceParameter 3int* pRetValue:The valuereturned from thedevice.SetStrData Copies a specified length of textstring from a character typevariable to a device.Example:Char a[6] = “abcde”;// Device “HW0000” has charactervalue “abcde”SetStrData ( @[W:HW00000], 0,&a );lReturn valueBOOL: If thedevice address isexceeded, or if thedevice is readonly, FALSE will bereturned.Parameter 1 DEVICE dst: Thetarget deviceParameter 2 intn nDstOffset:Offset of the 4. Reference4-143Function Description Parameterstarget deviceParameter 3Char*patrValue:Char array addressvariable where thesource string islocated.Note• When copying data, the source and destination devices must be of the same type. Otherwise,communication will fail.• If a device address exceeds the upper limit, data will not be copied.Understanding Communication FunctionsThe table below describes properties of the communication functions.Function Description ParametersADD_SUM Calculates and returns the sum ofentered data.Example:intn Result;char buf[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5};ADD_SUM(&buf[0], 5, &nResult);Return valueBOOL: If thenumber is beyondthe range of thebuffer, FALSE isreturned.Parameter 1char* pBuffer: Thebuffer forcalculationParameter 2intn Count: Thebyte number tobe calculatedParameter 3 int* nResult: Thecalculated valueADD_SUM_1S Calculates and returns the sum inone’s complement.Example:intn Result;Return valueBOOL: If thenumber is beyondthe range of thebuffer, FALSE is 4. Reference4-144Function Description Parameterschar buf[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5};ADD_SUM_1S(&buf[0], 5,&nResult);returned.Parameter 1char* pBuffer: Thebuffer forcalculationParameter 2intn Count: Thebyte number tobe calculatedParameter 3 int* nResult: Thecalculated valueADD_SUM_2S Calculates and returns the sum intwo’s complement.Example:intn Result;char buf[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5};ADD_SUM_2S(&buf[0], 5,&nResult);Return valueBOOL: If thenumber is beyondthe range of thebuffer, FALSE isreturned.Parameter 1char* pBuffer: Thebuffer forcalculationParameter 2intn Count: Thebyte number tobe calculatedParameter 3 int* nResult: Thecalculated valueCRC16 Calculates and returns the 16-bitCRC value of entered data.Example:intn Result;char buf[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5};CRC16(&buf[0], 5, &nResult);Return valueBOOL: If thenumber is beyondthe range of thebuffer, FALSE isreturned.Parameter 1char* pBuffer: Thebuffer forcalculationParameter 2intn Count: Thebyte number tobe calculatedParameter 3 int* nResult: Thecalculated valueXOR_SUM Calculates and returns the XORsum of entered data.Example:intn Result;char buf[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5};Return valueBOOL: If thenumber is beyondthe range of thebuffer, FALSE isreturned.4. Reference4-145Function Description ParametersXOR_SUM(&buf[0], 5, &nResult);Parameter 1char* pBuffer: Thebuffer forcalculationParameter 2intn Count: Thebyte number tobe calculatedParameter 3 int* nResult: Thecalculated valueReadFromIO If “nToRead” is “0”, data is readfrom the I/O device of adesignated controller for thetimeout specified in thecommunication settings.If “nToRead” is not “0”, thenumber of data specified is read,or data is read until the timeout isreached.Example:char Response[32];intReadSize;memset(&Response[0], 0, 32);ReadSize = ReadFromIO(0,&Response[0], 32 );Return valueint: The bytenumber of theread dataParameter 1intn Ctlr: Thecontroller number(0-3)Parameter 2char* pBuffer: Thebuffer that willstore the readdataParameter 3intn ToRead: Thesize of the data tobe readWriteToIO Transmit data to the I/O device ofa designated PLC.Example:char Command[6] = "ABCDEF";intn SentSize;nSentSize = WriteToIO(0,&Command[0], 6 );Return valueint: The bytenumber of thetransmitted dataParameter 1 intn Ctlr: The PLCnumber (0-3)Parameter 2char* pBuffer: Thedata buffer to betransmitted.Parameter 3 intn Size: Thebuffer sizeUnderstanding Memory FunctionsThe table below describes properties of the memory functions.Function Description Parameters4. Reference4-146Function Description ParametersHIBYTE Obtains the upper byte of the enteredword values.Example:intn Value = 0x1234;char nResult;nResult = HIBYTE(nValue);Return value char: Upper byteParameter 1 intn Value: Theentered dataLOBYTE Obtains the lower byte of the enteredword values.Example:intn Value = 0x1234;char nResult;nResult = LOBYTE(nValue);Return value char: Lower byteParameter 1 intn Value: Theentered dataMAKEWORD Obtains word values with two enteredbyte values.Example:char cLow = 0x12, cHigh = 0x34;intn Result;nResult = MAKEWORD(cLow, cHigh);//The result is 0x3412.Return value int: Word ValueParameter 1 char cLow: LowerbyteParameter 2 char cHigh: UpperbyteMemcpy Copies the data from the sourcebuffer to the destination buffer.Example:char src[9] = “123456789”, dst[4];Memcpy(&src[2], &dst[0], 4);Return valueBOOL: If thenumber is beyondthe range of thebuffer, FALSE isreturned.Parameter 1char * pDstData:The destinationbufferParameter 2char * pSrcData:The source bufferto be copiedParameter 3intn DataSize: Thedata number tobe copied (charnumber)Memset Initializes the buffer with a designatedvalue.Example:char src[9];Memset(&src[0], 0, 10);Return valueBOOL: If thenumber is beyondthe range of thebuffer, FALSE isreturned.4. Reference4-147Function Description ParametersParameter 1char * pSrcData:The source bufferto be copiedParameter 2char byData:Value to beinitializedParameter 3intn DataSize: Thedata number tobe initialized(char number)Memcmp Compares two buffers.Example:char src[9] = “123456789”, dst[4] =“3456”;intn Result;Memcmp(&src[2], &dst[0], 4,&nResult);Return valueBOOL: If thenumber is beyondthe range of thebuffer, FALSE isreturned.Parameter 1 char* pBuffer1:buffer 1Parameter 2 char* pBuffer2:buffer 2Parameter 3intn DataSize: Thedata number tobe compared(char number)Parameter 4int* nResult: If thetwo buffers arethe same, 0 isreturned. If theyare different, 1 isreturned.SwapWord Swap upper and lower byte datavalues of Word data.Example:intn Src = 0x1234, nResult;nResult = SwapWord(nSrc);//The value of nResult is 0x3412.Return value int: The swappeddata valueParameter 1intn SrcData: Thedata value to beswapedSwapDWord Swap upper and lower word datavalues of DWord data.Example:intn Src = 0x12345678, nResult;nResult = SwapDWord(nSrc);Return value int: The swappeddata valueParameter 1intn SrcData: Thedata value to beswapped4. Reference4-148Function Description Parameters//The value of nResult is 0x56781234.Understanding Data Conversion FunctionsThe table below describes properties of the data conversion functions.Function Description ParametersASCII2HEX Converts ASCII data to hexadecimaldata.Example:char buf[4] = “1234”;intn Result;ASCII2HEX(&buf[0], nResult, 4);//The value of nResult is 0x1234.Return valueBOOL: If thenumber is beyondthe range of thebuffer, FALSE isreturned.Parameter 1char* pSrcBuffer:The source bufferto be convertedParameter 2int* pRetValue:The variable thatwill store the datato be convertedParameter 3intn Count: Thenumber of bytesto be converted(1-8)HEX2ASCII Converts hexadecimal data to ASCIIdata.Example:char buf[4];intn Src = 0x1234;HEX2ASCII (nSrc, &buf[0], 4);Return valueBOOL: If the datanumber to beconverted is notbetween 1 and 8,or the size of thepDstBuffer islower than thatnumber, FALSE isreturned.Parameter 1intn Value: Thevalue to beconvertedParameter 2char* pDstBuffer:The destinationbuffer that willstore the data tobe converted4. Reference4-149Function Description ParametersParameter 3intn Count:Number of bytesto be converted(1-8)ASCII2DEC Converts ASCII data to decimal data.Example:char buf[4] = “1234”;intn Result;ASCII2HEX(&buf[0], nResult, 4);//The value of nResult is 1234.Return valueBOOL: If thenumber is beyondthe range of thebuffer, FALSE isreturned.Parameter 1char* pSrcBuffer:The source bufferto be convertedParameter 2int* pRetValue:The variable thatwill store the datato be convertedParameter 3intn Count: Thenumber of bytesto be converted(1-10)DEC2ASCII Converts decimal data to ASCII data.Example:char buf[4];intn Src = 1234;HEX2ASCII (nSrc, &buf[0], 4); Return valueBOOL: If the datanumber to beconverted is notbetween 1 and 8or the size ofpDstBuffer islower than thatnumber, FALSE isreturned.Parameter 1intn Value: Thevalue to beconvertedParameter 2char* pDstBuffer:The destinationbuffer that willstore theconverted dataParameter 3intn Count: Thenumber of bytesto be converted(1-10)4. Reference4-150NoteIf data that cannot be converted is encountered in the buffer, data conversion will stop. For example,when converting {“1”,”A,”B”,”3”,”K”,”2”,”8”,} from ASCII to hexadecimal, the result is {0x1AB3}, because theconversion cannot be completed.Understanding Other FunctionsThe following table describes properties of other functions.Function Description ParametersBacklightOn Turns the XGT Panel LCD on or off.This function is not supported by theIPC series.Example:if(@[X: HX100] == true)BacklightOn(true);Bool bOn: Backlight is turned on oroff.Buzzer Sound the buzzer for a specified time(50 ms). This function is notsupported by the IPC series.Example:if(@[X: HX100] == true) Buzzer();NoneSetBuzzerEnable Turn the buzzer on or off. Thisfunction is not supported by the IPCseries.Example:if(@[X: HX100] == true){SetBuzzerEnable(true); Buzzer();}Bool bEnable: Buzzer is turned on oroff.ShowStatusbar Show or hide the status bar. Thestatus bar appears and thendisappears automatically after aspecified time. This function is notsupported by the IPC series.Example:if(@[X: HX100] == true)ShowStatusbar();Bool bShow: Show the status bar.4. Reference4-151Function Description ParametersSleep Pause scripts for a specified time.Example:Int nLoop;for(nLoop = 0; nLoop<10;nLoop++){ Buzzer(); Sleep(500);}Int nSleepTime: Time to be stoppedtemporally (ms)RunExtProgram Runs external program.Set as char array.Example:char a[100] ="FlashDiskFILETEST.exe";char b[5] = "";if(@[x:HS0000.D] == true){RunExtProgram ( &a, &b );}First: Path of the program.Second: Parameter (eg. –silent)4. Reference4-1524.3 ObjectsObjects can change appearance, based on monitored data values. The subsections that follow explainwhat each object in XP-Builder can do and how to change its settings. For more information aboutdrawing objects, refer to <2.3.4.3 Drawing Objects>.You can set conditional settings for objects to change properties, such as the background color, framecolor, outline, text display, and more, as shown in the below table.Object SettingsSwitch Object Operation condition/Lamp conditionWord Lamp Image and text propertiesWord Message Image color/Image background color/Text color/TextNumeric InputNumeric DisplayImage background color/Text color/FlashingWord Window The window number to moveWord Part The part number to moveBar Graph The background color to be filled/The color to be filledPie Graph The background color to be filled/The color to be filledMeter Graph The pointer colorClosed Graph The background color to be filled/The color to be filledTo set a conditional expression, click in the object property window to register it.The Range Edit window will appear, as shown below. The window may appear different for each object.4. Reference4-153Function DescriptionStyle Select a format for inputting conditional expressions (two terms orthree terms).a. Preview Expressions Preview the conditional expression.b. Operand Set the operand and operator to set the range.Constant Set the number directly for the operand.$V(Standard Device) Set the standard device value that the object is monitoring as theoperand.Other Device Set the other device value as the operand.NoteRefer to the below table for the minimum and maximum constant values based on the device size.Device size Device type Minimum Maximum16 bit Signed decimal -32768 3276716 bit Unsigned decimal 0 6553516 bit BCD 0 999932 bit Signed decimal -2147483648 214748364732 bit Unsigned decimal 0 429496729532 bit BCD 0 99999999ab4. Reference4-154Lamp ObjectsLamp objects change shape or form based on the state of the PLC devices that they are connected to.Lamp objects come in three types: bit lamps, word lamps, and N-state lamps. Bit lamps change based onthe on/off state, word lamps change based on the text value, and N-state lamps change based on up tofive device statuses.Note• If a lamp object is not connected to a PLC device, the lamp is not displayed on the XGT Panel.• The lamp displays the default image if the connection with PLC device fails before 1 scan iscompleted.※ For details, refer to .• Do not overlay lamps on top of other objects. They may not be displayed correctly.Bit LampThe form of a bit lamp changes based on the on/off state of the connected device. This section describesavailable settings for bit lamp objects. Basic: The basic settings for bit lamp objects are shown in the screenshots below.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Description: Enter a description for the object.4. Reference4-155 Display: The display settings for bit lamp objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Transparent BG Image: Check the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state.- Image Type: Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between “On” and“Off” states. If you select the change color or pattern option, you must select a vector image for theobject. To view characteristics of raster or vector images, refer to <2.4.1 Managing GraphicLibraries>.Not Change Color/Pattern Use the original image. You can apply thepattern or color to the image. Select theimage to display for the “On” or ”Off” statusfrom raster, vector, or user-registered images.Same Image & ChangeColor/Pattern in On/OffSelect a vector image. You cannot select araster image. Apply a pattern or color to theimage.- Library: Click to select an image from an image library.- Open: Click to browse images on your computer. When you select an image from your computer, itwill be added to the image library automatically.- Pattern: Click a pattern to apply to the image. This option is available only when you select thechange color or pattern option in Image Type. Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects, butnot to the frames. The frames are different for each image. Refer to the below examples.PatternFrame4. Reference4-156- Pattern FG Color: Set a color for the foreground pattern.- Pattern BG Color: Set a color for the background pattern.- Frame Color: Set a frame color.- Blink: Set a blink speed for the object:Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.Fast The object will blink every second.PatternFramePatternFrame4. Reference4-157 Text: The text settings for bit lamp objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Use Caption: Check the checkbox to use a text caption with the object. When you select thisoption, you can input text from a text table.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- From Text Table: Check the checkbox to add text from a text table. The Text Table option will beactivated and the text input area will close. Add the required text to the text table before editingthe object. You must select text for the “On” and “Off” states from the same text table.- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select text. The color and font properties set in the texttable will be imported with the text.Select a text table andlanguageRegistered text table list4. Reference4-158- On <-> Off Copy: Click to copy the text and formatting from the “on” state to the “off” state orvice versa.- Copy Only Caption: You can open the dropdown menu next to [On -> Off] to select [Copy OnlyCaption]. This feature allows you to copy only the currently selected text string to another state.- Copy Only Property: You can open the dropdown menu next to [On -> Off] to select [Copy OnlyProperty]. This feature allows you to copy all properties except the currently selected text string arecopied to another state.- Delete On/Off Caption: Click to clear text settings for the current state.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Set a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a rate of 1%-600%.- Blink: Set a blink speed for the caption.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.Not use The caption will not blink.Slow The caption will blink every three seconds.Normal The caption will blink every two seconds.Fast The caption will blink every second.- Char. Spacing: Set text intervals. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid or have the same effect as a positivenumber.4. Reference4-159- Line Spacing: Set line spacing. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease, and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid of have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Change the Property of Text Table: Click to use different color and font properties for the textthan what is specified in the text table. This option is active only when you fetch text from the texttable.- Color: Set a font color.- Font Style: Set a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, or Right).- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, or Bottom). Detail: The detail settings for bit lamp objects include the following.- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the Offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.4. Reference4-160 Display Trigger: The display trigger setting for bit lamp objects.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the display trigger.- Type: Select the type of condition to be set.Bit On The object will display when the device is on.Bit Off The object will display when the device is off.Range The object will display when the range condition of the device issatisfied.Multi Bit The object will display when the logical operation results ofmultiple device are satisfied.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: Sets the range condition when you select it.Size 16bit or 32bit.Type Signed DEC, Unsigned DEC, BCD, or float.Expression Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-161Word LampThe form of a word lamp changes based on the text value of the connected device. This section describesavailable settings for word lamp objects.Below is an example of how to create and set a word lamp.1 Insert a word lamp on the screen.2 Double-click the word lamp to open the properties window.3 Set the device to IW0.0.2 from the Basic setting.4 Create four conditional expressions from the Basic setting. ($V is a standard device.)5 Set the images for conditions 1 to 4 in the Display setting.6 Set the text for conditions 1 to 4 in the Text setting.$V == 1$V == 2$V == 3$V == 44. Reference4-162 Basic: The basic settings for word lamp objects include the following.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Size: Set the data size for the device (16 bit upper byte, 16 bit lower byte, 16 bit, or 32 bit).- Type: Set the data type for the device (signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float).- Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions:(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up toeight conditions. Clicking this button opens the Range Editwindow, which allows you to create a condition. For moreinformation, refer to <4.2.1.3 Understanding Constants andData Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher upthe list.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower downthe list.(Copy&Paste) Select the conditional statement and click the correspondingbutton to add a new conditional statement.However, new conditional statements are not added if thenumber of conditional statements reach 64.- Description: Enter a description for the object.4. Reference4-163 Display: The display settings for word lamp objects include the following.- Transparent BG Image: Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.- State: Select a state from the drop-down list to configure options for each state.- Blink: Set a blink speed for the object:XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.Fast The object will blink every second.- Image Type: Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between “On” and“Off” states. If you select the Change Color/Pattern option, you must select a vector image for theobject. To view characteristics of raster or vector images, refer to <2.4.1 Managing GraphicLibraries>.Not Change Color/Pattern Use the original image. You can apply the pattern orcolor to the image. Select the image to display forOn or Off status from raster, vector, or userregistered images.Same Image & ChangeColor/Pattern in On/OffSelect a vector image. You cannot select a rasterimage. Apply a pattern or color to the image.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse for images on your computer. When you select an image from yourcomputer, it will be added to the image library automatically.4. Reference4-164- Pattern: Click a pattern to apply to the image. This option is available only when you select thechange color or pattern option in Image Type. Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects, butnot to the frames. The frames are different for each image. Refer the following examples:- Pattern FG Color: Set a color for the foreground pattern.- Pattern BG Color: Set a color for the background pattern.- Frame Color: Set a frame color. Text: The text settings for word lamp objects include the following.- Use Caption: Click the checkbox to use a text caption with the object. When you select this option,you can input text from a Text Table.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state. You must input the text in a texttable.PatternFramePatternFramePatternFrame4. Reference4-165- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add text from a text table. The Text Table option will beactivated and the text input area will close. Add the required text to the text table before editingthe object. You must select text for the “On” and “Off” states from the same text table.- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select text. The color and font properties set in the texttable will be imported with the text.- Copy to other state: Click to copy the text string and the text style of the current state to all otherstates.- Copy Only Caption: You can open the dropdown menu next to [Copy to other state] to select[Copy Only Caption]. This feature allows you to copy only the currently selected text string to otherstates.- Copy only property: You can set [Copy only property]. In this case, all properties except thecurrently set string are copied to another state.- Only caption continuous copy: Captions are copied consecutively to different states based on thecurrent state caption.If you inputdirectly.Add the numbers entered directly behind captions toautomatically copy to another state.Select a text table andlanguageRegistered text table list4. Reference4-166For example, if the caption is set to [Control 1] in the state 1, thecaption 0 is automatically set to [Control 0] and the caption 2 isset to [Control 2].If selected as atext tableThe index of the text table is automatically incremented by one.For example, if the caption of state 0 is as follows ([0] is stopped),state 1 caption is automatically set to ([1] in standby), and sate 2caption is automatically set to ([2] start).Slow The caption will blink every three seconds.Normal The caption will blink every two seconds.Fast The caption will blink every second.- Caption Continuous Copy: Captions are copied continuously by the above method, and the setproperty information (alignment, font, size, etc.) is also copied together.- Delete Caption: Click to clear text settings for the current state.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Set a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a rate of 1%-600%.- Blink: Set the blink speed for the caption.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.Not use The caption will not blink.Slow The caption will blink every three seconds.Normal The caption will blink every two seconds.Fast The caption will blink every second.- Char. Spacing: Set text intervals. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid or have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Line Spacing: Set line spacing. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease, and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid of have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Change the Property of Text Table: Click to use different color and font properties for the textthan what is specified in the text table. This option is active only when you fetch text from the texttable.4. Reference4-167- Color: Set a font color.- Font Style: Set a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, or Right).- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, or Bottom). Operation: Operation settings for word lamp objects include the following.- Use Script: Check the checkbox to use a script with the object.- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.- Script: When you select a script, it appears here. To modify a script, refer to <4.2 Scripts>.4. Reference4-168 Detail: The detail settings for word lamp objects include the following.- Offset: Check the checkbox to use the Offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary. Display Trigger: The display trigger setting for word lamp objects.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the display trigger.- Type: Select the type of condition to be set.Bit On The object will display when the device is on.4. Reference4-169Bit Off The object will display when the device is off.Range The object will display when the range condition of the device issatisfied.Multi Bit The object will display when the logical operation results ofmultiple device are satisfied.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the device windowyou can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: Sets the range condition when you select it.Size 16bit or 32bit.Type Signed DEC, Unsigned DEC, BCD, or float.Expression Click to designate the expression as conditional- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] to thebit condition.4. Reference4-170N-State LampThis section describes available settings for N-State lamp objects. The form of an N-State lamp changesbased on the statuses of up to 16 controllers. Refer to the following examples: Monitoring device (Bit device): P0000, M0000Priority Status No. Bit DeviceStatusImage Color Displayed Text FlashingSpeedHigh Status 0 P0000: OFFM0000: OFFBlue Normal operation No flashingStatus 1 P0000: ONM0000: OFFRed Stop FastStatus 2 P0000: OFFM000: ONYellow Caution SlowLow Status 3 P0000: ONM0000: ONPurple Alarm NormalP0000: OFF / M0000: OFF P0000: ON / M0000: OFFP0000: OFF / M0000: ON P0000: ON / M0000: ON4. Reference4-171 Basic: The basic settings for N-State lamp objects include the following.- The Num. of State: Select the number of statuses to display for the object (from 3 to 16).- State Change Condition: Set a method for changing device statuses.Change Conditionby BitDisplay the On/Off status for up to four controllers with onelamp. The maximum number of statuses is five. Refer to thefollowing example:Type P0 P1 P2 P3 DisplayexampleStatus 1 OFF OFF OFF OFFStatus 2 ON OFF OFF OFFStatus 3 OFF ON OFF OFFStatus 4 OFF OFF ON OFFStatus 5 OFF OFF OFF ONChange Conditionby Bit CombinationDisplays the combined On/Off status for up to four controllerswith one lamp. The maximum number of statuses is 16. Refer tothe following example:Type P0 P1 P2 P3 DisplayexampleStatus 1 OFF OFF OFF OFFStatus 2 ON OFF OFF OFFStatus 3 OFF ON OFF OFFStatus 4 ON ON OFF OFFStatus 5 OFF OFF ON OFF4. Reference4-172- Device Setting: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad iconto the right to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Description: Enter a description for the object. Display: The display settings for word lamp objects include the following.- Transparent BG Image: Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent.- State: Select a state from the drop-down list to configure options for each state.- Blink: Set a blink speed for the object:Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.Fast The object will blink every second.- Image Type: Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between “On” and“Off” states. If you select the change color or pattern option, you must select a vector image for theobject. To view characteristics of raster or vector images, refer to <2.4.1 Managing GraphicLibraries>.Not Change Color/Pattern Use the original image. You can apply the pattern orcolor to the image. Select the image to display for Onor Off status from raster, vector, or user registeredimages.Same Image & ChangeColor/Pattern in On/OffSelect a vector image. You cannot select a rasterimage. Apply a pattern or color to the image.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.4. Reference4-173- Open: Click to browse for images on your computer. When you select an image from yourcomputer, it will be added to the image library automatically.- Pattern: Click a pattern to apply to the image. This option is available only when you select thechange color or pattern option in Image Type. Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects, butnot to the frames. The frames are different for each image. Refer the following examples:- Pattern FG Color: Set a color for the foreground pattern.- Pattern BG Color: Set a color for the background pattern.- Frame Color: Set a frame color. Text Settings: The text settings for word lamp objects include the following.- Use Caption: Check the checkbox to use a text caption with the object. When you select thisoption, you can input text from a Text Table.PatternFramePatternFramePatternFrame4. Reference4-174- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- From Text Table: Check the checkbox to add text from a text table. The Text Table option will beactivated and the text input area will close. Add the required text to the text table before editingthe object. You must select text for each state from the same text table.- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select text. The color and font properties set in the texttable will be imported with the text.- Delete Caption: Click to clear text settings for the current state.- Copy to other state: Click to copy the current caption to another state’s caption properties.- Copy Only Caption: You can open the dropdown menu next to [Copy to other state] to select[Copy Only Caption]. This feature allows you to copy only the currently selected text string toanother state.- Copy Only Caption: You can open the dropdown menu next to [Copy to other state] to select[Copy Only Caption]. This feature allows you to copy only the currently selected text string toanother state.Select a text table andlanguageRegistered text table list4. Reference4-175- Copy only property: You can set [Copy only property]. In this case, all properties except thecurrently set string are copied to another state.- Only caption continuous copy: Captions are copied consecutively to different states based on thecurrent state caption.If you inputdirectly.Add the numbers entered directly behind captions toautomatically copy to another state.For example, if the caption is set to [Control 1] in the state 1, thecaption 0 is automatically set to [Control 0] and the caption 2 isset to [Control 2].If selected as atext tableThe index of the text table is automatically incremented by one.For example, if the caption of state 0 is as follows ([0] is stopped),state 1 caption is automatically set to ([1] in standby), and sate 2caption is automatically set to ([2] start).Slow The caption will blink every three seconds.Normal The caption will blink every two seconds.Fast The caption will blink every second.- Caption Continuous Copy: Captions are copied continuously by the above method, and the setproperty information (alignment, font, size, etc.) is also copied together.4. Reference4-176- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Set a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a rate of 1%-600%.- Blink: Set the blink speed for the caption.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supportedNot use The caption will not blink.Slow The caption will blink every three seconds.Normal The caption will blink every two seconds.Fast The caption will blink every second.- Char. Spacing: Set text intervals. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid or have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Line. Spacing: Set line spacing. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease, and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid of have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Change the Property of Text Table: Click to use different color and font properties for the textthan what is specified in the text table. This option is active only when you fetch text from the texttable.- Color: Set a font color.- Font Style: Set a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, or Right).- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, or Bottom).4. Reference4-177 Display Trigger: The display trigger setting for word lamp objects.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the display trigger.- Type: Select the type of condition to be set.Bit On The object will display when the device is on.Bit Off The object will display when the device is off.Range The object will display when the range condition of the device issatisfied.Multi Bit The object will display when the logical operation results ofmultiple device are satisfied.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: Sets the range condition when you select it.Size 16bit or 32bit.Type Signed DEC, Unsigned DEC, BCD, or float.Expression Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-178Switch ObjectsSwitches execute one or more functions, based on the switch type. Five switch types are available: Bit,Word, Change screen, Special, and Multi. Bit switches control On/Off states, Word switches executescripts or change values, Change screen switches change screens in the XGT Panel interface. Specialswitches perform storage-related actions. Multi switches carry out multiple functions.Note• If the switch is not connected to PLC device when using lamp condition, it is not displayed on XGTPanel.• The lamp displays the default image if the connection with PLC device fails before 1 scan iscompleted.※ For details, refer to .Bit SwitchBit switches control On/Off states of bit devices. This section describes available settings for bit switchobjects. Basic: The basic settings for bit switches include the following.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Copy to Lamp: Click to copy the device address from a bit switch to a lamp condition address.- Action Type: Set an operation to perform when the switch is activated.On Turns on the relevant bit device in the PLC when the switch isactivated. The state is preserved until changed by another 4. Reference4-179action.Off Turns off the relevant bit device in the PLC when the switch isactivated. The state is preserved until changed by anotheraction.Momentary Turns on the relevant bit device in the PLC only while the switchobject is held. The state returns to “Off” when the switch isreleased.Alternative Switches the relevant bit device value to the opposite statewhen the switch is activated. If the object is on when the switchis activated, it will turn off and vice versa.- Use Lamp Condition: If you want to control a lamp with a method other than simply turning it onwhen the switch is activated, you can select a different action.Bit Device When the device state is “On”, the lamp is on.Copy to Main The lamp condition’s bit device address is copied to the basicdevice of a bit switch.Word Device When the condition is met, the lamp is on.Size 16 bit upper byte, 16 bit lower byte, 16 bit, or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Use Lamp Offset: Click to set an offset for the lamp.- Description: Enter a description for the object. Display: The display settings for bit switch objects include the following.- Transparent BG Image: Check the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.4. Reference4-180- Use Image Reverse: The switch image is reversed when you tap the object or a condition is met. Ifyou set this option, you cannot use the Transparent BG Image option or the On/Off image. If youset the Transparent BG Image option, you cannot use this option.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state.- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in the Off state to On.- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On status to Off.- Image Type: Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between “On” and“Off” states. If you select the change color or pattern option, you must select a vector image for theobject. To view characteristics of raster or vector images refer to <2.4.1 Managing GraphicLibraries>.Not Change Color/Pattern Use the original image. You can apply the pattern orcolor to the image. Select the image to display forOn/Off status from raster, vector, or user registeredimages.Same Image & ChangeColor/Pattern in On/OffSelect a vector image. You cannot select a rasterimage. Apply a pattern or color to the image.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse for images on your computer. When you select an image from yourcomputer, it will be added to the image library automatically.- Pattern: Click a pattern to apply to the image. This option is available only when you select theChange color or Pattern option in Image Type. Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects, butnot to the frames. The frames are different for each image. Refer the following examples:- Pattern FG Color: Set a color for the foreground pattern.- Pattern BG Color: Set a color for the background pattern.- Frame Color: Set a frame color.PatternFramePatternFramePatternFrame4. Reference4-181- Blink: Set a blink speed for the object. To use the blink function, you must set the Use LampCondition option in the Basic settings.Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.Fast The object will blink every second. Text: The text settings for bit switch objects include the following.- Use Caption: Check the checkbox to use a text caption with the object. When you select thisoption, you can input text from a text table.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state. You must input text in a text table.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state. You must input text in a text table.- From Text Table: Check the checkbox to add text from a text table. The Text Table option will beactivated and the text input area will close. Add the required text to the text table before editingthe object. You must select text for the “On” and “Off” states from the same text table.- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select text. The color and font properties set in the texttable will be imported with the text.4. Reference4-182- On <-> Off Copy: Click to copy the text and formatting from the “On” state to the “Off” state orvice versa.- Copy Only Caption: You can open the dropdown menu next to [On -> Off] to select [Copy OnlyCaption]. This feature allows you to copy only the currently selected text string to another state.- Copy Only Property: You can open the dropdown menu next to [On -> Off] to select [Copy OnlyProperty]. This feature allows you to copy all properties except the currently selected text string arecopied to another state.- Delete On/Off Caption: Click to clear text settings for the current state.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Set a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a rate of 1%-600%.- Blink: Set the blink speed for the caption.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.Not use The caption will not blink.Select a text table andlanguageRegistered text table list4. Reference4-183Slow The caption will blink every three seconds.Normal The caption will blink every two seconds.Fast The caption will blink every second.- Char. Spacing: Set text intervals. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid or have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Line. Spacing: Set line spacing. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease, and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid of have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Change the Property of Text Table: Click to use different color and font properties for the textthan what is specified in the text table. This option is active only when you fetch text from the texttable.- Color: Set a font color.- Font Style: Set a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, or Right).- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, or Bottom).4. Reference4-184 Detail: The detail settings for bit switch objects include the following.- Security Level: Set whether or not to require a password to use the object.- Level: Set the security level for the object. The higher the security level is, the shorter theauthorization time becomes when the password is entered. When the authorization time expires,the user must enter the password again to use the object.- Action Delay: Set to delay the action triggered by the switch by a specified time.- Type: Set the type of action delay.On Delay When the switch is activated, the action is performed after thedelay time that you specify.Off Delay When the switch is released, the action is performed after thedelay time that you specify.Press Twice When the switch is activated once, a dialog box is invoked to allowthe user to verify the operation. When the switch is activated asecond time, the action is performed after the delay time that youspecify.- Time: Set the length of time for the action delay.- Offset in [Write] Operation: Set to use the Offset function.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Use Operation Log: Set to allow the device to be monitored in an operation log.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.4. Reference4-185 Action Condition: The action condition settings for bit switch objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result ofmultiple devices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-186 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for bit switch objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the display trigger.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The object will display when the device is on.Bit Off The object will display when the device is offRange The object will display when the range condition of the device issatisfied.Multi Bit The object will display when the logical operation results of multipledevice are satisfied.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-187Word SwitchWord switch executes the script, enters a fixed value, and adds or reduces the value. This sectiondescribes available settings for word switch objects. Basic: The Basic settings for word switch objects include the following.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Size: Set the data size of the device (16-bit upper byte, 16-bit lower byte, 16 bit, or 32 bit).- Type: Set the data form of the device (signed decimal, unsigned decimal, or float).- Action Type: Set the type of the action to perform.Set Write the specified value in the device.Add Add the specified value to the device value.Sub Subtract the specified value from the device value.Script Execute a script.Digit Add Increase the bit value of a specific location in a word device. The valueis added to the current value with as many operands as you specify,but the bit value of the location increases only by the value specifiedhere.0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3rd digit0 0 0 0 1 01 0 0For example, if the device value is as above and the digit is 3, thedevice value will change as shown above when you operate the wordswitch on the XGT Panel.4. Reference4-188Digit Sub Decrease the bit value of a specific location in a word device. Thevalue is subtracted from the current value with as many operands asyou specify, but the bit value of the location decreases only by thevalue specified here.ContinuousAdd /ContinuousSubThis option is available for only [Add], [Sub], [Digit Add], and [DigitSub] operations. When the switch is pressed for more than 1 second,the value increases or decreases by the increment or decrementsettings made in [Constant Value]-[Value] in 0.5 second intervals. If thedevice value exceeds its value range (see the Note below), it isexpressed as a carried number. For example, if it is a 16 bit signeddecimal, subtracting 1 from -32768 makes 32767.- Operand: Set the value to write to the device. The operand can be set as one of the following types.Constant Set a fixed value to use as an operand in the expression.Indirect Set to us the device value as an operand in the expression.Script No. Specify a script when performing actions other than adding,subtracting, writing a specific device value, or writing a fixed value.Data Type Set the data type to be increased or decreased. When you select BCD asthe data type, if the value returned by the specified device exceeds thenumeric range of BCD data (0-9), the word switch will not execute.Digit Set the number of digit to increase or decrease. For 16 bit devices, youcan set it from 1-4. For 32-bit devices, you can set it from 1-8.If the operand is saved as a script, the final value will be applied to the device after completing thecalculation. The description below shows how it works.1. Read the value from the device specified in the word switch and save the valueto the temporary variable referring to the device.2. Operate the script on the read value.3. Apply the value saved on the temporary variable after operating the script.Read the value from the device.Operate the script using theentered value.Apply the script result to thedevice.4. Reference4-189- From the flow chart above, the script result means “the value of the temporary variable whenthe script ends.” If the device value changes during operating the script, it will not affect thescript.- If you change the device value using a direct variable while the script is in operation, thechange will not remain because the value of the temporary variable after the script ends willbe written to the device. If you use the device within a script, a message such as “2012: Thestandard device exists in the specified ‘SCRIPT.’ An unexpected result might occur.” will bedisplayed.NoteIf you set a fixed constant operand, the range of the constant varies based on the sizeand type of the device, as described in the following table.Device Size Device Type Minimum Maximum16-bit upperbyte Signed decimal -128 12716-bit upperbyteUnsigned decimal,binary, hexadecimal,octal0 25516-bit lower byte Signed decimal -128 12716-bit lower byteUnsigned decimal,binary, hexadecimal,octal0 25516 bitSigned decimal -32,768 32,767Unsigned decimal 0 65,535BCD 0 9,99932 bitSigned decimal -2147,483,648 2,147,483,647Unsigned decimal 0 4,294,967,295BCD 0 99999999- Description: Enter a description for the object.4. Reference4-190 Display: The display settings for word switch objects include the following.- Transparent BG Image: Check the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.- Use Image Reverse: The switch image is reversed when you tap the object or a condition is met. Ifyou set this option, you cannot use the Transparent BG Image option or the On/Off image. If youset the Transparent BG Image option, you cannot use this option.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state.- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in the Off state to On.- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On status to Off.- Image Type: Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between “On” and“Off” states. If you select the change color or pattern option, you must select a vector image for theobject. To view characteristics of raster or vector images, refer to <2.4.1 Managing GraphicLibraries>.Not Change Color/Pattern Use the original image. You can apply the pattern orcolor to the image. Select the image to display forOn/Off status from raster, vector, or user registeredimages.Same Image & ChangeColor/Pattern in On/OffSelect a vector image. You cannot select a rasterimage. Apply a pattern or color to the image.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse for images on your computer. When you select an image from yourcomputer, it will be added to the image library automatically.- Pattern: Click a pattern to apply to the image. This option is available only when you select thechange color or pattern option in Image Type. Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects, butnot to the frames. The frames are different for each image. Refer the following examples: 4. Reference4-191- Pattern FG Color: Set a color for the foreground pattern.- Pattern BG Color: Set a color for the background pattern.- Frame Color: Set a frame color.- Blink: Set a blink speed for the object. You can use this option when you check Use LampCondition in the Lamp Condition settings.Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.Fast The object will blink every second.PatternFramePatternFramePatternFrame4. Reference4-192 Text: The text settings for word switch objects include the following.- Use Caption: Check the checkbox to use a text caption with the object. When you select thisoption, you can input text from a text table.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add text from a text table. The Text Table option will beactivated and the text input area will close. Add the required text to the text table before editingthe object. You must select text for the “On” and “Off” states from the same text table.- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select text. The color and font properties set in the texttable will be imported with the text.- On <-> Off Copy: Click to copy the text and formatting from the “On” state to the “Off” state orvice versa.Select a text table andlanguageRegistered text table list4. Reference4-193- Copy Only Caption: You can open the dropdown menu next to [On -> Off] to select [Copy OnlyCaption]. This feature allows you to copy only the currently selected text string to another state.- Copy Only Property: You can open the dropdown menu next to [On -> Off] to select [Copy OnlyProperty]. This feature allows you to copy all properties except the currently selected text string arecopied to another state.- Delete On/Off Caption: Click to clear text settings for the current state.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Set a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a rate of 1%-600%.- Blink: Set the blink speed for the caption.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.Not use The caption will not blink.Slow The caption will blink every three seconds.Normal The caption will blink every two seconds.Fast The caption will blink every second.- Char. Spacing: Set text intervals. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid or have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Line. Spacing: Set line spacing. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease, and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid of have the same effect as a positivenumber- Change the Property of Text Table: Click to use different color and font properties for the textthan what is specified in the text table. This option is active only when you fetch text from the texttable.- Color: Set a font color.- Font Style: Set a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time. 4. Reference4-194- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, or Right).- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, or Bottom). Detail: The detail settings for word switch objects include the following.- Security Level: Set whether or not to require a password to use the object.- Level: Set the security level for the object. The higher the security level, the shorter theauthorization time when the password is entered. When the authorization time expires, the usermust enter the password again to use the object.- Action Delay: Set to delay the action triggered by the switch by a specified time.- Type: Set the type of action delay.On Delay When the switch is activated, the action is performed after thedelay time that you specify.Press Twice When the switch is activated once, a dialog box is invoked to allowthe user to verify the operation. When the switch is activated asecond time, the action is performed after the delay time that youspecify.- Time: Set the length of time for the action delay.- Offset in [Write] Operation: Set to use the Offset function.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Use Operation Log: Set to allow the device to be monitored in an operation log.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.4. Reference4-195 Lamp Condition: The lamp condition settings for word switch objects include the following.- Use Lamp Condition: If you want to control a lamp with a method other than simply turning it onwhen the switch is activated, you can select a different action.- Type: Select a condition for lamp control.Bit When the device state is “On”, the lamp is on.Word When the condition is met, the lamp is on.- Bit: If you selected the bit condition type, specify a bit device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.- Word: If you selected the word condition type, specify a word device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.Size 16-bit upper byte, 16-bit lower byte, 16 bit, or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Use Lamp Offset: Click to set an offset for the lamp.4. Reference4-196 Action Condition: The action condition settings for word switch objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result ofmultiple devices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-197 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for word switch objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the display trigger.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The object will display when the device is on.Bit Off The object will display when the device is offRange The object will display when the range condition of the device issatisfied.Multi Bit The object will display when the logical operation results of multipledevice are satisfied.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-198Change Screen SwitchThe Change screen switch allows the user to switch screens in the interface. You can specify the type ofscreen to change to when the switch is activated. This section describes available settings for changescreen switch objects. Basic: The basic settings for change screen switch objects include the following.- Screen: Select a type of screen to change to.- Type: Set how the screen changes.Device The screen switches to the screen number that matches the devicevalue. If no screen matches the device value, the screen does notchange.Const The screen switches to a specified screen, regardless of the devicevalue.Screen No. Set the screen number or click [Browse] to locate a screen.If [Project Properties > Screen Settings > Change Screen by Device] is set, the screen change switchwill first attempt to write the screen number to the corresponding ‘Change to Screen Number’device. If the communication is normal, the value is written to the relevant device and the screen isswitched. However, if the communication is disconnected, the communication will be repeated asmuch as the [Timeout * Retry count] time entered in [Project Property > XGT Panel Settings]. Andeven if the time fails to write the value to screen change device, the screen is changed. In this state,if communication is resumed and the value of screen change device is read, it returns to the screencorresponding to the value.- Screen Change Type: Select a method for changing screens.Fixed The screen switches to a specified screen.Previous The screen switches to the previous screen.- Description: Enter a description for the object.4. Reference4-199- Offset When Using Import: Set to apply an offset to the screen number when importing a screenthat contains a change screen switch.When you do not select this option, the screen number will not change after importing.The screen number does not change and retains the screen number 1 that is set when exporting.When you select this option, the screen number, plus the offset, will be set to the change screenswitch.4. Reference4-200 Display: The display settings for change screen switch objects include the following.- Transparent BG Image: Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.- Use Image Reverse: The switch image is reversed when you tap the object or a condition is met. Ifyou set this option, you cannot use the Transparent BG Image option or the On/Off image. If youset the Transparent BG Image option, you cannot use this option.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state.- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in the Off state to On.- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On status to Off.- Image Type: Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between “On” and“Off” states. If you select the change color or pattern option, you must select a vector image for theobject. To view characteristics of raster or vector images, refer to <2.4.1 Managing GraphicLibraries>.Not Change Color/Pattern Use the original image. You can apply the pattern orcolor to the image. Select the image to display for Onor Off status from raster, vector, or user-registeredimages.Same Image & ChangeColor/Pattern in On/OffSelect a vector image. You cannot select a rasterimage. Apply a pattern or color to the image.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse for images on your computer. When you select an image from yourcomputer, it will be added to the image library automatically.- Pattern: Click a pattern to apply to the image. This option is available only when you select theChange Color or Pattern option in Image Type. Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects,but not to the frames. The frames are different for each image. Refer the following examples: 4. Reference4-201- Pattern FG Color: Set a color for the foreground pattern.- Pattern BG Color: Set a color for the background pattern.- Frame Color: Set a frame color. Text: The text settings for screen change object include the following.- Use Caption: Click the checkbox to use a text caption with the object. When you select this option,you can input text from a text table.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add text from a text table. The Text Table option will beactivated and the text input area will close. Add the required text to the text table before editingthe object. You must select text for the “On” and “Off” states from the same text table.PatternFramePatternFramePatternFrame4. Reference4-202- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select text. The color and font properties set in the texttable will be imported with the text.- On <-> Off Copy: Click to copy the text and formatting from the “On” state to the “Off” state orvice versa.- Copy Only Caption: You can open the dropdown menu next to [Copy to other state] to select[Copy Only Caption]. This feature allows you to copy only the currently selected text string toanother state.- Copy Only Property: You can open the dropdown menu next to [On -> Off] to select [Copy OnlyProperty]. This feature allows you to copy all properties except the currently selected text string arecopied to another state.- Delete On/Off Caption: Click to clear text settings for the current state.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Set a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a rate of 1%-600%.Select a text table andlanguageRegistered text table list4. Reference4-203- Blink: Set the blink speed for the caption.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.Not use The caption will not blink.Slow The caption will blink every three seconds.Normal The caption will blink every two seconds.Fast The caption will blink every second.- Char. Spacing: Set text intervals. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid or have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Line. Spacing: Set line spacing. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease, and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid of have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Change the Property of Text Table: Click to use different color and font properties for the textthan what is specified in the text table. This option is active only when you fetch text from the texttable.- Color: Set a font color.- Font Style: Set a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, or Right).- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, or Bottom).4. Reference4-204 Detail: The detail settings for change screen switch objects include the following.- Security Level: Set whether or not to require a password to use the object.- Level: Set the security level for the object. The higher the security level, the shorter theauthorization time when the password is entered. When the authorization time expires, the usermust enter the password again to use the object.- Action Delay: Set to delay the action triggered by the switch by a specified time.- Type: Set the type of action delay.On Delay When the switch is activated, the action is performed after thedelay time that you specify.Press Twice When the switch is activated once, a dialog box is invoked toallow the user to verify the operation. When the switch isactivated a second time, the action is performed after the delaytime that you specify.- Offset in [Write] Operation: Set to use the Offset function. The change screen switch does notsupport this function.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Use Operation Log: Set to allow the device to be monitored in an operation log.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.4. Reference4-205 Action Condition: The action condition settings for change screen switch objects include thefollowing.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-206 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for change screen switch objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the display trigger.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The object will display when the device is on.Bit Off The object will display when the device is offRange The object will display when the range condition of the device issatisfied.Multi Bit The object will display when the logical operation results of multipledevice are satisfied.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-207Special SwitchThis switch is for carrying out key code, alarm, logging, printing, language switching, script operation,and other storage-related actions. This section describes available settings for special switch objects. Basic: The basic settings for special switch objects include the following. You can select the functionfor the special switch and set the properties in the Special Switch Function settings.- History Alarm ViewerFunction DescriptionAlarm Group Filtering Set to filter the history alarms by the group.Check All Alarm Data inAlarm PageSet to view all alarm data or only specified alarm data byselecting the alarm. The view time is recorded for bothcases.• When checking all data Check Selected AlarmData in Alarm Viewer4. Reference4-208Function Description• When checking the selected alarm dataDelete All OccurrenceNo.Set to delete data for triggered alarms when the switch isactivated.Delete Occurrence No.of Selected AlarmSet to delete selected history alarm data on the currentpage when the switch is activated.Delete RecoveredAlarm Data in AlarmViewer PageSet to delete all recovered data when the switch is activated.Delete Recovered AllData in Alarm ViewerSet to delete all recovered data when the switch is activated.Delete SelectedRecovered in AlarmViewerSet to delete the specified data, except for unrecoveredalarm data when the switch is activated.Go to History AlarmViewer DetailWhen an alarm occurs, additional information related to thealarm may be required to solve the problem. In that case, awindow can be invoked with information from other objects.Set this function to see detailed history alarm data when theswitch is activated.4. Reference4-209Function DescriptionTo set the function to show detailed data:1. Edit the detailed Window screen.2. Check the box next to Show detail window.3. In History Alarm Viewer, set options under Use DetailedWindow Position.4. In the XGT panel, select an alarm, and then tap thespecial switch.History Alarm Filter Set to filter history alarm data and display it with the historyalarm viewer object. There are five types of filters:Occurrence, Check, Restoration, Uncheck, and Unrestoration(unrestored alarms).Type DescriptionOccurrence View the every history alarm dataoccurred.Check View the checked history alarmdata with the special switch.Restoration View the restored history alarmdata.Example of checked history alarm data4. Reference4-210Function DescriptionHistory Alarm ViewerLine DownSet to scroll history alarm data in the specified directionwhen the switch is activated.History Alarm ViewerLine upHistory Alarm ViewerPage DownHistory Alarm ViewerPage UpPrint History Alarm Set to print the selected history alarm data when the switchis activated. An alarm group can be chosen from the historyalarm list.Selected History AlarmViewer Line DownSet to change the line of the history alarm data when theswitch is activated.Selected History AlarmViewer Line Up4. Reference4-211- History Alarm Row Scroll: Set to move to the specified area of the history alarm data when theswitch is activated. If the number of data columns exceeds the columns supported by the XGTpanel, this function allows you to view more data.For the history alarms data such as above, the descriptions below show how each function operates:Function DescriptionNext Column Use this function when there are more columns to view thanare displayed on the XGT-Panel. Fixed columns retain andthe next column will be displayed on the area of unfixedcolumn.History alarm data displayed on the XGT-PanelIn the example above, data exists in the right-hand columnbut there is not enough area to show the all the data sosome columns are displayed in part.Pre. Column Use this function when there are more columns to view thanare displayed on the XGT-Panel. Fixed columns retain andthe previous column will be displayed on the area of unfixedcolumn.First Column Among the history alarm data, the history alarm on the firstHistory alarm data displayed on the XGT-PanelFixedUnfixedActual history alarm dataFixed4. Reference4-212Function Descriptioncolumn of the history alarm viewer on the XGT-Panel will bedisplayed.Last Column The history alarm on the last column of the history alarmviewer on the XGT-Panel will be displayed.If the total object area is greater than the width of thecolumns, the part that exceeds the width of the columns isshown in gray.- Logging ViewerFunction DescriptionLogging Viewer Line Down Set to scroll logging data up or down when theswitch is activated. Logging Viewer Line UpLogging Viewer Page DownLogging Viewer Page Up- Logging Row ScrollFunction DescriptionFirst Column Set to move to the specified area of the logging data when theswitch is activated. If the number of data columns exceeds thecolumns supported by the XGT panel, this function allows youto view more data.As the following example illustrates, fixed columns never move,but the unfixed areas can be moved, so that you can view moredata.Time Location Process 3 Process 42013/03/29 Line 1 21 312013/03/30 Line 2 22 322013/03/31 Line 3 23 332013/04/01 Line 4 24 34If the total object area is greater than the width of the columns,Last ColumnNext ColumnPrevious ColumnNext PagePrevious Page Fixed Unfixed4. Reference4-213Function Descriptionthe part that exceeds the width of the columns is shown in gray.- Alarm NavigatorFunction DescriptionAlarm NavigatorViewer Line DownSet to move up or down a line in the alarm search resultswhen the switch is activated.Alarm NavigatorViewer Line Up- Logging TrendFunction DescriptionNext Log Trend Data View the next log. You can set the number of logs to display.For example, if the number is set to “8”, the graph willdisplay the trend for the next eight logs.Previous Log TrendDataView the previous log. You can set the number of logs todisplay. For example, if the number is set to “8”, the graphwill display the trend for the previous eight logs.The First Log Trend View the first or last logged data.Current logging data4. Reference4-214Function DescriptionDataThe Last Log TrendDataBookMark Set/Reset This function sets the user’s specified data area in thelogging trend graph as a bookmark. The data areas in thegraph can be navigated freely and have access to return tothe bookmarked location.For example, two bookmarks can be set as shown below.After the bookmarks are set, the user can navigate thegraph to the area enclosed by dotted lines in the graphbelow. Then, the user can return to the area enclosed by thesolid lines (Bookmark1) by clicking the Bookmark specialswitch.Dotted line: Indicates an area on the logging trendbefore moving to the bookmark.Solid line: Indicates an area on the logging trendafter moving to Bookmark1.1. A maximum of five bookmarks can be selected.2. If more than five bookmarks are selected, the oldestbookmark is deleted.3. If the [Bookmark setting/release] button is clicked whilea bookmarked logging data set is displayed, the 4. Reference4-215Function Descriptionbookmark is released.4. If the previous data set is deleted after the logging areareaches its full capacity with [Use cycling buffer instorage area], the data set and its bookmark are deleted.5. If a bookmarked data set is displayed in the graph area,the bookmark is indicated in the zero position as shownin the screenshot below.Go to BookMark This function enables the user to navigate to a bookmarkedposition.1. When the [BookMark] special switch is clicked for thefirst time, the graph area moves to the oldestbookmarked position. Bookmarked positions cyclesequentially in chronological order from oldest to themost recent.2. When the most recent bookmarked position is displayed,the oldest bookmarked position is the next screenshot tobe displayed in the cycle.3. Even if current logging data is generated when thegraph area moves to a bookmarked position, the currentlogging data is not displayed in the graph area. The usermust move to the latest logging area by selecting [LastLog Trend Data] or [Next Log Trend Data].4. Reference4-216- MemoFunction DescriptionChange Memo Mode Set to switch the memo mode when the switch is activated. Inactive mode, memo input is allowed. In non-active mode,only memo viewing is allowed. When switching from active tonon-active mode, any unsaved memo inputs are discarded.Then, the first saved memo is displayed.Delete All Memo Set to delete all or selected memos. The third bit of thememo pad status device indicates whether or not the memoswere deleted successfully. Delete MemoNext Memo Set to move to the next or previous memo when the switch isactivated. Previous MemoPen Setting Set the color and thickness of the pen to be used for memos.You can also set a special switch to apply the color and linethickness you specify.Redo Memo Set to restore a recently canceled memo when the switch isactivated.Reset Memo Set to delete all memo files from storage devices when theswitch is activated. The third bit of the memo pad statusdevice indicates whether or not the memos were deletedsuccessfully.Save Memo Set to save memos in a storage location when the switch isactivated. The storage location must be designated in[Common] ▶ [Project Property Setting] ▶ [StorageSettings].Undo Memo Set to undo the last action in a memo when the switch isactivated.4. Reference4-217- Explorer and Editor: Data List EditorFunction DescriptionLine Up Press this button to view the line directly above the currentlyselected line.Line Down Press this button to view the line directly below the currentlyselected line.Page Up If the number of files or folders displayed in the list on the XGTPanel’s screen exceeds the maximum limit, the files and thefolder lists are created on multiple pages. Press this button toview the previous page in the file or folder list.Page Down If the number of files or folders displayed in the list on the XGTPanel’s screen exceeds the maximum number, the files and thefolder lists are created on multiple pages. Press this button toview the next page in the file or folder list.- Explorer and Editor: Extended File RecipeFunction DescriptionTransfer from PLC->XP Press this button to transfer Extended file recipes in the PLC toXP-Builder.Transfer from XP->PLC Press this button to transfer Extended file recipes in XP-Builderto the PLC.Line Up Press this button to view the folder or file in the line directlyabove the currently selected folder or file.Line Down Press this button to view the folder or file in the line directlybelow the currently selected folder or file.Page Up If the number of files or folders displayed in the list on the XGTPanel’s screen exceeds the maximum number, the files and thefolder lists are created on multiple pages. Press this button toview the previous page in the file or folder list.Page Down If the number of files or folders displayed in the list on the XGTPanel’s screen exceeds the maximum number limit, the filesand the folder lists are created on multiple pages. Press thisbutton to view the next page in the file or folder list.Show the Selected File Press this button to show the recipe data of the selected itemon the Extended file recipe editor when the user selects acertain item from the Extended file recipe list displayed onRecipe Explorer.4. Reference4-218- Explorer and Editor: File ExplorerFunction DescriptionLine Up Press this button to view the folder or file in the line directlyabove the currently selected folder or file.Line Down Press this button to view the folder or file in the line directlybelow the currently selected folder or file.Page Up If the number of files or folders displayed in the list on theXGT Panel’s screen exceeds the maximum limit, the files andthe folder lists are created on multiple pages. Press thisbutton to view the previous page in the file or folder list.Page Down If the number of files or folders displayed in the list on theXGT Panel’s screen exceeds the maximum limit, the files andthe folder lists are created on multiple pages. Press thisbutton to view the next page in the file or folder list.Copy Cut a selected file or folder from File Explorer.Cut Cut a selected file or folder from File Explorer.Paste Paste a selected file or folder from File Explorer in a selectedfolder. If there is a file or folder with the same name, "copy_"is prefixed to the copied file or folder.Delete Delete a selected file or folder from File Explorer. When afolder is deleted, all files in the folder are also deleted.Select All Select all valid files in a selected File Explorer folder.Execute Opens the files in the registered video player or the recipeeditor when the video or the CSV files are selected.Cancel Cancels the selection of a file or folder from File Explorer.Go Up to Directory Moves to the parent directory of the currently selected file orfolder.Go to Root Directory Moves to the root directory of the current storage device.Favorites Moves to a bookmark set by the user.Restoration of BasicRecipe Backup filesRestores the basic recipe data. The data is read from therecipe backup file in File Explorer that is specified by the user.A recipe backup file is a CSV file saved in a storage devicewhen the basic recipe backup device is set to “on”. The basicrecipe data cannot be restored if the basic recipe setting ischanged after the backup file is created, or if the backup file 4. Reference4-219Function Descriptionis created in another project.Write selected file namein to the deviceFile name device: Write selected file name in the file exploreron the device. Write path and file name on the device.Device length: Designate byte size including path and filename. 1 character is 2 bytes.For example, the selected file name is abc.csv. DesignateHW0000 as device and 14 bytes as byte. Then the valued ofabc.csv is saved to HW0000.Copy to specified path Specify the path to copy: If the feature is not set, copy andpaste the selected file in the file explorer. If the feature is set,copy and paste to the specified path regardless of whetherthe file explorer exists and its status.Path to copy: Set a file/path to copy: Copy and paste thecopied file to the set path. If the path is not set, copy andpaste to the file path selected in the file explorer.Include Path (Full Path): Specify whether to include the pathwhen saving the selected file name on the device. Forexample, if the selected file name and path is FlashDisk abc.csv.Checked Include path: FlashDiskabc.csvUnchecked Include path: abc.csv4. Reference4-220- Explorer and Editor: File Recipe EditorFunction DescriptionLine Up Press this button to view the folder or file in the line directlyabove the currently selected folder or file.Line Down Press this button to view the folder or file in the line directlybelow the currently selected folder or file.Page Up If the number of files or folders displayed in the list on the XGTPanel’s screen exceeds the maximum limit, the files and thefolder lists are created on multiple pages. Press this button toview the previous page in the file or folder list.Page Down If the number of files or folders displayed in the list on the XGTPanel’s screen exceeds the maximum limit, the files and thefolder lists are created on multiple pages. Press this button toview the next page in the file or folder list.Storage Save the data of the file recipe editor that is currently displayedon the XGT-Panel to the file selected in Recipe Explorer.- Explorer and Editor: File Recipe Explorer and TransferFunction DescriptionTransfer from PLC->XP Press this button to transfer file recipes in the PLC to XP-Builder.Transfer from XP->PLC Press this button to transfer file recipes in XP-Builder to the PLC.Line Up Press this button to view the folder or file in the line directlyabove the currently selected folder or file.Line Down Press this button to view the folder or file in the line directlybelow the currently selected folder or file.Page Up If the number of files or folders displayed in the list on the XGTPanel’s screen exceeds the maximum number, the files and thefolder lists are created on multiple pages. Press this button toview the previous page in the file or folder list.Page Down If the number of files or folders displayed in the list on the XGTPanel’s screen exceeds the maximum number limit, the files andthe folder lists are created on multiple pages. Press this buttonto view the next page in the file or folder list.Show the Selected File Press this button to show the recipe data of the selected itemon the file recipe editor when the user selects a certain itemfrom the file recipe list displayed on Recipe Explorer.4. Reference4-221- Explorer and Editor: General Recipe Explorer and TransferFunction DescriptionLine Up Press this button to view the folder or file in the line directlyabove the currently selected folder or file.Line Down Press this button to view the folder or file in the line directlybelow the currently selected folder or file.Transfer from PLC->XPTransfer from XP->PLCPress these buttons to transfer recipes from one device toanother.When the basic recipe edited in XP-Builder is transferred tothe XGT Panel, it will be backed up in the NVRAM. Thediagram below shows how recipes are transferred betweenthe NVRAM, an internal device and PLC.When a special switch is set to Transfer from NVRAM to PLC,recipe is transferred in the direction ⓐ described in theillustration above.To do this:1. Select a recipe item to transfer from Recipe Explorer.2. Press the special switch for transferring from NVRAM toPLC.Transfer from PLC toNVRAMWhen a special switch is set to Transfer from PLC to NVRAM,a recipe is transferred in the direction labeled ⓐ as shownin the diagram above.To do this:1. Select a recipe item.PLCGeneral RecipeNVRAM Internal Deviceⓐⓑ ⓒ4. Reference4-222Function Description2. Press the special switch for transferring from a PLC to theNVRAM.3. A basic recipe from a PLC moves to the NVRAM allocatedin the recipe.Transfer from NVRAM toInternal DeviceWhen a special switch is set to Transfer from NVRAM toInternal Device, recipe is transferred in the direction labeledⓑ as shown in the diagram above.In order to edit the basic recipe backed up in the NVRAM,the recipe saved in the NVRAM should be moved to theinternal device. Therefore, it should be moved to the internaldevice to edit the data and the address of the internal deviceto move can be set in the internal device of the recipe editor.Transfer from InternalDevice to NVRAMWhen a special switch is set to Transfer from Internal Deviceto NVRAM, a recipe is transferred in the direction labeled ⓑas shown in the diagram above.A basic recipe edited in the internal device is moved to theNVRAM.Transfer from InternalDevice to PLCWhen a special switch is set to Transfer from Internal Deviceto PLC, a recipe is transferred in the direction labeled ⓒ asshown in the diagram above.Transfer from PLC toInternal DeviceWhen a special switch is set to Transfer from PLC to InternalDevice, a recipe is transferred in the direction labeledⓒ asshown in the diagram above.Show the Selected Recipe Shows a selected recipe on the data list editor.- MultimediaFunction DescriptionPlayDirect: Enter file name. There is no need to enter the extensionof the video file4. Reference4-223Function DescriptionDevice: Set a device to enter the file name.Play: Play in ascending order based on the file name.You can play video files with the extension type of MP4, AVI,and WMV.,Stop Stops the video file being played.Pause / Restart Pauses the video file being played and restarts it.Fast Forward Moves forward by the set time.Backward Moves backward by the set time.Next file Plays the next file in ascending order based on the file name.Previous file Play previous file in ascending order based on the file name.- PDF ViewerFunction DescriptionFile Open The selected PDF file is displayed in the PDF file view object. Thefile can be selected by manually entering the file name or byreading the file name set in the device.If /# (number) is entered after the file name, the specified pagenumber is displayed when the PDF viewer runs.For example, USB StorageLS.pdf/#5 will display page 5 of theLS.pdf file at first.Manual setting: The name of the PDF file to be displayed ismanually entered.Device setting: The value of the parameter length (byte unit) isread from the specified device to use as the PDF file name.File Close Closes the file displayed in the PDF file view object.Zoom In Zooms in on the file displayed in the PDF file view object.Zoom Out Zooms out of the file displayed in the PDF file view object.4. Reference4-224Function DescriptionAnticlockwise Rotation Rotates the view of the file displayed in the PDF file view object90° in a counterclockwise direction.Clockwise Rotation Rotates the view of the file displayed in the PDF file view object90° in a clockwise direction.Previous Page Displays the previous page in the currently open file in the PDFfile view object. If there is no previous page, the current page isdisplayed.Next Page Displays the next page in the currently open file in the PDF fileview object. If there is no next page, the current page isdisplayed.First Page Displays the first page in the currently open file in the PDF fileview object.Last Page Displays the last page in the currently open file in the PDF fileview object.- VNC ViewerFunction DescriptionZoon In Zooms in on the viewer screen.Zoom Out Zoom out of the viewer screen.Start Begins a virtual network computing session.Stop Ends the current virtual network computing session.- ETCFunction DescriptionChange RuntimeLanguageSet to change the runtime language when the switch is activated.Select a language in the Function Setting field.4. Reference4-225Function DescriptionYou can specify runtime languages in the project properties. Click[Common] ▶ [Project Property Setting] ▶ [Language] and editthe available runtime language.Close Window Place it on the window screen and touch it during monitoring toclose the window screen. It operates when placed on the windowconnected to the bit window object, the history alarm detailwindow, and the keypad window screen. It does not work on thewindow connected to the word window object.Key Switch Set to open an input window when the switch is activated. Selectthe function in the Function Setting field, and set a key code ifnecessary.You can apply text, numbers, or special functions (clear, space,enter, caps lock, and more). When you select the special switch inthe XGT Panel, the key code is entered into the numeric or textinput device.If an ASCII character or Unicode character is selected, a user caninput only one text value.To use uppercase characters, users can enter the text value byentering uppercase characters.4. Reference4-226Function DescriptionNoteTo enter uppercase characters:• ASCII: You cannot input uppercase characters directly.To input uppercase characters, turn on the caps lockswitch and the letter input switch (A= the caps lockswitch + the “a” input switch).• UNICODE: Set the uppercase characters in advance. Youneed only one switch.Next Cursor Set to move the cursor in numeric or text input objects to the nextor previous field. Previous CursorPrint Screen Set to print a screen capture of the XGT Panel when the switch isactivated. The file can be printed to a file or to a printer, asspecified in the project properties. To set the properties, click[Common] ▶ [Project Property Setting] ▶ [Auxiliary Settings]and set a print option from the Output drop-down list underScreen Capture:Option DescriptionSaveas FileSave the image as a Bitmap file. Youcan set the file path in [Common] ▶[Project Property Setting] ▶ [StorageSetting] ▶ [Capture image].RuntimeprintPrint a screenshot with a printerconnected via USB.Save andPrintSave an image as a file and print it witha printer connected via USB. If a printeris not connected to the XGT Panel, asystem alarm will occur. When the user 4. Reference4-227Function Descriptionconnects the printer again andattempts to print, the system alarm willbe restored.To set the system alarm, click[Common] ▶ [Project PropertySetting] ▶ [Auxiliary Settings] andcheck the checkbox next to Alarmwindow pop-up.Program Monitoring Set to launch the program monitor when the switch is activated.To run the program monitor, use the XGT, XGI, or XGB series.Specify the program monitor settings in the project properties.Click [Common] ▶ [Project Property Setting] ▶ [XGT PanelSettings] ▶ [Program monitor].Run Other Application This function runs an application program set in the programpath. For example, the command, Memopad.exe runs theMemopad program from the “Flashdisk” folder using thefollowing settings.• Program interaction with HMI: Select a controller to interactwith when using program monitoring.4. Reference4-228Function Description• Program Path: Set a path for the program file to execute.• Use parameter: Set the transfer factor to be used as theparameter of the program when an application program, set inthe program path, is run. For example, if PDF Viewer is set asthe external application program, as shown in the screenshotbelow, the pdf file, set as the parameter in the file path, isopened by the PDF viewer. Some application programs may notsupport spaces (ASCII code: Space) in the parameter values.Runtime Exit Set to quit program monitoring when the switch is activated.Safe Removal Switch The safe removal switch performs the same function as the safehardware removal switch. Click the safe removal switch and thestorage unit (SD) detaches when the current operation iscompleted.The special device address for the sensor that detects that thestorage device has detached is contained in the following table.Storage Device Special Device AddressSD card HS51.2This function is supported only by iXP70/80/90 models.Security mode lock For a secured object, security is usually locked again after acertain period of time has elapsed from the time the security wasdisabled. This is a function to switch back to the security modewhen the special switch is pressed before a certain time.XP-Remote Set to enable remote monitoring of the XGT Panel. You canspecify functions for obtaining and terminating authorization forremote monitoring.Update Download project from storage device: Updates the current XGTPanel with the project in the path set by the user. If set as below,update to the test project in the XP_Project folder of USB Storage.4. Reference4-229 Display: The display settings for special switch objects include the following.- Transparent BG Image: Check the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.- Use Image Reverse: The switch image is reversed when you tap the object or a condition is met. Ifyou set this option, you cannot use the Transparent BG Image option or the On/Off image. If youset the Transparent BG Image option, you cannot use this option.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state.- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in the Off state to On.- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On status to Off.- Image Type: Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between “On” and“Off” states. If you select the change color or pattern option, you must select a vector image for theobject. To view characteristics of raster or vector images, refer to <2.4.1 Managing GraphicLibraries>.Not Change Color/Pattern Use the original image. You can apply the pattern orcolor to the image. Select the image to display for the“On” or ”Off” states from raster, vector, or userregistered images.Same Image & ChangeColor/Pattern in On/OffSelect a vector image. You cannot select a rasterimage. Apply a pattern or color to the image.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse images on your computer. When you select an image from your computer, itwill be added to the image library automatically.- Pattern: Click a pattern to apply to the image. This option is available only when you select thechange color or pattern option in Image Type. Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects, butnot to the frames. The frames are different for each image. Refer to the screenshots below.4. Reference4-230- Pattern FG Color: Select a color for the foreground pattern.- Pattern BG Color: Select a color for the background pattern.- Frame Color: Select a frame color. Text: The text settings for special switch objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Use Caption: Check the checkbox to use a text caption with the object. When you select thisoption, you can input text from a text table.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state. You must input the text in a texttable.- From Text Table: Check the checkbox to add text from a text table. The Text Table option will beactivated and the text input area will close. Add the required text to the text table before editingthe object. You must select text for the “On” and “Off” states from the same text table.PatternFramePatternFramePatternFrame4. Reference4-231- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select text. The color and font properties set in the texttable will be imported with the text.- On <-> Off Copy: Click to copy the text and formatting from the “On” state to the “Off” state orvice versa.- Copy Only Caption: You can open the dropdown menu next to [On -> Off] to select [Copy OnlyCaption]. This feature allows you to copy only the currently selected text string to another state.- Copy Only Property: You can open the dropdown menu next to [On -> Off] to select [Copy OnlyProperty]. This feature allows you to copy all properties except the currently selected text string arecopied to another state.- Delete On/Off Caption: Click to clear text settings for the current state.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly into the field. You can set a ratio of 1%-600%.- Blink: Set the blink speed for the caption.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.Select a text table andlanguageRegistered text table list4. Reference4-232Not use The caption will not blink.Slow The caption will blink every three seconds.Normal The caption will blink every two seconds.Fast The caption will blink every second.- Char. Spacing: Set text intervals. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid or have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Line. Spacing: Set line spacing. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease, and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid of have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Change the Property of Text Table: Click to copy different color and font properties to the textthan those specified in the text table. This option is active only when you fetch text from the texttable.- Color: Select a font color.- Font Style: Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right).- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (top, middle, or bottom). Detail: The detail settings for special switch objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Security Level: Set whether or not to require a password to use the object.- Level: Set the security level for the object. The higher the security level, the shorter theauthorization time when the password is entered. When the authorization time expires, the usermust enter the password again to use the object.- Action Delay: Set to delay the action triggered by the switch by a specified time.- Type: Set the type of action delay.On Delay When the switch is activated, the action is performed after thedelay time that you specify.4. Reference4-233Press Twice When the switch is activated once, a dialog box is invoked toallow the user to verify the operation. When the switch isactivated a second time, the action is performed after the delaytime that you specify.- Time: Set the length of time for the action delay.- Offset in [Write] Operation: Set to use the Offset function. The special switch does not supportthis function.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Action Trigger (Only for History Alarm Viewer/ Multimedia): Set whether or not to use anaction trigger with the history alarm viewer object and multimedia display. The Special Switchfunction is activated when the special switch is pressed on the XGT Panel or when the specifieddevice is turned on.NoteWhere there are two or more “Play” switches for the same operating device whenthere are more than two multimedia objects on one screen (main screen/popupwindow/overlay window, etc.), it is not guaranteed that the video file will play at thatpoint. Therefore, it is not recommenced to use the same device for an operatingdevice.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Use Operation Log: Set to allow the device to be monitored in an operation log.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.4. Reference4-234 Lamp Condition: The lamp condition settings for special switch objects are shown in the screenshotbelow.- Use Lamp Condition: If you want to control a lamp with a method other than simply turning it onwhen the switch is activated, you can select a different action.- Type: Select a condition for lamp control.Bit When the device state is on, the lamp is on.Word When the condition is met, the lamp is on.- Bit: If you selected the bit condition type, specify a bit device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.- Word: If you selected the word condition type, specify a word device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.Size 16-bit upper byte, 16-bit lower byte, 16-bit, or 32-bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, or BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Use Lamp Offset: Click to set an offset for the lamp.4. Reference4-235 Action Condition: The action condition settings for special switch objects are shown in thescreenshot below.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16-bit or 32-bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-236 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for special switch objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the display trigger.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The object will display when the device is on.Bit Off The object will display when the device is offRange The object will display when the range condition of the device issatisfied.Multi Bit The object will display when the logical operation results of multipledevice are satisfied.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-237Multi SwitchA multi switch object is a switch that can operate a combination of functions of the bit switch, wordswitch, change screen switch and special switch. You can set the sequence of each operation and up to20 functions can be carried out at a time. This section describes available settings for multi switch objects. Basic: The basic settings for multi switch objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Set Script in Up or Down Action: Set scripts for up or down states of the switch.Down Act. Script Select a script to execute when the switch is depressed.Up Act. Script Select a script to execute when the switch is released.- Operation Type: Select and manage operations.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher up thelist.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower downthe list.- Bit Operation: Click to set a condition for a bit switch. For more information about bit switches,refer to <4.3.2.1 Bit Switch>.- Word Operation: Click to set a condition for a word switch. For more information about wordswitches, refer to <4.3.2.2 Word Switch>.- Change Screen: Click to set a condition for a screen change switch. For more information aboutscreen change switches, refer to <4.3.2.3 Change Screen Switch>NoteThe change screen switch must be the last switch when using multiple switches. This 4. Reference4-238switch will be moved to the end of the operation list automatically. This is to ensurethat all the user operations on the current screen are performed before switching toanother screen.- Print Screen: Click to set a condition for a print screen switch. For more information about printscreen switches, refer to <4.3.2.4 Special Switch>.- Change Language: Click to set a condition for a change language switch. For more informationabout change language switches, refer to <4.3.2.4 Special Switch>.- Special Operation: Click to set a condition for a special operation switch. For more informationabout special operation switches, refer to <4.3.2.4 Special Switch>.NoteLanguage and screen switching operate independently, even though both are specialswitches.- Description: Enter a description for the object. Display: The display settings for multi switch objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Transparent BG Image: Check the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.- Use Image Reverse: The switch image is reversed when you tap the object or a condition is met. Ifyou set this option, you cannot use the Transparent BG Image option or the On/Off image. If youset the Transparent BG Image option, you cannot use this option.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state.- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in the Off state to On.- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On status to Off.- Image Type: Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between “On” and“Off” states. If you select the change color or pattern option, you must select a vector image for theobject. To view characteristics of raster or vector images, refer to <2.4.1 Managing GraphicLibraries>.4. Reference4-239Not Change Color/Pattern Use the original image. You can apply the pattern orcolor to the image. Select the image to display for the“On” or “Off” states from raster, vector, or userregistered images.Same Image & ChangeColor/Pattern in On/OffSelect a vector image. You cannot select a rasterimage. Apply a pattern or color to the image.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse images on your computer. When you select an image from your computer, itwill be added to the image library automatically.- Pattern: Click a pattern to apply to the image. This option is available only when you select thechange color or pattern option in Image Type. Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects, butnot to the frames. The frames are different for each image. Refer to the screenshots below.- Pattern FG Color: Set a color for the foreground pattern.- Pattern BG Color: Set a color for the background pattern.- Frame Color: Set a frame color.PatternFramePatternFramePatternFrame4. Reference4-240 Text: The text settings for multi switch objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Use Caption: Check the checkbox to use a text caption with the object. When you select thisoption, you can input text from a text table.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state. You must input text from a text table.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state. You must input text from a texttable.- From Text Table: Check the checkbox to add text from a text table. The Text Table option will beactivated and the text input area will close. Add the required text to the text table before editingthe object. You must select text for the “On” and “Off” states from the same text table.- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select text. The color and font properties set in the texttable will be imported with the text.- On <-> Off Copy: Click to copy the text and formatting from the “On” state to the “Off” state orvice versa.Select a text table andlanguageRegistered text table list4. Reference4-241- Copy Only Caption: You can open the dropdown menu next to [Copy to other state] to select[Copy Only Caption]. This feature allows you to copy only the currently selected text string toanother state.- Copy Only Property: You can open the dropdown menu next to [On -> Off] to select [Copy OnlyProperty]. This feature allows you to copy all properties except the currently selected text string arecopied to another state.- Delete On/Off Caption: Click to clear text settings for the current state.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly into the field. You can set a ratio of 1%-600%.- Blink: Set the blink speed for the caption.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.Not use The caption will not blink.Slow The caption will blink every three seconds.Normal The caption will blink every two seconds.Fast The caption will blink every second.- Char. Spacing: Set text intervals. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid or have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Line. Spacing: Set line spacing. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease, and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid of have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Change the Property of Text Table: Click to apply different color and font properties to the textfrom those specified in the text table. This option is active only when you fetch text from the texttable.4. Reference4-242- Color: Select a font color.- Font Style: Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right).- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (top, middle, or bottom). Detail: The detail settings for multi switch objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Security Level: Set whether or not to require a password to use the object.- Level: Set the security level for the object. The higher the security level, the shorter theauthorization time when the password is entered. When the authorization time expires, the usermust enter the password again to use the object.- Action Delay: Set to delay the action triggered by the switch by a specified time.- Type: Set the type of action delay.On Delay When the switch is activated, the action is performed after thedelay time that you specify.Press Twice When the switch is activated once, a dialog box is invoked toallow the user to verify the operation. When the switch isactivated a second time, the action is performed after thedelay time that you specify.- Time: Set the length of time for the action delay.- Offset in [Write] Operation: Set to use the Offset function. The MultiAction Switch does notsupport this function.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Use Operation Log: Set to allow the device to be monitored in an operation log.4. Reference4-243 Lamp Condition: The lamp condition settings for multi switch objects are shown in the screenshotbelow.- Use Condition: If you want to control a lamp with a method other than simply turning it on whenthe switch is activated, you can select a different action.- Type: Select a condition for lamp control.Bit When the device state is on, the lamp is on.Word When the condition is met, the lamp is on.- Bit: If you selected the bit condition type, specify a bit device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.- Word: If you selected the word condition type, specify a word device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, or BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Use Lamp Offset: Click to set an offset for the lamp.4. Reference4-244 Action Condition: The action condition settings for multi switch objects are shown in the screenshotbelow.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-245 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for multi switch objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the display trigger.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The object will display when the device is on.Bit Off The object will display when the device is offRange The object will display when the range condition of the device issatisfied.Multi Bit The object will display when the logical operation results of multipledevice are satisfied.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or floatExp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-246Message ObjectsYou can use message objects to display messages based on specified conditions of bit or word devices.You must add the messages to a text table to invoke them with a message object.Note• If the message object is not connected with PLC device, only background image is displayed.※ For details, refer to .Bit MessageThis section describes available settings for bit message objects. Basic: The basic settings for bit message objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Description: Enter a description for the object.4. Reference4-247 Display: The display settings for bit message objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse images on your computer. When you select an image from your computer, itwill be added to the image library automatically.- Transparent BG Image: Check the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.- Frame Color: Select a frame color.- Plate Color: Select a plate color.- Use Border: Set whether or not to apply a border to the message area.- Border Color: Select a border color.4. Reference4-248 Text: The text settings for bit message objects are shown in the screenshot below.- On: Click to configure options for the object in the “On” state. You can input text only from a texttable.- Off: Click to configure options for the object in the “Off” state. You can input text only from a texttable.- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select text. The color and font properties set in the texttable will be imported with the text.- On <-> Off Copy: Click to copy the text and formatting from the “On” state to the “Off” state orvice versa.- Delete On/Off Msg.: Click to delete the text for the selected state.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Blink: Set a blink speed for the object:XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.Fast The object will blink every second.- Char. Spacing: Set text intervals. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid or have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Line Spacing: Set line spacing. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease, and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid of have the same effect as a positivenumber.4. Reference4-249- Change the Property of Text Table: Click to apply different color and font properties to the textfrom those specified in the text table. This option is active only when you fetch text from the texttable.Color Select a font color.Font Style Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can applymore than one option at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right).- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (top, middle, or bottom). Detail: The detail settings for bit message objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Offset: Check the checkbox to use the Offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Display Mode: Set an option for the color of the message based on the background color.Transparent Display the message transparently, in contrast to thebackground image.XOR Display the message in a color that is easily distinguishable fromthe background image.4. Reference4-250 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for bit message objects are shown in the screenshotbelow.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-251Word MessageThis section describes available settings for word message objects. Basic: The basic settings for word message objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Size: Select a data size (16 bit or 32 bit). Changing the data size for an existing object will deletethe conditions specified in the case settings.- Type: Select a data type (Signed decimal number, unsigned decimal number, or BCD).- Message Num: Set the message type. Changing the message type for an existing object will deletethe conditions specified in the case settings. Message number is the number for each row on theedit window of the text table.4. Reference4-252Indirect A value is read from the referenced device to invoke the messagefrom the table.Case If the reference device meets the conditions specified in the casesettings, the message is invoked. Set the conditional statementfrom the text tab.Fixed Displays the message of selected number.4. Reference4-253If set to a ‘Fixed’, the [Offset] device cannot be used.Text table number: Sets the method for selecting the text table number. The text table number isthe number in front of a text table, as shown below.Fixed Set the text table number to be displayed manually.Device Displays the text table number of the value of the set device. Forexample, if the value of the device is 7, use [7 Text Table_7].Number of continuous display rows: Displays the messages of the number of continuous rows fromthe first message number. For example, it is shown as follows if the text table is like below, thevalue of the message device HW0000 is 3, and the number of continuous display of rows is 6.4. Reference4-254Set as above, display as below.If displays continuous rows, the property of text table is based on first rows set value.If the message type is set to Case, conditional expressions can be set in the case settings. If themessage type is set to Indirect, conditional expressions cannot be set in the case settings.If the size or type of data changes, all the conditional expressions that are set in the case settingswhen the data was created will be deleted.If you change the message type from Case to Indirect, all the conditional expressions in the casesettings will be deleted.- Description: Enter a description for the object.A-UMAC ERROR ACKA-PC처리중ERROR ACKA-VISION ERROR ACKB-UMAC ERROR ACKB-PC처리중ERROR ACKB-VISION ERROR ACK4. Reference4-255 Display: The display settings for word message objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse images on your computer. When you select an image from your computer,it will be added to the image library automatically.- Transparent BG Image: Check the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.- Frame Color: Select a frame color.- Plate Color: Select a plate color.- Use Border: Set whether or not to apply a border to the message area.- Border Color: Select a border color.4. Reference4-256 Text: The text settings for word message objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Select Text Table: Select a text table for specifying message text.- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select text. The color and font properties set in the texttable will be selected with the text.This option is available only when the message type is set to Case in the basic settings. The text tobe set here is displayed in the message object by default when all the conditions that are set in thecase settings are not met. In the Indirect type where the text string number for a device isdesignated, the message will not be displayed in the message object when the text string numberfor the device does not exist. That is, text cannot be selected from a text table when the messagetype is Indirect and text can be selected from a text table when the message type is Case.- Delete All Message: Delete any existing messages assigned to the object.- Font: The font settings for a message cannot be set by the user. A message displayed in a wordmessage object shares the default settings of a pre-created text table. Therefore, the font for themessage corresponds with the font of the current editing language that is set in [COMMON] ▶[Project Property Setting] ▶ [Language].- Range: Insert conditions when [Case] is selected in [Basic]-[Select Message].Click the button to the right of the cell in the [Range] column to display a dialog box for insertingconditions.4. Reference4-257When character strings are selected, click the button to the right of the cell in the [Text] column todisplay a dialog box for inserting a text table. [Color] is displayed as set in [Text Table]. You canchange [Color] by checking the [Change Property] checkbox.To copy and paste an item, select the row containing the item and press Ctrl+C, then press Ctrl+Vto paste it into the desired row.To remove an item, click the row or column to remove and press the Delete key. For vector images,the frame color column and the background color column are added.To change the order of [Range], click and drag the row to where you want to relocate, and releasethe mouse button.For example, to move the third row to the second row, click and drag the third row to the secondrow and release the mouse button when the pointer is positioned between the rows as shown 4. Reference4-258below.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Change the Property of Text Table: Click to apply different color and font properties to the textfrom those specified in the text table. This option is active only when you fetch text from the texttable.- Color: Select a font color.- Blink: Select a blink speed for the object:XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, and XP50-TTE are not supported.Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.Fast The object will blink every second.- Char. Spacing: Set text intervals. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid or have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Line Spacing: Set line spacing. If the value is a negative number, the spacing will decrease, and ifthe value is a very small negative number, it can be overlaid of have the same effect as a positivenumber.- Font Style: Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right).- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (top, middle, or bottom).4. Reference4-259 Operation: The operation settings for word message objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Use Script: Check the checkbox to use a script with the object.- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.Script: When you select a script, it appears here. To modify a script, refer to <4.2 Scripts>.4. Reference4-260 Detail: The detail settings for word message objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Offset: Check the checkbox to use the Offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110. Offset cannot be set when [Basic]-[MessageNumber] selection method is [Fixed].- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Display Mode: Select an option for the color of the message based on the background color.Transparent Set the message to be transparent and contrast with thebackground image.XOR Display the message in a color that is easily distinguishable fromthe background image.4. Reference4-261 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for word message objects are shown in the screenshotbelow.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-262Numeric/Text ObjectsNumeric and text objects show values from devices or input values from keypads to devices. Four typesof numeric/text objects are available and are described in the below table.Type DescriptionNumeric Input Enters and displays the value in the word device connected to the PLC on the XGTPanel.Numeric Display Displays the word device data connected to the PLC in numbers on the XGTPanel.Text Input Writes the entered text in the word device in ASCII code.Text Display Displays the text recognizing the data saved in the word device as the ASCII codevalue.Note• If the numeric/text objects are not connected with PLC device, only background image isdisplayed.※ For details, refer to .Numeric InputYou can use numeric input devices to enter values in word devices. This section describes availablesettings for numeric input objects. Basic: The basic settings for numeric input objects are shown in the screenshot below.4. Reference4-263- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Use Input Function: Uncheck this option to change the numeric input object to a numeric displayobject. Object property setting options automatically change to fit the object type. Refer to<4.3.4.2 Numeric Display> for detailed information.- Size: Set a data size (16 bit upper byte, 16 bit lower type, 16 bit, or 32 bit). If you change the datasize of an existing object, the input and display conditions will automatically change to match thenew data size.XP30-BTE, XP-30TTE, XP40-TTE, and the XP50-TTE do not support 16bit upper/lower byte.- Display Format: Set the display format.Numeric Format Set the number format.Format ExampleSigned decimal -2184Unsigned decimal 2184Octal 4210Hexadecimal 888Binary 10010001000BCD 888Float 2184.0The Float format can be selected only when the data size is 32bit.No. of Display Digits Set how many digits to display (up to 64). If the number ofdigits is less than the capacity of the device, empty spaces arefilled with placeholders (“*”). If the device value cannot bedisplayed in BCD format, it is expressed as “~”.4. Reference4-264No. of Decimal Digits Set how many places to put to the right of the decimal pointwhen you select formats other than binary, octal, andhexadecimal.- Use Scaling: When a user scales and inputs random values into an established PLC device address,this function can be applied. Actual PLC values and displayable values differ by data size anddisplay type. If the value input by a user exceeds the maximum value, the maximum value is inputinto the device instead. If the value input by a user is lower than the minimum value, the minimumvalue is input into the device instead. If the input value is out of the input max/min value range ofscaling, it is not entered.Min Device Value Input the minimum data value of PLC device to scale.Device: Able to set the minimum value as the device address.Constant: Able to set the minimum value as constant accordingto data size and numeric type.Max Device Value Input the maximum data value of PLC device to scale.Device: Able to set the maximum value as the device address.Constant: Able to set the maximum value as constant accordingto data size and numeric type.Min. Input Value Input the minimum data value to be displayed at scale.Device: Able to set the minimum value as the device address.Constant: Able to set the minimum value as constant accordingto data size and numeric type.Max. Input Value Input the maximum data value to be displayed at scale.Device: Able to set the maximum value as the device address.Constant: Able to set the maximum value as constant accordingto data size and numeric type.Use Round Off This option activates or deactivates rounding up to the scaledvalue.[Device value]  [Indicated value]-10 -250 10 (decimal point to be alwaysdiscarded)53 1086 17 (decimal point to be alwaysdiscarded)100 20204 40 (decimal point to be alwaysdiscarded)If “Rounding up” is set, the values are rounded up as shown inthe table below.[Device value]  [Indicated value]4. Reference4-265-10 -250 10 (decimal point to be rounded up)53 1186 17 (decimal point to be rounded up)100 20204 41 (decimal point to be rounded up)In the below example, the maximum input value and the maximum device value are set to 1,000and 100 respectively, while the actual input value is 2,000.However, in the case of a number input device, after entering a value, when displaying it on anobject, it outputs in the same way as a number output device. Therefore, the value may bedisplayed differently from the entered value. After entering the values as above, the object isdisplayed in the following way.{ ( Max Out – Min out ) / ( Max Dev. – Min Dev. ) } * Device{ ( 1000 – 0 ) / ( 100 – 0 ) } * 10 = 100Any value above the maximum input value is recognized as the maximum value (1,000), so thedevice value becomes 100. Likewise, if you enter an input value under 0, the value is still recognizedas 0 and the device value becomes 0.Note• The available device value range and displayable data value range differ by the sizeand type of the device, as shown in the below table.Device Size Device Type Minimum Maximum16 bit uppertypeSigned decimal -128 127Unsigned decimal,binary, octal,hexadecimal0 2554. Reference4-26616 bit lowertypeSigned decimal -128 127Unsigned decimal,binary, octal,hexadecimal0 25516 bitSigned decimal -32768 32767Unsigned decimal 0 65535BCD 0 999932 bitSigned decimal -2147483648 2147483647Unsigned decimal 0 4294967295BCD 0 99999999• When you input a number, the errors shown in the table below can occur.Message Condition SolutionCan’t WriteDataWhen the communicationfails between thecontroller and the XGTPanel.Check the cableconnection or the powerof the XGT Panel.Exceeded TheMaximumValue!When you input a valuethat exceeds the devicesize or data limit.Input an exact value. Referto the available devicevalue range.• If the device size is changed, the existing input condition and display condition aredeleted.• If the communication with the controllers fails while inputting or reading the data,only the background image is displayed on the XGT Panel. The number is notdisplayed.• If you want to enter a decimal place, press the period on the keypad and then enterthe numbers.- Use Cipher: Set to encode the numeric value that a user inputs. The input value will appear as “*” inthe interface.- Description: Enter a description for the object.4. Reference4-267 Display: The display settings for numeric input objects include the following.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse for images on your computer. When you select an image from yourcomputer, it will be added to the image library automatically.- Transparent BG Image: Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.Frame Color Set a frame color (only available with vector images).Plate Color Set a plate color (only available with vector images). Text: The text settings for numeric input objects include the following.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Set a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.4. Reference4-268- Color: Set a font color.- Blink: Set a blink speed for the object:Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.Fast The object will blink every second.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a rate of 1%-600%.- Text Plate Color: Click to set the background color for figures.Text plate color is not in use Text plate color in use (blue)- Space: Set the indent from the margin of the object. If you select left alignment, you can set theleft indent. If you select right alignment, you can set the right indent.- Font Style: Set a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, or Right).- Display Mode: Set to display the background color of figures in an XOR (exclusive Or) color or intransparent.Transparent XOR Input Case: The input case settings for numeric input objects include the following.- Input Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions. You can create only onecondition for numeric input.4. Reference4-269(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up to eightconditions. Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window,which allows you to create a condition. For more information,refer to <4.2.1.3 Understanding Constants and Data Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher upthe list.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower downthe list.4. Reference4-270 Display Case: The display case settings for numeric input objects include the following.- Display Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions. If the device value meetsmultiple conditions, the display settings will be based on the first condition met.(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up to eightconditions. Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window,which allows you to create a condition. For more information,refer to <4.2.1.3 Understanding Constants and Data Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher upthe list.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower downthe list.$V is a value of a device to monitor.If an input condition is $V > 0 and a display condition is as follows.Setting Condition BackgroundcolorText color BlinkCondition 1 200 <= $V < 300 Blue Yellow Not useCondition 2 $V > 1000 Yellow Black SlowGeneral Do not set. Gray Black Not useChanges of the number input on the XGT Panel according to the changes in the value of the deviceto monitor are as follow.4. Reference4-271Status ResultDevice value = -200 Not supportedDevice value = 199Device value = 250Device value = 1010NoteIf a value of a device meets multiple conditions, it is displayed according to thesettings of the first condition. In the example above, if the device value is 250, it will bedisplayed with the settings of the condition 1 although it meets both the condition 1and the condition 2.In the Range Edit window, you can adjust the settings for the plate color, text color, and blinking.Plate Color Set the background color of an image selected in the Display settings.If a raster image is selected, this option is not available.A raster image is selectedA vector image is selectedText Color Set the color of a figure to be displayed in a numeric input object.Blink Set a blink speed for the object (Not use, Slow, Normal, fast).4. Reference4-272 Operation: The operation settings for numeric input objects include the following.- Use Input Script: Set whether or not to use a script for numeric input.- Input Script No.: Select a script for numeric input.- Use Display Script: Set whether or not to use a script for numeric display.- Display Script No.: Select a script for numeric display.- Input Script Name: Expresses the most recent selected script contents.4. Reference4-273Note• Input Script Process:- Values entered by the user are always regarded as decimal numbers, so they arenot converted.- The maximum and minimum values differ according to the size and type of thedevice.- When an action fails during script execution, the next action in the sequence iscarried out.- When an action fails during script execution and a temporary variable ($ variable)is changed at the point of failure, the next step is carried out with the changedvalue.- If a script result value does not meet the specified condition, the message “Invalidat Input Case” appears and the action fails.- If communication fails while writing a value, the message “Can’t Write Data”appears and the action fails.4. Reference4-274• Output Script Process:- If communication fails when a value is read from a device, the next action in asequence is not performed.- If an action fails during execution of the script, the next action in the sequence iscarried out.- When an action fails during script execution and a temporary variable ($ variable)is changed at the point of failure, the next step is carried out with the changedvalue.- If the device type does not match the BCD style, the type is replaced with a tilde(~).- If the result value exceeds the number of figures you set, the extra numbers on theleft are displayed are replaced with asterisks (*).- If communication fails while writing a value, the message “Can’t Write Data”appears and the action fails.4. Reference4-275 Detail: The detail settings for numeric input objects include the following.- Security Level: Set the security level for the object. The higher the security level, the shorter theauthorization time when the password is entered. When the authorization time expires, the usermust enter the password again to use the object.- Zero Fill: If you have selected right justification, select this option to insert zeroes (0) before thenumber.- Zero Display: Set whether or not to show zeroes. If you do not set this option, the object displaysnothing when the device value is 0.- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.The offset function behaves differently if a read device is set. When a read device is set, the offset isonly applied to the writing device. If a read device is not set, the offset is applied to both read andwrite devices.4. Reference4-276- Offset Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon tothe right to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Read Device: Set whether or not to use a separate device for reading data. When you set the readdevice, even if it is same as the reference device in the Basic setting, the offset is only applied tothe write device. If the read device is different from the reference device, the value is written to thewrite device during the input process. In contrast, when the input process is stopped, the value isread from the read device and the data is displayed.For example, if the device value is as follows,Type Device address Device valueReference Device D10 100Read Device D20 200The result of writing 500 to the numeric input object is as follows.Condition Value from controller Value displayed in XGT PanelRead not set D10 500 5004. Reference4-277Condition Value from controller Value displayed in XGT PanelD20 200Read set D10 500 200D20 200The values in the controller are same, but the data displayed in the XGT Panel is different.- Write Check Device: Set a device to verify the returned device value. Set this option when the bitdevice is ON after inputting the number.- Write Device Off: Set when to turn off the write check device, if the data cannot be verified.- Use Operation Log: Set to allow the device to be monitored in an operation log.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, XP50-TTE is not supported. Keypad Option: The keypad options settings for numeric input objects include the following.- Cursor: Set the movement type for using the automatic cursor.If the focus type is set to Touch, input objects for continuous inputs can be grouped together.Continuous inputs are performed in each group.If there is an interlocked object with an input order, the input cursor will skip the locked unit andmove automatically to the next unit in the sequence.If you press a cursor moving special switch while on input, current input will be canceled and thedata will return to the status before input. And the previous or next input object will be ready forinput.4. Reference4-278Focus Type Set a method for moving the cursor. If you select Touch, the user musttouch the input field to move the cursor. The flow for the Touch methodis as follows:If you select Input Permit Device, the cursor moves only when the inputpermit bit device is on.Input PermitBit DeviceSet the input permit bit device when Input Permit Device is selected.Clear Type Set whether or not to clear input data automatically when switching toinput mode.Auto Clear OFF Shows the previous data in input mode.Auto Clear On Clears input data automatically whenswitching to input mode.- Keypad Settings: Set the key window options for data input. If you don’t use the key window, youcan also set the key switches using the special switch object on the same screen.Keypad Type Set whether or not to use the Window Keypad Screen.Use Keypad set in InputObjectSet whether or not to use the keypad specified in the keywindow settings. Enter the number of the key window or click[Browse] to locate the key window.If this option is not selected, the keypads set in [COMMON] ▶[Project Property Setting] ▶ [Key Window Settings] will beused.Use User Keypad Position Set whether or not to specify a location for the key window.Set the coordinates for the X and Y axes. If you do not specifythe location, the key window will appear at the upper left orupper right of the screen.- Use Auto Cursor: Set whether or not to use the auto cursor function. When the user touches [Enter]while entering data in a key window, the cursor moves to the next input field automatically.72000☞2907200☞5720290☞Input Permit Bit Device: ONOFF OFFDisplay mode Input mode Display mode Touch Enter4. Reference4-279Input Order Specify the sequence number of the window to control cursormovement.Use Group Specify the same sequence number of a group of windows tocontrol cursor movement.- Use Interlock: Set to prevent input when the interlock device meets the specified condition (deviceON or OFF). The input cursor will skip the locked unit and move automatically to the next unit inthe sequence.4. Reference4-280 Action Condition: The action condition settings for numeric input objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within thespecified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result ofmultiple devices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or floatExp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-281 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for numeric input objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or FloatExp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-282Numeric DisplayThis section describes available settings for numeric display objects. Basic: The basic settings for numeric display objects include the following.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Use Input Function: Check this option to change the numeric display object to a numeric inputobject. Object property setting options automatically change to fit the object type. Refer to<4.3.4.1 Numeric Input> for detailed information.- Size: Set a data size (16 bit upper byte, 16 bit lower byte, 16 bit, or 32 bit). If you change the datasize of an existing object, the input and display conditions will automatically change to match thenew data size.XP30-BTE, XP-30TTE, XP40-TTE, and the XP50-TTE do not support 16bit upper/lower byte.- Display Format: Set the display format.Numeric Format Set the number format.Format ExampleSigned decimal -2184Unsigned decimal 2184Octal 4210Hexadecimal 888Binary 10010001000BCD 888Float 2184.0The Float format can be selected only when the data size is 32bit.4. Reference4-283No. of DisplayDigitsSet how many digits to display (up to 64). If the number of digitsis less than the capacity of the device, empty spaces are filledwith placeholders (“*”). If the device value cannot be displayedin BCD format, it is expressed as “~”.No. of DecimalDigitsSet how many places to put to the right of the decimal pointwhen you select formats other than binary, octal, andhexadecimal numbers.Format Set the formats for both the numeric and text displays. If youwant to input text, enter it directly. Numbers, however, appearsas asterisks (*).The number of asterisks you can input depends on the No. ofDecimal Digits – Truncated Digits setting. For example:The displayed result in the XGT Panel differs by device:• Device1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8• Device1 2 3 4 5 6Truncated Digits Set a number of digits to truncate from the numerical value.Truncation occurs in order from the most significant bit (MSB) tothe least significant bit (LSB).- Use Scaling: When a user scales and inputs random values to an established PLC device address,this function can be applied. Actual PLC values and displayable values differ by data size anddisplay type. If the value input by a user exceeds the maximum value, the maximum value is inputto the device instead. If the value input by a user is lower than the minimum value, the minimumvalue is input to the device instead.Min Device Value Input the minimum data value of PLC device to scale.Device: Able to set the minimum value as the device address.No. of Display Digits:Truncated Digits: 1No. of Display Digits:Truncated Digits: 1→ 234cm, 5mm→ 12cm, 3mm4. Reference4-284Constant: Able to set the minimum value as constant accordingto data size and numeric type.Max Device Value Input the maximum data value of PLC device to scale.Device: Able to set the maximum value as the device address.Constant: Able to set the maximum value as constant accordingto data size and numeric type.Min. Input Value Input the minimum data value to be displayed at scale.Device: Able to set the minimum value as the device address.Constant: Able to set the minimum value as constant accordingto data size and numeric type.Max. Input Value Input the maximum data value to be displayed at scale.Device: Able to set the maximum value as the device address.Constant: Able to set the maximum value as constant accordingto data size and numeric type.Use Round Off This option activates or deactivates rounding up to the scaledvalue.[Device value]  [Indicated value]-10 -250 10 (decimal point to be always discarded)53 1086 17 (decimal point to be always discarded)100 20204 40 (decimal point to be always discarded)If “Rounding up”is set, the followings are successful.[Device value]  [Indicated value]-10 -250 10 (decimal point to be rounded up)53 1186 17 (decimal point to be rounded up)100 20204 41 (decimal point to be rounded up)For example, if the maximum display value is 1000, the minimum value is 0, the device maximumvalue is 100, and the minimum value is 0, and the actual device value is 100, it operates as follows.{ ( Max out – min out ) / ( max dev. – min dev. ) } * Device{ ( 100 – 0) / ( 100 – 0 ) } * 100 = 104. Reference4-285Note• The available device value range and displayable data value range differ by size andtype of the device, as described in the following table.Device Size Device Type Minimum Maximum16 bit uppertypeSigned decimal -128 127Unsigned decimal,binary, octal,hexadecimal0 25516 bit lowertypeSigned decimal -128 127Unsigned decimal,binary, octal,hexadecimal0 25516bitSigned decimal -32768 32767Unsigned decimal 0 65535BCD 0 999932 bitSigned decimal -2147483648 2147483647Unsigned decimal 0 4294967295BCD 0 999999994. Reference4-286• When you input a number, the following errors can occur:Message Condition SolutionCan’t WriteDataWhen thecommunication failsbetween the controllerand XGT Panel.Check the cable connectionor the power of XGT Panel.Exceeded TheMaximumValue!When you input a valuethat exceeds the devicesize or data limit.Input an exact value. Refer tothe available device valuerange.• If the device size is changed, the existing input condition and display condition aredeleted.• If the communication with the controllers fails while inputting or reading the data,only the background image is displayed on the XGT Panel. The number is notdisplayed.• If you want to enter a decimal place, press the period on the keypad and then enterthe numbers.- Description: Enter a description for the object. Display: The display settings for numeric display objects include the following.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse for images on your computer. When you select an image from yourcomputer, it will be added to the image library automatically.- Transparent BG Image: Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent.Frame Color Set a frame color (only available with vector images).Plate Color Set a plate color (only available with vector images).4. Reference4-287 Text: The text settings for numeric display objects include the following.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Set a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Color: Set a font color.- Blink: Set a blink speed for the object:Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.Fast The object will blink every second.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a rate of 1%-600%.- Text Plate Color: Click to set the background color for figures.Text plate color is not in use Text plate color in use (blue)- Space: Set the indent from the margin of the object. If you select left alignment, you can set theleft indent. If you select right alignment, you can set the right indent.- Font Style: Set a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, or Right).- Display Mode: Set an option for the color of the message based on the background color.Transparent Display the message transparently, in contrast to the backgroundimage.4. Reference4-288XOR Display the message in a color that is easily distinguished from thebackground image. Display Case: The display case settings for numeric display objects include the following.- Display Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions. If the device value meetsmultiple conditions, the display settings will be based on the first condition met.(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up to eightconditions. For more information, <4.2.1.3 UnderstandingConstants and Data Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher up thelist.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower down thelist.$V is a value of a device to monitor.If an input condition is $V > 0 and a display condition is as follows.Setting Condition BackgroundcolorText color BlinkCondition 1 200 <= $V <300Blue Yellow Not useCondition 2 $V > 1000 Yellow Black Slow4. Reference4-289Setting Condition BackgroundcolorText color BlinkGeneral Do not set. Gray Black Not useChanges of the number input on the XGT Panel according to the changes in the value of the deviceto monitor are as follow.Status ResultDevice value = -200 Not supportedDevice value = 199Device value = 250Device value = 1010NoteIf a value of a device meets multiple conditions, it is displayed according tothe settings of the first condition. In the example above, if the device value is250, it will be displayed with the settings of the condition 1 although itmeets both the condition 1 and the condition 2.In the Range Edit window, you can adjust the settings for the plate color, text color, and blinking.Plate Color Set the background color of an image selected in the Display settings.If a raster image is selected, this option is not available.A raster image is selectedA vector image is selectedText Color Set the color of a figure to be displayed in a numeric input object.4. Reference4-290Blink Set a blink speed for the object (Not use, Slow, Normal, Fast). Operation: The operation settings for numeric display objects include the following.- Use Script: Click the checkbox to use a script with the object.- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.- Script: When you select a script, it appears here. To modify a script, refer to <4.2 Scripts >.4. Reference4-291 Detail: The detail settings for numeric display objects include the following.- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Zero Fill: If you have selected right justification, select this option to insert zeroes (0) before thenumber.- Zero Display: Set whether or not to show zeroes. If you do not set this option, the object displaysnothing when the device value is 0.4. Reference4-292 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for numeric display objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within thespecified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result ofmultiple devices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-293Text InputYou can write the entered texts in the word device in ASCII code. This section describes available settingsfor text input objects. Basic: The basic settings for text input objects include the following.- Use Input Function: Uncheck this option to change the text input object to a text display object.Object property setting options automatically change to fit the object type. Refer to <4.3.4.4 TextDisplay> for detailed information.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad- Display Format: Set the display format.No. of BYTE Set the number of characters to display (2 to 64).- Use Data Byte Swap: Set to change output data into word form. For example, if ABCD is input,BADC is output in the device.- Use Cipher: Set to encode the numeric value that a user inputs. The input value will appear as “*” inthe interface.- Description: Enter a description for the object.Note• Spaces are counted in the number of bytes allowed for text input.• 16 bit word devices allow entry of double-byte characters.• The starting address of the specified reference device is the memory location fortext input. The amount of text that can be input is the same as the volume of thememory location.• An odd number of characters can be input and the remaining areas will be filled 4. Reference4-294with 0. For example, if the number of characters is set to 4 and only 3 characters areinput, the remaining area in the memory will be filled with 0. Display: The display settings for text input objects include the following.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse for images on your computer. When you select an image from yourcomputer, it will be added to the image library automatically.- Transparent BG Image: Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent.Frame Color Set a frame color (only available with vector images).Plate Color Set a plate color (only available with vector images). Text: The text settings for text input objects include the following.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Set a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Color: Set a font color.4. Reference4-295- Blink: Set a blink speed for the object:Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.Fast The object will blink every second.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a rate of 1%-600%.- Text Plate Color: Click to set the background color for figures.Text plate color is not in use Text plate color in use (blue)- Space: Set the indent from the margin of the object. If you select left alignment, you can set theleft indent. If you select right alignment, you can set the right indent.- Font Style: Set a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, or Right).- Display Mode: Set an option for the color of the message based on the background color.Transparent Display the message transparently, in contrast to the backgroundimage.XOR Display the message in a color that is easily distinguished from thebackground image. Detail: The detail settings for text input objects include the following.- Security Level: Set the security level for the object. The higher the security level, the shorter theauthorization time when the password is entered. When the authorization time expires, the usermust enter the password again to use the object.- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder reads 4. Reference4-296the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.The offset function behaves differently if a read device is set. When a read device is set, the offset isonly applied to the writing device. If a read device is not set, the offset is applied to both read andwrite devices. - Offset Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon tothe right to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Read Device: Set whether or not to use a separate device for reading data. When you set the readdevice, even if it is same as the reference device in the Basic setting, the offset is only applied tothe write device. If the read device is different from the reference device, the value is written to thewrite device during the input process. In contrast, when the input process is stopped, the value isread from the read device and the data is displayed.For example, if the device value is as follows:Type Device address Device valueReference Device D10 0 (0x00)Reading Device D20 CD (0x4443)The result of writing AB(0x4241) to the numeric input object is as follows:Condition Value from controller Value displayed in XGT PanelRead not set D10 AB(0x4241) AB(0x4241)D20 CD(0x4443)Read set D10 AB(0x4241) CD(0x4443)D20 CD(0x4443)The values in the controller are same, but the data displayed in the XGT Panel is different.- Write Check Device: Set a device to verify the returned device value. Set this option when the bitdevice is On after inputting the number.- Write Device Off: Set when to turn off the write check device, if the data cannot be verified.- Use Log: Set to allow the device to be monitored in an operation log.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, XP50-TTE is not supported.4. Reference4-297 Keypad Option: The keypad options settings for text input objects include the following.- Cursor: Set the movement type for using the automatic cursor.If the focus type is set to Touch, input objects for continuous inputs can be grouped together.Continuous inputs are performed in each group.If there is an interlocked object with an input order, the input cursor will skip the locked unit andmove automatically to the next unit in the sequence.If you press a cursor moving special switch while on input, current input will be canceled and thedata will return to the status before input. And the previous or next input object will be ready forinput.Focus Type Set a method for moving the cursor. If you select Touch, the user must touchthe input field to move the cursor. The flow for the Touch method is asfollows:If you select Input Permit Device, the cursor moves only when the InputPermit Bit Device is on.Input Permit Set the input permit bit device when Input Permit Device is selected.Input Permit Bit Device:OFF OFFDisplay mode Input mode Display mode Touch Enter4. Reference4-298Bit DeviceClear Type Set whether or not to clear input data automatically when switching to inputmode.• Auto Clear OFF: Shows the previous data in input mode.• Auto Clear On: Clears input data automatically when switching to inputmode.- Keypad Settings: Set the key window options for data input. If you don’t use the key window, youcan also set the key switches using the special switch object.Keypad Type Set whether or not to use the Window Keypad Screen.Use Keypad set inInput ObjectSet whether or not to use the keypad specified in the key windowsettings. Enter the number of the key window or click [Browse] tolocate the key window.Use User KeypadPositionSet whether or not to specify a location for the key window. Set thecoordinates for the X and Y axes. If you do not specify the location,the key window will appear at the upper left or upper right of thescreen.- Use Auto Cursor: Set whether or not to use the auto cursor function. When the user touches [Enter]while entering data in a key window, the cursor moves to the next input field automatically.Input Order Specify the sequence number of the window to control cursormovement.Use Group Specify the same sequence number of a group of windows to controlcursor movement.- Use Interlock: Set to prevent input when the interlock device meets the specified condition (deviceON or OFF). The input cursor will skip the locked unit and move automatically to the next unit inthe sequence.72000☞2907200☞5720290☞4. Reference4-2994. Reference4-300 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for text input objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-301 Action Condition: The action condition settings for text input objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-302Text DisplayYou can display text from a word device that is saved in ASCII code. For example, you can display fourletters with the M00 device as the reference device, as shown here:The data is read by word unit, with the low byte of the device value read first and the high byte read next:When you input the four-letter ASCII code, the value is displayed in the four bytes of the reading rangefrom the device address.This section describes available settings for text display objects. Basic: The basic settings for text display objects include the following.4. Reference4-303- Use Input Function: Check this option to change the text display object to a text input object.Object property setting options automatically change to fit the object type. Refer to <4.3.4.3 TextInput > for detailed information.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Display Format: Set the display format.Num. of Byte Set the byte number of characters to display (2 to 64).- Use Data Byte Swap: Set to change output data into word form.- Display Type: Set the display type.Device Value Use the value from the device address set in the Basic settings.Input Value Display the value entered with the keypad on the current screen. Ifyou set this option, you cannot use the Device, Display Format,and Use Data Byte Swap options.Input Max. Value Display the maximum value in the text display according to thedata type of the numeric input object currently inputting a value.If you set this option, you cannot use the Device, DisplayFormat, and Use Data Byte Swap options.If the scaling feature or input condition is set in the numeric inputobject where the current value is being input, the maximum valueof the intersection range of the input range restricted by the twofeatures in displayed.Input Min. Value Display the minimum value in the text display according to thedata type of the numeric input object currently inputting a value.If you set this option, you cannot use the Device, DisplayFormat, and Use Data Byte Swap options.The range of the maximum and minimum input values differ bydevice size and the shape of the object generated by the pop-upkeypad. Furthermore, if the input condition is set, the maximumand minimum values also differ, depending on the ranges of theinput condition.If the scaling feature or input condition is set in the numeric inputobject where the current value is being input, the minimum valueof the intersection range of the input range restricted by the twofeatures in displayed.Bit DeviceAddressDisplay the device address no the device value.If the settings are as follows, the value saved in the HW9 devicewill be displayed.4. Reference4-304If Bit Device Address is selected, the address of the device isdisplayed as follows.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, XP50-TTE is not supported.Word DeviceAddressDisplay the device address no the device value.If you select Internal Device Skip on Device Address show in[COMMON] ▶ [Project Property Setting] ▶ [Language], aninternal device address will not be displayed in a text displayobject in that Bit Device Address or Word Device Address isselected.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, XP50-TTE is not supported.- Description: Enter a description for the object.Note• Spaces are counted in the number of bytes allowed for text input.• 16 bit word devices allow entry of double-byte characters.• The starting address of the specified reference device is the memory location fortext input. The amount of text that can be input is the same as the volume of thememory location.4. Reference4-305 Display: The display settings for text display objects include the following.- Library: Click to select an image from the library.- Open: Click to browse for images on your computer. When you select an image from yourcomputer, it will be added to the image library automatically.- Transparent BG Image: Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent. Youcannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time.Frame Color Set a frame color (only available with vector images).Plate Color Set a plate color (only available with vector images). Text: The text settings for text display objects include the following.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Set a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Color: Set a font color.- Blink: Set a blink speed for the object:Not use The object will not blink.Slow The object will blink every three seconds.Normal The object will blink every two seconds.4. Reference4-306Fast The object will blink every second.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a rate of 1%-600%.- Multilingual: Set an option for a second language (ASCII). If you select a language other thanEnglish, you cannot change the font. Fonts for other languages are displayed as set in theLanguage option of the Project Property settings. Refer to <2.2.2.6 Changing Languages> formore information.- Text Plate Color: Click to set the background color of the figures at XGT Panel.- Space: Set the indent from the margin of the object. If you select left alignment, you can set theleft indent. If you select right alignment, you can set the right indent.- Font Style: Set a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, or Right).- Display Mode: Set an option for the color of the message based on the background color.Transparent Display the message transparently, in contrast to thebackground image.XOR Display the message in a color that is easily distinguished fromthe background image. Detail: The detail settings for text display objects include the following.- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.4. Reference4-307 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for text display objects include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-308Window ObjectsWindow objects allow you to invoke windows based on the conditions of the device.Bit WindowThis section describes available settings for bit window objects. Basic: The basic settings for bit window objects include the following.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Window Screen No.: Set the window number to invoke or click [Browse] to locate the window.- Bit Condition: Set the bit condition for invoking the window (on or off).- Window Type: Set the type of window to invoke.Popup Set to open a new window on top of the existing window.Overlap Set to overlay a new window in an area where no figures or objects existon the Base screen, so that the Base screen can still be seen.- Placement: Set the location where the new window will appear on the screen (top-left, center, topright, bottom-right, or bottom-left). For example, if you set the location to “Top-Left”, the windowwill appear aligned to the upper-left corner of the object.4. Reference4-309Below are the descriptions for the placement options.Placement DescriptionTop-Left Align the upper left corners of the window and the object.Center Align the centers of the window and the object.Top-Right Align the upper right corners of the window and the object.Bottom-Right Align the lower right corners of the window and the object.Bottom-Left Align the lower left corners of the window and the object.Note• If the input window area exceeds the borders of the Base screen, it is not displayedin the XGT Panel. In this case, the project download will not start. If the windowobject area partially extends beyond the right or bottom of the Base screen, onlythe portion of the object that is inside the borders will be displayed.• There are two ways to close the bit window when the condition is met.1. Reverse the reference device status.2. For a pop-up window, click the close button. The device status is converted automatically. If the windows overlap, the close button is not displayed. The placement points for Window and Part objects are listed in the table below.Object Placement PointWindow Object The start point of the edited Window screen4. Reference4-310Part Object The start point where the parts are drawn in theedited Part screen.- Description: Enter a description of the object. Detail: The detail settings for bit window objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Offset: Check the checkbox to use the Offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Use Border: Set the border color of a window object in XP-Builder. If the border color is not set, awindow object will be displayed in the color you set in [TOOL] ▶ [Option] ▶ [Edit Option] ▶[Default Line Color of Figure/Object].The border is not displayed on the XGT Panel screen. It is displayed only in XP builder.4. Reference4-311Word WindowThis section describes available settings for word window objects. Basic: The basic settings for word window objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Control Device:Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.Size Set the data size for the object (16 or 32 bit). If Display Part Screenis set to “Indirect”, the size is fixed to 16 bit and cannot be changed.Type Set the data type for the object (signed decimal, Unsigned decimal,or BCD).4. Reference4-312- Window Type: Set the type of window to invoke.Popup Set to open a new window on top of the existing window.Overlap Set to overlay a new window in an area where no figures or objectsexist on the Base screen, so that the Base screen can still be seen.- Display Window: Set the method for invoking the window.Indirect Invoke the window based on the device value.Case Invoke the window when the condition is met. Conditionalexpressions can be created only when Case is selected.- Placement: Set the location where the new window will appear on the screen (top-left, center, topright, bottom-right, or bottom-left). For example, if you set the location to “Top-Left”, the windowwill appear aligned to the upper-left corner of the object. Below are the descriptions for the placement options.Placement DescriptionTop-Left Align the upper left corners of the window and the object.Center Align the centers of the window and the object.Top-Right Align the upper right corners of the window and the object.Bottom-Right Align the lower right corners of the window and the object.Bottom-Left Align the lower left corners of the window and the object.Note• If the data size or type are changed, the input and display condition are deleted.4. Reference4-313• If the Display Window setting changes to Indirect, the input and display conditionare deleted.• If the input window area exceeds the borders of the Base screen, it is not displayedin the XGT Panel. In this case, the project download will not start. If the windowobject area partially extends beyond the right or bottom of the Base screen, theportion of the object that is inside the borders will be displayed.• The Word Window object is always displayed on the basic screen and you cannotclose the window, as there is no close button. The Word Window object can beallocated two or more states, so it cannot be determined how the reference devicestate should change even if the present Window screen is closed.• The placement points for the Window and Part objects are listed in the table below.Object Placement PointWindow Object The start point of the edited Window screen.Part Object The start point where the parts are drawn in theedited Part screen.- Description: Enter a description for the object.4. Reference4-314 Case: The case settings for word window objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions:(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up to eightconditions. Clicking this icon opens the Range Edit window,which allows you to create a condition. For more information,refer to <4.2.1.3 Understanding Constants and Data Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher upthe list.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower downthe list.A number can be set for a window screen that pops up or overlaps when a condition is met. Youcan directly set the number or browser for a window screen. If you click the Browser button, all thewindow screens created will be displayed in thumbnails as shown below. Select a window screen toset the number.4. Reference4-315 Operation: The operation settings for word window objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Use Script: Check the checkbox to use a script with the object.- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.- Script: When you select a script, it appears here. To modify a script, refer to <4.2 Scripts > Detail: The detail settings for word window objects are shown in the screenshot below.4. Reference4-316- Offset: Check the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.The Offset function behaves differently if a read device is set. When a read device is set, the offsetis only applied to the writing device. If a read device is not set, the offset is applied to both readand write devices.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Use Border: Set the border color of a window object on XP-Builder. If the border color is not set, awindow object will be displayed in the color you set in [TOOL] ▶ [Option] ▶ [Edit Option] ▶[Default Line Color of Figure/Object]. This function is only for the XGT Panel and does not affectediting.4. Reference4-317Part ObjectsYou can use part objects to invoke parts based on the device condition. There are four movement typesof the part objects: Fixed, XY, Line, and Route. Fixed: Display the part according to the registered location condition in XP-Builder. XY: Display the part on the dot registered as the device value. The XY coordinates are set based onthe device value regardless of the current XY coordinates of that object.In this case, the X location value is the same as the device address (P100) and the Y location value isthe device address plus 1 (P101). In the below example, the device value is shown in the table.Device (1) (2) (3)X coordinate (P100) 20 130 180Y coordinate (P101) 80 200 18The bit object movement for the above example is shown below. Line: Display the movement of the object through the straight line. Set the minimum value as thestarting point, and the maximum value as the ending point.4. Reference4-318In this case, the X and Y location are relative based on the maximum and minimum value. The Xlocation value is the same as the device address (P100) and the Y location value is the device addressplus 1 (P101).If the XY device value is as below:Device (1) (2) (3)Device Value 0 50 100Then the bit object movement is as below:A starting point has a dot, whereas an ending point does not. Route: Display the movement of the object according to the point you set in advance. You can set thepoint to display the part.If the location device value is 6, the part moves along path (6). If the location device value is 1 and 4, itmoves along paths (1) and (4) respectively.Ending pointStarting point4. Reference4-319Bit PartThis section describes available settings for bit part objects. Basic: The basic settings for bit part objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- No. of Part Screen: Set the parts to invoke.On Set the part to invoke when the device is set to “On”.Off Set the part to invoke when the device is set to “Off”.On Blink Set the part to blink when the device is set to “On” (not use, slow,normal, and fast).Off Blink Set the part to blink when the device is set to “Off” (not use, slow,normal, and fast).- Placement: Set the location where the new part will appear on the screen (top-left, center, topright, bottom-right, or bottom-left). For example, if you set the location to “Top-Left”, the part willappear in the upper-left corner of the object.4. Reference4-320Type DescriptionTop-Left Align the upper-left corner of the part with the upper-left cornerof the object.Center Center the part over the object.Top-Right Align the upper-right corner of the part with the upper-rightcorner of the object.Bottom-Right Align the lower-right corner of the part with the lower-rightcorner of the object.Bottom-Left Align the lower-left corner of the part with the lower-left cornerof the object.Note• If an area of the part extends beyond the borders of the Base screen, only the areainside the window borders will be displayed.• The placement points for Window and Part objects are as follows: 4. Reference4-321Object Placement PointWindow Object The start point of the edited Window screen.Part Object The start point where the parts are drawn in theedited Part screen.- Position: Set a device to control values for the relative location of the part for XY, Line, and Routepaths. The size of the path position device is fixed at 16 bit. The maximum and minimum valuesrestrict the path of a part, based on the device value (only for line paths).- Description: Enter a description of the object. Detail: The detail settings for text bit part objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Offset: Check the checkbox to use the Offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary.4. Reference4-322 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for bit part objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-323Word PartThis section describes available settings for word part objects. Basic: The basic settings for word part objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Control Device:Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.Size Set the data size for the object (16 or 32 bit). If Display Part Screenis set to “Indirect”, the size is fixed to 16 bit and cannot be changed.Type Set the data type for the object (Signed decimal, unsigned decimal,BCD, or float).- Screen Type: Set the type of part to invoke.Part Screen Set to invoke a part.Storage Image Set to invoke an image from a storage location, such as a CF card orUSB device. Images can only be invoked from a folder titled“XP_User Image.” Image filenames must be formatted with theprefix, img, followed by a five digit number, for example,“ImgXXXXX.bmp” or”ImgXXXXX.jpg. ” If the filename is such as“Img00000.bmp” or “img00000.jpg,” then the device value is “0,”andthe image will not be invoked.- Display Part Screen: Set the method for invoking the window.Indirect Invoke the window based on the device value. It is either thewindow number or the image file name that the device valueinvokes. For example, if the device value is “1” and the screen type is 4. Reference4-324set to Part Screen, Part Screen 1 will be invoked. If the screen type isset to Storage Image, the file “img00001.bmp” will be invoked.Case Invoke the window when the condition is met.- Placement: Set the location where the new part will appear on the screen (top-left, center, topright, bottom-right, or bottom-left). For example, if you set the location to “Top-Left”, the part willappear in the upper-left corner of the object.Type DescriptionTop-Left Align the upper-left corner of the part with the upper-left cornerof the object.Center Center the part over the object.Top-Right Align the upper-right corner of the part with the upper-rightcorner of the object.Bottom-Right Align the lower-right corner of the part with the lower-rightcorner of the object.Bottom-Left Align the lower-left corner of the part with the lower-left cornerof the object.4. Reference4-325Note• If the data size or type is changed, the input and display conditions are deleted.• If the Display Part Screen setting changes to Indirect, the input and displayconditions are deleted.• If an area of the part extends beyond the borders of the Base screen, only the areainside the borders will be displayed.• The placement points for the Window and Part objects are as follows:Object Placement PointWindow Object The start point of the edited Window screen.Part Object The start point where the parts are drawn in theedited Part screen.• When the Screen Type setting is Storage Image and the Display Part Screen settingis Indirect, the image from the storage device that corresponds to the currentcontrol device is displayed.- Position: Set a device to control values for the relative location of the part for XY, Line, and Routepaths. The size of the path position device is fixed at 16 bit. The maximum and minimum valuesrestrict the path of a part based on the device value (only for line paths).- Storage Image Setting: Set options for using images from a storage location.Width Set the width of the image when you import an image from thestorage device. The image size is reduced or expanded to fit thewidth you set. When you set the Original size option, you can viewas much of the original image as fits within the width you set.Height Set the height of the image when you import an image from thestorage device. The image size is reduced or expanded to fit theheight you set. When you set the Original size option, you canview as much of the original image as fits within the height youset.Storage Path Select the storage location for the image.Original size Set to show the image in its original size. If the image size is largerthan the Base screen, only as much of the image as fits within theBase screen will be displayed, as shown below.4. Reference4-326 If you do not set this option, the image will be reduced to thewidth and height you set. When you set the width and height to640x480, the image is shown as follows:Image Type Select the image type (BMP or JPG).Moving Pixel When an image is too large to be shown on the screen in itsentirety, set the number of pixels to scroll when the user scrolls up,down, left, or right to see another part of the image. Use thisoption when you set the Original Size option.- Description: Enter a description of the object.4. Reference4-327 Case: The case settings for word part objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions:(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up to eightconditions. Clicking this icon opens the Range Edit window, whichallows you to create a condition. For more information, refer to<4.2.1.3 Understanding Constants and Data Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher up thelist.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower down thelist.A number can be set for a part screen that pops up or overlaps when a condition is met. You candirectly set the number or browser for a part screen. If you click the Browser button, all the partscreens created will be displayed in thumbnails as shown below. Select a part screen to set thenumber.4. Reference4-328NoteBrowser button is not provided if the Screen type is set to Storage Image in Basicproperty window. Operation: The operation settings for word part objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Script: Check the checkbox to use a script with the object.- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.- Script: When you select a script, it appears here. To modify a script, refer to <4.2 Scripts>.4. Reference4-329 Detail: The detail settings for word part objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Offset: Check the checkbox to use the Offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow you can also specify network settings, if necessary. Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for word part objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified 4. Reference4-330range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-331Animation ObjectAnimation objects allow you to display moving images (GIFs) based on the device conditions. Animation: The animation settings for animation objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Loop: Set whether or not to repeat the animation. If you set this option, you cannot set theStart/End or Pause/Restart devices.- Start/End: Set a bit device to start and end the animation.- Pause/Restart: Set a device to pause or resume the animation halfway.- Library: Click to select an animation from the user or system graphic libraries.- Open: Click to select a GIF file from your computer.- Speed: Set the speed of the animation.Slow 400 msNormal 250 msFast 100 ms- Description: Enter a description of the relevant object.NoteDepending on the operation speed and the image size, animation objects canoverload the system and affect the overall performance.In projects other than WXP, animated gifs "The original image cannot exceed 256pixels in width and length, and the number of frames can not exceed 16. Check theabove constraints when registering with the library or checking for data errors.If the animation object is not connected to PLC device when setting Start / End, Pause/ Restart device, it displays the image of stop status.※ For details, refer to .4. Reference4-332 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for animation objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Action Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-333Graph ObjectsYou can use graph objects to express various device values. Eight types of graphs are available, includingbar, pie, meter, closed, trend, logging trend, logging scatter, and real-time scatter graphs.Note• If the graph object is not connected to a PLC device, only graph background and scale aredisplayed.※ For details, refer to .Bar GraphThe following sections describe options available for bar graphs. Basic: The basic settings for bar graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Control Device: Specify the following options for the control device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. When youclick the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can also specifynetwork settings, if necessary.Size Set the data size of the device (16 bit or 32 bit). If you change the data 4. Reference4-334size of an existing object, the conditional statement will be deleted.Type Set the data form at the device (signed decimal, unsigned decimal,BCD, or float). If you change the data type of an existing object, theconditional statement will be deleted.- Upper/Lower Limit Value: Set the maximum and minimum values of the data to display. Themaximum and minimum values must be within the range supported by the device type. Otherwise,only the minimum or maximum value supported by the device will be displayed.Device Set the specified device value as the maximum and minimum value.Constant Set the specified fixed value as the maximum and minimum value.NoteRefer to the following table for the minimum and maximum constant values based onthe device size:Device size Device type Minimum Maximum16bit Signed decimal -32768 3276716bit Unsigned decimal 0 6553516bit BCD 0 999932bit Signed decimal -2147483648 214748364732 bit Unsigned decimal 0 429496729532 bit BCD 0 99999999- Description: Enter a description of the relevant object. Display: The display settings for bar graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Transparent BG Image: Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent.- Library: Click to select a background image for the graph from an image library.- Open: Click to search for a background image for the graph on your computer.- Direction: Set the direction of the graph (top > bottom, bottom > top, left > right, or right > left).4. Reference4-335- Hatch: Set a pattern for the ranges in the graph.- Transparent Border: Set whether or not to use a transparent border for the graph.- Frame Display: Specify the following options for the frame.Border Color Select a border color.Plate Color Select the background for areas not filled by value ranges.- Fill Type: Specify the following options for the fill.Pattern FG Color Select a foreground color for the pattern.Pattern BG Color Select a background color for the pattern.- Scale: Specify the following options for the scale.Point Set the number of points in the scale. The number can be setfrom 0 to 255. Every fifth point is displayed longer than otherpoints and the size of the points differ by graph. If the numberof points is 0, other options cannot be set.Interval Set the space between points on the graph (0 to 10).Location Set the location of the scale in the graph.Alignment Set the alignment of points in the scale. If the location of thescale is to the left or right, the alignment can be set as left orright. If the location of the scale is at the top or bottom, thealignment can be set as top or bottom.Color Set the color of the scales.Plate ColorFill Color4. Reference4-336 Case: The case settings for bar graph object are shown in the below screenshot.- Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions.(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up toeight conditions. Clicking this icon opens the Range Editwindow, which allows you to create a condition. For moreinformation, refer to <4.2.1.3 Understanding Constants andData Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete thecondition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher upthe list.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lowerdown the list.When you create a range condition, you can also set the fill type of the graph.Pattern FG Color Set the foreground color of the graph to display when thecondition is met.Pattern BG Color Set the background color of the graph to display when thecondition is met.4. Reference4-337 Operation: The operation settings for bar graph objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Use Script: Check the checkbox to use a script with the object.- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.- Script: When you select a script, it appears here. To modify a script, refer <4.2 Scripts> Detail: The detail settings for bar graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Offset: Check the checkbox to use the Offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.4. Reference4-338 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for bar graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-339Pie GraphThe following sections describe the available options for pie graph objects. Basic: The basic settings for pie graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Control Device: Specify the following options for the control device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.Size Set the data size of the device (16 bit or 32 bit). If you change thedata size of an existing object, the conditional statement will bedeleted.Type Set the data form at the device (signed decimal, unsigned decimal,BCD, or float). If you change the data type of an existing object, theconditional statement will be deleted.- Upper/Lower Limit Value: Set the maximum and minimum values of the data to display. Themaximum and minimum values must be within the range supported by the device type. Otherwise,only the minimum or maximum value supported by the device will be displayed.Device Set the specified device value as the maximum and minimum value.4. Reference4-340Constant Set the specified fixed value as the maximum and minimum value.NoteRefer to the following table for the minimum and maximum constant values based onthe device size:Device size Device type Minimum Maximum16bit Signed decimal -32768 3276716bit Unsigned decimal 0 6553516bit BCD 0 999932bit Signed decimal -2147483648 214748364732 bit Unsigned decimal 0 429496729532 bit BCD 0 99999999• If the number of channels is 2 or more, the device of each channel is set as acontinuous device based on the input device.- Example) Input device: HW00000, if the size is 16bit, set the second channel deviceto HW00001- Example) Input device: HW00000, if the size is 32bit, set the second channel deviceto HW00002• If the number of channels is 2 or more, only the positive number greater than 0 canbe entered for device input.- Description: Enter a description of the relevant object. Display: The display settings for pie graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Channels: Input the number of items to display on pie graph.- Library: Click to select a background image for the graph from an image library.4. Reference4-341- Open: Click to search for a background image for the graph on your computer.- Hatch: Set a pattern for the ranges in the graph.- Transparent BG Image: Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent.- Transparent Border: Set whether or not to use a transparent border for the graph.- Frame Display: Specify the following options for the frame.Border Color Select a border color.Plate Color Select the background for areas not filled by value ranges.- Fill Type: Specify the following options for the fill.Pattern FG Color Set a foreground color for the pattern.Pattern BG Color Set a background color for the pattern.- Shape and Direction: Specify the following options for the shape and direction.Shape Set the shape of the pie chart (circle, top-half circle, bottomhalf circle, left-half circle, right-half circle, top-fan, bottomfan, left-fan, right-fan, and 3/4 fan).Direction Set the direction for filling the pie graph (clockwise orcounter-clockwise).Start Position When using a circle shape, set the start position of thepointer. If the direction is clockwise, the start position is asfollows. Top Bottom Left Right- Scale: Specify the following options for the scale.Point Set the number of points in the scale.Color Set the color of the scales.4. Reference4-342Setting when the number of channels is 2 or more:- Select fill-type channel: Enter the channel number to set the fill color, or select the channelnumber from the drop-down list.- Use Data display: Displays the ratio of the value of each channel to the value of all channels is %.Text size Set the size of the displayed text.Text color Set the color of the displayed text.Use text BG color Set the background color of the displayed text.- Fill Color: Set the fill color of pie portion of each channel.4. Reference4-343 Case: The case settings for pie graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions.(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up to eightconditions. Clicking this icon opens the Range Edit window,which allows you to create a condition. For more information,refer to <4.2.1.3 Understanding Constants and Data Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher up thelist.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower downthe list.When you create a range condition, you can also set the fill type of the graph.Pattern FG Color Set the foreground color of the graph to display when thecondition is met.Pattern BG Color Set the background color of the graph to display when thecondition is met.4. Reference4-344 Operation: The operation settings for pie graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Script: Check the checkbox to use a script with the object.- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.- Script: When you select a script, it appears here. To modify a script, refer to <4.2 Scripts>. Detail: The detail settings for pie graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Offset: Check the checkbox to use the Offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.4. Reference4-345 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for pie graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-346Meter GraphThe following sections describe available options for meter graphs. Basic: The basic settings for meter graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Control Device: Specify the following options for the control device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.Size Set the data size of the device (16 bit or 32 bit). If you change thedata size of an existing object, the conditional statement will bedeleted.Type Set the data form at the device (signed decimal, unsigned decimal,BCD, or float). If you change the data type of an existing object, theconditional statement will be deleted.- Upper/Lower Limit Value: Set the maximum and minimum values of the data to display. Themaximum and minimum values must be within the range supported by the device type. Otherwise,only the minimum or maximum value supported by the device will be displayed.Device Set the specified device value as the maximum and minimum value.Constant Set the specified fixed value as the maximum and minimum value.4. Reference4-347NoteRefer to the following table for the minimum and maximum constant values based onthe device size:Device size Device type Minimum Maximum16bit Signed decimal -32768 3276716bit Unsigned decimal 0 6553516bit BCD 0 999932bit Signed decimal -2147483648 214748364732 bit Unsigned decimal 0 429496729532 bit BCD 0 99999999- Description: Enter a description of the relevant object. Display: The display settings for meter graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Library: Click to select a background image for the graph from an image library.- Open: Click to search for a background image for the graph on your computer.- Frame Display: Specify the following options for the frame.Border Color Select a border color.Plate Color Select the background for areas not filled by value ranges.Needle Color Select the pointer color.- Transparent BG Image: Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent.- Transparent Border: Set whether or not to use a transparent border.- Shape and Direction: Specify the following options for the shape and direction:Shape Set the shape of the graph.Direction Set the direction for filling the graph.4. Reference4-348Start Position When using a circle shape, set the starting position of thepointer.When using a circle shape, set the starting position of thepointer. If the direction is clockwise, the start position is asfollows. Top Bottom Left Right- Scale: Specify the following options for the scale.Point Set the number of points in the scale.Color Set the color of the scales. Case: The case settings for meter graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions.(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up to eightconditions. Clicking this icon opens the Range Edit window,which allows you to create a condition. For more information,refer to <4.2.1.3 Understanding Constants and Data Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher up thelist.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower downthe list.When you create a range condition, you can also set the needle color of the graph to display whenthe condition is met.4. Reference4-349 Operation: The operation settings for meter graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Script: Check the checkbox to use a script with the object.- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.- Script: When you select a script, it appears here. To modify a script, refer to <4.2 Scripts>. Detail: The detail settings for meter graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Offset: Check the checkbox to use the Offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.4. Reference4-350 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for the meter graph object include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-351Closed GraphThe following sections describe the options available for closed graph objects. Basic: The basic settings for closed graph objects include the following.- Control Device: Specify the following options for the control device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.Size Set the data size of the device (16 bit or 32 bit). If you change thedata size of an existing object, the conditional statement will bedeleted.Type Set the data form of the device (signed decimal, unsigned decimal,BCD, or float). If you change the data type of an existing object, theconditional statement will be deleted.- Upper/Lower Limit Value: Set the maximum and minimum values of the data to display. Themaximum and minimum values must be within the range supported by the device type. Otherwise,only the minimum or maximum value supported by the device will be displayed.Device Set the specified device value as the maximum and minimumvalue.Constant Set the specified fixed value as the maximum and minimum value.4. Reference4-352NoteRefer to the following table for the minimum and maximum constant values based onthe device size:Device size Device type Minimum Maximum16bit Signed decimal -32768 3276716bit Unsigned decimal 0 6553516bit BCD 0 999932bit Signed decimal -2147483648 214748364732 bit Unsigned decimal 0 429496729532 bit BCD 0 99999999- Description: Enter description in the relevant object. Display: The display settings for closed graph objects include the following.- Transparent BG Image: Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent.- Library: Click to select a background image for the graph from a library.- Open: Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer.- Direction: Set the direction for filling the graph (Top > Bottom, Bottom > Top, Left > Right, orRight > Left).- Hatch: Select the pattern for the filled areas of the graph.- Transparent Border: Set whether or not to use a transparent border.- Frame Display: Specify the following options for the frame.Border Color Set a border color.Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges.- Fill Type: Specify the following options for the fill.Pattern FG Color Set the foreground color for the pattern.4. Reference4-353Pattern BG Color Set the background color for the pattern.- Scale: Specify the following options for the scale.Point Set the number of points in the scale. The number can beset from 0 to 255. Every fifth point is displayed longer thanother points and the size of the points differ by graph. Ifthe number of points is 0, other options cannot be set.Interval Set the space between points on the graph (0 to 10).Location Set the location of the scale in the graph.Alignment Set the alignment of points in the scale. If the location ofthe scale is left or right, the alignment can be set in left orright. If the location of the scale is top or bottom, thealignment can be set in top or bottom.Color Set the color of the scales. Case: The case settings for closed graph object include the following.- Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions:(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up to eightconditions. Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window,which allows you to create a condition. For more information,refer to <4.2.1.3 Understanding Constants and Data Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher up thelist.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower downthe list.4. Reference4-354When you create a range condition, you can also set the fill type of the graph.Pattern FG Color Set the foreground color of the graph to display when thecondition is met.Pattern BG Color Set the background color of the graph to display when thecondition is met. Operation: The operation settings for closed graph object include the following.- Use Script: Click the checkbox to use a script with the object.- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.- Script: When you select a script, it appears here. To modify a script, refer to refer to <4.2 Scripts>.4. Reference4-355 Detail: The detail settings for closed graph object include the following.- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary. Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for the closed graph object include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.4. Reference4-356- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-357Trend GraphThe following sections describe available options for trend graphs.Note• Only the data points on the X axis (time axis) that are collected most recently according to thecurrent time will be displayed on the screen. That is, the previous values of the current time(acquisition interval X the number of points on the X axis) will be displayed.• When the screen shifts, communication may stop and resume. If a communication delay occurs,graphs may not appear correctly. If communication fails for a short time because of environmentalfactors such as nose, graphs may not appear correctly.4. Reference4-358 Basic: The basic settings for the trend graph object include the following.- Device: Specify the following options for the device.Size Set the data size of the device (16 bit or 32 bit).Type Set the data form of the device (signed decimal, unsigned decimal,BCD, or float).NoteThe data size, data form, maximum alarm value, minimum alarm value, maximum datavalue, minimum data value are equally applied to all the devices.- Alarm Value: Set whether or not to trigger an alarm if the data value exceeds the maximum orminimum limits.Device Set the specified device value as the alarm limit.Constant Set the specified fixed value as the alarm limit.As you see in the example below that compares the production volume and the target volume, themaximum alarm value and the minimum alarm value are displayed in straight lines.4. Reference4-359- Device: Click to specify a device to be referenced by the object or enter the device address. Whenyou specify a device, a new device input row will be created automatically, where you can specifymore devices to be referenced (up to 8).To remove a device, click the row number and press delete on the keypad.- Line Color: Set the line color for the graph.- Line Type: Set the line type (dash or solid).- Line Thickness: Sets the line thickness.Solid line 1 through 10 can be set.dotted line Only 1 is available.4. Reference4-360 Max/Min: The Max/Min settings for the trend graph object include the following.- Max/Min Setting: This option specifies the maximum and minimum values for the data to display.The maximum and minimum values are set by selecting with a device or by entering the constantvalues. In the graph below, the minimum value is set at 0 and the maximum value is set at 150within a range of 0-150.If a device to be monitored has a value outside the maximum or minimumvalues, it is displayed as the maximum or minimum value on the graph.100%0%50%Not displayed4. Reference4-361Individual If the maximum and minimum values are set to [Individual], they areapplied respectively based on the device address listed in [Basic].If thedevices P0000, P0001, and P0002 are registered in [Basic] as shown inthe screenshot below, the maximum and minimum values arespecified:[Default Settings][Maximum/Minimum Value Settings]When the maximum and minimum values are specified separately asshown above, both values for the first device, P0000, are set to 0 and150 on the graph. The maximum and minimum values for the seconddevice, P0001, are set to 100 and 200 on the graph. The maximumand minimum values for the third device, P0002, are set to 50 and 250on the graph.NoteIf The Setting Type of Min/Max is set to [Individual],Reference Line menu option is not displayed.Block If the maximum and minimum values are set to [Block], all indices thatare set in [Basic] will have the same values. Therefore, indices 1, 2, and3 will all have the same maximum and minimum values in the exampleabove. Only one maximum and minimum value each can be enteredfor whole setting configurations.The reference line can be set only when the maximum and minimum1500200025050(3) (2) (1)4. Reference4-362values are specified. Display: The display settings for the trend graph object include the following.- Library: Click to select a background image for the graph from a library.- Open: Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer.- Transparent BG: Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent.- Transparent Border: Set whether or not to use a transparent border.- No. of Display in X axis: Set the number of data points to be displayed on the graph (more than3).- Frame Display: Specify the following options for the frame.Border Color Set a border color.Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges.- Sampling Time x100ms: Set the cycle for collecting the data, in millisecondsConstant For a constant, the cycle can be set between 1 and 6,000.Device For a device, the cycle is set from a device value. However, if adevice value is 0, the cycle is changed to 100 ms forcefully.- Starting Point Location: Set a starting point for the scales (left bottom or right bottom).4. Reference4-363- The Scroll Points: Set the speed that the graph will scroll across the screen, by setting the numberof points that the graph will scroll each time. The higher the number, the faster the graph will scroll.Previous data are deleted by the number of points that you set and the new data are displayed inthe direction of the graph.- Scale: Specify the following options for the scale.No. of Horizontal Point Set the number of points on the X axis.No. of Vertical Point Set the number of points on the Y axis.X-axis Height Set the height of the X axis scale.Y-axis Width Set the width of the Y axis scale.Scale Color Set the color of the scales.Left RightGraph direction Graph direction4. Reference4-364 Operation: The operation settings for trend graph object include the following.- Use Script: Click the checkbox to use a script with the object.Select Script Select a script from the drop-down list.Script When you select a script, it appears here. To modify a script, referto <4.2 Scripts>. Detail: The detail settings for trend graph object include the following.- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address based onthe value of the offset device. For example, if the starting device address is P100, XP-Builder readsthe value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value. If the offset value is 10, forexample, then the referenced device address is P110.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.4. Reference4-365 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for the trend graph object include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-366 Reference Line: The reference settings for the trend graph object include the following.NoteIn the Max/Min setting window, if The Setting Type of Min/Max is set to [Individual],Reference Line menu option is not displayed.- Use Reference: Click the checkbox to use a reference line for the graph. A reference line refers to aline displaying the location of a specific value set by the user other than the maximum or minimumvalue.A reference line can be set as a fixed value or device value and it can be set only when themaximum and minimum values are set to [Block].Num of Reference Set the number of reference lines. When you enter thenumber of lines and move to the properties table of thereference lines, the corresponding number rows will becreated to allow you adjust the properties. 1 to 8 referencelines can be created.Reference Properties You can set the properties only when Use Reference ischecked. If the Value Type is set to Constant, you cannotenter a device. If the Value Type is set to Device, you cannotenter a fixed value. The number column is a reference line 4. Reference4-367number. It cannot be edited and its location cannot bechanged. If the line type of a reference line is set to Dash,the thickness can only be set to 1.Display Value Select this option to display reference line values in a text.The text color is the same as the color of the reference line,and the text size is adjusted based on the size of the trendgraph.Logging Trend GraphThe following sections describe available options for logging trend graph objects.Note• Only the data points on the X axis (time axis) that are collected most recently according to thecurrent time will be displayed on the screen.• When the logging is in progress, communication may stop for a short time because ofenvironmental factors such as nose and the logging fails. The data of such time are not normal andare not displayed on the logging trend graph. Therefore, the graph appears intermittently.4. Reference4-368 Basic: The basic settings for the logging trend graph object include the following.- Logging Device: Specify the following options for the logging device.Size Set the data size of the device (16 bit or 32 bit). You can change the datasize only in the Logging data from the project pane.Type Set the data form of the device (signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD,or float).- Alarm Value: Set whether or not to trigger an alarm if the data value exceeds the maximum orminimum limits.Device Set the specified device value as the alarm limit.Constant Set the specified fixed value as the alarm limit.As you see in the example below that compares the production volume and the target volume, themaximum alarm value and the minimum alarm value are displayed in straight lines.- Logging Group: Set the number of the logging group, which is set in the Logging.4. Reference4-369- Display: Set the condition for displaying the graph.Always Display Set to display always.Display when BitOn/OffSet to display only specific index based on the device value.For example, if the conditional device is set to P0100 and fourindices are set as shown in the screenshot below,the following graphs are displayed based on the status of thefour contiguous bit devices starting from P0100.- Sort: Set a sort option (oldest first or latest first).- Cont. Add: Click to enter a starting index and range. Up to 20 items can be entered.- Delete All: Click to delete all input data at once.- Index: Shows the index number of the device. An index number increases by 1 starting from 1 oflogging device as the device address increases.As you see in the example below, when 32 devices from P0100 are edited to be logged, the indicesnumbers of the four devices, P0001, P0005, P0010, and P0018, from the 32 devices are as follow.4. Reference4-370Device address Logging indexP0001 (logging device) 1P0002 2… …P0005 5… …P0010 10… …P0018 18To add a new item, enter the index number for the item on the index column. When a new item isadded, a blank index column is created on the next row to add a next item. Up to 20 items can beadded.To remove an item, click the row number and press delete on the keypad.- Device Add.: Shows the starting address for the logging group and logging index. The deviceaddress cannot be input and is displayed according to the logging index.- Line Color: Set the line color for the graph.- Line Type: Set the line type (dash or solid).- Line Thickness: Sets the line thickness.4. Reference4-371Solid line 1 through 10 can be set.dotted line Only 1 is available.- Description: Enter a description for the object. Max/Min: The Max/Min settings for the trend graph object include the following.- Max/Min Setting: This option specifies the maximum and minimum values for the data to display.The maximum and minimum values are set by selecting with a device or by entering the constantvalues. In the graph below, the minimum value is set at 0 and the maximum value is set at 150within a range of 0-150.If a device to be monitored has a value outside the maximum or minimumvalues, it is displayed as the maximum or minimum value on the graph.Individual If the maximum and minimum values are set to [Individual], theyare applied respectively based on the device address listed in[Basic].If the devices P0000, P0001, and P0002 are registered in[Basic] as shown in the screenshot below, the maximum andminimum values are specified:100%0%50%Not displayed4. Reference4-372[Default Settings][Maximum/Minimum Value Settings]When the maximum and minimum values are specifiedseparately as shown above, both values for the first device,P0000, are set to 0 and 150 on the graph. The maximum andminimum values for the second device, P0001, are set to 100 and200 on the graph. The maximum and minimum values for thethird device, P0002, are set to 50 and 250 on the graph.NoteIf The Setting Type of Min/Max is set to [Individual],Reference Line menu option is not displayed.Block If the maximum minimum values are set to [Block], all indices thatare set in [Default] will have the same values. Therefore, indices 1,2, and 3 will all have the same maximum and minimum values inthe example above. Only one maximum and minimum value eachcan be entered for whole setting configurations.The reference line can be set only when the maximum andminimum values are specified.1500200025050(3) (2) (1)4. Reference4-373 Display: The display settings for the logging trend graph object include the following.- Library: Click to select a background image for the graph from a library.- Open: Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer.- Transparent BG: Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent.- Transparent Border: Set whether or not to use a transparent border.- No. of Display in X axis: Set the number of data points to be displayed on the graph (3 to 120).Device Set the specified device value as the X axis point.Constant Set the specified fixed value as the X axis point.- Frame Display: Specify the following options for the frame.Border Color Set a border color.Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges.- No. of Samples to Scroll: A user can refer to the data of his intended position with the specialswitch; Previous Data/Next Data View. However, in the below two cases (The latest data trackingmode/the oldest data tracking mode), a window is automatically updated and it displays the datasince the present time. Through this option, you can set how many data units will be applied totransfer a screen.The latest datatracking modeWhen you edit and download logging trend graph aftersetting Preferred View Mode as the latest data trackingmode, logging trend is set as the latest data tracking modeand it updates a screen every time logging is performed 4. Reference4-374newly and then, it tracks and shows the latest logging data.The oldest datatracking modeThe logging type linked to logging trend graph is set ascircular buffer, the data displayed at the current screen willbe removed someday with continuous logging process.Then, the equipment updates a screen automatically anddisplays the oldest data.- Starting Point Location: Set a starting point for the scales (Left Bottom, Right Bottom, Left Top, orRight Top).- Data Order: Specify the following options for the data order, for example:Time Data8: 10 108: 20 208: 30 308: 40 408: 50 50Latest -> Oldest Show data in order from most recent to oldest. The startingpoint is on the left:The Starting Point Location is on the right:Oldest -> Latest Show data in order from oldest to most recent.The Starting Point Location is on the left:The Starting Point Location is on the right: 4. Reference4-375- Scale: Specify the following options for the scale.No. of Horizontal Point Set the number of points on the X axis.No. of Vertical Point Set the number of points on the Y axis.X-axis Height Set the height of the X axis scale.Y-axis Width Set the width of the Y axis scale.Scale Color Set the color of the scales. Cursor: The cursor settings for logging trend graph object include the following.- Cursor: Specify the following options for the cursor.Use Cursor Set whether or not to display the cursor on the XGT screen, asillustrated below.Storage CursorInformationSet whether or not to save cursor data (logging time of the currentcursor position and related values). Cursor data is saved at deviceand the size of the device is always 32 bit. The cursor informationis saved as follows, based on the device set:4. Reference4-376The cursor information is saved in the specified device wheneverthe data from the current location of the cursor is changed or thecursor is moved.Color Set a color for the cursor.Line Set a line type for the cursor (solid or dash).Note• To show or hide the cursor, click the Logging Trend Graph area.• The location of the cursor is at the center of the current data.Saved at 32bitThe maximumnumber oflogging groups(20)Saved asunsigned 16bitThe maximum numberof logging groups (20)Saved in the lower 16bit4. Reference4-377 < The current data value: 3> < The current data value: 8>• If the data to be displayed is deleted, because the area is deleted in the cursordisplay mode, the cursor will also disappear. When the logging is restarted, thecursor will reappear.• The cursor cannot be moved. To move the cursor, use the Next Log Trend Data orPrevious Log Trend Data option from the Special Switch object.• If there is no data before or after the current data, the cursor is moved to theprevious or next data. Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for the logging trend graph object include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.4. Reference4-378- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions. Reference Line: The reference line settings for the logging trend graph object include the following.NoteIn the Max/Min setting window, if The Setting Type of Min/Max is set to [Individual],Reference Line menu option is not displayed.- Use Reference: Click the checkbox to use a reference line for the graph. A reference line refers to aline displaying the location of a specific value set by the user other than the maximum or minimumvalue.A reference line can be set as a fixed value or device value and it can be set only when themaximum and minimum values are set to [Block].4. Reference4-379Num of Reference Set the number of reference lines. When you enter thenumber of lines and move to the properties table of thereference lines, the corresponding number rows will becreated to allow you adjust the properties. 1 to 8 referencelines can be created.Reference Properties You can set the properties only when Use Reference ischecked. If the Value Type is set to Constant, you cannotenter a device. If the Value Type is set to Device, you cannotenter a fixed value. The number column is a reference linenumber. It cannot be edited and its location cannot bechanged. If the line type of a reference line is set to Dash,the thickness can only be set to 1.Display Value Select this option to display reference line values in a text.The text color is the same as the color of the reference line,and the text size is adjusted based on the size of thelogging trend graph.4. Reference4-380Scatter Graph – Logging ScatterThe following sections describe available options for logging scatter graph objects. When the ScatterGraph Type window appears, select Logging Scatter and click OK. Basic: The basic settings for the logging scatter graph objects include the following.- Type of Scatter: Set the type of scatter chart.Y Scatter Shows device addresses, including the logging start device, inorder along the X-axis. The data displays in a loop, so you do notneed to designate the minimum or maximum value.4. Reference4-381X-Y Scatter For two continuous device addresses from starting device, showsthe previous device value along the X-axis and the next devicevalue along the Y-axis and displays dot or value where the twocoordinates intersect. You must designate a minimum andmaximum value for the axes.- Scatter Basic Setting: Specify the following options for the scatter chart.Group ID The logging group No. to be displayed can be established among1~32. You can fix the logging group number from Logging in theProject pane. To add a new item to logging scatter chart, inputlogging group number to logging group window and press theEnter key. If a new item is added, the screen for logging groupnumber is added to the next row and you can also add anotheritem up to 20. To delete the item, select the number of item andpress the Delete key.Start Device It displays a starting device that is applicable to input logginggroup number. Register the start device from the Logging in theProject pane. Each control device data is initialized as 0 aftercompleting each operation.Type It sets the data type of device.Size It displays the size of device to be logged. The value established atlogging of common data is applied to the size of logging deviceand you cannot set it up.- Description: Enter a description for the object.4. Reference4-382 Max./Min.: The maximum and minimum value settings for the logging scatter graph object includethe following.- Max./Min. Setting: Specify the following options for the maximum/minimum setting.Y Axis Type / XAxis TypeYou can set the minimum and maximum value as many as theitems of logging distribution charts added at Basic Settings.Namely, you cannot add or delete the items on the minimum andmaximum value. The type of the minimum and maximum value canbe established as Constant or Device.Y Axis. Max / YAxis. MinYou can set the minimum and maximum values of data to bedisplayed on the Y-axis. You can use a device value or a constant. Ifthe device value exceeds the minimum or maximum, it is displayedas the minimum or maximum value of the graph.X Axis. Max / XAxis. MinYou can set the minimum and maximum values of data to bedisplayed on the X-axis. You can use a device value or a constant. Ifthe device value exceeds the minimum or maximum value, it isdisplayed as the minimum or maximum value of the graph. The Xaxis displays the device values in order, so you do not need todesignate a minimum or maximum value.4. Reference4-383NoteIf The Setting Type of Min/Max is set to [Individual], Reference Line menu option isnot displayed. Line and Dot: The line and dot settings for the logging scatter graph object include the following.- Setting of Line: Specify the following options for the line.Use Line Set to use a line to display the data.Line Color Set the color of the line.Line Type Set the type of the line (solid or dash).Use Dot Set to use dots for displaying the data.Dot Color Set the color of the dots.Dot Type Set the type of the dots.4. Reference4-384 Alarm: The alarm settings for the logging scatter graph object include the following.- Alarm Setting (Only Y Scatter Graph): Specify the following options for the alarm.Use Alarm Set whether to use a value or not. It is only available for the Y Scattergraph.Max Value /Min ValueIt establishes a warning upper bound and warning lower bound for alogging trend graph. If the device value is more than the warningupper bound, it is not shown as the established line or dot color butdisplayed as the upper bound line or dot color. However, if thedevice value is less than the lower bound, it is displayed as theestablished lower bound line or dot color.Max Line / MinLineYou can set the color of a line to be applied when it is more or lessthan the warning upper bound of a logging distribution graph. If thedevice value exceeds the warning upper bound, it is displayed asupper bound line color. However, if it is less than the warning upperbound, it is displayed as the lower bound line color.Max. Dot /Min. DotYou can set the color of a dot to be applied when it is more or lessthan the warning upper bound of a logging distribution graph. If thedevice value exceeds the warning upper bound, it is displayed as theupper bound dot color. However, if it is less than the warning upperbound, it is displayed as the lower bound dot color.4. Reference4-385 Display: The display settings for the logging scatter graph objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Library: Click to select a background image for the graph from an image library.- Open: Click to search for a background image for the graph on your computer.- Transparent BG: Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent.- Transparent Border: Set whether or not to use a transparent border.- No. of Display Data: It fixes the number of dots to be displayed on a screen.X-Y Scatter indicates a dot as two device values.Y Scatter indicates each device value with a dot.- Frame Display: Specify the following options for the frame.Border Color Select a border color.Plate Color Select the background for areas not filled by value ranges.- Starting Point Location: Set a starting point for the scales (left bottom or right bottom).- Scale: Specify the following options for the scale.No. of Horizontal Point Set the number of points on the X axis.No. of Vertical Point Set the number of points on the Y axis.X-axis Height Set the height of the X axis scale.Y-axis Width Set the width of the Y axis scale.Scale Color Set the color of the scales.4. Reference4-386Note• The logging scatter graph is to mainly show how data are distributed and once dataare displayed on the screen, they will not be deleted. The logging type linked tologging scatter graph is set as circular buffer, the data displayed at the currentscreen will be removed someday with continuous logging process. In this case, thedots and lines corresponding to the deleted data will not be deleted.• The dots and lines distributed on the screen are initialized when the logging area isdeleted. That is, you can use the logging area deleting device to initialize the scatterscreen.• If you use multiple logging groups by connecting them, a short delay may occur indisplaying data of each group. Each logging group operates independently with itsown execution condition, monitoring device, and monitoring area. Therefore, a timedifference occurs between collected data when executing even if executionconditions of multiple logging groups are met at the same time. Also, a short timedelay occurs between displayed data by each group on the data distribution.• The logging function communicates with priority on the device connected to theprevious object when acquiring data. Therefore, lots of logging groups and shorteracquisition cycles highly affect the overall communication speed. It is recommendedto use the logging function when necessary. Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for logging scatter objects are shown in the belowscreenshot.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.4. Reference4-387Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions. Reference Line: The reference line settings for the logging trend graph object include the following.NoteIn the Max/Min setting window, if The Setting Type of Min/Max is set to [Individual],Reference Line menu option is not displayed.- Use Reference: Click the checkbox to use a reference line for the graph. A reference line refers to aline displaying the location of a specific value set by the user other than the maximum or minimumvalue.4. Reference4-388A reference line can be set as a fixed value or device value and it can be set only when themaximum and minimum values are set to [Block].Num of Reference Set the number of reference lines. When you enter thenumber of lines and move to the properties table of thereference lines, the corresponding number rows will becreated to allow you adjust the properties. 1 to 8 referencelines can be created.Reference Properties You can set the properties only when Use Reference ischecked. If the Value Type is set to Constant, you cannotenter a device. If the Value Type is set to Device, you cannotenter a fixed value. The number column is a reference linenumber. It cannot be edited and its location cannot bechanged. If the line type of a reference line is set to Dash,the thickness can only be set to 1.Scatter Graph - Realtime ScatterThe following sections describe available options for realtime scatter objects.When the Scatter Graph Type window appears, select Realtime Scatter and click OK.4. Reference4-389 Basic: The basic settings for the realtime scatter graph object include the following.- Type of Scatter: Set the type of scatter chart.Y Scatter Shows device addresses, including the logging start device, in orderalong the X-axis. The data displays in a loop, so you do not need todesignate the minimum or maximum value.X-Y Scatter For two continuous device addresses from starting device, shows theprevious device value along the X-axis and the next device valuealong the Y-axis and displays dot or value where the twocoordinates intersect. You must designate a minimum and maximumvalue for the axes.- Scatter Basic Setting: Specify the following options for the scatter.4. Reference4-390Setting ofDevice num.Set the number of devices to be monitored (1 to 1,000). You canspecify device numbers individually or designate a control device tospecify device addresses.The example below shows when you specify a device numberindividually.When you do not specify a device number, the device address, controldevice +1, is set as the device number.ControlDeviceIf the first bit of word control device is On, it displays the number ofcontinuous devices from a starting device at a graph. If the second bitis On, it removes the current graph area. Each control device data isinitialized into 0 after completing each operation. If a new item isadded, the blank control device window is created to next row andyou can add another item up to 8.Size Set the data size of the object.Type Set the data type of the object.Device Num. Set the device number.Offset Set whether to use the offset.- In case of not using offsetIn case of not using offsetAddress Description DisplayHW00000 Control Device -HW00001 Reserved -4. Reference4-391HW00002 Start Device Display- …(10) DisplayHW00011Device number of startdevice Display- In case of using offsetWhen using offset, the device (HW0002) is used as the offset device asshown below. If the value of HW00002 is5, 10 consecutively fromHW00007 separated by 5words from HW00002 are displayed.In case of using offsetAddress Description DisplayHW00000 Control Device -HW00001 Reserved -HW00002 Used as the offset value(if value is 5)Not display- …(Start from the offsetdistance)-HW00007 Start Device Display- RemarksIf the size is 32bit, it is calculated as much as DWORD.In case of not using offsetAddress Description DisplayHW00000 Control Device -HW00001~HW00002 Reserved -HW00003 Start Device Display4. Reference4-392- …(10) DisplayHW00022 Device number ofstart deviceDisplayDescription Enter a description for the object. Max./Min.: The maximum and minimum value settings for the realtime scatter graph object includethe following.- Max./Min. Setting: Specify the following options for the maximum/minimum setting.Y Axis Type / XAxis TypeYou can set the minimum and maximum value as many as theitems of logging distribution charts added at Basic Settings.Namely, you cannot add or delete the items on the minimum andmaximum value. The type of the minimum and maximum value canbe established as Constant or Device.Y Axis. Max / YAxis. MinYou can set the minimum and maximum values of data to bedisplayed on the Y-axis. You can use a device value or a constant. Ifthe device value exceeds the minimum or maximum, it is displayedas the minimum or maximum value of the graph.4. Reference4-393X Axis. Max / XAxis. MinYou can set the minimum and maximum values of data to bedisplayed on the X-axis. You can use a device value or a constant. Ifthe device value exceeds the minimum or maximum value, it isdisplayed as the minimum or maximum value of the graph. The Xaxis displays the device values in order, so you do not need todesignate a minimum or maximum value.NoteIf The Setting Type of Min/Max is set to [Individual], Reference Line menu option isnot displayed.4. Reference4-394 Line and Dot: The line and dot settings for the realtime scatter graph object include the following.- Setting of Line: Specify the following options for the line.Use Line Set to use a line to display the data.Line Color Set the color of the line.Line Type Set the type of the line (solid or dash).Use Dot Set to use dots for displaying the data.Dot Color Set the color of the dots.Dot Type Set the type of the dots. Alarm: The alarm settings for the realtime scatter graph object include the following.- Alarm Setting (Only Y Scatter Graph): Specify the following options for the alarm.Use Alarm Set whether using warning value or not. It is only available for the YScatter graph.4. Reference4-395Max Value /Min ValueIt establishes warning upper bound and warning lower bound forlogging trend graph. If the device value is more than warning upperbound, it is not shown as established line or dot color but displayedas upper bound line or dot color. On the other hand, if the devicevalue is less than lower bound, it is displayed as established lowerbound line or dot color.Max Line / MinLineYou can set the color of a line to be applied when it is more or lessthan the warning upper bound of logging distribution graph. If thedevice value exceeds warning upper bound, it is displayed as upperbourn line color. On the other hand, if it is less than warning upperbound, it is displayed as lower bound line color.Max. Dot /Min. DotYou can set the color of a dot to be applied when it is more or lessthan the warning upper bound of logging distribution graph. If thedevice value exceeds warning upper bound, it is displayed as upperbound dot color. On the other hand, if it is less than warning upperbound, it is displayed as lower bound dot color. Display: The display settings for the realtime scatter graph object include the following.- Library: Click to select a background image for the graph from a library.- Open: Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer.- Transparent BG: Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent.- Transparent Border: Set whether or not to use a transparent border.- No of Display data: It fixes the number of dots to be displayed at a screen. If Type of Scatter is setto X-Y Scatter in the Basic settings, the number of dots cannot be set and up to 500 dots can bedisplayed.X-Y Scatter indicates a dot as two device values.Y Scatter indicates respectively each device value with a dot.4. Reference4-396- Frame Display: Specify the following options for the frame.Border Color Set a border color.Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by valueranges.- Starting Point Location: Set a starting point for the scales (Left Bottom or Right Bottom).- Scale: Specify the following options for the scale.No. of Horizontal Point Set the number of points on the X axis.No. of Vertical Point Set the number of points on the Y axis.X-axis Height Set the height of the X axis scale.Y-axis Width Set the width of the Y axis scale.Scale Color Set the color of the scales. Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for realtime scatter objects are shown in the belowscreenshot.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.4. Reference4-397- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions. Reference Line: The reference line settings for the logging trend graph object include the following.NoteIn the Max/Min setting window, if The Setting Type of Min/Max is set to [Individual],Reference Line menu option is not displayed.- Use Reference: Click the checkbox to use a reference line for the graph. A reference line refers to aline displaying the location of a specific value set by the user other than the maximum or minimumvalue.A reference line can be set as a fixed value or device value and it can be set only when themaximum and minimum values are set to [Block].Num of Reference Set the number of reference lines. When you enter thenumber of lines and move to the properties table of thereference lines, the corresponding number rows will be 4. Reference4-398created to allow you adjust the properties. 1 to 8 referencelines can be created.Reference Properties You can set the properties only when Use Reference ischecked. If the Value Type is set to Constant, you cannotenter a device. If the Value Type is set to Device, you cannotenter a fixed value. The number column is a reference linenumber. It cannot be edited and its location cannot bechanged. If the line type of a reference line is set to Dash,the thickness can only be set to 1.4. Reference4-399History Alarm Viewer ObjectThis section describes available settings for history alarm viewer objects.Note• The XGT Panel collects and stores history alarm data regularly even when a history alarm viewerobject is not edited on the screen.• You can use a special switch to delete history alarm data. Unrestored data cannot be deleted.• When there is an insufficient number of history alarm viewer objects, use the History Alarm ViewerPage Down function of a special switch to move to the next page. You can also use the HistoryAlarm Viewer Page Up function to move to the previous page.• You can use the Print History Alarm function of a special switch to print history alarm data on thecurrent screen. Basic: The basic settings for history alarm viewer objects are shown below.- Alarm Form: Set the form at the alarm.No. of Row Set the number of rows to be displayed.Sort Set a sort method for the logging data (oldest first or newest first).- Use Detailed Window Position: Specify the location of the details window.- Frame Display: Specify options for the frame of the alarm viewer.Frame Color Select the frame color.4. Reference4-400Plate Color Select the background color for the table.- Line: Set the color and width of the line.Line Color Select the line color of the frame.Line Width Set the line width of the frame.- Description: Enter a description of the object. State: The state settings for history alarm viewer objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Initial Filtering Type: Check the checkboxes to select the types of filters to use for the alarm data:Restoration Set to show history data for restored alarms.No Restoration Set to show history data for unrestored alarms.Check Set to show history data for checked alarms.Uncheck Set to show history data for unchecked alarms.4. Reference4-401Initial Alarm Group Set to show history data for a specific alarm group. Afterchecking the checkbox, select an alarm group from thedrop-down list. If you select an alarm navigator group,history data for all alarms will be shown.- Change Color by States: Set the color of the rows based on the alarm state.Change Colors ofCheck StateSets whether background color / text color is changed in caseof checked status alarm among XGT Panel.Check Plate Color Select a background color for rows of checked alarms. If youdo not select a color, the default color set in the Frame Coloroption in Basic settings will be applied.Check Text Color Select a text color for rows of checked alarms. If you do notselect a color, the default color set in the Color option in Textsettings will be applied.Change Colors ofRestoration StateSets whether background color / text color is changed in caseof restored status alarm among XGT Panel.Restoration PlateColorSet a background color for rows of restored alarms. If you donot select a color, the default color set in the Plate Coloroption in Basic settings will be applied.Restoration TextColorSelect a text color for rows of restored alarms. If you do notselect a color, the default color set in the Color option in Text4. Reference4-402settings will be applied. Header: The header settings for history alarm viewer objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Header: Set whether or not to use a header.Plate Color Select the background color for the header. When you set not touse the background color, it will be displayed as transparent.Text Color Select the text color for the header.- Header Edit: Set additional header options.From Text Table inHeader EditSet to fetch header labels from a text table. When you setthis option, the Title row is shown as below. Double-clickthe title area to select the appropriate text string from atext table.4. Reference4-403No. of fixed ref. val. Set the number of reference value rows to show at onetime on the XGT Panel display. To see additional rows, usethe History Alarm Row Scroll function provided by aSpecial Switch. In the below example, the options are setas follows:This allows you to view two reference rows at one time onthe XGT Panel display:NoteTo view the next rows, you can use a special switch.Create the special switch in the editing area, and click[History Alarm Row Scroll] ▶ [Next row]. The rowsare moved to the next rows as shown below:If the reference rows are different sizes, some rowscan be cut off as below: 4. Reference4-404To view the total data in the row, use the specialswitch again. Create the special switch in the editingarea, and click [History Alarm Row Scroll] ▶ [Nextow].Fit to a max. headerlengthSet to fit the longest header length when you use the texttable to input header titles. If you do not set this option,the header length changes whenever the runtimelanguage is changed.For example, refer to Character String 343 highlighted inthe screenshot below for the heading Alarm History. If thelanguage is set to Korean, “날짜및시간” will be displayed. Ifthe language is set to English, “Date and Time” will bedisplayed. The size of the object is not fixed to allowvariable character string lengths to be used for differentlanguages.If “Fit to the max header length” is set, the width of acharacter string is always set to the longest heading (“Dateand Time” in this case) regardless of the language.Setting of Cell Size Set to adjust the size of each column. The size of referencecolumns can be set in the number of characters. The sizeof the other columns can be set in pixels. If you do not setthis option, you can set only the length of the Messageand Group columns. The rest of the columns differ byheader type and font. When you change the size of thehistory alarm viewer object, the Message and Groupcolumns are changed based on the value you set in CellSize. In the below example, the sizes of the Message andGroup columns are set as follows.4. Reference4-405In this case, the cell sizes of the Message and Groupcolumns are changed to “5” and “3”, respectively:Note• You can change the order of headers (Occurrence,Message, Group, Restoration, Check, and more).Drag and drop a header to the desired place.• You cannot reduce the row size below the size ofthe header text. The minimum row size is the sameas the header text length.• Rows cannot be reduced to the extent that the dataor header of the selected row cannot be displayed.That is, the minimum size is when the data andheader of all the selected rows can be displayed.• The address display string displays the devices set inthe Project pane - [History Alarm]-[Alarm Group]-[Alarm List].5 : 34. Reference4-406Reference Value ofFixed ColumnThe reference value for generated history alarms can beset in the Project pane - [History Alarm]-[Alarm Group]-[Alarm List]. Text: The text settings for history alarm viewer objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Color: Select a font color.- Font Style: Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right).4. Reference4-407 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for history viewer alarm objects are shown in the belowscreenshot.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-408Data List ObjectData list objects allow you to read consecutive values and display them in a table. This section describesavailable settings for data list object. Basic: The basic settings for data list objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Control Device: Specify the following options for the control device.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. When youclick the keypad icon to open the Device window, you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.Size Set the data size of the device (16 bit or 32 bit).Note• If the size and type of data are changed, the case settings will be deleted.• If communication with the PLC fails, the data values will not be displayed.• If the device number exceeds the maximum device range, the values on the data listmay differ from the actual values of the PLC.- Display Format: Set the display format.Numeric Format Set the number format (signed decimal, unsigned decimal,octal, hexadecimal, and binary, BCD, or float).No. of Display Digits Set how many digits to display (up to 64). If the number ofdigits is less than the capacity of the device, empty spacesare filled with placeholders (“*”). If the device value cannotbe displayed in the BCD format, it is expressed as “~”.4. Reference4-409No. of Decimal Digits Set how many places to put to the right of the decimal pointwhen you select formats other than binary, octal, andhexadecimal.Zero Fill If you have selected right justification, select this option toinsert zeros (0) before the number.- Description: Enter a description of the object. Display: The display settings for data list objects are shown in the below screenshot.- List Form: Specify the form at the list.No. of Row Set the number of rows.No. of Col. Set the number of columns.Space Specify the size of the area where the data will be shown (0 to32 for each axis)Direction Set the direction to display the data (top > bottom or left >right).- Frame Display: Set whether or not to use a frame.Frame Color Select the frame color.Plate Color Select the background color for the table.Line Color Select the line color for the frame.4. Reference4-410Line Width Set the line width for the frame.- Use Header: Set whether or not to use a header.Plate Color Select the background color for the header.Text Color Select the text color for the header.- Header Edit: Click column headers to select text strings from a text table. Text: The text settings for data list objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Color: Select a font color.- Font Style: Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right).4. Reference4-411 Case: The case settings for data list objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Case List: Create, delete, or reorganize conditional expressions:(Create) Click to create a new range condition. You can create up toeight conditions. Clicking this icon opens the Range Editwindow, which allows you to create a condition. For moreinformation, refer to <4.2.1.3 Understanding Constantsand Data Types>.(Delete) Click a condition and then click this icon to delete thecondition.(Up) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higherup the list.(Down) Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lowerdown the list.In the Range Edit window, you can adjust the settings for the plate color and text color.Plate Color Select the background color of a data list.Text Color Select the text color of data in a data list.4. Reference4-412 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for data list objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Action Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-413Logging Viewer ObjectThis section describes available settings for logging viewer objects. Main: The main settings for logging viewer objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Select Logging Group: Set the number of the logging group to monitor. A number of a logginggroup refers to the number that you set in [COMMON] ▶ [Logging Setting].- Description: Enter a description of the object. Display: The display settings for logging viewer objects are shown in the below screenshot.- List Form: Specify the form at the list.4. Reference4-414No. of Row Set the number of rows.No. of Col. Set the number of columns.Space Specify the size of the area where the data will be shown (0 to32 for each axis).Format Set the data format.Item DescriptionDate/Time Date and timeDate DateTime TimeDate Set the date format.Item DescriptionYYYY/MM/DD Year/Month/Date (4-digit year)YY/MM/DD Year/Month/Date (2-digit year)MM/DD/YYYY Month/Date/Year (4-digit year)MM/DD Month/DateMM/DD/YY Month/Date/Year (2-digit year)DD/MM/YYYY Date/Month/Year (4-digit year)DD/MM/YY Date/Month/Year (2-digit year)Time Set the time format.Item DescriptionHH:MM:SS Hour:Minute:SecondHH:MM Hour:MinuteSort Set the sorting method (oldest data first or most recent datafirst).- Frame Display: Set whether or not to use a frame.Frame Color Select the frame color.Plate Color Select the background color for the table.Line Color Select the line color for the frame.Line Width Set the line width for the frame.Note• Only one logging viewer object can be set in one screen.• When “#” or “*” is displayed in a logging viewer object, refer to [COMMON] ▶[Logging Setting].4. Reference4-415 Header: The header settings for logging viewer objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Use Header: This option enables or disables the heading in Logging view. If the heading isdisabled, it cannot be entered and is not displayed on the XGT Panel.Plate Color Select the background color for the header.Text Color Select the text color for the header.Bold Set the text in the header to appear in boldface.Italic Set the text in the header to appear in italics.Strikeout Adds a line through the middle of the selected text.Underline Adds a line under the selected text.- Common Display Format: Set this option to apply the settings to all index data. To change thedata, use the Header Edit option.Data Format Set the display type.Digits Set how many digits to display (up to 64). If the number of digitsis less than the capacity of the device, empty spaces are filledwith placeholders (“*”). If the device value cannot be displayed inBCD format, it is expressed as “~”.Zero Fill If you have selected right justification, select this option to insertzeros (0) before the number.No. of DecimalDigitsSet how many places to put to the right of the decimal pointwhen you select formats other than binary, octal, and 4. Reference4-416hexadecimal.- Header Edit: Click column headers to select text strings from a text table.From TextTable inHeader EditSet to fetch header labels from a text table. Click a column header to select theappropriate text string from a text table.Multilingual If the output format is set to text, show in chosen language.[Setting ofCell Size] and[SettingDevice Sizeper Col.]You can display the logged values in different device sizes by column. For example,after defining 15 values from M0 (as shown below), you can set the “Load” and“Estimated shipment” columns to have an 8 byte (32 bits) format; the “Inlettemperature” column to have a 4 byte (16 bits) format; and the “Ship name” columnto have a 20 byte text string format.Forexample, If every logging column has a different device size(16 bit, 32 bit, repeatedtext) used together4. Reference4-417Number Date Value1(Device :M0, M1)Value2(Device :M2, M3)Value3(Device:M4)Value4(Device :M5–M15)1 19/08/201820:100x314388910x135677010x1356 BALASHIP19the settings to display a table as above are shown in the screenshot below.Thefollowing features not supported by XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, and XP40-TTE, XP50-TTE.Fit to a max.header lengthSet to fit the longest header length when you use the text table to input headertitles. If you do not set this option, the header length changes whenever the runtimelanguage is changed. For example, in the character string highlighted in thescreenshot below, string no. 2 is specified as the heading in logging view. If theediting language is set to [English], it displays “Ballast”. If the editing language is setto [Korean], it displays “밸러스트탑재”. The object size is adjusted automaticallybased on the string length.[If the Fit to a max. heading length option is set, the object sizes change regardlessof the editing language.]4. Reference4-418[If the Fit to a max. heading length option is not set, the object size does not changeregardless of the editing language.]Switched to Koreanlanguage (variablesize)Width: 240Width: 332Width: 3324. Reference4-419- Logging index: Shows the index number of the device. The index numbers of logging devicesstarts at “1” and increases by one as the device address increases.As you can see in the example below, when 32 devices from P0100 are edited to be logged, theindex numbers of the four devices - P0001, P0005, P0010, and P0018 - from the 32 devices are asfollows.Switched to Koreanlanguage (fixed size)Width: 332Width: 3324. Reference4-420Device address Logging indexP0001 (logging device) 1P0002 2… …P0005 5… …P0010 10… …P0018 18NoteIf the target device of a logging group is not 32-bit, an error occurs while checking thedata when the data type of a logging viewer object is set to “Float”.4. Reference4-421 Text: The text settings for logging viewer objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Color: Select a font color.- Font Style: Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right). Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for the logging viewer objects are shown in the belowscreenshot.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.4. Reference4-422Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specifiedrange.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-423Alarm Navigator ObjectThe alarm navigator object allows you to conveniently view the alarm history. This section describesavailable settings for alarm navigator objects.NoteAlarm group names displayed in an alarm navigator object are the group names that have been setwhen creating history alarms. Therefore, the text color and properties are shared from those of the texttable that has been set as the group number. Basic: The basic settings for alarm navigator objects are shown in the below screenshot.- Frame Display: Set whether or not to use a frame.Frame Color Select the frame color.Plate Color Select the background color for the table.No. of Col. Set the number of columns to show.- Line: Set the line properties.- Font: Set the font size.- Description: Enter a description of the object.4. Reference4-424 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for recipe navigator objects are shown in the screenshotbelow.- Use Action Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within thespecified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result ofmultiple devices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-425ExplorerThis object displays a list of the file recipes saved in the storage device (USB, CF Card) or the basic recipesedited in XP-Builder. You can write the recipe data shown in the recipe navigator object directly to thecontroller. This section describes available settings for Recipe Explorer. For more details about recipes,refer to <4.1.4 Recipes>. Basic: The basic settings for recipe navigator objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Type: Set the type of recipe to display.File Recipe Set to show the XPRXXXXX.csv list in the folder “XP_Recipe” on a storagedevice, such as a USB drive, CF card, or SD card.Basic Recipe Set to show the basic recipe list.Internal Device Specify the internal device that is used for transferring edited basicrecipes from NVRAM. You should move the basic recipes from NVRAMto the internal device to edit them. For example, if the basic recipe is setin XP-Builder, the value should be moved to the internal device totransfer the device value from the D400 to the PLC or from the PLC tothe D400.4. Reference4-426File Explorer File Explorer displays all the files and the folder lists except for thehidden files and folders that are saved in the storage devices (USB drive,CF Card and SD Card).- Frame Display: Set whether or not to use a frame.Frame Color Select the frame color.4. Reference4-427Plate Color Select the background color for the table.No. of Col. Set the number of columns to show.- Line: Set the line properties.- Manager Display Format: Set the data format for the recipe navigator object.File Name Set to show the recipe file name. The file recipe displays the name of theCSV file saved in the storage device. The basic recipe displays the datagenerated in XP-Builder in numerical order. For example, ,, and so on.File Des. Set to show the recipe description. The description of the file recipe isthe title of the CSV file or the name of the basic recipe in XP-Builder.- Description: Enter a description of the object.- File Explorer Setting.Root Plate Specify the background color of the section displaying the parentpath in File Explorer. Users can navigate between folders or moveto the previous directory through the parent path.Parent Path DisplaySection4. Reference4-428Root Text Specify the color of the text in the section displaying the parentpath in File Explorer.Use Status Bar This option sets whether the status bar will be used. The status barshows the current status of File Explorer. The current action will bedisplayed as shown in the screenshot below.Plate Color Specify the background color of the section displaying the statusbar in File Explorer.Text Color Specify the text color in the section displaying the status bar in FileExplorer.Note• If multiple items are selected in File Explorer, the first of the selected items isoperated. For example, if My Documents is selected and then Program Files is also selected and the Copy button is clicked, the files in MyDocuments are copied.• File Explorer cannot be used with some models. The following models do notprovide File Explorer:XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, XP50-TTE• Folders and files are displayed in a file recipe as follows.DirectoryTo move to the directory, select therow and select Show the SelectedRecipe under General RecipeExplorer and Transfer from a specialswitch.File NameTo view the file, select the row andselect Show the Selected Recipeunder General Recipe Explorer andTransfer from a special switch.Status Bar4. Reference4-429 Text: The text settings for recipe navigator objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Color: Select a font color.- Font Style: Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.4. Reference4-430 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for recipe navigator objects are shown in the screenshotbelow.- Use Action Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within thespecified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result ofmultiple devices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-431Data List Editor ObjectThe data list editor object interprets PLC device values continuously and displays them in a table forediting. This section describes available settings for the data list editor object. Basic: The basic settings for the data list editor objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Control Device: Specify a device to monitor values.Device Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click thekeypad icon to the right to specify a device or tag address. Whenyou click the keypad icon to open the Device window you can alsospecify network settings, if necessary.Size Set the data size for the device (16 bit or 32 bit).No. of EditDeviceSet the number of devices to be shown (up to 255). Clicking adesired cell in a data list editor will open the keypad. Press theEnter key to move the focus of the keypad to the next cellautomatically to allow you to edit the value of the next cell. Pressthe ESC key on the keypad to stop editing.- Display Format: Set the display format.Numeric Format Set the number format (signed decimal, unsigned decimal, octal,hexadecimal, and binary, BCD, or float).No. of DisplayDigitsSet how many digits to display (up to 64). If the number of digits isless than the capacity of the device, empty spaces are filled withplaceholders (“*”). If the device value cannot be displayed in BCDformat, it is expressed as “~”.No. of DecimalDigitsSet how many places to put to the right of the decimal point whenyou select number formats other than binary, octal, andhexadecimal.4. Reference4-432Zero Fill If you have selected right justification, select this option to insertzeros (0) before the number.- Description: Enter a description of the object. Display: The display settings for the data list editor objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Recipe Form: Set the display options for recipe data.No. of Row Set the number of rows to display.No. of Col. Set the number of columns to display.Direction Set the display direction (top > bottom or left > right).- Frame Display: Set the display options for the frame.Use Set whether or not to use a frame.Frame Color Select the frame color.Plate Color Select the background color.Line Color Select the line color.Line Width Set the line width.- Index Form: Set the header format for the data list.Plate Color Select the background color.Text Color Select the text color.4. Reference4-433 Keypad Option: The keypad option settings for the data list editor objects are shown in thescreenshot below.- Use Keypad: Set whether or not to use a keypad.Use Keypad set inInput ObjectSet whether or not to use a keypad specified in anobject. Enter the key window number or click[Browse] to locate the window.Use User KeypadPositionSet whether or not to specify the location of thekeypad on the screen.- Use Interlock: Set to prevent input when the interlock device meets the specified condition. Theinput cursor will skip the locked unit and move automatically to the next unit in the sequence.Not allowed on ON When the device is on, input is not allowed.Not allowed on OFF When the device is off, input is not allowed.- Use Log: Set to allow the device to be monitored in an operation log.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, XP50-TTE is not supported.4. Reference4-434 Text: The text settings for the data list editor objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Color: Select a font color.- Font Style: Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right). Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for the data list editor objects are shown in thescreenshot below.- Use Action Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the 4. Reference4-435specified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result ofmultiple devices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-436File Recipe Editor ObjectThe file recipe editor object allows you to view and edit recipes. This section describes available settingsfor the file recipe editor object. Display: The display settings for the file recipe editor objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Recipe Form: Set the display options for the recipe data.No. of Row Set the number of rows to display.No. of Col. Set the number of columns to display.Direction Set the display direction (top > bottom or left > right).- Frame Display: Set the display options for the frame.Use Set whether or not to use a frame.Frame Color Select the frame color.Plate Color Select the background color.Line Color Select the line color.Line Width Set the line width.- Index Form: Set the header format for the data list.Plate Color Select the background color.Text Color Select the text color.- Description: Enter a description of the object.4. Reference4-437 Keypad Option: The keypad option settings for the file recipe editor objects are shown in thescreenshot below.- Use Keypad: Set whether or not to use a keypad.Use Keypad set in InputObjectSet whether or not to use a keypad specified in an object.Enter the key window number or click [Browse] to locatethe window.Use User KeypadPositionSet whether or not to specify the location of the keypad onthe screen.- Use Interlock: Set to prevent input when the interlock device meets the specified condition. Theinput cursor will skip the locked unit and move automatically to the next unit in the sequence.Not allowed on ON When the device is on, input is not allowed.Not allowed on OFF When the device is off, input is not allowed.- Use Log: Set to allow the device to be monitored in an operation log.XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE, XP40-TTE, XP50-TTE is not supported.4. Reference4-438 Text: The text settings for the file recipe editor objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Color: Select a font color.- Font Style: Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time.- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right). Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for the file recipe editor objects are shown in thescreenshot below.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the 4. Reference4-439specified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result ofmultiple devices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range. Constants are based on device size.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-440Clock ObjectThis section describes available settings for the clock object. Basic: The basic settings for the clock objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Format: Set the data format.Item DescriptionDate/Time Date and timeDate DateTime Time- Date: Set the date format.Item DescriptionYYYY/MM/DD Year/Month Number/Date (4-digit year)YY/MM/DD Year/Month Number/Date (2-digit year)MM/DD/YYYY Month Number/Date/Year (4-digit year)MM/DD Month Number /DateMM/DD/YY Month Number /Date/Year (2-digit year)DD/MM/YYYY Date/Month Number /Year (4-digit year)DD/MM/YY Date/Month Number /Year (2-digit year)DD/MMM/YYYY Date/Month Name/Year (4-digit year)DD/MMM/YY Date/Month Name/Year (2-digit year)4. Reference4-441- Time: Set the time format.Item DescriptionHH:MM:SS Hour:Minute:SecondHH:MM Hour:Minute- Display Day: Set whether or not to show the day of the week.- Zero Fill: If the date or time includes a single digit number, select this option to insert a zerobefore the number. For example,23/3/2010 15:15:3 ▶ 23/03/2010 15:15:03- Preview: Shows a preview of the data format.- Clock Type: Set a clock type.System Clock Set to show the system time in the clock.Logging TrendClockSet to show logging data in the clock. Set a logging trend option(most recent time, oldest time, or cursor time). If a logging trendobject does not exist in a screen, “-“ will be displayed in the timeformat because the time cannot be displayed.- Description: Enter a description of the object. Display: The display settings for the clock objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Library: Click to select an image from an image library.- Open: Click to browse images on your computer. When you select an image from your computer, itwill be added to the image library automatically.- Transparent BG Image: Set whether or not to make the background transparent.- Frame Color: Select a frame color (only available with vector images).- Plate Color: Select a background color from the image.4. Reference4-442 Text: The text settings for the clock objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.- Size: Select a text size from the drop-down list or enter a value directly into the field.- Width Ratio: Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop-down list or enteringa value directly in to the field. You can set a ratio of 1%-600%.- Color: Select a font color.- Font Style: Select a font style (bold, italic, strikeout, or underline). You can apply more than oneoption at a time. Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for the clock objects are shown in the screenshot below.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified 4. Reference4-443range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multipledevices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range. Constants are based on the device size.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-444Embedded Screen ObjectYou can use the embedded screen object to open other screens on the Base screen. You can insert afrequently-used page without additional editing through this object. This section describes availablesettings for embedded screen object.To embed a screen into the Base screen, in the Project pane, drag and drop a window (Base screen,window, or Part screen) onto the editing area.The window will be embedded as follows: Basic: Basic settings for the embedded screen object include the following.- Screen Type: Set the type of screen to be opened.- Go to screen: Set whether or not to open an existing screen.4. Reference4-445- Screen Number: Set the screen number to open.Inserting a screen to use an object as the background of another screen, follow the steps below. Forexample, to insert the "B2" screen as the background on the "B1" screen, open the B1 screen andinsert Select the screen (B2) and right-click it.Settings' menu. As a result, the screen of B2 is displayed in the form of an insert object,It will be created and inserted in the future. At this time, the screen insertion object has a selectionlock. It will be in the state and cannot be selected. To unlock the selection, press the "UnlockSelected" menu it’s possibleInserting a Screen To use an object as a background on all other main screens, do the following: Forexample, to insert "B2" screen as background in all basic screens, select the screen (B2) to insert andthen right-click and select "Set as background screen of all basic screens". As a result, the screen of B2is inserted in the form of an inserted object on all the basic screens except B2, and is created at thetop of the screen. At this time, the selection objects can not be selected because the selection lock isapplied. To unlock the selection, press the "Unlock" menu.Note• When you insert a Base screen into another Base screen: 4. Reference4-446- Background settings will not be applied.- Set scripts cannot be used.- The inserted Base screen cannot be imported from another Base screen to itself.- The same number Base screen cannot be inserted.• You can also insert the Base screen into another Base screen by dragging it.• When you try to insert a Base screen that is already embedded in another Base screen, theembedded screen is not inserted. Only the Base screen itself is inserted.• If you click the insert screen move icon in the Data Viewer window, you can move to thecorresponding insert screen without needing to release the lock status.4. Reference4-447Memo Pad ObjectThis section describes available settings for the memo pad object. Basic: The basic settings for the memo pad object include the following.- Storage Confirm: Set whether or not to use a device to view current memo status. Enter the deviceaddress in the field or click the icon to the right of the field to specify a device address. The firstthree bits of the device address specify the function of the memo pad.Device Bit Description00 Indicates the status of the object (on in active mode; off in nonactive mode).01 Shows whether or not the memo was saved successfully. The Savingfunction of a special switch saves a memo currently on the XGTPanel.02 Shows whether or not the memo was deleted successfully. TheDeleting function of a special switch deletes a memo currently onthe XGT Panel.- Pen: Set the pen options.Pen Width Set the pen width (1 to 30).Pen Color Set the pen color.- Display: Set the display options.Plate Color Set the background color of the memo pad.Use Border Set whether or not to use a border.Border Color Set the border color.Border Width Set the border width.- Description: Enter a description for the object.4. Reference4-448 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for the memo pad object include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within thespecified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result ofmultiple devices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range. Constants are based on device size.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.4. Reference4-449PDF Viewer ObjectThis section describes available settings for the PDF viewer object.You can either use File Explorer to search for a PDF file and open it in the PDF viewer object on thescreen, or configure a special switch for PDF viewing. Refer to the PDF viewer section in <4.3.2.4 SpecialSwitch> for detailed information. Basic: The basic settings for the PDF viewer object include the following.- Device of page No.: Set a device to assign the page number of a PDF file that is currently open.- Open File: Set whether to open a PDF file using a file path, or a device.- Description: Enter a description for the object.Note• You can place only one PDF viewer on a screen.• PDF viewer function is not supported in the simulator.• The PDF document is displayed to fit the width of the object. You can scroll down tosee the rest of the document outside the viewing area.4. Reference4-450VNC Viewer ObjectThis section describes available settings for the VNC viewer object.You can remotely monitor the hot computer’s screen using the VNC viewer. Refer to the VNC viewersection in <4.3.2.4 Special Switch> for detailed information. VNC Viewer: The basic settings for the VNC viewer object include the following.- Remote: Enter the host name of the remotely connected HMI device for monitoring.- Port: Enter the TCP/IP port number to use for the monitoring.- Use password: Click the checkbox to set a password for the monitoring operation.- Option: Set the following options.- Use Popup Window: Select this option to display the remote screen in a popup window.- Disable Touch Inputs: Select to disable touch inputs for the remote screen.- Description: Enter a description for the object.4. Reference4-451 Display Trigger: The display trigger settings for the VNC viewer object include the following.- Use Condition: Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action.- Type: Set a type of condition to specify.Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on.Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off.Range The action is performed when the value falls within thespecified range.Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result ofmultiple devices is met.- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input field or click the keypad icon to theright to specify a device or tag address. When you click the keypad icon to open the Devicewindow, you can also specify network settings, if necessary.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range. Constants are based on device size.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or float.Exp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.Note• You can place only one VNC viewer on a screen.• PDF viewer function is not supported in the simulator.4. Reference4-452Multimedia objectThis section describes multimedia objects. You can play the video file using multimedia objects. For moreinformation, please refer to <4.3.2.4 Special Switch>. Multimedia: This is the Basic setting of multimedia objects.- Video folder: Enter the folder name where the video file is located.- Repeat: Set the video file to repeat playback.- Status Device: Enter the device value to read the current status value of the multimedia object.Status Device Value Description0 Normal1 No external Storage2 File Open Error4 Movie File Play Error8 Movie Play Finished3, 5, 6, 7, 9~16 Reserved- Description: Enter the description of the object.Multimedia objects have the below restrictions.Item DescriptionVideo File Supports MP4, AVI, and WMW files.HDMI ExtendedScreen (iXP2 only)Not support video play on HDMI extended screen.Play Speed High-quality, high-capacity videos can take a long time toload or may break when playing. For iXP2 model, the 1024 x768 resolution is recommended.4. Reference4-453Number ofmultimedia objectOnly 1 multimedia object can be created in each screen andwindow.Video Play Video play is only possible in one place. The currentlyplaying video will stop when playing a video through amultimedia object on a popup window while playing a videoon the main screen.Note• If the video cannot be played, take the following measures..-iXP2Play after encoding video file set as below through video encoding program.• iXP2-08XXA modelResolution: 800 x 600, Codec: H264• Other iXP2 modelsResolution: 1024 x 768, Codec: H264-wXP• Please install the external video integrated codec on the PC where wXP is installed.4. Reference4-454FTP ClientThe FTP client is an object that connects to an FTP server, displays a list of files and directories on the FTPserver, and downloads selected files. PDF files on an FTP server can be displayed using a PDF viewerobject. FTP client object is available only for iXP2 and iXP models. Basic: FTP client basic setting.- FTP Server: Enter the IP address of the FTP server to connect to. The FTP server address can beused by entering a fixed value or by using a device.- Port number: Enter the FTP server port to connect to. The default port number is 21. The portnumber can be changed by entering a fixed value or using a device.- User ID: Enter the User ID of the FTP server to connect to. If anonymous mode connection is used,the ID is set to anonymous. The ID can be changed by entering a fixed value or by using a device.- Password: Enter the password of the FTP server account to access. The password can be changedby entering a fixed value or by using the device.- FTP server anonymous mode connection: Connect to the FTP server using the Anonymousaccount. The ID is disabled so that it cannot be changed.- Use Passive Mode: When set, accesses in passive mode.- FTP server charset settings: Set the character set of the FTP server. The default value is UTF-8.4. Reference4-455Note• If the set character set is different from the character set on the server, it may happen that theKorean display is not normally performed.• When connecting to an FTP server running on iXP2, the file and folder names may not be displayedin Korean.- Status Device: Set the device that records the value to display the operation status of the FTPclient .0 Default value1 IP address is incorrect.2 FTP server connection success3 FTP server connection failure4 File download success5 File download failure.6 FTP server connection termination.- Description: Enter the description of the object. Display: This is the screen for setting the FTP client display. This is the same as the file explorer'sframe shape, line, and file explorer settings.- Use Frame: Select whether to use the frame.4. Reference4-456Frame Color Set frame colorPlate Color Set plate color of FTP client.Col.number Set the number of rows to be displayed on the screen.- Line: Set the line color and width.BG Colorof RootSpecifies the background color of the area that displays theparent path on FTP clients. You can go to the previous folderor previous directory through the parent path.Text Colorof RootSpecifies the text color of the area that parent path in the FTPclient.Use StatusBarEnable or disable the status bar.The status bar displays the current FTP client’s operationalconnection status and the server address to which it isconnected.BG Color Specifies the background color of the area where the FTPclient displays the status bar.4. Reference4-457Text Specifies the text color of the area that displays the status baron the FTP client.Note• If multiple cells are selected in the FTP client, the cell selected first operates. For example, if youselect A.PDF, B.PDF in order, and then press the Execute special switch, the selected A.PDF file isdisplayed in the PDF viewer first. Text: Set the text for FTP Client. It is the same as the character setting function of File Explorer.- Font: Select the font.- Size: Select the font size.- Color: Set the text color- Font style: Set the text style. Bold, italic, strikeout, underline). 2 or more can be selected.4. Reference4-458 Display trigger: Sets the display trigger for the FTP Client. This is the same as the display triggersetting function of File Explorer.- Use Condition: Select whether to use the display trigger.- Type: Set the type of the condition.Bit On Displayed when the device is onBit Off Displayed when the device is offRange Displayed when the value is included in the set areaMulti Bit It operates when the result of multiple devices satisfies thelogical command.- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or use the keypad buttons.Network settings are also possible when you press the keypad button to open the device window.- Range: If you select the range condition, specify the range.Size 16 bit or 32 bit.Type Signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD, or FloatExp. Click to designate the expression as conditional.- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, specify the number of bits and click [Setting] tospecify the bit conditions.-Note• If connection to the FTP server fails, check the following.- Check if the FTP server IP address is correctly entered and connected to the network by ping test.- Check if the entered ID and password are correct- When connecting with an anonymous account, you must enter a password according to the FTPserver settings. Please enter your email address in the password.4. Reference4-459• If Korean file and directory names are not displayed, check the following.- The character set must be set to match that of the FTP server.- If you cannot check the character set of the FTP server, change the UTF-8 and CP949 andreconnect.4. Reference4-4604.4 Viewing or Changing XGT Panel InformationTo view or change XGT Panel information:1 In XP-Builder, click [COMMUNICATION] ▶ [XGT Panel Information].2 Click a tab to view or change the following information: General: The General tab allows you to view properties for the XGT Panel.- XGT Panel: The XGT Panel model number.- State: The operational state of the XGT Panel.- Version: The XGT Panel version.- File version: The file version.- Flash memory: Used and available flash memory.- CF Card: Used and available memory on an installed CF card.- USB Memory: Used and available memory on an installed USB device.- SD Card: Used and available memory on an installed SD card (For iXP/IPC series only).- Project Compare with XGT Panel: Check if the modified download is enabled. The checkcompares the project’s ID in the HMI with the current project ID. If the project IDs differ, a fulldownload is required. Even if the two projects are the same, they may be considered asdifferent projects. Errors occur if a project is deleted from the HMI because of communicationerrors or if the project ID is changed when the project is sent to another HMI device for 4. Reference4-461completion of the project. The following screenshots show messages for projects that are thesame and different. Settings: The Settings tab allows you to specify the following settings:- Touch Buzzer Sound: Set whether or not to use audible feedback when a user touches theXGT Panel screen. This feature is not supported by the IPC series.- Keep-Alive Time: Set how long the server will keep the communication port open if there isno response from the XGT Panel.- Alias Name: Specify an alias to use when scanning for or connecting to the XGT Panel.4. Reference4-462 Clock: The Clock tab allows you to specify the following settings:- Date: Specify the date. Click [Set] to apply your settings to the XGT Panel.- Time: Specify the time. Click [Set] to apply your settings to the XGT Panel.- Synchronise with PC Time: Click to apply the computer’s time to the XGT Panel. Password: The Password tab allows you to specify or delete the password that is required whentransferring a project to the XGT Panel.- Previous Password: Enter the current password and click [Delete] to delete it.- New Password: Enter a new password and click [Set].- Confirm Password: Re-enter the new password and click [Set].4. Reference4-4634.5 Using the HTML Device CopierYou can use the HTML Device Copier to copy and paste the device values onto a web page to monitorthe devices on the web.To copy and paste the devices:1 Create a project.2 Click [TOOL] ▶ [HTML Device Copier].3 Specify the action type and size, and enter the device address.4 Click [Copy] to copy the device value.5 Paste it on an HTML editor to use it on a web page.4. Reference4-464NoteHTML functions related to the device monitoring• GetXPData [Parameter 1] [Parameter 2] [Parameter 3][Parameter 1] device value read in text string[Parameter 2] 4 byte device address in hexadecimal numbers[Parameter 3] return data type (1–7)*• SetXPData [Parameter 1] [Parameter 2] [Parameter 3][Parameter 1] device value to be written[Parameter 2] 4 byte device address in hexadecimal numbers[Parameter 3] return data type (1–7)** Return data types are: 1. Signed decimal, 2. Unsigned decimal, 3. Octonary,4. Hexadecimal, 5. Binary, 6. BCD, 7.Real number4. Reference4-4654.6 Using the CSV ConverterYou can use the CSV converter to convert an encrypted CSV (CSVE) file into regular CSV file.To convert a CSVE file to CSV format:1 Click [TOOL] ▶ [CSV Converter].2 Click [Add CSVE Files], and then select the CSVE files in the file browser window.3 Click […] on the right side of the Output folder field, and select the destination folder for theconverted CSV files.4 Click [Convert] to start conversion.4. Reference4-4664.7 Managing External Storage Sources for BackupThis section describes how to control external storage sources when making file backups, such as logging,recipe, and screen image data. You can manage the backup data in this way: You can back up data, such as logging, recipe, and screen image data by saving them to a CF card, SDcard, or a USB storage source, according to the settings contained in XP-Builder. If there is insufficient memory in the external storage source, the data will be deleted and the backupprocess will stop. Settings that control this situation are adjusted in XP-Builder. You can monitor if the external backup storage source has been recognized or not. When you are backing up data make sure that external storage sources are only removed when thesafe removal switch is turned on and after the LED lamp turns off. Failure to observe these precautionsmay result in backup failure.Managing the File Path for Backup FilesThe file path shown below describes how backup files are routed:LoggingYYYY.MM.BeginDay.EndDay.0DD.BeginHour.EndHour.0 (Filled storage limit per folder)HH.BeginMinute.FFLhhmmss0.CSVRecipeRhhmmss0.CSV (each logging number has the same substructure)DD.BeginHour.EndHour.1 (Filled storage limit per folder, and share the same start andend time.)DD.BeginHour. FF (Storage limit not reached)1 (Logging number)2 (Sub directory_ same as 1)Screen ImageShhmmss0.BMP (each logging number has the same sub structure)The root directory of CF or USB storage4. Reference4-467File Path for Logging Backup The ‘Logging’ subdirectory will be created under the root directory of the USB/CF/SD storage source. Under the ‘Logging’ directory, a subdirectory will be created with a filename generated by the loggingnumber. Under the logging number directory, a subdirectory will be created with a filename by Year/Month.- The date directory will be included as a subdirectory.- Up to 500 date directories can be created.- The ‘Year/Month’ directory will not only contain year and month information, but will also recordthe date the directory was created.As an example, the name of a directory created in October 2010 with subdirectories created since15 October would be: 2010.10.15.FF. The FF at the end of the directory name represents that thereis more data space to store for October, 2010. (This means that the subdirectory currently holdsless than 500 date directories).- When there is a change of Month, the directory name will be changed and saved to the last date inthe month when information was logged.As an example, if the directory contains date directories created between October 15 and October30, and was created in October 2010, the directory name would be 2010.10.15.30.0 when themonth changes to November 2010.- If a month directory is carrying more than 500 date subdirectories before the month ends, thedirectory name will change to the last date in the sub directory.For example, if the number of date sub directories created from 1 October to 15 October 2010 isgreater than 500 the file name will be: 2010.10.01.15.0.- If the month ends or the total number of sub directories exceeds 500, or the directory has the samestarting/ending date name, then the last index number is added to identify the directories.As an example, if the directory created in October 2010 has 3 directories each holding 500 subdirectories, then the directory names would be:: 2010.10.01.01.0: 2010.10.01.01.1: 2010.10.01.01.2 Under the Year-/Month directory, a subdirectory with a date name will be created.- The date directory contains an hour subdirectory.- The date directory can hold up to 500 hour subdirectories.- The filenames of date directories contain date and hour information, for the first subdirectory thatwas created.- The rest of the directory creation procedure is identical to the Year/Month directory creationprocedure. Under the Date directory, a directory will be created that will store time information created.- The Hour directory will contain backup files.- Each Hour directory can hold up to 500 backup files.- The Hour directory contains hour and minute information for the first file that was created.- The rest of the directory creation procedure is identical to the Year/Month directory creationprocedure.4. Reference4-468 Logging backup files have hour, minute, and second information as their file names.- Backup files will be created in CSV format.- The names of the files will begin with ‘L’, representing 'logging', and the rest of the name willcontain hour, minute, and second index information.- If the backup files are created simultaneously in the same second, additional index information willbe added at the end of the file name.Path for Recipe Backup A directory named ‘Recipe’ will be created under the USB/CF/SD storage root directory. A subdirectory will be created with filenames identified by Year/Month. The rest of the directory structure is the same as the logging backup file structure. Recipe backup files have hour, minute, and second information as their file name.- Backup files will be created in CSV format.- The filenames will begin with ‘R’, representing 'recipe', and the rest of the name will contain hour,minute, and second index information.- If backup files are created simultaneously in the same second, additional index information will beadded at the end of file name.Path for Screen Backup A directory named ‘Screen Image’ will be created in the USB/CF/SD storage directory. A subdirectory named by Year/Month will be created in the Screen Image directory. The rest of the directory structure is the same as the logging backup file structure. Screen Image backup files use hour, minute, and second information as their file names.- The backup files will be created in bitmap format.- The filenames will begin with ‘S’ , representing 'Screen Image', and the rest of the name will containhour, minute, and second index information.- If backup files are created simultaneously in the same second, additional index information will beadded at the end of filename.4. Reference4-469Path for Memo Backup A directory named ‘Memo’ will be created in the USB/CF/SD storage directory. A subdirectory named by Year/Month will be created in the Memo directory. The rest of the directory structure is the same as the logging backup file structure. Memo back up files use hour, minute, and second information as their file name.- The backup files will be created in bitmap format.- The filenames will begin with ‘M’, representing 'Memo', and the rest of the name will contain hour,minute, and second index information.- If backup files are created simultaneously in the same second, additional index information will beadded at the end of the filename.Note• If time is set ahead of present time, normal operation is guaranteed. However, if time is set behindpresent time, normal operation is not guaranteed. If this situation arises, hour unit directories andall subdirectories should be deleted to resume normal operation. For example, if the date settinghad been changed from 10th December to 5th December, Year/Month directories including 5thDecember will have to be deleted to enable normal operation to resume.• Logging, Recipe, Screen Image, and Memo functions do not support project classification. Forinstance, if Project A has logging groups numbered 1,2 and 3, and each logging group creates a filebackup, 1,2,3 directory will be created and each file will be saved in a subdirectory. Then, if Project Bhas logging groups numbered 1 and 2, downloads the projects and creates file backups, these filescan be mixed with Project A’s backed up files. In this situation, the operator should classify ProjectA’s and Project B’s backup files by their download time.4. Reference4-470Managing Memory for BackupsIf there is insufficient memory in the external storage sources, data is deleted or backup processes stopdepending on XP-Builder’s configuration.Using XP-Builder to delete the oldest data for backup, click [Common] ▶ [Project Property Setting] ▶[Storage Settings], set the Backup Storage location for each file, and then click the checkbox next toDelete old file if disk full.When you back up the file by erasing the oldest files: If there is insufficient backup space, look for the earliest Year/Month subdirectories in Logging, Recipe,and Screen Image directories. When looking at Logging, look for subdirectories under the currentback up logging number. For example, if Logging number 2 is on the current back up list but does nothave data in the file’s directory, data in logging number 1 directory will remain untouched. Look for the earliest date directory in the earliest Year/Month directory. Look for the earliest hour directory in the earliest date directory. Delete the earliest backed up files from the earliest hour directory. If more data space is needed, repeat the above steps and check available data space. When deleting files, if the whole hour directory has been cleared, remove the hour directory. When deleting hour directories, if a whole date directory has been cleared, remove the date directory. When deleting date directories, if a whole month directory has been cleared, remove the monthdirectory.Note• If an unreadable directory or file (operator file or directory) is found, leave the directory or file andlocate normal backup files.• If the current directory contains only operator data, it will cause a backup failure. The XGT Panelcannot delete operator data, therefore it will stop any further action.4. Reference4-471When there is Insufficient Memory or Exceeds the Limit Storage properties are configured in XP-Builder, project properties. By checking Delete old file if diskfull, the earliest video files will be automatically located and deleted. If Delete old file if disk full isunchecked, then XP-Builder will stop and prompt the user with an error message. When the total number of files reaches 1000, delete the earliest created file from the earliest createddirectory. As files are deleted and the directory is emptied, the directory will then be deleted.4. Reference4-472Monitoring External Storage ConnectionXGT Panel monitors connections with external storage devices. Storage monitoring is set up in XP-Builderas shown below:To use the monitoring function, you should select the Alarm window pop-up option, when youdownload the project file.When the external storage device for logging, recipe, and screen image backup is removed from XGTPanel while the device is running, a system alarm is turned on. The alarm is reset when an externalstorage device is reconnected to the XGT Panel.You can check system alarms and their device addresses in the System Alarm menu located in XP-Builderas shown below: 4. Reference4-4734. Reference4-474Safe Removal SwitchThe safe removal switch is used to remove external storage devices without any loss of backup data.When the safe removal switch is on, and the storage device is not processing data, the LED lamp will turnoff. If the storage device is processing data, the LED lamp will turn off after the backup is completed,automatically disengaging the storage device. This means that when the LED lamp is turned off nobackup action will be completed and the data in the storage device is inaccessible.When the safe removal switch is activated and the LED lamp is off, the storage device must be removedand reconnected to ensure that it is recognized. The minimum time delay for removing and reconnectingstorage devices after their safe removal is 5 seconds.The actions listed below describe situations where theLEDlamp will not turn off even if the safe removalswitch is turned on. The LED lamp will only go off after the described actions are fully completed: While a backup file is being created or XP-Builder is reading data If the images stored in the XP_User Image from an external storage device is being used as a partimage and being loaded in the program While reading or writing a file recipe While reading backup data from the XP-server through an XP-Link connection While browsing backup lists to upload from XP-Builder While loading a sound file or an image that belongs to a project While transferring project backup data to a storage device or from XP-Builder While downloading a project using XP-Builder or a storage device While changing an image in the start menu While ladder program monitoring is being saved in a storage deviceFunction Sub Classification ActionData Backup Alarm WritingLogging WritingRecipe WritingScreen WritingMemo WritingVideo WritingStill Shot WritingData Upload Alarm ReadingLogging ReadingRecipe Reading4. Reference4-475Function Sub Classification ActionScreen ReadingMemo ReadingVideo ReadingStill Shot ReadingData by Function Part Image ReadingEdit File Recipe Reading/WritingSend File Recipe Reading/WritingWeb Server Create Webpage WritingSending XP-Link File ReadingInquire file list ReadingProject Upload Project Backup Communication ReadingProject Backup - Storage WritingDownload Project Image WritingSound WritingProject Backup WritingLadder Monitor Download WritingExecute ReadingChange Start Menu Image ReadingDownload Storage Project Data Reading5. Other features5-15. Other features5.1 Gestures & Multi-TouchGesture definition1 FlickYou can quickly move up/down/left/right while maintaining contact with one finger.2 SwipeSlowly move up/down/left/right while maintaining contact with one fingerNote• When using the gesture function without transitions, the touch position must be within the object touse the gesture function.Screen Transition Gesture Function1 The screen transition gesture function is performed only when there is no other object in the gesturemotion range. It operates under the following conditions.2 The screen transition gesture function works as soon as you release your hand after performing theflick operation.Note• The screen switching function is based on the screen number created by XP-Builder.As a result, the next screen changes to the next number screen on the currentscreen, and the previous screen changes the same way.5. Other features5-2Logging Trend Graph Gesture Function1 Logging Trend Graph The gesture function can recognize the gesture from the moment you touchthe logging trend graph object. It operates under the following conditions.Gesture Direction Gesture Type Action PerformedLeft Swipe View next data 3 timesLeft Flick View next data 1 timeRight Swipe View previous data 3 timesRight Flick View previous data 1 timeNote• If you touch the Logging Trend Graph object, you can perform the gesture function and the blueframe will be displayed. This allows you to check whether the gesture is recognizable.Logging View Gesture Function1 Logging View Gesture function allows you to recognize the gesture from the moment you touch theLogging View object.Gesture Direction Gesture Type Action PerformedLeft Swipe View next column 1 timeLeft Flick View next column 3 timesRight Swipe View previous column 1 timeRight Flick View previous column 3 timesDown Swipe View one line up 1 timeDown Flick View one line up 3 timesUP Swipe View one line down 1 timeUP Flick View one line down 3 timesNote• History Alarm View when you touch an object, you can perform a gesture function and a blue frameis displayed. This allows you to check whether the gesture is recognizable.5. Other features5-3History Alarm View Gesture Function1 History Alarm View Gesture Function can recognize the gesture from the moment you touch theHistory Alarm View object. It operates under the following condition:Gesture Direction Gesture Type Action PerformedLeft Swipe View next column 1 timeLeft Flick View next column 3 timesRight Swipe View previous column 1 timeRight Flick View previous column 3 timesDown Swipe View one line up 1 timeDown Flick View one line up 3 timesUP Swipe View one line down 1 timeUP Flick View one line down 3 timesNote• When you touch the Logging View object, it becomes possible to perform the gesture function and ablue border is displayed. This allows you to check whether the gesture is recognizable.Explorer/FTP Client gesture functionAlarm / File / Basic Recipe / File Recipe explorer gesture object recognition is possible from the moment you touchan object. It operates under the following conditions.1 Alarm ExplorerGesture Direction Gesture Type Action PerformedDown Swipe View one line up 1 timeUp Swipe View one line down 1 time2 File ExplorerGesture Direction Gesture Type Action PerformedDown Swipe View one line up 1 timeUp Swipe View one line down 1 time3 Basic Recipe ExplorerGesture Direction Gesture Type Action PerformedDown Swipe View one line up 1 timeUp Swipe View one line down 1 time4 File Recipe ExplorerGesture Direction Gesture Type Action PerformedDown Swipe View one line up 1 timeUp Swipe View one line down 1 time5. Other features5-45 FTP ClientGesture Direction Gesture Type Action PerformedDown Swipe View one line up 1 timeUp Swipe View one line down 1 timeMulti-touch function1 Up to 2 points can be simultaneously touched by the user at the same time.2 Multi-touch function works on both normal screen and pop-up window (window screen, etc.).Note• The first touch input will automatically disappear when you perform an operation (Ex: numeral inputdevice) that loses existing focus as the second touch input will open a new window when performingmulti touch.• Since the second touch coordinates are calculated based on the first touch input, if the first touch isreleased while the two points are touched at the same time, the second touch input valuedisappears. (On the other hand, if you remove your finger from the second touch and touch it again,it will work normally.)• Multi-touch function is supported only in iXP25. Other features5-5Screen change gesture options1 Screen change gesture method can be set as “Change by screen number,” “Change by screen-changeorder (Similar to web browser)”Change by screen numberPerform the screen-changing gesture in the default set method to change to the previous or nextscreen based on the screen number.Change by screen change order(Similar to web browser)When performing the screen change gesture option, it changes to previous/next screen based on theorder of the screen as moved by the user.E.g If the user changed screen in order to 1->10->20 by screen-change switch, move to screennumber 10 by performing previous screen change gestures on screen number 20.2 Setting MethodPossible to set the “Screen change gesture method” option in [Project Property]-[Auxiliary Settings] of XP-Builder5. Other features5-6Gesture function On/Off1 The user can select whether the gesture function is activated or not.2 XP-Runtime menu - Settings - Touch Setting, you can check the "Gesture Function" check box asbelow.3 If you check the "Gesture Function" check box, the gesture function will be on. If you uncheck it, thegesture and multi touch will be offAppendixApp-1Appendix1 Program MonitorThe Program Monitor allows you to check the status of the system and diagnose PLC errors.1.1 About Program MonitorThe Program Monitor works with PLCs that support the monitoring function, as described in <5. 1.1.1PLCs that Support Monitoring >. The function shows the ladder diagrams for each PLC that can bemonitored, as described in <5. 1.1.3 The Program Monitor Window>.1.1.1 PLCs that Support MonitoringYou can only monitor PLCs that use the ladder diagram (LD) language. If a program uses the IL language,it will be converted to LD for display in the Program Monitor window. The following table describes PLCtypes manufactured by LS ELECTRIC that support monitoring.Series PLC Type Maximum Program Capacity (Steps)XGK XGK-CPUA 32KXGK-CPUE 16KXGK-CPUH 64KXGK-CPUS 32KXGK-CPUU 128KXGK-CPUSN 64KXGK-CPUHN 128KXGK-CPUUN 256KXGB XGB-XBCE 4KXGB-DR16C3 10KXGB-XBCSU 15KXGB-XBCH 15KXGB-XBMS 10KXGB-XBMH 64KAppendixApp-2Series PLC Type Maximum Program Capacity (Steps)XGB-XBCU 32KThe following table describes connection types that support monitoring.Series Connection TypeXGK CPU connectionLink connectionEthernet connectionXGB CPU connectionLink connectionEthernet connectionNoteLink connection and Ethernet connection are only for modules that has the XGT server function. Referto the module’s user manual to learn more about each module.The following table describes device types that support displaying monitoring data or changing currentvalues.Device XGK XGBMonitoring DataDisplayCurrent ValueChangeMonitoring DataDisplayCurrent ValueChangeP ● ● ● ●M ● ● ● ●K ● ● ● ●F ● ◐ ● ◐T ● ● ● ●C ● ● ● ●U ● ● ● ●Z ● ● ● ●S ● ● ● ●AppendixApp-3Device XGK XGBL ● ● ● ●N ● ● ● XD ● ● ● ●R ● ● △ △ZR ● ● △ △(●: Supports all areas, ◐: Supports some areas, △: Supports some models, X: Not supported)NoteRefer to the PLC’s user manual to learn more about the device sizes and properties.1.1.2 Properties by HMI devicesThe following table shows the devices the support monitoring or the standard display lines.HMI device Resolution Standard Display LineXP30 320X240 7 linesXP50 640X480 14 linesXP70 640X480 14 linesXP80 800X600 18 linesXP90 1024X768 18 linesAppendixApp-41.1.3 The Program Monitor WindowThe basic Program Monitor window appears below.Item Descriptiona The top row shows fundamental information about the program and the connected PLC.b The monitoring area shows the LD program.c Set to scroll the screen by line or page.Scroll upward.Scroll to the left.Scroll to the right.Scroll downward.Move to the previous touch point.Move to the next touch point.Move to the next search result.Click to start or stop monitoring.Program/Variable SwitchDisplays programs only.Displays devices/variables only.Displays the monitoring areas for programs and devices/variables in a splitview mode. Drag the line between the two areas to adjust the heights.When you click the program/variable switch, you can monitor variables in the program as well.abcAppendixApp-5Item Descriptiond Add, remove, or edit devices to monitor. Up to 16 devices can be monitored.e The monitoring area shows the devices.deAppendixApp-61.2 Monitoring ProgramYou can monitor programs manually from the XGT Panel’s menu or via a special switch object on a UIwindow. When you monitor programs via a special switch object, the objects on the screen will notcommunicate until the Program Monitor stops.1.2.1 Monitoring Programs from the XGT Panel MenuTo start the Program Monitor from the XGT Panel menu:1 Touch and hold the XGT Panel screen to open the main menu.2 Touch [PLC Information].3 Select a connection number from the drop-down list and touch [Program Monitor].NoteIf you have not selected the program monitor function in the XP-Builder project, the Program Monitorfunction will not be active. For more information, refer to <2.2.2.2 Changing XGT Panel Settings>.To stop the program monitor:1 In XP-Builder, click [COMMON] ▶ [Project Property Setting] ▶ [XGT Panel Settings].2 Touch the checkbox next to Program monitor.AppendixApp-71.2.2 Monitoring Programs with a Special Switch ObjectTo start the Program Monitor with a special switch object:1 Create a special switch object in XP-Builder and transfer the project to the XGT Panel. For moreinformation about special switch objects, refer to <2.3.4 Inserting Figures or Objects> and <4.3.2.4Special Switch>.2 On the XGT Panel, access the window that contains the special switch.3 Touch the special switch to activate the Program Monitor.NoteWhile the Program Monitor is active, objects on the current screen cannot be monitored, but scriptsand logging functions will work normally.1.2.3 Selecting Programs to MonitorOnce you activate the Program Monitor, you must select which programs to monitor.To select programs1 In the Program Monitor window, touch a program from the program list and then touch [Select].AppendixApp-82 To begin monitoring the program, touch [Mon]. The LD program will appear in the monitoring areaof the window.3 If the command is longer than the window can display, you can double-tap [PUT] to the right of thecommand to expand it. Tap [Close] to return to normal monitoring.AppendixApp-91.2.4 Managing ProgramsYou can save or delete programs from the Program Monitor.To manage programs:1 Touch the program list button at the top left of the window. To update the program list, touch[Update].2 Touch a program to monitor ▶ [Select] to move to the monitoring window.3 To read comments, touch [Comment] ▶ [Read].4 To save a program as a file, touch a program and then touch [Save]. When the program is saved“Match” appears in the Status column. If the file cannot be saved to the PLC, “Mismatch” appears inthe Status column.AppendixApp-105 To delete a file, touch a program and then touch [Delete]. When the program is deleted, “Removed”appears in the Status column.NoteThe file saving or deleting functions are available only when the file saving option is checked.1.2.5 Viewing the Monitoring DataMonitoring data appear differently depending on contact, coil, and command.Monitoring data of contacts are displayed as shown below.Contact type ON OFFNormally open contactNormally closed contactPositive transition-sensing contactNegative transition-sensing contactAppendixApp-11Monitoring data of coils are displayed as shown below.Item ON OFFCoilNegated coilSet coilReset coilPositive transition-sensing coilNegative transition-sensing coilMonitoring value of each device is displayed on the top of a command. Monitoring values are displayeddifferently depending on the data type used in a command.Command type Monitoring data displayCompared commandCommand1.2.6 Changing the Display FormatIn the Program Monitor, you can choose from four display formats for data, as described in the followingtable.Format DescriptionUnsigned decimal Displays the current device value as an unsigned decimalnumber.Signed decimal Displays the current device value as a signed decimal number.Hexadecimal number Displays the current device value as a hexadecimal number.Depending on command Displays the current value based on the command properties.AppendixApp-12To change the display format:1 On the XGT Panel, touch and hold the screen to open the main menu.2 Touch [Option] ▶ [Monitor].3 In the Options window, touch a display format.4 Touch [OK] to save your changes.NoteReal number and string data types are displayed as real numbers and strings, respectively, of displayformat you choose. For more information about data types for each PLC command, refer to the PLCuser manual.1.2.7 Changing the Current Device ValueYou can change the current device value from the Program Monitor. The Program Monitor must berunning to change the device value.To change the current value of a PLC device:1 From the Program Monitor window, select a device.AppendixApp-132 Tap [Menu] to display a menu dialog box.3 Tap [Test] to change the value.4 Enter a value in the Value field and tap [OK]. You can also change current device value from the Device Monitor window.5 From the Device Monitor window, tap the Value field of a device to change.AppendixApp-146 Enter a value in the Value field and tap [OK].NoteWhen you select bit type device, the dialog box to select ON/OFF will be displayed. Number input unitor string input unit will be displayed depending on the inputted data type. After selecting the deviceto be changed, you can select the current device value.AppendixApp-151.3 Monitoring DevicesYou can monitor devices that are not currently used by the program and check the status off the PLC.1.3.1 Managing DevicesTo add a device:1 In the Device Monitor window, tap [Add].2 Tap the Device field to open the Add Device window.3 Enter a device and tap [OK] in the Device Input window.AppendixApp-164 Tap the currently select device data type.5 Select the desired device data type.6 Tap [OK] to finish.When you insert a device, the device will be added to the currently selected point. The procedure ofinserting a device is the same as the procedure of inserting a device except that the point to insert adevice is selected.To insert a device:1 In the Device Monitor window, select a point to insert a device and tap [Ins.].AppendixApp-172 Enter a device and select a device data type.3 Tap [OK] to finish.You can change the device or the device data type.To edit a device:1 In the Device Monitor window, tap [Edit].2 Change the device or the device data type, and tap [OK].AppendixApp-18To remove a device:1 Select a device to remove.2 In the Device Monitor window, tap [Rem.].AppendixApp-191.4 Using the Search FunctionsYou can use various search functions to find devices, labels, sub-routines, or cross references, or you canmove to the desired step directly.1.4.1 Searching for DevicesYou can search for devices by setting the data type or the search range.1 In the Program Monitor window, tap [Menu].2 Tap [Search] to open the Device Search window.3 Enter a device to search for.AppendixApp-20To enter a general device (for example, M0000):1 Tap the device input field.2 Enter the device address and tap [OK].For an index device, two devices should be entered in the format of “Default Device [Index Device]”. Theprocedure for entering a default device is the same as the procedure for entering a general device. AppendixApp-21To enter an index device (for example, M0000[Z000]):1 Check the checkbox next to [Z].2 Tap the device input field.3 Enter the device address and tap [OK].An indirect device is displayed in the format of “# + Default Device”.The procedure for entering a default device is the same as the procedure for entering a general device.AppendixApp-22To enter an indirect device (for example, #P0000):1 Check the check box next to “#”.2 Tap the device input field.3 Enter the device address and tap [OK].An indirect index device is displayed in the format of “# + Default Device[Index Device]”.AppendixApp-23To enter an indirect index device (for example, #P0000[Z00]):1 Check the checkbox next to “#”.2 Check the checkbox next to [Z].3 Tap the device input field.4 Enter the device address and tap [OK].AppendixApp-24You can select a device type (Bit, Word, or Word with bit).Device type DescriptionBit Search for a match from bit devices.Word Search for a match from word devices.Word with bits Search for a match from word devices and a device containinga word device from bit devices.For example, if you enter “M0000” and select Word with bittype, the following devices will be searched.Word device: M0000Bit devices: M00000, M00001, M00002- M0000FNoteWhen you search for a device, devices of the same device type will be searched. For example, if youenter “M0000”, devices such as M0000[Z000], #M0000, #M0000[Z000] will not be searched.After entering the device, tap [OK] to search for devices. The pointer will appear at the first search result.AppendixApp-25Tap to move to the next search result.AppendixApp-261.4.2 Searching for Labels1 You can search for labels that are used in programs and move to the corresponding point directly.2 In the Program Monitor window, tap [Menu].3 Tap [Search Label] to open the Label List window.4 Tap the desired label and tap [OK].5 Confirm the search result.AppendixApp-271.4.3 Searching for Sub-routinesYou can search for sub-routines that are used in programs and move to the corresponding point directly.1 In the Program Monitor window, tap [Menu].2 Tap [Search SBRT] to open the Sub-routine List window.3 Tap the desired sub-routine and tap [OK].AppendixApp-284 Confirm the search result.1.4.4 Searching for StepsYou can search for a step and move to the corresponding point directly.1 In the Program Monitor window, tap [Menu].2 Tap [Move to Step] to open the Move to Step window.AppendixApp-293 Tap the step number field to open the Number Input window.4 Enter the step number and tap [OK].5 Confirm the search result.AppendixApp-301.4.5 Searching with TouchYou can search for labels, sub-routines, or devices with touch.1.4.6 Searching for Labels with TouchYou can search for a JMP command that a selected label refers to. You can also move directly to a labelthat a JMP command refers to.Because more than one JMP command can exist for one label, you can move to the next search result.To search for a JMP command that a label refers to:1 Select a desired label.2 Tap and hold the label command for a second.AppendixApp-313 Confirm the search result.Because only one label exists for one program block, you cannot move to the next search result.To search for a label that is used as an operand for a JMP command:1 Select a desired JMP commandAppendixApp-322 Tap the JMP command or the operand for a second.3 Confirm the search result.AppendixApp-331.4.7 Searching for Sub-routines with TouchYou can search for a CALL or CALLP command that a selected sub-routine refers to. You can also searchfor a sub-routine that is used as an operand for a CALL or CALLP command.Because more than one CALL or CALLP command can exist for one sub-routine, you can move to thenext search result.To search for a CALL or CALLP command that a sub-routine refers to:1 Select a desired sub-routine.2 Tap and hold the sub-routine command or the operand for a second.3 Confirm the search results.AppendixApp-34Because sub-routines exist in the entire PLC program, search results may not appear in the selectedprogram.To search for a sub-routine that a CALL or CALLP command refers to:1 Select a desired CALL or CALLP command.2 Tap the CALL or CALLP command or the operand for a second.AppendixApp-353 Confirm the search result.1.4.8 Searching for Devices with TouchYou can search for a device with touch to find out whether an input device is used for output or anoutput device is used for input.To search for a command that uses a selected input device for output:1 Select a desired input device.AppendixApp-362 Tap the device for a second.3 Confirm the nearest output device upward from the selected device.4 Tap to move to the next output device.AppendixApp-37To search for a command that uses a selected output device for input:1 Select a desired output device.2 Tap the device for a second.AppendixApp-383 Confirm the nearest input device downward from the selected device.NoteThis function uses the inclusion relationship between the data types of commands for searching. Forthe data types of command, refer to PLC user’s manual.AppendixApp-391.5 Configuring OptionsConfigure various settings of the Program Monitor.To configure the options:1 In the Program Monitor window, tap [Menu].2 Tap [Option] to open the Option window.3 Touch a tab to view or change the following information. File: The File tab allows you to set where to save files.AppendixApp-40- Save Option: Set where to save files. Monitor: The Monitor tab allows you to choose a display format.- Monitor Display Options: Set the display format. View: The View tab allows you to change the LD options.- Color: Set the color for the LD program.- Display Options: Set the display type of a device in the Program Monitor.- Line: Set the number of lines to display devices, variables, or descriptions. If you selectVariable, all data are displayed. If you select a certain line, only that line will be displayed. Ifthe total number of lines is bigger than the selected number of lines, …… will be displayed.- Column: Set the number of columns to display on the screen. If you select the minimumnumber of columns, all items will be displayed except the output descriptions.- Monitor Line: Set the monitor display line of commands. If you select 0 Line, the currentmonitor value of commands will not be displayed. This option is useful when you want tomonitor only ON/OFF of a contact.AppendixApp-412 NC Program MonitorBy monitoring the NC program of the PLC connected to the HMI, can easily diagnose the PLC programstatus and errors.2.1 Start1 NC Program drive download.Download NC monitor program using XP-Manager.2 Add switch for NC program executionAppendixApp-42After downloading NC Program monitor, create special switch to execute NC monitor programthrough XP-Builder.- Program Interaction with HMI: Check it.- Program Path: Run NCMonitor.exe in the path downloaded in step 1 above. For example, if youdownloaded the program to FlashDisk, set it to FlashDiskNCMonitorNCMonitor.exe.AppendixApp-432.2 Run at wXP1 Install XG5000. (XG5000 V4.20 or later)2 Add switch for NC program execution- Program Interaction with HMI: Uncheck it.- Program Path: Run NCMonitor.exe in the path location where wXP is installed. For example, if theprogram is installed in C:program filesLSwXPNCMonitorNCMonitor.exe3 IP settingSpecify the IP in the UserSettings.inf file in the path where wXP is installed. For example, if youinstalled wXP in C:Program FilesLSwXPNCMonitorUserSettings.inf. Special switch: Set as shown below.- Program Interaction with HMI: Check it.- Program Path: Run NCMonitor.exe in the path downloaded in step 1 above. For example, if youdownloaded the program to FlashDisk, set it to FlashDiskNCMonitorNCMonitor.exe.AppendixApp-442.3 NC Monitoring Program FeaturesAble to monitor the devices not currently used in the program and check the status of thePLC.2.3.1 NC monitoring program description1 Display the currently running NC program.2 Display connected PLC type and operation status.3 Display the toolpath program.4 The NC program currently running is displayed.5 Display the current position value of the work piece coordinate.6 Change the view mode of the toolpath graph. IS090 – XY – YZ – ZX is displayed in sequence.7 Re-read NC programs and parameters from the PLC. It is used when NC program is newlydownloaded from XG5000.8 Manage NC files.AppendixApp-459 Set the device to connect with the function button.2.3.2 User Device SettingIt is used when you want to control PLC program by button.Specify the device to name the selected NC program.2.3.3 NC file ManagementManage NC files saved in the PLC. Using this feature, you can select NC program to operateand delete, load and export files.AppendixApp-461 Display file list.2 Write the selected NC program to the program name specified in [Preferences].3 Deleted the selected NC file.4 Import the NC file from the removable storage device.5 Export the selected NC file to a removable storage device.6 Close the dialog.AppendixApp-472.3.4 Import NC file1 Display the drive list in the XGT Panel.2 Displays a list of subfolders and NC files in the currently selected folder.3 Select the NC file to import and close the dialog.4 Cancel the load operation.Deleting and importing loads the NC program again. NC program is applied only in the stopmode and needs to be converted. However, it can be operated normally only when the keyswitch of PLC is remote mode.AppendixApp-482.3.5 Change View ModeThe NC monitor supports four viewing modes. Each time you press the View Type button, the for modes,ISO90 – XY – YX – ZX, change in sequence.AppendixApp-492.4 Edit NC ProgramEdit NC program is only available at wXP.2.4.1 PreparationProgram editing is a separate external program. Notepad++ is recommended to take advantage of theSyntax Highlight feature of NC code (notepad++ is freeware available for download fromhttps://notepad-plus-plus.org).1 Enable NC Syntax Highlight featureSelect menu in Notepad++ [Language] – [Define Your Language …]. In the dialog below, click thebutton [Import…] to select the NC language definition file for XMC (file name G-CODE_XG.XML). Thefile exists in the installed NC monitor program installation path.AppendixApp-50If you run notepad++ again after importing the file, you can see that the GCODE item is added asshown below.2 Specify the editor path.AppendixApp-51NC Editor is set in the UserSettings.inf file. Open the fie and specify the path where notepad++ isinstalled. The following is an example of installing Notepad++ in the path C:ProgramFiles(x86)Notepad++.3 Select the NC file to import and close the dialog.4 Cancel the import operation.[Editor]PATH = C:Program Files(X86)NNotepad++NotePad++.exeARG1=-nosessionARGE=-nosession –n%d2.4.2 OverviewClick menu [NC File] to display the file list. Select the program you want to edit from the filelist and click the [Edit] button.If the file is edited and you exit the NC File Manager, you check whether the changed file iswritten to the PLC. The procedure below is the same as importing an NC file.AppendixApp-52If there is a contact error in the NC file, an error dialog box appears as shown below.After selecting the line where the error occurred, click the [Edit] button to edit it again.AppendixApp-533 AutoscanAutoscan is able to check the configuration and module status of the network system consisting ofRAPIEnet I/F modules of the PLC connected to the HMI device, and measure the cable distance.NoteCable distance measurement may vary depending on the configuration of the network system. For thedetails, please refer to RAPIEnet I/F module user manual.3.1 Start Autoscan3.1.1 OverviewDownload Autoscan program using XP-Manger. After selecting the Manager Driver of the device to useAutoscan in XP-Manager, select Autoscan. When running the Autoscan program in Korean: After setting [Download Font File], set it to[ANSI/OEM Korean Unified Hangul 949], and then specify a font that supports Korean, such as [Gulim]. When running the Autoscan program in English: After setting [Download Font File], set it to [ANSILatin 1 1252], and then specify a font that supports English such as [Tahoma].If the selected font file and whether the font is Korean or English do not match, the language of theautoscan program may appear broken on the machine.AppendixApp-543.1.2 Add special switch to operate Autoscan programAfter downloading the Autoscan program, create a special switch that can executed Autoscan throughXP-Builder. If downloaded to FlashDisk from XP-Manager, the program path is FlashDiskAutoScan.exe.- Program Interaction with HMI: Do no set.- Program Path: Run AutoScan.exe in the path downloaded in step 1 above. For example, if youdownloaded the program to FlashDisk, set it to FlashDiskAutoScanAutoScan.exe.AppendixApp-55- Use Parameter: Set when registering PLC IP connect. If the parameter is not used, the default IP is192.168.1.2, Port is 2004. The monitoring period is 1 second.- Direct: Register the IP and port number of the PLC to be connected. For example, if you connectwith IP: 192.168.1.2, Port: 2004, set –h 192.168.1.2 –p 2004. When setting the monitoring period,specify the period (unit: second) after –t. If the period is 2 seconds, set –h 192.168.1.2 –p 2004 –t2.NoteWhen setting the Program Interaction with HMI, the runtime running on the machine is stopped andonly external programs set by the user are executed. If the setting is checked, it may appear that themachine is malfunctioning when executing an external program, but in reality only the set externalprogram is executed and the runtime is not operated.3.2 Using in wXP1 Install XG5000 (XG5000 version 4.20 or later).2 Add a special switch to executed Autoscan program.- Program Interaction with HMI: Do no set.- Program Path: Run AutoScan.exe from the location where wXP is installed. For example, if youinstalled the program in C:Program FilesLS, set it to C:Program FilesLSAutoScanAutoScan.exe.- Parameter: Set when registering PLC IP connect. If the parameter is not used, the default IP is192.168.1.2, Port is 2004. The monitoring period is 1 second.- Direct: Register the IP and port number of the PLC to be connected. For example, if you connectwith IP: 192.168.1.2, Port: 2004, set –h 192.168.1.2 –p 2004. When setting the monitoring, specify theperiod (unit: second) after –t. If the period is 2 seconds, set –h 192.168.1.2 –p 2004 –t2.3 IP SettingWhen adding a special switch for running the Autoscan program, you can set the PLC and IP to beconnected, but you can also set the IP through the IP setting screen by clicking the setting button afterrunning the Autoscan program. The default IP is 192.168.1.2 and the port number is 2004. Afterregistering the IP of PLC to be connected in the IP setting screen, click the Apply button to save it as afile. For example, if you installed wXP in C:Program FilesLS, it will be saved in the C:ProgramFilesLSwXPAutoScanIPList.xml file.AppendixApp-56AppendixApp-573.3 Features of AutoscanAble to check the network system configuration status consisting of the RAPIEnet I/O module of the PLCconnected to the HMI.3.3.1 Autoscan program menuItem DescriptionAutoScan – IP: Port: Period Displays the IP, Port number and monitoring period of theconnected PLC.Network Information - Station No. Displays the quantity of the RAPIEnet I/F modules of theconnected network.- Range: 0~63Network Information - Topology/Set Displays setting of the system network configuration statusand user topology setting.- LINE: Line type network configuration.- RING: Ring type network configuration.The network configuration is depend on the RAPIEnetprotocol. For details, please refer to the RAPIEnet I/F usermanual.Network Information – Collision When two or more of the modules to be connected on the AppendixApp-58Item Descriptionnetwork have the same station number, the collision stationnumber is displayed.Setting Set the IP, Port number and monitoring period of the PLC tobe connected.Save Save the current network system configuration status.Slave Diagnostic Executes the slave diagnostic.Goto Local Change the MRS autoscan screen to the local autoscanscreen.Compare The status of the added/deleted/changed is displayed bycomparing the previously saved network system configurationstatus with the current network configuration status.Cable Distance Displays the cable distance between the RAPIEnet I/F of thePLC that connected to HMI.Autoscan status screen Displays network status on screen.Progress Bar Displays the progress on the progress bar.Cable Deletion/Cable Addition Displays index for the Autoscan screen. Red when the cable isremoved, and blue when a cable is added.Show User Topology Displays the compare result of the user topology when itchecked.Monitoring The current network system configuration status isperiodically updated and displayed.Retry Displays the current network system configuration status byupdating once.Close Closes the Autoscan program screen.3.3.2 IP setting and monitoring period settingIt is used when setting the IP and port number of the PLC to be connected and the monitoring period.After running the Autoscan program, click the [Setting] button to display the setting screen.AppendixApp-59Item DescriptionLabel The label for IP and port number of the PLC to be registered isdisplayed. When touched, the keyboard screen is displayedand you can set the label.IP Displays the IP of the PLC to be registered.Set Displays the IP input. When IP input is complete, IP settingitems are changed.Port The port information of the PLC to be registered is displayed.When touched, the keyboard screen is displayed and the portnumber can be set.List Displays the PLC list.Add/Edit Label, IP, Port number contents are applied in PLC list. If thesame label exists in the list, it is edited, otherwise it is addedto the list.Delete Deletes the selected information from the registered PLC list.Monitoring Period Displays monitoring period. Unit is seconds and the range is 1to 10.Apply Save the settings and close the dialog box. If the same labelexists in the PLC list, it is changed to the set contents.Close Closed the dialog without saving the settings.AppendixApp-603.3.3 Save network statusSaves the current network system configuration status. Clicking the [Save] button saves the currentnetwork system configuration status, and the progress is displayed as a progress bar. In the MARautoscan screen, it is not possible to save the network system configuration status, so the [Save] buttonis disabled.3.3.4 Slave DiagnosticExecutes slave diagnostic. Click the [Slave Diagnostic] button to diagnose the current network systemconfiguration and display the error details.AppendixApp-613.3.5 Goto LocalChanges from the MRS autoscan screen to the local autoscan screen. The [Goto Local] button is activatedonly in the MRS autoscan screen mode. Clicking the button changes to the local autoscan screen. Thefigure below shows the MRS autoscan screen.3.3.6 CompareCompares the previously saved network system configuration status with the current network systemconfiguration status and displays the status of addition/deletion/change. Clicking the [Compare] buttonchanges to the [Stop] and displays the comparison result. Clicking the [Stop] button ends the Comparefunction. In the MRS Auto Scan screen, it is not possible to save the network system configuration status,so the [Compare] button is disabled.AppendixApp-623.3.7 Cable DistanceYou can measure the cable distance between the HMI device and the RAPIEnet I/F module of theconnected PLC. Clicking [Cable Distance] displays the measured cable distance along with the measureddate as shown below. Optical cables cannot be measured, so they are marked as Fiber Optic.To display the measured cable distance, first do as follows. If you display the cable distance in Autoscanwithout following the method below, the cable distance may be displayed incorrectly.(a) Configure the system and connect cables.(b) Turn on the power and check if the Link LEDs of all RAPIEnet I/F modules to which cables areconnected are on.(c) Remove the cable from the electrical port of the module where the Link Led is on, and reconnect after5~10 seconds.(d) Carry out (c) for all modules on the network or modules to measure cable distance. However, do notattach or detach both ports at the same time.(e) After performing (c) on the cable to measure the distance, click [Cable Distance] on the Auto Scanscreen.3.3.8 MonitoringThe current network system configuration status is periodically updated and displayed. If you click the[Monitoring] button, it changes to the [Stop] button, and the network status is periodically updated anddisplayed, and the progress is displayed as a progress bar. The update period is set in the monitoringperiod (unit: second) in the setting screen. Click the [Stop] button to end the monitoring function.AppendixApp-633.3.9 Remote module status information diagnosticDiagnosis service is performed on the module of the station number displayed on the autoscan. If youclick the station number to perform diagnosis service on the auto scan screen, the diagnosis servicebutton is displayed at the bottom as shown in the figure below.The figure below show the clicked MRS node.Item DescriptionModule Info. Displays remote communication module information. If you click the [Module info.]button, the communication mode information dialog box for the MRS node isdisplayed as shown below. Clicking the [Retry] button changes the communicationmodule information to the latest status. Clicking the [Close] button closes the AppendixApp-64Item Descriptiondialog box.Media Info. Displays remote media information. Clicking the [Media Info.] button displays themedia information dialog box for the remote I/O node as shown below. If you clickthe [Monitoring] button, the media information is periodically updated. Click the[Retry] button to update the media information. Clicking the [Close] button closesthe dialog box.Autoscan Perform MRS auto scan. Switches to the screen showing the IP list connected underthe selected MRS. Click the [Goto Local] button to switch to the local autoscanscreen.AppendixApp-65Item DescriptionThe figure below show the clicked remote I/O node.Item DescriptionModule Info. Displays remote communication module information. If you click the [Module info.]button, the communication mode information dialog box for the remote I/O nodeis displayed as shown below. Clicking the [Retry] button changes thecommunication module information to the latest status. Clicking the [Close] buttoncloses the dialog box.AppendixApp-66Item DescriptionMedia Info. Displays remote media information. In case of the remote I/O note, the button willdeactivated.The figure below show the clicked local node.Item DescriptionModule Info. Displays remote communication module information. If you click the [Module info.]button, the communication mode information dialog box for the local node isdisplayed as shown below. Clicking the [Retry] button changes the communicationmodule information to the latest status. Clicking the [Close] button closes thedialog box.AppendixApp-67Item DescriptionMedia Info. Displays remote media information. Clicking the [Media Info.] button displays themedia information dialog box for the local note as shown below. If you click the[Monitoring] button, the media information is periodically updated. Click the [Retry]button to update the media information. Clicking the [Close] button closes thedialog box.Item Details DescriptionService StatusInformationXGT ServerTotal number of framestransmitted/received by XGT server service.HS. LinkTotal number of framestransmitted/received by high speed linkservice.P2P(EIP)Total number of framestransmitted/received by P2P serviceAppendixApp-68Item DescriptionEtcTotal number of frames transmitted andreceived by other servicesMedia StatusInformation(packet/sec)Broadcast The number of packets per second forframes sent and received by broadcastMulticastThe number of packets per second offrames transmitted and received bymulticastUnicast The number of packets per second offrames sent and received by unicastGroup Trans.The number of packets per second offrames transmitted and received by grouptransmissionPacket Monitoring(packet/sec)Transmit The number of packets per second inframes sent on each portReceive Packets per second of frames received oneach portRelay Packets per second of frames relayed oneach portErrorThe number of packets per second of errorsthat occur during transmission/reception oneach portWhen an error occurs in the frame transmitted or received from the RAPIEnet I/Fmodule, you can check the detailed information of the error. Media informationscreen If the error count is 1 or more among the contents of packet monitoring, the[Detail Error] button is activated. Clicking the [Detail Error] button opens the packetmonitoring details screen. For each error, you can check the number of errorpackets per port.AppendixApp-69Item DescriptionItem DescriptionTx_Retry_Over CntNumber of frames that cannot be transmitted evenafter 16 retransmissionsDelay Collision Detect CntNumber of delayed collisions on the line aftertransmissionLost Carrier Cnt Number of times carrier loss occurred duringtransmissionCarrier Not Detected Cnt Number of times a carrier was not detected duringpreamble transmissionCRC Error Frame Receive CntNumber of occurrences of frames in which CRCerrors were receivedFrame Receive Error Cnt Number of frames with reception errorToo-Short Frame Cnt Number of received frames less than 64 bytesToo-Long Frame Cnt Number of received frames greater than 1518 bytesResidual-Bit Frame Cnt Number of received frames including Residual-BitAppendixApp-704 XP-VSP4.1 About XP-VSPXP-VSP is software that enables data communication between the ladder software of a remote PC andthe PLC connected to the XGP panel. The features of XP-VSP include the following. Supports virtual seral ports Supports TCP/IP technology Supports various COM ports at the same time Allows using of user-created files that are already downloaded Shows the availability of drivers4.1.1 OverviewXP-VSP enables data communication between the ladder software and the PLC using the TCP/IPtechnology and the Virtual serial port technology.The illustration below describes how the ladder software and the PLC communicate using the TCP/IPtechnology.AppendixApp-711 The ladder software of the computer uses a virtual com port.2 The virtual com port sends data to TCP/IP.3 The XGT panel receives data from the TCP/IP server.4 The data is sent to and received from the PLC via RS232C.5 The TCP/IP server of the XGT panel sends data to the computer.6 The ladder software receives data.AppendixApp-724.1.2 Supported PLC DriversXP-VSP supports the drivers that support the PLC loader protocol.The following drivers are supported.Manufacturer DriverLS GLOFA GM series CPU DirectMaster-K series CPU DirectXGK series CPU DirectXGB series CPU DirectXGI series CPU DirectXGR series CPU DirectOmron Corporation CS/CJ Host Link serialYASKAWA MEMOBUS RTU MasterAppendixApp-734.2 Installing and UpdatingThis section explains how to install and update the XP-VSP software.4.2.1 Installing XP-VSPYou may install XP-VSP on a PC that meets the following minimum system requirements. Processor: Pentium 4 or higher Memory: 512MB or more free memory COM Ports: Ethernet port Hard Disk: 1GB capacity or higher Monitor: Minimum resolution of 1024x768 OS: Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10 Peripherals: Mouse and keyboardTo install XP-VSP:1 Run the XP-VSP setup file.2 Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation.AppendixApp-744.2.2 Updating XP-VSPTo update XP-VSP:1 Run the XP-VSP setup file of a new version with the old version already installed.2 Select Reinstall and click Next.3 Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation.AppendixApp-754.3 Interfaces and FeaturesThis section describes the XP-VSP interface.Interface DescriptionXP List Window Shows the online status or the previously registered XP information.• XP Connection Status: Online/Offline• XP Status: Shows the current mode or version of XP.• XP Type: Shows the type of XP.• PLC1-PLC4: Specifies the PLC driver that is built in XP.• Manufacturer: Shows the manufacturer of the PLC driver.• Driver: Shows the PLC driver.Communication Port For the PLC drivers that do not support XP-VSP, ‘XP-VSP not supported’ isdisplayed. It the PCL driver supports XP-VSP, the port number is displayed. Youcan change the port number.Manually Add Set the virtual com of XP that is no online.Setup Set the options for XP-VSP.Exit End XP-VSP.AppendixApp-764.4 Using XP-VSPThis section describes how to use the XP-VSP software.4.4.1 Registering Virtual Com PortTo register a virtual com port:1 Download “LS:XGK(CPU)” project using XP-Builder.2 Change the Communication Port from Do not use to a random port. If the project does not support XP-VSP, you cannot select a virtual com port as shown below.AppendixApp-77To register a virtual com port directly:1 Click [Manually Add].2 Enter the following information and click [OK].AppendixApp-78Item DescriptionXGT-Panel IP Address Enter the IP address the virtual com port is registered.PLC Driver XGT panel supports 16 PLC drivers at the same time. Select one ofthe 16 drivers.Communication Port Select the number of the virtual com port to register.Note• Once a virtual com port is registered, you can use the port afterward. You do not have to register iteach time.• XP-VSP is supported from XGT-Panel V1.11AppendixApp-794.4.2 Connecting PLC and Ladder Program via Virtual Com PortYou can connect the PLC and the ladder program using the virtual com port that is previously registered.Before connecting, the XGT panel and the PLC must be connected via RS232C.To connect the PLC and the ladder program via virtual com port:1 Tap [Start] rom the XGT panel’s menu to start monitoring.2 Start XG5000.3 Access the menu of XG5000 and select [Online] ▶ [Connection Settings].4 Set the Method to RS-232C and click [Settings].5 Set the Connection Port to the virtual com port.AppendixApp-806 Click [Connect] to connect to the PLC.AppendixApp-814.4.3 Unregistering Virtual Com PortTo unregister a virtual com port:1 Change the Communication Port to Do not use.2 Click [Yes] on the pop-up.AppendixApp-824.5 Editing Default SettingsYou can edit default settings in XP-VSP.To open the settings windows:1 Click [Setup].2 Change the following information.Item DescriptionAuto Start XP-VSP onStartSet to start XP-VSP automatically when the Windows starts.Start on System Tray Set to start XP-VSP on the system tray.XGT-Panel SearchIntervalSet the interval to search for XGT-panel on the network.AppendixApp-835 wXP5.1 About wXPwXP is an application designed for LS ELECTRIC’s PC-based devices and is used to run the projectsdesigned in XP-Builder.5.1.1 RequirementsThe minimum hardware requirements for a PC to run wXP are listed below.Hardware Requirements RemarksProcessor Pentium4 or aboveRAM 512MB or aboveHDD 1GB or aboveOS Windows7 or aboveAppendixApp-845.2 wXP InterfaceThe screen configuration of wXP is as shown below. The meaning of each function is as shown below.(Inserted number for each item.)5.2.1 ProjectItem DescriptionStart monitoring Start monitoring using the currently downloaded project.Stop Stop monitoring.AppendixApp-855.2.2 ScreenItem DescriptionAdjust Screen Size toFixed SizeSet all frames and screens to the sizes specified in XP-Builder (e.g., if theproject was designed in 1024 x 768, the project opens in the actual size).Adjust Screen Size toFrame SizeResize the screen size to fit the current frame.5.2.3 Offline SettingItem DescriptionOffling Setting This is he item which user sets environment of wXP. The setting items areapplied when setting in offline. If you change settings in online, you mustrestart wXP to apply the settings you set.AppendixApp-86Item DescriptionGoto screen afterboot upStart monitoring using the currently downloaded project as soon as wXP islaunched.Quick Start Set to display the monitoring screen without showing the progress bar forimage loading. Since images are loaded when necessary while switchingbetween screens, screen switching may become slightly slower.Show always title barof popup windowSet to allow all pop-up windows to be displayed with title bars whilemonitoring (pop-up window objects, global windows, pop-up numerickeypad windows). When this feature is disabled, the title bar is displayed onlywhen you touch an empty area on the screen.Start with Full Screen Set to start wXP in full screen mode. The top menu and frame are hiddenfrom the screen. You can enable this feature when monitoring is stopped toresume monitoring in full screen mode.Set startup screen If start screen numbers are assigned, monitoring begins in the order specifiedby the start screen numbers. Use this option to set your own screen numbers.The original screen numbers will be used if you specify a screen number thatdoes not exist.Show Cursor Set to hide the mouse cursor during monitoring.Gesture / Multi Touch • Set the gesture / multi-touch function.• The default gesture / multi-touch operation (maximum touch point, etc.) isthe same as iXP2 (except Handy model).• If the multi-touch / gesture function is desabled on the hardware runningwXP, the “Gesture / Multi-touch function” check box is disabled.• Gesture / multi-touch support can be checked in “Pen and Touch” item in“System” information on Windows below.Full Screen Option:Default MonitorWhen multiple monitors are in use, set to enter full screen mode on themonitor where the majority of the original screen is displayed.Full Screen Option: When multiple monitors are in use, set to specify full screen mode display AppendixApp-87Item DescriptionSet Monitor options. The following are principles used for the display options.• The top-left corner of the 1st monitor becomes the top-left corner of themonitoring screen.• The monitoring screen size is adjusted to include all the monitor screens.• You cannot view the areas of the monitoring screen beyond the areascovered by the monitor screens.Refer to the following figure for actual application. The orange outlinespecifies the entire monitoring screen, while the green blocks are the unseenareas.When 2 monitors are used:When 3 monitors are used:When 4 monitors are used:5.2.4 HelpItem DescriptionHelp Displays the version information of wXPAppendixApp-885.3 wXP RestrictionsYou may experience the following restrictions when working with wXP.Item DescriptionUnsupported service wXP does not support printing, XP-Remote, Web server, VNC server, or PLCprogram monitoring services.Special switch wXP does not support safety interlock switch, program monitor switch, orother special switches related to XP_Remote.Script function wXP does not support backlight settings, USB power reset, buzzer, buzzeractivation, alarm, or screen print script functions.License Key The license key provided at the time of purchase of wXP must be connectedto the device to use software normally.AppendixApp-896 Object Display Rule before Communication ConnectionObject Before 1 scan completed Time OutLamp Object Not Displayed Display Default ImageMessage Object Display Image Display ImageNumeric/TextObjectDisplay Image Display ImageGraph Object Display Graph Display GraphAnimation Object Display Image Display ImageWindow Object Not Displayed Not DisplayedPart Object Not Displayed Not DisplayedAppendixApp-907 GlossaryTerm Description1: 1 “one to one” communication; a communication mode; in 1: 1communication, one panel is used to send commands to onecontroller1: N “one to many” communication; a communication mode; in 1: Ncommunication, one panel is used to send commands to multiplecontrollersbaud baud and bits per second are not necessarily the same, so do notuse "bits per second" or "bps" as a synonym for baud; modemsare conventionally designated by bits per second or kilobits persecond; a 28.8 kbps modem runs at a different baud, dependingon how events are coded for transmissionbit object an object in an XP-builder project that is controlled by a bit devicebitmap refers to a specific file format for online artcase a selection control mechanism that exists in most imperativeprogramming languages, such as Pascal, C/C++, C# and Java; itallows the value of a variable or expression to control the flow ofprogram execution via a multi-way branch (or “go to,” one ofseveral labels); in XP-Builder, cases are used to control theoperations assigned for individual objects, by providing multipleconditional expressions where the object’s device value is one ofthe operands.condition a Boolean expression used to control conditionals and loops; itaffects the programming or operating of control statements, suchas WHILE, FOR, and IF; in XP-Builder, conditions are used tocontrol the operations assigned for individual objects, byproviding a condition or conditional expression where the object’sdevice value is one of the operands.controller the physical unit that delivers instructions to machinery; XPBuilder supports numerous types of controllers; see alsoprogrammable logic controllerDEC keypad a Window screen for user input of decimal charactersediting area the main part of the XP-Builder interface, where objects can beplaced to create a projectEthernet a connection method; the maximum throughput for an Ethernet AppendixApp-91Term Descriptionconnection is 100mbpsfalling edge the bit at which the device turns off is the falling edgeFLOAT keypad a Window screen for user input of float charactersHEX keypad a Window screen for user input of hexadecimal charactersIL language intermediate language; the language of an abstract machinedesigned to aid in the analysis of computer programsinverter an electrical power converter that changes direct current (DC) toalternating current (AC); the converted AC can be delivered at anyrequired voltage and frequency with the use of appropriatetransformers, switching, and control circuitslog Automatically produced and time-stamped documentation ofevents relevant to a particular system. In XP-Builder, you canenable logging option in a particular object’s property settingwindow to track and record the operationN: 1 “Many to one” communication; a communication mode; in N: 1communication, multiple panels are used to send commands tothe same controller; this is an atypical configuration.offset function a function to specify a device address by referencing an “offset”from the starting addressoperator a symbol used to connect expressions; logical operators are usedto create a test expression that controls program flow; relationaloperators test or define some kind of relation between twoentitiesrange the set of values to be included in a functionraster image a bitmap image with a dot matrix data structure representing agenerally-rectangular grid of pixels or points of color; a rasterimage can be in varying formats, such as GIF, JPG, and BMPrising edge the bit at which the device turns on is the rising edgeRS232 A series of standards for serial binary single-ended data andcontrol signals connecting between data terminal equipment(DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE). Themaximum throughput for an RS232 connection is 115Kbps.RS485 A standard for defining the electrical characteristics of drivers andreceivers for use in balanced digital multipoint systems. RS485offers data transmission speeds of 35 Mbit/s up to 10 m and AppendixApp-92Term Description100 Kbit/s at 1200 m.screen the basic component of an XP-Builder project, where userinterfaces (objects) are placedscript a small program written for a command interpreter or anotherscripting languageservo Servomechanism; a device used for control of a desired operationthrough the use of feedback; the term correctly applies only tosystems where the feedback or error-correction signals helpcontrol mechanical position, speed, or other parameters.token a credential used to control usage rights; the node that holds thetoken has the current usage rightstoolbar part of the XP-Builder interface where menu shortcuts aredesignated by icons and buttonsunsigned decimal a system for expressing negative numbersvector image an image based on paths or strokes, for the representation ofgeometrical primitives, such as points, lines, curves, and shapes orpolygons; because vector-based images are not made up of aspecific number of dots, they can be scaled to a larger sizewithout losing image qualitywindow either the windows of the operating system (MS Windows) orpartial screens that are created and used in XP-builderword object an object in an XP-builder project that is controlled by a worddeviceXG5000 Simulator A simulator for testing PLC logic programs. It can be run with XPSimulator to test operation of an XP-builder projectsAppendixApp-938 List of AcronymsAcronym DefinitionA/V audio/videoASCII American standard code for information interchangeBCD binary code decimalCF compact flashCMY cyan-magenta-yellowCMYK cyan-magenta-yellow-blackCOM communicationsCPU central processing unitDEC decimalGIF graphic interchange formatGUI graphical user interfaceH/W hardwareHEX hexadecimalI used in device expressions to represent inputIB used in device expressions to represent byte inputIEC International Electrotechnical CommissionIL intermediate languageIP internet protocolIP ingress protectionIW used in device expressions to represent word inputJPEG joint photographic experts groupLAN local area networkLC liquid crystal displayLD ladder diagramLED light emitting diodeM metadataMPEG moving picture experts groupAppendixApp-94Acronym DefinitionPC personal computerPDF portable document formatPIN personal identification numberPIR passive infraredPLC programmable logic controllerQ outputQB bit outputQCIF quarter common intermediate formatQVGA quarter video graphicsQW word outputRAM random access memoryRGB red-green-blueROM read-only memoryS/W softwareSD secure digitalSDK software development kitSMTP simple mail transfer protocolSRAM static random access memoryTCP transmission control protocolTIFF tagged image file formatUDP user datagram protocolUI user interfaceURL uniform resource locatorUSB universal serial busVGA video graphics arrayVM virtual memoryVSP virtual serial portWAN wide area networkAppendixApp-959 CautionLS ELECTRIC's HMI device must only use the font included with Microsoft's WinCE license (link below), the user isresponsible if any other font is used.XP Series : https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/previous-versions/windows/embedded/ms901084(v%3dmsdn.10)iXP/eXP Series : https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/previousversions/windows/embedded/ee489823(v%3dwinembedded.60)iXP2 Series : https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/previousversions/windows/embedded/ee489874(v%3dwinembedded.70).■ HeadquarterLS-ro 127(Hogye-dong) Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-Do, 14119,Korea■ Seoul OfficeLS Yongsan Tower, 92, Hangang-daero, Yongsan-gu, Seoul, 04386,KoreaTel: 82-2-2034-4033, 4888, 4703 Fax: 82-2-2034-4588E-mail: automation@lselectric.co.kr■ Factory56, Samseong 4-gil, Mokcheon-eup, Dongnam-gu, Cheonan-si,Chungcheongnam-do, 31226, Korea©2017. LS ELECTRIC Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.■ Overseas Subsidiaries• LS ELECTRIC Japan Co., Ltd. (Tokyo, Japan)Tel: 81-3-6268-8241 E-Mail: jschuna@lselectric.biz• LS ELECTRIC (Dalian) Co., Ltd. (Dalian, China)Tel: 86-411-8730-6495 E-Mail: jiheo@lselectric.com.cn• LS ELECTRIC (Wuxi) Co., Ltd. (Wuxi, China)Tel: 86-510-6851-6666 E-Mail: sblee@lselectric.co.kr• LS ELECTRIC Shanghai Office (China)Tel: 86-21-5237-9977 E-Mail: tsjun@lselectric.com.cn• LS ELECTRIC Vietnam Co., Ltd.Tel: 84-93-631-4099 E-Mail: jhchoi4@lselectric.biz (Hanoi)Tel: 84-28-3823-7890 E-Mail: sjbaik@lselectric.biz (Hochiminh)• LS ELECTRIC Middle East FZE (Dubai, U.A.E.)Tel: 971-4-886-5360 E-Mail: salesme@lselectric.biz• LS ELECTRIC Europe B.V. (Hoofddorf, Netherlands)Tel: 31-20-654-1424 E-Mail: europartner@lselectric.biz• LS ELECTRIC America Inc. (Chicago, USA)Tel: 1-800-891-2941 E-Mail: sales.us@lselectricamerica.comwww.lselectric.co.kr2020.08